Linux Standard Base Specification 1.3

Linux Standard Base Specification 1.3
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Standards Group
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1; with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
Portions of the text were taken from other copyrighted documents in accordance with the respective licenses of those documents.
Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds.
UNIX a registered trademark of the Open Group in the United States and other countries.
LSB is a trademark of the Free Standards Group in the USA and other countries.
Intel386 and Itanium are trademarks of Intel Corporation.
OpenGL is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Revision History
Revision 0.9.0	07-May-2001	Revised by: SRA	
Initial version for Public Comment	
Revision 0.9.1	30-May-2001	Revised by: SRA	
Changes derived from Public Comments. Simplified User & Group Section, Lots of additional details cleaned up. Lots of spelling fixes.	
Revision 0.9.2	07-Jun-2001	Revised by: SRA	
More changes derived from Public Comments. Pulled the SGML chapter due to uncertainty from the working group.	
Revision 0.9.3	18-Jun-2001	Revised by: SRA	
More changes derived from Public Comments.	
Revision 1.0.0	29-Jun-2001	Revised by: SRA	
More changes derived from Public Comments. Assigned specs to commands. Final change to copyright statement.	
Revision 1.0.1.011221	21-Dec-2001	Revised by: SRA	
*	Significant editorial cleanup for both style and consistancy.
*	Added the following new curses interfaces: COLS, LINES
*	Added the following new reentrant interfaces: asctime_r, gethostbyname_r, getpwuid_r, getutent_r, gmtime_r, localtime_r, rand_r, random_r.
*	Added the following new RPC interfaces: authnone_create, clnt_create, clnt_pcreateerror, clnt_perrno, clnt_perror, clnt_spcreateerror, clnt_sperrno, clnt_sperror, key_decryptsession, svc_getreqset, svcerr_auth, svcerr_decode, svcerr_noproc, svcerr_noprog, svcerr_progvers, svcerr_systemerr, svcerr_weakauth, xdr_accepted_reply, xdr_array, xdr_bool, xdr_bytes, xdr_callhdr, xdr_callmsg, xdr_char, xdr_double, xdr_enum, xdr_float, xdr_free, xdr_int, xdr_long, xdr_opaque, xdr_opaque_auth, xdr_pointer, xdr_reference, xdr_rejected_reply, xdr_replymsg, xdr_short, xdr_string, xdr_u_char, xdr_u_long, xdr_u_short, xdr_union, xdr_vector, xdr_void, xdr_wrapstring, xdrmem_create, xdrrec_create, xdrrec_eof.
*	Added the following new interfaces: timer_create, timer_delete, timer_getoverrun, timer_gettime, timer_settime.
*	Added the following new pthreads interfaces: pthread_mutexattr_getpshared, pthread_mutexattr_setpshared.
*	The following were replaced with threaded equivilents: errno, h_errno.
*	Remove the following interface due to lack of specifications: XESetBeforeFlush, XESetCloseDisplay, XESetCopyGC, XESetCreateFont, XESetCreateGC, XESetError, XESetErrorString, XESetEventToWire, XESetFreeFont, XESetFreeGC, XESetPrintErrorValues, XESetWireToError, XESetWireToEvent, XkbApplyVirtualModChanges, XkbChangeKeycodeRange, XkbGetKeyVirtualModMap, XkbTranslateKey, XkbUpdateActionVirtualMods, XkbUpdateKeyTypeVirtualMods, XkbXlibControlsImplemented.
*	The following interfaces have been deprecated: _IO_2_1_stderr_, _IO_2_1_stdin_, _IO_2_1_stdout_, __bzero , __mbrlen, __secure_getenv , __sigpause, __wcstod_internal, __wcstof_internal, __wcstol_internal, __wcstold_internal __wcstoll_internal, __wcstoul_internal, __wcstoull_internal
*	The FHS chapter was replaced by a more extensive Execution Environment chapter. In addition to the previous FHS content, /proc/cpuinfo and a few devices are defined.
*	The Data Definitions are more thorough and more accurate.
*	Removed appendix B, which was non-normative.	
Revision 1.2	28-Jun-2002	Revised by: SRA	
*	New Interfaces XESetBeforeFlush, XESetCloseDisplay XESetCopyGC XESetCreateFont XESetCreateGC XESetError XESetErrorString XESetEventToWire XESetFlushGC XESetFreeFont XESetFreeGC XESetPrintErrorValues XESetWireToError XESetWireToEvent Xutf8TextListToTextProperty Xutf8TextPropertyToTextList _XtCheckSubclassFlag crealf glPointParameterfvEXT setupterm __h_errno_location bind_textdomain_codeset dcngettext dgettext dngettext fgetwc_unlocked getdomainname getpwnam_r lcong48 posix_memalign readdir_r setdomainname setenv setrlimit64 unsetenv vfwscanf vsyslog __ctype_tolower pthread_rwlock_timedrdlock pthread_rwlock_timedwrlock pthread_setconcurrency
*	Removed Interfaces __bzero __mbrlen __secure_getenv __sigpause __wcstoll_internal __wcstoull_internal fdetach getmsg putmsg h_errno 
*	Remove libta and AIO interfaces aio_cancel aio_cancel64 aio_error aio_error64 aio_fsync aio_fsync64 aio_read aio_read64 aio_return aio_return64 aio_suspend aio_suspend64 aio_write aio_write64 clock_getcpuclockid clock_getres clock_gettime clock_nanosleep clock_settime lio_listio lio_listio64 shm_open shm_unlink timer_create timer_delete timer_getoverrun timer_gettime timer_settime
*	Improved Data Definitions
*	Numerous clarification.	
Revision 1.3	27-Oct-2002	Revised by: SRA	
*	Several interfaces were changed either to or from the LSB as the guiding specification based on issues which were raised with the LSB 1.2. The new reference more accurately describes these interfaces. Several interfaces were incorporated from the Li18nux 2000 Specification to better support Internationalization and localization. The descriptions of interfaces defined by the LSB have been clarified and improved overall. The data definitions are more complete now. Some duplications were eliminated and some omissions have been included.
*	New Interfaces touchline touchwin __isinf __isinff __isinfl __isnan __isnanf __isnanl asprintf freeaddrinfo gai_strerror getaddrinfo getgrgid_r getgrnam_r getnameinfo inet_ntop inet_pton isinff ngettext statvfs64 tdelete pam_acct_mgmt pam_authenticate pam_chauthtok pam_close_session pam_end pam_fail_delay pam_get_item pam_getenvlist pam_open_session pam_set_item pam_setcred pam_start pam_strerror _Unwind_DeleteException _Unwind_Find_FDE _Unwind_ForcedUnwind _Unwind_GetDataRelBase _Unwind_GetGR _Unwind_GetIP _Unwind_GetLanguageSpecificData _Unwind_GetRegionStart _Unwind_GetTextRelBase _Unwind_RaiseException _Unwind_Resume _Unwind_SetGR _Unwind_SetIP, xdr_u_int and socket ioctl() commands
*	Deprecated Interfaces __dcgettext alphasort alphasort64 endhostent fstatfs fstatfs64 sethostent setmntent statfs statfs64 waitid
*	New Libraries libgcc_s, libpam
*	New RPM File Format specification
*	Add new ELF Section .jcr
*	Add new ELF Section .eh_frame_hdr
*	Add new ELF Program Header PT_GNU_EH_FRAME	

Table of Contents
I. Introduction	000
1. Introduction	000
1.1. Introduction	000
1.2. Purpose	000
1.3. Related Standards	000
1.4. Relevant Libraries	000
1.5. How to Use this Standard	000
1.6. Definitions	000
1.7. Terminology	000
II. Object Format	000
2. Object Files	000
3. Sections	000
3.1. Sections Types	000
3.1.1. ELF Section Types	000
3.1.2. Additional Section Types	000
4. Special Sections	000
4.1. Special Sections	000
4.1.1. ELF Special Sections	000
4.1.2. Additional Special Sections	000
5. Symbol Mapping	000
5.1. Symbol Mapping	000
5.1.1. C Language	000
5.1.2. C++ Language	000
6. EH Frame Header	000
6.1. DWARF Exception Header Encoding	000
7. Symbol Versioning	000
7.1. Symbol Version Table	000
7.2. Version Definitions	000
7.3. Version Requirements	000
7.4. Startup Sequence	000
7.5. Symbol Resolution	000
8. ABI note tag	000
III. Dynamic Linking	000
9. Program Loading and Dynamic Linking	000
10. Program Header	000
11. Dynamic Entries	000
11.1. Dynamic Entries	000
11.1.1. ELF Dynamic Entries	000
11.1.2. Additional Dynamic Entries	000
12. Program Interpreter	000
12.1. 	000
IV. Base Libraries	000
13. Libraries	000
13.1. Interfaces for libc	000
13.1.1. RPC	000
13.1.2. System Calls	000
13.1.3. Standard I/O	000
13.1.4. Signal Handling	000
13.1.5. Localization Functions	000
13.1.6. Socket Interface	000
13.1.7. Wide Characters	000
13.1.8. String Functions	000
13.1.9. IPC Functions	000
13.1.10. Regular Expressions	000
13.1.11. Character Type Functions	000
13.1.12. Time Manipulation	000
13.1.13. Terminal Interface Functions	000
13.1.14. System Database Interface	000
13.1.15. Language Support	000
13.1.16. Large File Support	000
13.1.17. Standard Library	000
13.2. Data Definitions for libc	000
13.2.1. assert.h	000
13.2.2. ctype.h	000
13.2.3. dirent.h	000
13.2.4. errno.h	000
13.2.5. fcntl.h	000
13.2.6. fmtmsg.h	000
13.2.7. fnmatch.h	000
13.2.8. ftw.h	000
13.2.9. getopt.h	000
13.2.10. glob.h	000
13.2.11. grp.h	000
13.2.12. iconv.h	000
13.2.13. inttypes.h	000
13.2.14. langinfo.h	000
13.2.15. limits.h	000
13.2.16. locale.h	000
13.2.17. net/if.h	000
13.2.18. netdb.h	000
13.2.19. netinet/in.h	000
13.2.20. netinet/tcp.h	000
13.2.21. netinet/udp.h	000
13.2.22. nl_types.h	000
13.2.23. pwd.h	000
13.2.24. regex.h	000
13.2.25. rpc/auth.h	000
13.2.26. rpc/clnt.h	000
13.2.27. rpc/rpc_msg.h	000
13.2.28. rpc/svc.h	000
13.2.29. rpc/types.h	000
13.2.30. rpc/xdr.h	000
13.2.31. sched.h	000
13.2.32. search.h	000
13.2.33. setjmp.h	000
13.2.34. signal.h	000
13.2.35. stddef.h	000
13.2.36. stdio.h	000
13.2.37. stdlib.h	000
13.2.38. sys/file.h	000
13.2.39. sys/ipc.h	000
13.2.40. sys/mman.h	000
13.2.41. sys/msg.h	000
13.2.42. sys/param.h	000
13.2.43. sys/poll.h	000
13.2.44. sys/resource.h	000
13.2.45. sys/sem.h	000
13.2.46. sys/shm.h	000
13.2.47. sys/socket.h	000
13.2.48. sys/stat.h	000
13.2.49. sys/time.h	000
13.2.50. sys/timeb.h	000
13.2.51. sys/times.h	000
13.2.52. sys/types.h	000
13.2.53. sys/un.h	000
13.2.54. sys/utsname.h	000
13.2.55. sys/wait.h	000
13.2.56. syslog.h	000
13.2.57. termios.h	000
13.2.58. time.h	000
13.2.59. ulimit.h	000
13.2.60. unistd.h	000
13.2.61. utime.h	000
13.2.62. utmp.h	000
13.2.63. wchar.h	000
13.2.64. wctype.h	000
13.2.65. wordexp.h	000
13.3. Interfaces Definitions for libc	000
_IO_feof	000
_IO_getc	000
_IO_putc	000
_IO_puts	000
__assert_fail	000
__ctype_b	000
__ctype_get_mb_cur_max	000
__ctype_tolower	000
__ctype_toupper	000
__cxa_atexit	000
__daylight	000
__dcgettext	000
__environ	000
__errno_location	000
__fpending	000
__getpagesize	000
__getpgid	000
__h_errno_location	000
__isinf	000
__isinff	000
__isinfl	000
__isnan	000
__isnanf	000
__isnanl	000
__libc_current_sigrtmax	000
__libc_current_sigrtmin	000
__libc_start_main	000
__lxstat	000
__mempcpy	000
__rawmemchr	000
__sigsetjmp	000
__stpcpy	000
__strdup	000
__strtod_internal	000
__strtof_internal	000
__strtok_r	000
__strtol_internal	000
__strtold_internal	000
__strtoll_internal	000
__strtoul_internal	000
__strtoull_internal	000
__sysconf	000
__sysv_signal	000
__timezone	000
__tzname	000
__wcstod_internal	000
__wcstof_internal	000
__wcstol_internal	000
__wcstold_internal	000
__wcstoul_internal	000
__xmknod	000
__xstat	000
__xstat64	000
_environ	000
_nl_msg_cat_cntr	000
_obstack_begin	000
_obstack_newchunk	000
_sys_errlist	000
_sys_siglist	000
acct	000
adjtime	000
adjtimex	000
alphasort	000
alphasort64	000
asprintf	000
bind_textdomain_codeset	000
bindresvport	000
bindtextdomain	000
cfmakeraw	000
cfsetspeed	000
daemon	000
dcgettext	000
dcngettext	000
dgettext	000
dngettext	000
err	000
error	000
errx	000
fcntl	000
flock	000
fstatfs	000
fstatfs64	000
getdomainname	000
gethostbyname	000
gethostbyname_r	000
getloadavg	000
getopt	000
getopt_long	000
getopt_long_only	000
getpwnam_r	000
gets	000
getservbyname	000
getservent	000
gettext	000
getutent	000
getutent_r	000
glob64	000
globfree64	000
initgroups	000
ioctl	000
sockio	000
iswctype	000
kill	000
mbsnrtowcs	000
memmem	000
memrchr	000
ngettext	000
nice	000
obstack_free	000
opterr	000
optind	000
optopt	000
psignal	000
random_r	000
setbuffer	000
setdomainname	000
setegid	000
setenv	000
seteuid	000
setgroups	000
sethostid	000
sethostname	000
setmntent	000
setutent	000
sigandset	000
sigblock	000
siggetmask	000
sigisemptyset	000
sigorset	000
sigreturn	000
statfs	000
statfs64	000
stime	000
stpcpy	000
stpncpy	000
strcasestr	000
strerror_r	000
strfry	000
strndup	000
strnlen	000
strptime	000
strsep	000
strsignal	000
strtok_r	000
strtoq	000
strtouq	000
strverscmp	000
system	000
textdomain	000
unlink	000
unsetenv	000
vasprintf	000
vdprintf	000
verrx	000
vsyslog	000
wait3	000
wait4	000
waitid	000
waitpid	000
warn	000
warnx	000
wcpcpy	000
wcpncpy	000
wcscasecmp	000
wcsdup	000
wcsncasecmp	000
wcsnlen	000
wcsnrtombs	000
wcstoq	000
wcstouq	000
xdr_u_int	000
13.4. Interfaces for libm	000
13.4.1. Math	000
13.5. Data Definitions for libm	000
13.5.1. math.h	000
13.6. Interfaces for libpthread	000
13.6.1. Posix Threads	000
13.7. Data Definitions for libpthread	000
13.7.1. pthread.h	000
13.7.2. semaphore.h	000
13.8. Interfaces Definitions for libpthread	000
sem_timedwait	000
13.9. Interfaces for libgcc_s	000
13.9.1. Unwind Library	000
13.10. Data Definitions for libgcc_s	000
13.10.1. unwind.h	000
13.11. Interfaces Definitions for libgcc_s	000
_Unwind_DeleteException	000
_Unwind_Find_FDE	000
_Unwind_ForcedUnwind	000
_Unwind_GetDataRelBase	000
_Unwind_GetGR	000
_Unwind_GetIP	000
_Unwind_GetLanguageSpecificData	000
_Unwind_GetRegionStart	000
_Unwind_GetTextRelBase	000
_Unwind_RaiseException	000
_Unwind_Resume	000
_Unwind_SetGR	000
_Unwind_SetIP	000
13.12. Interfaces for libdl	000
13.12.1. Dynamic Loader	000
13.13. Data Definitions for libdl	000
13.13.1. dlfcn.h	000
13.14. Interfaces Definitions for libdl	000
dladdr	000
13.15. Interfaces for libcrypt	000
13.15.1. Encryption	000
13.16. Data Definitions for libcrypt	000
13.17. Interfaces for libpam	000
13.17.1. Pluggable Authentication API	000
13.18. Data Definitions for libpam	000
13.18.1. security/pam_appl.h	000
13.19. Interfaces Definitions for libpam	000
pam_acct_mgmt	000
pam_authenticate	000
pam_chauthtok	000
pam_close_session	000
pam_end	000
pam_fail_delay	000
pam_get_item	000
pam_getenvlist	000
pam_open_session	000
pam_set_item	000
pam_setcred	000
pam_start	000
pam_strerror	000
V. Utility Libraries	000
14. Libraries	000
14.1. Interfaces for libz	000
14.1.1. Compression Library	000
14.2. Data Definitions for libz	000
14.2.1. zlib.h	000
14.3. Interfaces for libncurses	000
14.3.1. Curses	000
14.4. Data Definitions for libncurses	000
14.4.1. curses.h	000
14.5. Interfaces for libutil	000
14.5.1. Utility Functions	000
14.6. Interfaces Definitions for libutil	000
forkpty	000
login	000
login_tty	000
logout	000
logwtmp	000
openpty	000
VI. Graphic Libraries	000
15. Libraries	000
15.1. Interfaces for libX11	000
15.1.1. X Windows System Interface	000
15.2. Data Definitions for libX11	000
15.2.1. X11/X.h	000
15.2.2. X11/Xauth.h	000
15.2.3. X11/Xcms.h	000
15.2.4. X11/Xlib.h	000
15.2.5. X11/Xutil.h	000
15.3. Interfaces for libXext	000
15.3.1. X Shape Extension	000
15.3.2. X Display Power Management Signaling Extension	000
15.3.3. X Shared Memory Extensions	000
15.3.4. MIT-MISC Extension	000
15.3.5. X Synchronization Extension	000
15.3.6. X Security Extension	000
15.3.7. X Double Buffer Extension	000
15.4. Data Definitions for libXext	000
15.4.1. X11/extensions/security.h	000
15.4.2. X11/extensions/sync.h	000
15.5. Interfaces for libSM	000
15.5.1. Session Management Functions	000
15.6. Data Definitions for libSM	000
15.6.1. X11/SM/SMlib.h	000
15.7. Interfaces for libICE	000
15.7.1. ICE Functions	000
15.8. Data Definitions for libICE	000
15.8.1. X11/ICE/ICElib.h	000
15.8.2. X11/ICE/ICEutil.h	000
15.9. Interfaces for libXt	000
15.9.1. X Toolkit	000
15.10. Data Definitions for libXt	000
15.10.1. X11/Composite.h	000
15.10.2. X11/CompositeP.h	000
15.10.3. X11/ConstrainP.h	000
15.10.4. X11/Constraint.h	000
15.10.5. X11/Intrinsic.h	000
15.10.6. X11/ObjectP.h	000
15.11. Interfaces Definitions for libXt	000
_XtCopyFromArg	000
_XtInherit	000
_XtInheritTranslations	000
_XtIsSubclassOf	000
15.12. Interfaces for libGL	000
15.12.1. GL X interface	000
15.12.2. OpenGL	000
15.13. Data Definitions for libGL	000
15.13.1. GL/gl.h	000
15.13.2. GL/glx.h	000
VII. Package Format and Installation	000
16. Software Installation	000
16.1. Package File Format	000
16.1.1. Lead Section	000
16.1.2. Header Structure	000
16.1.2.1. Header Record	000
16.1.2.2. Index Record	000
16.1.2.2.1. Index Type Values	000
16.1.2.2.2. Index Tag Values	000
16.1.2.3. Header Store	000
16.1.3. Signature Section	000
16.1.4. Header Section	000
16.1.4.1. Package Information	000
16.1.4.2. Installation Information	000
16.1.4.3. File Information	000
16.1.4.4. Dependency Information	000
16.1.4.4.1. Package Dependency Values	000
16.1.4.4.2. Package Dependencies Attributes	000
16.1.4.5. Other Information	000
16.1.5. Payload Section	000
16.2. Package Script Restrictions	000
16.3. Package Tools	000
16.4. Package Naming	000
16.5. Package Dependencies	000
16.6. Package Architecture Considerations	000
VIII. Commands and Utilities	000
17. Commands and Utilities	000
17.1. Commands and Utilities	000
17.2. Command Behavior	000
ar	000
at	000
awk	000
batch	000
bc	000
cat	000
chfn	000
chgrp	000
chmod	000
chown	000
chsh	000
col	000
cp	000
cpio	000
crontab	000
csplit	000
cut	000
date	000
df	000
diff	000
dmesg	000
du	000
echo	000
egrep	000
env	000
expand	000
expr	000
fgrep	000
file	000
find	000
fuser	000
gencat	000
gettext	000
grep	000
groupadd	000
groupdel	000
groupmod	000
groups	000
gunzip	000
gzip	000
head	000
hostname	000
iconv	000
install	000
install_initd	000
ipcrm	000
ipcs	000
killall	000
ln	000
localedef	000
lpr	000
ls	000
lsb_release	000
m4	000
make	000
man	000
md5sum	000
mkdir	000
mknod	000
mktemp	000
more	000
mount	000
msgfmt	000
mv	000
newgrp	000
nice	000
nl	000
nohup	000
od	000
passwd	000
paste	000
patch	000
pathchk	000
pidof	000
pr	000
printf	000
pwd	000
remove_initd	000
renice	000
rm	000
rmdir	000
rsync	000
sed	000
sendmail	000
shutdown	000
sleep	000
sort	000
split	000
strip	000
su	000
sum	000
sync	000
tail	000
tar	000
tee	000
test	000
touch	000
tr	000
tty	000
umount	000
uname	000
unexpand	000
uniq	000
useradd	000
userdel	000
usermod	000
wc	000
xargs	000
IX. Standard Shell	000
18. Standard Shell	000
18.1. Introduction	000
18.2. Standard Shell Exceptions	000
18.2.1. Pathname of $0	000
18.2.2. Sourcing non-executable files	000
18.2.3. Globalized Pattern Matching	000
18.3. Standard Shell Rationale	000
X. Users & Groups	000
19. Users & Groups	000
19.1. User and Group Database	000
19.2. User & Group Names	000
19.3. UID Ranges	000
19.4. Rationale	000
XI. Execution Environment	000
20. File System Hierarchy	000
20.1. /dev	000
21. Additional Recommendations	000
21.1. Minimal granted Directory and File permissions	000
21.2. Recommendations for applications on ownership and permissions	000
21.2.1. Directory Write Permissions	000
21.2.2. File Write Permissions	000
21.2.3. File Read and execute Permissions	000
21.2.4. Suid and Sgid Permissions	000
21.2.5. Privileged users	000
21.2.6. Changing permissions	000
21.2.7. Removable Media (Cdrom, Floppy, etc.)	000
21.2.8. Installable applications	000
22. Additional Behaviors	000
23. Localization	000
23.1. Regular Expressions	000
23.2. Filename Globbing	000
XII. System Initialization	000
24. System Initialization	000
24.1. Cron Jobs	000
24.2. Init Script Actions	000
24.3. Comment conventions for init scripts	000
24.4. Installation and removal of init.d files	000
24.5. Run Levels	000
24.6. Facility names	000
24.7. Script names	000
24.8. Init script Functions	000
A. Alphabetical Listing of Interfaces	000
A.1. libX11	000
A.2. libXt	000
A.3. libm	000
A.4. libGL	000
A.5. libXext	000
A.6. libICE	000
A.7. libSM	000
A.8. libdl	000
A.9. libcrypt	000
A.10. libz	000
A.11. libncurses	000
A.12. libutil	000
A.13. libc	000
A.14. libpthread	000
A.15. libpam	000
A.16. libgcc_s	000
B. GNU Free Documentation License	000
B.1. PREAMBLE	000
B.2. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS	000
B.3. VERBATIM COPYING	000
B.4. COPYING IN QUANTITY	000
B.5. MODIFICATIONS	000
B.6. COMBINING DOCUMENTS	000
B.7. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS	000
B.8. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS	000
B.9. TRANSLATION	000
B.10. TERMINATION	000
B.11. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE	000
B.12. How to use this License for your documents	000

List of Tables
1-1. Related Standards	000
1-2. Standard Libraries Names	000
1-3. Standard Library Names defined in the Architecture Specific Supplement	000
3-1. ELF Section Types	000
3-2. Additional Section Types	000
4-1. ELF Special Sections	000
4-2. Additional Special Sections	000
6-1. .eh_frame_hdr Section Format	000
6-2. DWARF Exception Header value format	000
6-3. DWARF Exception Header application	000
10-1. Linux Segment Types	000
13-1. libc Definition	000
13-2. libc - RPC Function Interfaces	000
13-3. libc - System Calls Function Interfaces	000
13-4. libc - System Calls Deprecated Function Interfaces	000
13-5. libc - Standard I/O Function Interfaces	000
13-6. libc - Standard I/O Deprecated Function Interfaces	000
13-7. libc - Standard I/O Data Interfaces	000
13-8. libc - Signal Handling Function Interfaces	000
13-9. libc - Signal Handling Data Interfaces	000
13-10. libc - Localization Functions Function Interfaces	000
13-11. libc - Localization Functions Deprecated Function Interfaces	000
13-12. libc - Localization Functions Data Interfaces	000
13-13. libc - Socket Interface Function Interfaces	000
13-14. libc - Wide Characters Function Interfaces	000
13-15. libc - String Functions Function Interfaces	000
13-16. libc - IPC Functions Function Interfaces	000
13-17. libc - Regular Expressions Function Interfaces	000
13-18. libc - Regular Expressions Data Interfaces	000
13-19. libc - Character Type Functions Function Interfaces	000
13-20. libc - Character Type Functions Data Interfaces	000
13-21. libc - Time Manipulation Function Interfaces	000
13-22. libc - Time Manipulation Data Interfaces	000
13-23. libc - Terminal Interface Functions Function Interfaces	000
13-24. libc - System Database Interface Function Interfaces	000
13-25. libc - System Database Interface Deprecated Function Interfaces	000
13-26. libc - Language Support Function Interfaces	000
13-27. libc - Large File Support Function Interfaces	000
13-28. libc - Large File Support Deprecated Function Interfaces	000
13-29. libc - Standard Library Function Interfaces	000
13-30. libc - Standard Library Data Interfaces	000
13-31. libm Definition	000
13-32. libm - Math Function Interfaces	000
13-33. libm - Math Data Interfaces	000
13-34. libpthread Definition	000
13-35. libpthread - Posix Threads Function Interfaces	000
13-36. libgcc_s Definition	000
13-37. libgcc_s - Unwind Library Function Interfaces	000
13-38. libdl Definition	000
13-39. libdl - Dynamic Loader Function Interfaces	000
13-40. libcrypt Definition	000
13-41. libcrypt - Encryption Function Interfaces	000
13-42. libpam Definition	000
13-43. libpam - Pluggable Authentication API Function Interfaces	000
14-1. libz Definition	000
14-2. libz - Compression Library Function Interfaces	000
14-3. libncurses Definition	000
14-4. libncurses - Curses Function Interfaces	000
14-5. libncurses - Curses Data Interfaces	000
14-6. libutil Definition	000
14-7. libutil - Utility Functions Function Interfaces	000
15-1. libX11 Definition	000
15-2. libX11 - X Windows System Interface Function Interfaces	000
15-3. libXext Definition	000
15-4. libXext - X Shape Extension Function Interfaces	000
15-5. libXext - X Display Power Management Signaling Extension Function Interfaces	000
15-6. libXext - X Shared Memory Extensions Function Interfaces	000
15-7. libXext - X Synchronization Extension Function Interfaces	000
15-8. libXext - X Security Extension Function Interfaces	000
15-9. libXext - X Double Buffer Extension Function Interfaces	000
15-10. libSM Definition	000
15-11. libSM - Session Management Functions Function Interfaces	000
15-12. libICE Definition	000
15-13. libICE - ICE Functions Function Interfaces	000
15-14. libXt Definition	000
15-15. libXt - X Toolkit Function Interfaces	000
15-16. libXt - X Toolkit Data Interfaces	000
15-17. libGL Definition	000
15-18. libGL - GL X interface Function Interfaces	000
15-19. libGL - OpenGL Function Interfaces	000
16-1. RPM File Format	000
16-2. Signature Format	000
16-3. Index Type values	000
16-4. Header Private Tag Values	000
16-5. Signature Tag Values	000
16-6. Signature Digest Tag Values	000
16-7. Signature Signing Tag Values	000
16-8. Package Info Tag Values	000
16-9. Installation Tag Values	000
16-10. File Info Tag Values	000
16-11. Package Dependency Tag Values	000
16-12. Index Type values	000
16-13. Package Dependency Attributes	000
16-14. Other Tag Values	000
16-15. CPIO File Format	000
17-1. Commands and Utilities	000
19-1. Required User & Group Names	000
19-2. Optional User & Group Names	000
A-1. libX11 Function Interfaces	000
A-2. libXt Function Interfaces	000
A-3. libXt Data Interfaces	000
A-4. libm Function Interfaces	000
A-5. libm Data Interfaces	000
A-6. libGL Function Interfaces	000
A-7. libXext Function Interfaces	000
A-8. libICE Function Interfaces	000
A-9. libSM Function Interfaces	000
A-10. libdl Function Interfaces	000
A-11. libcrypt Function Interfaces	000
A-12. libz Function Interfaces	000
A-13. libncurses Function Interfaces	000
A-14. libncurses Data Interfaces	000
A-15. libutil Function Interfaces	000
A-16. libc Function Interfaces	000
A-17. libc Data Interfaces	000
A-18. libpthread Function Interfaces	000
A-19. libpam Function Interfaces	000
A-20. libgcc_s Function Interfaces	000
List of Figures
7-1. Version Definition Entries	000
7-2. Version Definition Auxiliary Entries	000
7-3. Version Needed Entries	000
7-4. Version Needed Auxiliary Entries	000

I. Introduction

Chapter 1. Introduction
1.1. Introduction
This is version 1.3 of the Linux Standard Base Specification. An implementation of this version of the specification may not claim to be an implementation of the Linux Standard Base unless it has successfully completed the compliance process as defined by the Free Standards Group.
1.2. Purpose
The Linux Standard Base (LSB) defines a system interface for compiled applications and a minimal environment for support of installation scripts. Its purpose is to enable a uniform industry standard environment for high-volume applications conforming to the LSB.
The LSB defines a binary interface for application programs that are compiled and packaged for LSB-conforming implementations on many different hardware architectures. Since a binary specification must include information specific to the computer processor architecture for which it is intended, it is not possible for a single document to specify the interface for all possible LSB-conforming implementations. Therefore, the LSB is a family of specifications, rather than a single one.
The LSB is composed of two basic parts: A common specification ("generic LSB" or "gLSB") describing those parts of the interface that remain constant across all implementations of the LSB, and an architecture-specific specification ("archLSB") describing the parts of the interface that vary by processor architecture. Together, the generic LSB and the architecture-specific supplement for a single hardware architecture provide a complete interface specification for compiled application programs on systems that share a common hardware architecture.
This document is the generic LSB. It must be used in conjunction with an architecture-specific supplement. Whenever a section of this specification must be supplemented by architecture-specific information, this document includes a reference to the architecture supplement. Architecture supplements may also contain additional information that is not referenced here.
This document should be used in conjunction with the documents it references. This document enumerates the system components it includes, but descriptions of those components may be included entirely or partly in this document, partly in other documents, or entirely in other reference documents. For example, the section that describes system service routines includes a list of the system routines supported in this interface, formal declarations of the data structures they use that are visible to applications, and a pointer to the underlying referenced specification for information about the syntax and semantics of each call. Only those routines not described in standards referenced by this document, or extensions to those standards, are described in the detail. Information referenced in this way is as much a part of this document as is the information explicitly included here.
1.3. Related Standards
The specifications listed below are referenced in whole or in part by the Linux Standard Base. When a specification is referenced in a way that imposes a requirement (for example, "foo must behave as specified in the XyzzySpec"), then the relevant requirements of that specification apply as if they were part of the LSB itself. However, if the LSB refers to a specification without imposing a requirement, then it is merely a reference and does not add additional requirements. The LSB may refer to a portion of a specification (for example, to define a specific function or group of functions); in such cases, only the explicitly referenced portion of the specification applies.
Table 1-1. Related Standards
System V Application Binary Interface - DRAFT - 22 June 2000	http://www.caldera.com/developers/gabi/2000-07-17/contents.html	
DWARF Debugging Information Format, Revision 2.0.0 (July 27, 1993)		
Filesystem Hierarchy Standard (FHS) 2.2	http://www.pathname.com/fhs/	
IEEE Standard for Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic	http://www.ieee.org/	
System V Application Binary Interface, Edition 4.1	http://www.caldera.com/developers/devspecs/gabi41.pdf	
ISO/IEC 9899: 1990, Programming Languages --C		
ISO/IEC 9899: 1999, Programming Languages --C		
ISO/IEC 14882: 1998(E) Programming languages --C++		
Linux Assigned Names And Numbers Authority	http://www.lanana.org/	
Large File Support	http://www.UNIX-systems.org/version2/whatsnew/lfs20mar.html	
LI18NUX 2000 Globalization Specification, Version 1.0 with Amendment 4	http://www.li18nux.org/docs/html/LI18NUX-2000-amd4.htm	
Linux Standard Base	http://www.linuxbase.org/spec/	
OpenGL® Application Binary Interface for Linux	http://oss.sgi.com/projects/ogl-sample/ABI/	
OSF-RFC 86.0	http://www.opengroup.org/tech/rfc/mirror-rfc/rfc86.0.txt	
IEEE Std POSIX 1003.2-1992 (ISO/IEC 9945-2:1993)	http://www.ieee.org/	
POSIX 1003.1c	http://www.ieee.org/	
RFC 1952: GZIP file format specification version 4.3	http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1952.txt	
RFC 2440: OpenPGP Message Format		
CAE Specification, May 1996, X/Open Curses, Issue 4, Version 2 (ISBN: 1-85912-171-3, C610), plus Corrigendum U018	http://www.opengroup.org/publications/catalog/un.htm	
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interface Definitions (XBD),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-186-1, C605)	http://www.opengroup.org/publications/catalog/un.htm	
CAE Specification, January 1997, Commands and Utilities (XCU), Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-191-8, C604)	http://www.opengroup.org/publications/catalog/un.htm	
CAE Specification, February 1997, Networking Services (XNS), Issue 5(ISBN: 1-85912-165-9, C523)	http://www.opengroup.org/	
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)	http://www.opengroup.org/publications/catalog/un.htm	
The Single UNIX® Specification(SUS) Version 1 (UNIX 95) System Interfaces & Headers	http://www.opengroup.org/publications/catalog/un.htm	
The Single UNIX® Specification(SUS) Version 3	http://www.unix.org/version3/	
System V Interface Definition, Issue 3 (ISBN 0201566524)		
System V Interface Definition,Fourth Edition		
Double Buffer Extension Library	http://www.x.org/	
X Display Power Management Signaling (DPMS) Extension, Library Specification	http://www.x.org/	
X Record Extension Library	http://www.x.org/	
Security Extension Specification, Version 7.1	http://www.x.org/	
X Nonrectangular Window Shape Extension Library Version 1.0	http://www.x.org/	
MIT-SHM--The MIT Shared Memory Extension	http://www.x.org/	
X Synchronization Extension Library	http://www.x.org/	
XTEST Extension Library	http://www.x.org/	
X11R6.4 X Inter-Client Exchange (ICE) Protocol	http://www.x.org/	
X11R6.4 X11 Input Extension Library	http://www.x.org/	
X11R6.4 Xlib - C library	http://www.x.org/	
X/Open Portability Guide, Issue 4	http://www.opengroup.org/	
X11R6.4 X Session Management Library	http://www.x.org/	
X11R6.4 X Toolkit Intrinsics	http://www.x.org/	
zlib 1.1.3 Manual	http://www.gzip.org/zlib/	

1.4. Relevant Libraries
The libraries listed here shall be available on a Linux Standard Base system. This list may be supplemented or amended by the architecture-specific specifications.
Table 1-2. Standard Libraries Names
Library	Runtime Name	
libX11	libX11.so.6	
libXt	libXt.so.6	
libGL	libGL.so.1	
libXext	libXext.so.6	
libICE	libICE.so.6	
libSM	libSM.so.6	
libdl	libdl.so.2	
libcrypt	libcrypt.so.1	
libz	libz.so.1	
libncurses	libncurses.so.5	
libutil	libutil.so.1	
libpthread	libpthread.so.0	
libpam	libpam.so.0	
libgcc_s	libgcc_s.so.1	

Table 1-3. Standard Library Names defined in the Architecture Specific Supplement
Library	Runtime Name	
libm	See archLSB	
libc	See archLSB	
proginterp	See archLSB	

These libraries will be in an unspecified directory which the dynamic linker will search by default.
1.5. How to Use this Standard
The complete LSB specification is composed of this generic LSB specification and the supplemental processor-specific specification for a particular processor architecture. These two documents constitute a specification that should be used in conjunction with the publicly-available standards documents it references. The LSB enumerates the system components it includes, but descriptions of those components may be included entirely in the LSB, partly in the LSB and partly in other documents, or entirely in other reference documents.
1.6. Definitions
gLSB
 	The common part of the LSB Specification that describes those parts of the interface that remain constant across all hardware implementations of the LSB.
archLSB
 	The architectural part of the LSB Specification which describes the specific parts of the interface that are platform specific. The archLSB is complementary to the gLSB.
LSB Implementation Conformance 
 	An implementation satisfying the following requirements: 
	1.	The implementation shall implement fully the architecture described in the hardware manual for the target processor architecture. 
	2.	The implementation shall be capable of executing compiled applications having the format and using the system interfaces described in this document.
	3.	The implementation shall provide libraries containing the interfaces specified by this document, and shall provide a dynamic linking mechanism that allows these interfaces to be attached to applications at runtime. All the interfaces shall behave as specified in this document.
	4.	The map of virtual memory provided by the implementation shall conform to the requirements of this document. 
	5.	The implementation's low-level behavior with respect to function call linkage, system traps, signals, and other such activities shall conform to the formats described in this document. 
	6.	The implementation shall provide all of the mandatory interfaces in their entirety. 
	7.	The implementation may provide one or more of the optional interfaces. Each optional interface that is provided shall be provided in its entirety. The product documentation shall state which optional interfaces are provided. 
	8.	The implementation shall provide all files and utilities specified as part of this document in the format defined here and in other referenced documents. All commands and utilities shall behave as required by this document. The implementation shall also provide all mandatory components of an application's runtime environment that are included or referenced in this document. 
	9.	The implementation, when provided with standard data formats and values at a named interface, shall provide the behavior defined for those values and data formats at that interface. However, a conforming implementation may consist of components which are separately packaged and/or sold. For example, a vendor of a conforming implementation might sell the hardware, operating system, and windowing system as separately packaged items.
	10.	The implementation may provide additional interfaces with different names. It may also provide additional behavior corresponding to data values outside the standard ranges, for standard named interfaces.
LSB Application Conformance 
 	An application with the following characteristics: 
	1.	Its executable files are either shell scripts or object files in the format defined for the Object File Format system interface.
	2.	Its object files participate in dynamic linking as defined in the Program Loading and Linking System interface.
	3.	It employs only the instructions, traps, and other low-level facilities defined in the Low-Level System interface as being for use by applications.
	4.	If it requires any optional interface defined in this document in order to be installed or to execute successfully, the requirement for that optional interface is stated in the application's documentation. 
	5.	It does not use any interface or data format that is not required to be provided by a conforming implementation, unless: 
•	If such an interface or data format is supplied by another application through direct invocation of that application during execution, that application is in turn an LSB conforming application.
•	The use of that interface or data format, as well as its source, is identified in the documentation of the application. 
	6.	It must not use any values for a named interface that are reserved for vendor extensions. 
A strictly conforming application does not require or use any interface, facility, or implementation-defined extension that is not defined in this document in order to be installed or to execute successfully. 
Rationale 
 	An LSB conforming application is expected to have no dependencies on any vendor extensions to this document. The most common such extensions are additional function entry points and additional libraries other than the ones defined in this document. If an application requires such extensions, it is not portable, since other LSB conforming implementations may not provide those extensions. 
An LSB conforming application is required to use system services on the implementation on which it is running, rather than importing system routines from some other implementation. Thus, it must link dynamically to any routines in the implementation that perform system traps to kernel services. 
It is to be expected that some applications may be companion applications to other applications. For example, a query application may be a companion to a database application; a preprocessor may be an adjunct to one or more compilers; a data reformatter may convert data from one document manager to another. In such cases, the application may or may not be LSB conforming, regardless of whether the other application on which it is dependent is LSB conforming. If such an application merely uses data produced by another application, the application's compliance is independent of the other application's compliance. If such an application actually invokes another application during execution (as, for example, a third-party math library), the invoking application is LSB conforming only if it also constitutes a LSB conforming application in combination with the invoked application. 
Shell Script
 	A file that is read by an interpreter (e.g., awk). The first line of the shell script includes a reference to its interpreter binary.
1.7. Terminology
can
 	Describes a permissible optional feature or behavior available to the user or application. The feature or behavior is mandatory for an implementation that conforms to this document. An application can rely on the existence of the feature or behavior.
implementation-defined
 	Describes a value or behavior that is not defined by this document but is selected by an implementor. The value or behavior may vary among implementations that conform to this document. An application should not rely on the existence of the value or behavior. An application that relies on such a value or behavior cannot be assured to be portable across conforming implementations. The implementor shall document such a value or behavior so that it can be used correctly by an application.
may
 	Describes a feature or behavior that is optional for an implementation that conforms to this document. An application should not rely on the existence of the feature or behavior. An application that relies on such a feature or behavior cannot be assured to be portable across conforming implementations.
To avoid ambiguity, the opposite of may is expressed as need not, instead of may not.
must
 	Describes a feature or behavior that is mandatory for an application or user. An implementation that conforms to this document shall support this feature or behavior.
shall
 	Describes a feature or behavior that is mandatory for an implementation that conforms to this document. An application can rely on the existence of the feature or behavior.
should
 	For an implementation that conforms to this document, describes a feature or behavior that is recommended but not mandatory. An application should not rely on the existence of the feature or behavior. An application that relies on such a feature or behavior cannot be assured to be portable across conforming implementations.
For an application, describes a feature or behavior that is recommended programming practice for optimum portability.
undefined
 	Describes the nature of a value or behavior not defined by this document which results from use of an invalid program construct or invalid data input. The value or behavior may vary among implementations that conform to this document. An application should not rely on the existence or validity of the value or behavior. An application that relies on any particular value or behavior cannot be assured to be portable across conforming implementations.
unspecified
 	Describes the nature of a value or behavior not specified by this document which results from use of a valid program construct or valid data input. The value or behavior may vary among implementations that conform to this document. An application should not rely on the existence or validity of the value or behavior. An application that relies on any particular value or behavior cannot be assured to be portable across conforming implementations.
will
 	Same meaning as shall; shall is the preferred term.

II. Object Format

Chapter 2. Object Files
LSB-conforming implementations shall support the object file Executable and Linking Format (ELF), which is defined by the following documents: 
•	System V Application Binary Interface, Edition 4.1
•	System V Application Binary Interface - DRAFT - April 29, 1998
•	this document
•	an architecture-specific LSB specification
Conforming implementations may also support other unspecified object file formats.

Chapter 3. Sections
3.1. Sections Types
A section header's sh_type member specifies the sections's semantics.
3.1.1. ELF Section Types
The following section types are defined in the System V Application Binary Interface, Edition 4.1. 
Table 3-1. ELF Section Types
Name	Value	Description	
SHT_DYNAMIC	0x6	The section holds information for dynamic linking. Currently, an object file shall have only one dynamic section, but this restriction may be relaxed in the future. See `Dynamic Section' in Chapter 5 for details.	
SHT_DYNSYM	0xb	
	
SHT_FINI_ARRAY	0xf	This section contains an array of pointers to termination functions, as described in `Initialization and Termination Functions' in Chapter 5. Each pointer in the array is taken as a parameterless procedure with a void return.	
SHT_HASH	0x5	The section holds a symbol hash table. Currently, an object file shall have only one hash table, but this restriction may be relaxed in the future. See `Hash Table' in the Chapter 5 for details.	
SHT_HIPROC	0x7fffffff	Values in this inclusive range are reserved for processor-specific semantics.	
SHT_HIUSER	0xffffffff	This value specifies the upper bound of the range of indexes reserved for application programs. Section types between SHT_LOUSER and SHT_HIUSER can be used by the application, without conflicting with current or future system-defined section types.	
SHT_INIT_ARRAY	0xe	This section contains an array of pointers to initialization functions, as described in `Initialization and Termination Functions' in Chapter 5. Each pointer in the array is taken as a parameterless procedure with a void return.	
SHT_LOPROC	0x70000000	Values in this inclusive range are reserved for processor-specific semantics.	
SHT_LOUSER	0x80000000	This value specifies the lower bound of the range of indexes reserved for application programs.	
SHT_NOBITS	0x8	A section of this type occupies no space in the file but otherwise resembles SHT_PROGBITS. Although this section contains no bytes, the sh_offset member contains the conceptual file offset.	
SHT_NOTE	0x7	The section holds information that marks the file in some way. See `Note Section' in Chapter 5 for details.	
SHT_NULL	0x0	This value marks the section header as inactive; it does not have an associated section. Other members of the section header have undefined values.	
SHT_PREINIT_ARRAY	0x10	This section contains an array of pointers to functions that are invoked before all other initialization functions, as described in `Initialization and Termination Functions' in Chapter 5. Each pointer in the array is taken as a parameterless proceure with a void return.	
SHT_PROGBITS	0x1	The section holds information defined by the program, whose format and meaning are determined solely by the program.	
SHT_REL	0x9	The section holds relocation entries without explicit addends, such as type Elf32_Rel for the 32-bit class of object files or type Elf64_Rel for the 64-bit class of object files. An object file may have multiple relocation sections. See "Relocation"	
SHT_RELA	0x4	The section holds relocation entries with explicit addends, such as type Elf32_Rela for the 32-bit class of object files or type Elf64_Rela for the 64-bit class of object files. An object file may have multiple relocation sections. `Relocation' b	
SHT_SHLIB	0xa	This section type is reserved but has unspecified semantics.	
SHT_STRTAB	0x3	The section holds a string table. An object file may have multiple string table sections. See `String Table' below for details.	
SHT_SYMTAB	0x2	These sections hold a symbol table. Currently, an object file shall have only one section of each type, but this restriction may be relaxed in the future. Typically, SHT_SYMTAB provides symbols for link editing, though it may also be used for dynamic linking.	

3.1.2. Additional Section Types
The following additional section types are defined here. 
Table 3-2. Additional Section Types
Name	Value	Description	
SHT_GNU_verdef	0x6ffffffd	This section contains the symbol versions that are provided.	
SHT_GNU_verneed	0x6ffffffe	This section contains the symbol versions that are required.	
SHT_GNU_versym	0x6fffffff	This section contains the Symbol Version Table.	

Chapter 4. Special Sections
4.1. Special Sections
Various sections hold program and control information. Sections in the lists below are used by the system and have the indicated types and attributes.
4.1.1. ELF Special Sections
The following sections are defined in the System V Application Binary Interface, Edition 4.1. 
Table 4-1. ELF Special Sections
Name	Type	Attributes	
.bss	SHT_NOBITS	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.comment	SHT_PROGBITS	0	
.data	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.data1	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.debug	SHT_PROGBITS	0	
.dynamic	SHT_DYNAMIC	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.dynstr	SHT_STRTAB	SHF_ALLOC	
.dynsym	SHT_DYNSYM	SHF_ALLOC	
.fini	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_EXECINSTR	
.fini_array	SHT_FINI_ARRAY	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.hash	SHT_HASH	SHF_ALLOC	
.init	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_EXECINSTR	
.init_array	SHT_INIT_ARRAY	 SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.interp	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC	
.line	SHT_PROGBITS	0	
.note	SHT_NOTE	0	
.preinit_array	SHT_PREINIT_ARRAY	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.rodata	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC	
.rodata1	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC	
.shstrtab	SHT_STRTAB	0	
.strtab	SHT_STRTAB	SHF_ALLOC	
.symtab	SHT_SYMTAB	SHF_ALLOC	
.text	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_EXECINSTR	

.bss
 	This section holds uninitialized data that contribute to the program's memory image. By definition, the system initializes the data with zeros when the program begins to run. The section occupies no file space, as indicated by the section type, SHT_NOBITS
.comment
 	This section holds version control information.
.data
 	This section holds initialized data that contribute to the program's memory image.
.data1
 	This section holds initialized data that contribute to the program's memory image.
.debug
 	This section holds information for symbolic debugging. The contents are unspecified. All section names with the prefix .debug hold information for symbolic debugging. The contents of these sections are unspecified.
.dynamic
 	This section holds dynamic linking information. The section's attributes will include the SHF_ALLOC bit. Whether the SHF_WRITE bit is set is processor specific. See Chapter 5 for more information.
.dynstr
 	This section holds strings needed for dynamic linking, most commonly the strings that represent the names associated with symbol table entries. See Chapter 5 for more information.
.dynsym
 	This section holds the dynamic linking symbol table, as described in `Symbol Table'. See Chapter 5 for more information.
.fini
 	This section holds executable instructions that contribute to the process termination code. That is, when a program exits normally, the system arranges to execute the code in this section.
.fini_array
 	This section holds an array of function pointers that contributes to a single termination array for the executable or shared object containing the section.
.hash
 	This section holds a symbol hash table. See `Hash Table' in Chapter 5 for more information.
.init
 	This section holds executable instructions that contribute to the process initialization code. When a program starts to run, the system arranges to execute the code in this section before calling the main program entry point (called main for C programs)
.init_array
 	This section holds an array of function pointers that contributes to a single initialization array for the executable or shared object containing the section.
.interp
 	This section holds the path name of a program interpreter. If the file has a loadable segment that includes relocation, the sections' attributes will include the SHF_ALLOC bit; otherwise, that bit will be off. See Chapter 5 for more information.
.line
 	This section holds line number information for symbolic debugging, which describes the correspondence between the source program and the machine code. The contents are unspecified.
.note
 	This section holds information in the format that `Note Section' in Chapter 5 describes of the System V Application Binary Interface, Edition 4.1.
.preinit_array
 	This section holds an array of function pointers that contributes to a single pre-initialization array for the executable or shared object containing the section.
.rodata
 	This section holds read-only data that typically contribute to a non-writable segment in the process image. See `Program Header' in Chapter 5 for more information.
.rodata1
 	This section hold sread-only data that typically contribute to a non-writable segment in the process image. See `Program Header' in Chapter 5 for more information.
.shstrtab
 	This section holds section names.
.strtab
 	This section holds strings, most commonly the strings that represent the names associated with symbol table entries. If the file has a loadable segment that includes the symbol string table, the section's attributes will include the SHF_ALLOC bit; otherwi
.symtab
 	This section holds a symbol table, as `Symbol Table'. in this chapter describes. If the file has a loadable segment that includes the symbol table, the section's attributes will include the SHF_ALLOC bit; otherwise, that bit will be off.
.text
 	This section holds the `text,' or executable instructions, of a program.
4.1.2. Additional Special Sections
The following additional sections are defined here. 
Table 4-2. Additional Special Sections
Name	Type	Attributes	
.ctors	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.dtors	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.eh_frame	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.eh_frame_hdr	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC	
.gnu.version	SHT_GNU_versym	SHF_ALLOC	
.gnu.version_d	SHT_GNU_verdef	SHF_ALLOC	
.gnu.version_r	SHT_GNU_verneed	SHF_ALLOC	
.jcr	SHT_PROGBITS	SHF_ALLOC+SHF_WRITE	
.note.ABI-tag	SHT_NOTE	SHF_ALLOC	
.stab	SHT_PROGBITS	0	
.stabstr	SHT_STRTAB	0	

.ctors
 	This section contains a list of global constructor function pointers.
.dtors
 	This section contains a list of global destructor function pointers.
.eh_frame
 	This section contains information necessary for frame unwinding during exception handling. The format is the same as for .debug_frame as described by DWARF Debugging Information Format, Revision 2.0.0 (July 27, 1993).
.eh_frame_hdr
 	This section contains a pointer to the .eh_frame section which is accessible to the runtime support code of a C++ application. This section may also contain a binary search table which may be used by the runtime support code to more efficiently access records in the .eh_frame section.
.gnu.version
 	This section contains the Symbol Version Table.
.gnu.version_d
 	This section contains the Version Definitions.
.gnu.version_r
 	This section contains the Version Requirments.
.jcr
 	This section contains information necessary for registering compiled Java classes. The contents are compiler-specific and used by compiler initialization functions.
.note.ABI-tag
 	Specify ABI details.
.stab
 	This section contains debugging information. The contents are not specified as part of the LSB.
.stabstr
 	This section contains strings associated with the debugging infomation contained in the .stab section.

Chapter 5. Symbol Mapping
This chapter defines how names are mapped from the source symbol to the object symbol.
5.1. Symbol Mapping
Symbols in a source program are translated by the compilation system into symbols that exist in the object file. The rules for this translation are defined here.
5.1.1. C Language
External C symbols have the same names in C and object files' symbol tables.
5.1.2. C++ Language
Because of the immaturity of the C++ ABI (for name mangling, exception handling, and other such issues), we do not standardize any libraries for C++ in this version of the Linux Standard Base. 1
In a future version of this specification, name mangling rules will be specified so that C++ symbols can be mapped into symbol names in the object file.
Notes
1. 	It seems to be possible, using existing Linux development tools, to write an application in C++ which complies with this rule by linking statically with libstdc++ and all other libraries containing C++. The following command illustrates how this may be accomplished:
g++ example.cc -Wl,-Bdynamic,-lc,-Bstatic 

Chapter 6. EH Frame Header
The .eh_frame_hdr section contains additional information about the .eh_frame section. A pointer to the start of the .eh_frame data, and optionally, a binary search table of pointers to the .eh_frame records are found in this section.
Data in this section is encoded according to the DWARF Exception Header Encoding described below.
Table 6-1. .eh_frame_hdr Section Format
Encoding	Field	
unsigned byte	version	
unsigned byte	eh_frame_ptr_enc	
unsigned byte	fde_count_enc	
unsigned byte	table_enc	
encoded	eh_frame_ptr	
encoded	fde_count	

	binary search table	

version
 	Version of the .eh_frame_hdr format. This value must be 1.
eh_frame_ptr_enc
 	The encoding format of the eh_frame_ptr field.
fde_count_enc
 	The encoding format of the fde_count field. A value of DW_EH_PE_omit indicates the binary search table is not present.
table_enc
 	The encoding format of the entries in the binary search table. A value of DW_EH_PE_omit indicates the binary search table is not present.
eh_frame_ptr
 	The encoded value of the pointer to the start of the .eh_frame section.
fde_count
 	The encoded value of the count of entries in the binary search table.
binary search table
 	A binary search table containing fde_count entries. Each entry of the table consist of two encoded values, the initial location, and the address. The entries are sorted in an increasing order by the initial location value.
6.1. DWARF Exception Header Encoding
The DWARF Exception Header Encoding is used to describe the type of data used in the .eh_frame_hdr section. The upper 4 bits indicate how the value is to be applied. The lower 4 bits indicate the format of the data.
Table 6-2. DWARF Exception Header value format
Name	Value	Meaning	
DW_EH_PE_omit	0xff	No value is present.	
DW_EH_PE_uleb128	0x01	Unsigned value is encoded using the Little Endian Base 128 (LEB128) as defined by DWARF Debugging Information Format, Revision 2.0.0 (July 27, 1993).	
DW_EH_PE_udata2	0x02	A 2 bytes unsigned value.	
DW_EH_PE_udata4	0x03	A 4 bytes unsigned value.	
DW_EH_PE_udata8	0x04	An 8 bytes unsigned value.	
DW_EH_PE_sleb128	0x09	Signed value is encoded using the Little Endian Base 128 (LEB128) as defined by DWARF Debugging Information Format, Revision 2.0.0 (July 27, 1993).	
DW_EH_PE_sdata2	0x0A	A 2 bytes signed value.	
DW_EH_PE_sdata4	0x0B	A 4 bytes signed value.	
DW_EH_PE_sdata8	0x0C	An 8 bytes signed value.	

Table 6-3. DWARF Exception Header application
Name	Value	Meaning	
DW_EH_PE_absptr	0x00	Value is used with no modification.	
DW_EH_PE_pcrel	0x10	Value is reletive to the current program counter.	
DW_EH_PE_datarel	0x30	Value is reletive to the beginning of the .eh_frame_hdr section.	
DW_EH_PE_omit	0xff	No value is present.	

Chapter 7. Symbol Versioning
This chapter describes the Symbol Versioning mechanism. All ELF objects may provide or depend on versioned symbols. Symbol Versioning is implemented by 3 section types: SHT_GNU_versym, SHT_GNU_verdef, and SHT_GNU_verneed.
The term "Elfxx" means "Elf32" or "Elf64" depending on the architecture.
Versions are described by strings. The structures that are used for symbol versions also contain a member that holds the ELF hashing values of the strings. This allows for more efficient processing.
7.1. Symbol Version Table
The Symbol Version Table is contained in the special section .gnu.version which has a section type of SHT_GNU_versym. This section has the same number of entries as the Dynamic Symbol Table.
This section contains an array of elements of type Elfxx_Half. Each entry specifies the version defined for or required by the corresponding symbol in the Dynamic Symbol Table.
The values in the Symbol Version Table are unique to the object in which they are located. These values are identifiers that are provided by the the vna_other member of the Elfxx_Vernaux structure or the vd_ndx member of the Elfxx_Verdef structure.
The values 0 and 1 are reserved.
0
 	The symbol is local, not available outside the object.
1
 	The symbol is defined in this object and is globally available.
All other values are used to identify version strings located in one of the other Symbol Version sections. The value itself is not the version associated with the symbol. The string identified by the value defines the version of the symbol.
7.2. Version Definitions
Symbol definitions are contained in the special section .gnu.version_d which has a section type of SHT_GNU_verdef. The number of entries in this section is contained in the DT_VERDEFNUM entry of the Dynamic Section. The sh_link member of the section header points to the section that contains the strings referenced by this section.
Figure 7-1. Version Definition Entries
typedef struct {
        Elfxx_Half    vd_version;
        Elfxx_Half    vd_flags;
        Elfxx_Half    vd_ndx;
        Elfxx_Half    vd_cnt;
        Elfxx_Word    vd_hash;
        Elfxx_Word    vd_aux;
        Elfxx_Word    vd_next;
} Elfxx_Verdef;
vd_version
 	Version revision. This value is currently set to 1, and will be reset if the versioning implementation is incompatibly altered.
vd_flags
 	Version information flag bitmask.
vd_ndx
 	Version index numeric value referencing the SHT_GNU_versym section.
vd_cnt
 	Number of associated verdaux array entries.
vd_hash
 	Version name hash value (ELF hash function).
vd_aux
 	Offset to a corresponding entry in the verdaux array, in bytes.
vd_next
 	Offset to the next verdef entry, in bytes.
Figure 7-2. Version Definition Auxiliary Entries
typedef struct {
        Elfxx_Word    vda_name;
        Elfxx_Word    vda_next;
} Elfxx_Verdaux;
vda_name
 	Offset to the version or dependency name string in the section header, in bytes.
vda_next
 	Offset to the next verdaux entry, in bytes.
7.3. Version Requirements
Symbol definitions are contained in the special section .gnu.version_r which has a section type of SHT_GNU_verneed. The number of entries in this section is contained in the DT_VERNEEDNUM entry of the Dynamic Section. The sh_link member of the section header points to the section that contains the strings referenced by this section.
Figure 7-3. Version Needed Entries
typedef struct {
        Elfxx_Half    vn_version;
        Elfxx_Half    vn_cnt;
        Elfxx_Word    vn_file;
        Elfxx_Word    vn_aux;
        Elfxx_Word    vn_next;
} Elfxx_Verneed;
vn_version
 	Version of structure. This value is currently set to 1, and will be reset if the versioning implementation is incompatibly altered.
vn_cnt
 	Number of associated verneed array entries.
vn_file
 	Offset to the file name string in the section header, in bytes.
vn_aux
 	Offset to a corresponding entry in the vernaux array, in bytes.
vn_next
 	Offset to the next verneed entry, in bytes.
Figure 7-4. Version Needed Auxiliary Entries
typedef struct {
        Elfxx_Word    vna_hash;
        Elfxx_Half    vna_flags;
        Elfxx_Half    vna_other;
        Elfxx_Word    vna_name;
        Elfxx_Word    vna_next;
} Elfxx_Vernaux;
vna_hash
 	Dependency name hash value (ELF hash function).
vna_flags
 	Dependency information flag bitmask.
vna_other
 	Object file version identifier used in the .gnu.version symbol version array. Bit number 15 controls whether or not the object is hidden; if this bit is set, the object cannot be used and the static linker will ignore the symbol's presence in the object.
vna_name
 	Offset to the dependency name string in the section header, in bytes.
vna_next
 	Offset to the next vernaux entry, in bytes.
7.4. Startup Sequence
When loading a sharable object, version definition data from the loaded object is analyzed to assure that it meets the version requirements of the calling object. The dynamic loader retrieves the entries in the caller's Elfxx_Verneed array and attempts to find matching definition information in the loaded Elfxx_Verdef table.
Each object and dependency is tested in turn. If a symbol definition is missing, the loader returns an error. A warning is issued instead of a hard error when the vna_flags bit for VER_FLG_WEAK is set in the Elfxx_Vernaux entry.
When the versions referenced by undefined symbols in the loaded object are found, version availability is certified. The test completes without error and the object is made available.
7.5. Symbol Resolution
When symbol versioning is used in an object, relocations extend the performance of definition testing beyond the simple match of symbol name strings: the version of the reference must also equal the name of the definition. The same index that is used in the symbol table can be referenced in the SHT_GNU_versym section, and the value of this index is then used to acquire name data. The corresponding requirement string is retrieved from the Elfxx_Verneed array, and likewise, the corresponding definition string from the Elfxx_Verdef table.
Bit number 15 of the version symbol controls whether or not the object is hidden; if this bit is set, the object cannot be used and the static linker will ignore the symbol's presence in the object.
Results differ in the interaction of objects that variously use symbol versioning. 
•	The object with the reference and the object with the definitions may both use versioning. All described matching is processed in this case. A fatal error is triggered when no matching definition can be found in the object whose name is the one referenced by the vn_name element in the Elfxx_Verneed entry.
•	The object with the reference may not use versioning, while the object with the definitions does. In this instance, only the definition with index numbers 1 and 2 will be used in the reference match, the same identified by the static linker as the base definition. In infrequent cases where the static linker was not used, as in calls to dlopen(), a version that does not have the base definition index is acceptable as long as it is the only version for which the symbol is defined.
•	The object with the reference may use versioning, but the object with the definitions specifies none. A matching symbol is accepted in this case. A fatal error is triggered in the unlikely event that a corruption in the required symbols list obscured an outdated object file and caused a match on the object filename in the Elfxx_Verneed entry.
•	Finally, both the object with the reference and the object with the definitions may not use versioning. The behavior in this instance defaults to pre-existing symbol rules.

Chapter 8. ABI note tag
Every executable shall contain a section named .note.ABI-tag of type SHT_NOTE. This section is structured as a note section as documented in the ELF spec. The section must contain at least the following entry. The name field (namesz/name) contains the string "GNU". The type field shall be 1. The descsz field shall be at least 16, and the first 16 bytes of the desc field shall be as follows.
The first 32-bit word of the desc field must be 0 (this signifies a Linux executable). The second, third, and fourth 32-bit words of the desc field contain the earliest compatible kernel version. For example, if the 3 words are 2, 2, and 5, this signifies a 2.2.5 kernel.

III. Dynamic Linking

Chapter 9. Program Loading and Dynamic Linking
LSB-conforming implementations shall support the object file information and system actions that create running programs as specified in the System V Application Binary Interface, Edition 4.1 and the System V Application Binary Interface - DRAFT - April 29, 1998 and as supplemented by this document and an architecture-specific LSB specification.
Any shared object that is loaded must contain sufficient DT_NEEDED records to satisfy the symbols on the shared library.

Chapter 10. Program Header
In addition to the Segment Types defined in the System V Application Binary Interface, Edition 4.1 and the System V Application Binary Interface - DRAFT - April 29, 1998 the following Segment Types shall also be supported.
Table 10-1. Linux Segment Types
Name	Value	
PT_GNU_EH_FRAME	0x6474e550	

PT_GNU_EH_FRAME
 	The array element specifies the location and size of the exception handling information as defined by the .eh_frame_hdr section.

Chapter 11. Dynamic Entries
A dynamic entry's d_tag member control the interpretation of d_un.
11.1. Dynamic Entries
11.1.1. ELF Dynamic Entries
The following dynamic entries are defined in the System V Application Binary Interface, Edition 4.1. 
DT_BIND_NOW
 	Process relocations of object
DT_DEBUG
 	For debugging; unspecified
DT_FINI
 	Address of termination function
DT_HASH
 	Address of symbol hash table
DT_HIPROC
 	End of processor-specific
DT_INIT
 	Address of init function
DT_JMPREL
 	Address of PLT relocs
DT_LOPROC
 	Start of processor-specific
DT_NEEDED
 	Name of needed library
DT_NULL
 	Marks end of dynamic section
DT_PLTREL
 	Type of reloc in PLT
DT_PLTRELSZ
 	Size in bytes of PLT relocs
DT_REL
 	Address of Rel relocs
DT_RELA
 	Address of Rela relocs
DT_RELAENT
 	Size of one Rela reloc
DT_RELASZ
 	Total size of Rela relocs
DT_RELENT
 	Size of one Rel reloc
DT_RELSZ
 	Total size of Rel relocs
DT_RPATH
 	Library search path
DT_SONAME
 	Name of shared object
DT_STRSZ
 	Size of string table
DT_STRTAB
 	Address of string table
DT_SYMBOLIC
 	Start symbol search here
DT_SYMENT
 	Size of one symbol table entry
DT_SYMTAB
 	Address of symbol table
DT_TEXTREL
 	Reloc might modify .text
11.1.2. Additional Dynamic Entries
The following dynamic entries are defined here. 
DT_ADDRRNGHI
 	Values from DT_ADDRRNGLO through DT_ADDRRNGHI are reserved for definition by an archLSB.
DT_ADDRRNGLO
 	Values from DT_ADDRRNGLO through DT_ADDRRNGHI are reserved for definition by an archLSB.
DT_AUXILIARY
 	Shared object to load before self
DT_FILTER
 	Shared object to get values from
DT_FINI_ARRAY
 	The address of an array of pointers to termination functions.
DT_FINI_ARRAYSZ
 	Size in bytes of DT_FINI_ARRAY
DT_FLAGS_1
 	State flags, see DF_1_* below
DT_HIOS
 	Values from DT_LOOS through DT_HIOS are reserved for definition by specific operating systems.
DT_INIT_ARRAY
 	The address of an array of pointers to initialization functions.
DT_INIT_ARRAYSZ
 	Size in bytes of DT_INIT_ARRAY
DT_LOOS
 	Values from DT_LOOS through DT_HIOS are reserved for definition by specific operating systems.
DT_NUM
 	Number of dynamic entry tags defined (excepting reserved ranges).
DT_POSFLAG_1
 	Flags for DT_* entries, effecting the following DT_* entry
DT_RELCOUNT
 	All Elf32_Rel R_*_RELATIVE relocations have been placed into a single block and this entry specifies the number of entries in that block. This permits ld.so.1 to streamline the processing of RELATIVE relocations.
DT_SYMINENT
 	Entry size of syminfo
DT_SYMINFO
 	Address of the Syminfo table.
DT_SYMINSZ
 	Size of syminfo table (in bytes)
DT_VALRNGHI
 	Entries which fall between DT_VALRNGHI & DT_VALRNGLO use the Dyn.d_un.d_val field of the Elf*_Dyn structure.
DT_VALRNGLO
 	Entries which fall between DT_VALRNGHI & DT_VALRNGLO use the Dyn.d_un.d_val field of the Elf*_Dyn structure.
DT_VERDEF
 	Address of version definition table
DT_VERDEFNUM
 	Number of version definitions
DT_VERNEED
 	Address of table with needed versions
DT_VERNEEDNUM
 	Number of needed versions
DT_VERSYM
 	Address of the table provided by the .gnu.version section.

Chapter 12. Program Interpreter
12.1. 
The Program Interpreter is specified in the appropriate architecture-specific LSB specification.

IV. Base Libraries

Chapter 13. Libraries
An LSB-conforming implementation shall support some base libraries which provide interfaces for accessing the operating system, processor and other hardware in the system.
13.1. Interfaces for libc
Table 13-1. libc Definition
Library:	libc	
SONAME:	See archLSB.	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
ISO/IEC 9899: 1999, Programming Languages --C1	
Large File Support2	
Linux Standard Base3	
IEEE Std POSIX.1-1996 [ISO/IEC 9945-1:1996]4	
CAE Specification, February 1997, Networking Services (XNS), Issue 5(ISBN: 1-85912-165-9, C523)5	
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)6	
The Single UNIX® Specification(SUS) Version 37	
System V Interface Definition, Issue 3 (ISBN 0201566524)8	
System V Interface Definition,Fourth Edition9	

13.1.1. RPC
Table 13-2. libc - RPC Function Interfaces
authnone_create9	svc_getreqset8	xdr_bytes8	xdr_opaque_auth8	xdr_union8	
clnt_create9	svcerr_auth8	xdr_callhdr8	xdr_pointer8	xdr_vector8	
clnt_pcreateerror9	svcerr_decode8	xdr_callmsg8	xdr_reference8	xdr_void8	
clnt_perrno9	svcerr_noproc8	xdr_char8	xdr_rejected_reply8	xdr_wrapstring8	
clnt_perror9	svcerr_noprog8	xdr_double8	xdr_replymsg8	xdrmem_create8	
clnt_spcreateerror9	svcerr_progvers8	xdr_enum8	xdr_short8	xdrrec_create8	
clnt_sperrno9	svcerr_systemerr8	xdr_float8	xdr_string8	xdrrec_eof8	
clnt_sperror9	svcerr_weakauth8	xdr_free8	xdr_u_char8	
	
getdomainname3	xdr_accepted_reply8	xdr_int8	xdr_u_int3	
	
key_decryptsession8	xdr_array8	xdr_long8	xdr_u_long8	
	
setdomainname3	xdr_bool8	xdr_opaque8	xdr_u_short8	

13.1.2. System Calls
Table 13-3. libc - System Calls Function Interfaces
__fxstat3	fchown6	initgroups3	read6	setrlimit642	
__getpgid3	fcntl3	ioctl3	readdir6	setsid6	
__lxstat3	fdatasync6	kill3	readdir_r6	setuid6	
__xmknod3	flock3	killpg6	readlink6	sleep6	
__xstat3	fork6	lchown6	readv6	statfs3	
access6	fstatfs3	link6	rename6	statvfs6	
acct3	fstatvfs6	lockf6	rmdir6	stime3	
alarm6	fsync6	lseek6	sbrk6	symlink6	
brk6	ftime6	mkdir6	sched_get_priority_max6	sync6	
chdir6	ftruncate6	mkfifo6	sched_get_priority_min6	sysconf6	
chmod6	getcontext6	mlock6	sched_getparam6	time6	
chown6	getegid6	mlockall6	sched_getscheduler6	times6	
chroot6	geteuid6	mmap6	sched_rr_get_interval6	truncate6	
clock6	getgid6	mprotect6	sched_setparam6	ulimit6	
close6	getgroups6	msync6	sched_setscheduler6	umask6	
closedir6	getitimer6	munlock6	sched_yield6	uname6	
creat6	getloadavg3	munlockall6	select5	unlink3	
dup6	getpagesize6	munmap6	setcontext6	utime6	
dup26	getpgid6	nanosleep6	setegid3	utimes6	
execl6	getpgrp6	nice3	seteuid3	vfork6	
execle6	getpid6	open6	setgid6	wait6	
execlp6	getppid6	opendir6	setitimer6	wait33	
execv6	getpriority6	pathconf6	setpgid6	wait43	
execve6	getrlimit6	pause6	setpgrp6	waitid3	
execvp6	getrusage6	pipe6	setpriority6	waitpid3	
exit6	getsid6	poll6	setregid6	write6	
fchdir6	getuid6	pread6	setreuid6	writev6	
fchmod6	getwd6	pwrite6	setrlimit6	

Table 13-4. libc - System Calls Deprecated Function Interfaces
fstatfs3	statfs3	waitid3	

13.1.3. Standard I/O
Table 13-5. libc - Standard I/O Function Interfaces
_IO_feof3	fgetc6	fseeko6	putc6	snprintf6	
_IO_getc3	fgetpos6	fsetpos6	putc_unlocked6	sprintf6	
_IO_putc3	fgets6	ftell6	putchar6	sscanf6	
_IO_puts3	fgetwc_unlocked6	ftello6	putchar_unlocked6	telldir6	
alphasort3	fileno6	fwrite6	puts6	tempnam6	
asprintf3	flockfile6	getc6	putw6	ungetc6	
clearerr6	fopen6	getc_unlocked6	remove6	vasprintf3	
ctermid6	fprintf6	getchar6	rewind6	vdprintf3	
fclose6	fputc6	getchar_unlocked6	rewinddir6	vfprintf6	
fdopen6	fputs6	gets3	scanf6	vprintf6	
feof6	fread6	getw6	seekdir6	vsnprintf6	
ferror6	freopen6	pclose6	setbuf6	vsprintf6	
fflush6	fscanf6	popen6	setbuffer3	
	
fflush_unlocked6	fseek6	printf6	setvbuf6	

Table 13-6. libc - Standard I/O Deprecated Function Interfaces
alphasort3	

	

Table 13-7. libc - Standard I/O Data Interfaces
stderr6	stdin6	stdout6	

13.1.4. Signal Handling
Table 13-8. libc - Signal Handling Function Interfaces
__libc_current_sigrtmax3	sigaddset6	sighold6	sigpause6	sigsuspend6	
__libc_current_sigrtmin3	sigaltstack6	sigignore6	sigpending6	sigtimedwait6	
__sigsetjmp3	sigandset3	siginterrupt6	sigprocmask6	sigwait6	
__sysv_signal3	sigblock3	sigisemptyset3	sigqueue6	sigwaitinfo6	
bsd_signal6	sigdelset6	sigismember6	sigrelse6	
	
psignal3	sigemptyset6	siglongjmp6	sigreturn3	
	
raise6	sigfillset6	signal6	sigset6	
	
sigaction6	siggetmask3	sigorset3	sigstack6	

Table 13-9. libc - Signal Handling Data Interfaces
_sys_siglist3	

	

13.1.5. Localization Functions
Table 13-10. libc - Localization Functions Function Interfaces
__dcgettext3	catgets6	dgettext3	iconv_close6	nl_langinfo6	
bind_textdomain_codeset3	catopen6	dngettext3	iconv_open6	setlocale6	
bindtextdomain3	dcgettext3	gettext3	localeconv6	textdomain3	
catclose6	dcngettext3	iconv6	ngettext3	

Table 13-11. libc - Localization Functions Deprecated Function Interfaces
__dcgettext3	

	

Table 13-12. libc - Localization Functions Data Interfaces
_nl_msg_cat_cntr3	

	

13.1.6. Socket Interface
Table 13-13. libc - Socket Interface Function Interfaces
__h_errno_location3	gethostbyname_r3	getsockopt5	send5	socket5	
accept5	gethostid6	listen5	sendmsg5	socketpair5	
bind5	gethostname5	recv5	sendto5	
	
bindresvport3	getpeername5	recvfrom5	setsockopt5	
	
connect5	getsockname5	recvmsg5	shutdown5	

13.1.7. Wide Characters
Table 13-14. libc - Wide Characters Function Interfaces
__wcstod_internal3	mbsinit6	vwscanf1	wcsnlen3	wcstoumax1	
__wcstof_internal3	mbsnrtowcs3	wcpcpy3	wcsnrtombs3	wcstouq3	
__wcstol_internal3	mbsrtowcs6	wcpncpy3	wcspbrk1	wcswcs6	
__wcstold_internal3	mbstowcs6	wcrtomb6	wcsrchr6	wcswidth6	
__wcstoul_internal3	mbtowc6	wcscasecmp3	wcsrtombs6	wcsxfrm6	
btowc6	putwc1	wcscat6	wcsspn6	wctob6	
fgetwc6	putwchar1	wcschr6	wcsstr6	wctomb6	
fgetws1	swprintf6	wcscmp6	wcstod6	wctrans6	
fputwc1	swscanf1	wcscoll6	wcstof1	wctype6	
fputws1	towctrans6	wcscpy6	wcstoimax1	wcwidth6	
fwide1	towlower1	wcscspn6	wcstok6	wmemchr6	
fwprintf6	towupper6	wcsdup3	wcstol6	wmemcmp6	
fwscanf1	ungetwc1	wcsftime1	wcstold1	wmemcpy6	
getwc1	vfwprintf1	wcslen6	wcstoll1	wmemmove6	
getwchar6	vfwscanf1	wcsncasecmp3	wcstombs6	wmemset6	
mblen6	vswprintf1	wcsncat6	wcstoq3	wprintf1	
mbrlen6	vswscanf1	wcsncmp6	wcstoul6	wscanf1	
mbrtowc6	vwprintf1	wcsncpy6	wcstoull1	

13.1.8. String Functions
Table 13-15. libc - String Functions Function Interfaces
__mempcpy3	bzero6	strcasestr3	strncasecmp6	strtoimax1	
__rawmemchr3	ffs6	strcat6	strncat6	strtok6	
__stpcpy3	index6	strchr6	strncmp6	strtok_r3	
__strdup3	memccpy6	strcmp6	strncpy6	strtold1	
__strtod_internal3	memchr6	strcoll6	strndup3	strtoll1	
__strtof_internal3	memcmp6	strcpy6	strnlen3	strtoq3	
__strtok_r3	memcpy6	strcspn6	strpbrk6	strtoull1	
__strtol_internal3	memmove6	strdup6	strptime3	strtoumax1	
__strtold_internal3	memrchr3	strerror6	strrchr6	strtouq3	
__strtoll_internal3	memset6	strerror_r3	strsep3	strverscmp3	
__strtoul_internal3	rindex6	strfmon6	strsignal3	strxfrm6	
__strtoull_internal3	stpcpy3	strfry3	strspn6	swab6	
bcmp6	stpncpy3	strftime6	strstr6	
	
bcopy6	strcasecmp6	strlen6	strtof1	

13.1.9. IPC Functions
Table 13-16. libc - IPC Functions Function Interfaces
ftok6	msgrcv6	semget6	shmctl6	
	
msgctl6	msgsnd6	semop6	shmdt6	
	
msgget6	semctl6	shmat6	shmget6	

13.1.10. Regular Expressions
Table 13-17. libc - Regular Expressions Function Interfaces
advance6	re_exec6	regerror6	regfree6	
	
re_comp6	regcomp6	regexec6	step6	

Table 13-18. libc - Regular Expressions Data Interfaces
loc16	loc26	locs6	

13.1.11. Character Type Functions
Table 13-19. libc - Character Type Functions Function Interfaces
__ctype_get_mb_cur_max3	isdigit6	iswalnum6	iswlower6	toascii6	
_tolower6	isgraph6	iswalpha6	iswprint6	tolower6	
_toupper6	islower6	iswblank7	iswpunct6	toupper6	
isalnum6	isprint6	iswcntrl6	iswspace6	
	
isalpha6	ispunct6	iswctype3	iswupper6	
	
isascii6	isspace6	iswdigit6	iswxdigit6	
	
iscntrl6	isupper6	iswgraph6	isxdigit6	

Table 13-20. libc - Character Type Functions Data Interfaces
__ctype_b3	__ctype_tolower3	__ctype_toupper3	

13.1.12. Time Manipulation
Table 13-21. libc - Time Manipulation Function Interfaces
adjtime3	asctime_r6	difftime6	localtime6	tzset6	
adjtimex3	ctime6	gmtime6	localtime_r6	ualarm6	
asctime6	ctime_r6	gmtime_r6	mktime6	

Table 13-22. libc - Time Manipulation Data Interfaces
__daylight3	__tzname3	timezone6	

__timezone3	daylight6	tzname6	

13.1.13. Terminal Interface Functions
Table 13-23. libc - Terminal Interface Functions Function Interfaces
cfgetispeed6	cfsetispeed6	tcdrain6	tcgetattr6	tcsendbreak6	
cfgetospeed6	cfsetospeed6	tcflow6	tcgetpgrp6	tcsetattr6	
cfmakeraw3	cfsetspeed3	tcflush6	tcgetsid6	tcsetpgrp6	

13.1.14. System Database Interface
Table 13-24. libc - System Database Interface Function Interfaces
endgrent6	getgrgid6	getprotoent6	getutent3	setmntent3	
endhostent5	getgrgid_r6	getpwent6	getutent_r3	setnetent5	
endnetent5	getgrnam6	getpwnam6	getutxent6	setprotoent5	
endprotoent5	getgrnam_r6	getpwnam_r3	getutxid6	setpwent6	
endpwent6	gethostbyaddr5	getpwuid6	getutxline6	setservent5	
endservent5	gethostbyname3	getpwuid_r6	pututxline6	setutent3	
endutent6	getnetbyaddr5	getservbyname3	setgrent6	setutxent6	
endutxent6	getprotobyname6	getservbyport5	setgroups3	
	
getgrent6	getprotobynumber5	getservent3	sethostent5	

Table 13-25. libc - System Database Interface Deprecated Function Interfaces
endhostent5	sethostent5	setmntent3	

13.1.15. Language Support
Table 13-26. libc - Language Support Function Interfaces
__libc_start_main3	_obstack_begin3	_obstack_newchunk3	obstack_free3	

13.1.16. Large File Support
Table 13-27. libc - Large File Support Function Interfaces
__fxstat643	fopen642	ftello642	mkstemp642	readdir642	
__lxstat643	freopen642	ftruncate642	mmap642	statfs643	
__xstat643	fseeko642	ftw642	nftw642	statvfs642	
alphasort643	fsetpos642	getrlimit642	open642	tmpfile642	
creat642	fstatfs643	lockf642	pread642	truncate642	
fgetpos642	fstatvfs642	lseek642	pwrite642	

Table 13-28. libc - Large File Support Deprecated Function Interfaces
alphasort643	fstatfs643	statfs643	

13.1.17. Standard Library
Table 13-29. libc - Standard Library Function Interfaces
_Exit1	div6	globfree643	longjmp6	srand6	
__assert_fail3	drand486	grantpt6	lrand486	srand486	
__cxa_atexit3	ecvt6	hcreate6	lsearch6	srandom6	
__errno_location3	erand486	hdestroy6	makecontext6	strtod6	
__fpending3	err3	hsearch6	malloc6	strtol6	
__getpagesize3	error3	htonl5	memmem3	strtoul6	
__isinf3	errx3	htons5	mkstemp6	swapcontext6	
__isinff3	fcvt6	imaxabs1	mktemp6	syslog6	
__isinfl3	fmtmsg6	imaxdiv1	mrand486	system3	
__isnan3	fnmatch6	inet_addr5	nftw6	tdelete6	
__isnanf3	fpathconf6	inet_aton5	nrand486	tfind6	
__isnanl3	free6	inet_ntoa5	ntohl5	tmpfile6	
__sysconf3	freeaddrinfo7	inet_ntop7	ntohs5	tmpnam6	
_exit6	ftrylockfile6	inet_pton7	openlog6	tsearch6	
_longjmp6	ftw6	initstate6	perror6	ttyname6	
_setjmp6	funlockfile6	insque6	posix_memalign4	ttyname_r6	
a64l6	gai_strerror7	isatty6	ptsname6	twalk6	
abort6	gcvt6	isblank7	putenv6	unlockpt6	
abs6	getaddrinfo7	isinf1	qsort6	unsetenv3	
atexit6	getcwd6	isinff	rand6	usleep6	
atof6	getdate6	isinfl1	rand_r6	verrx3	
atoi6	getenv6	isnan1	random6	vfscanf1	
atol6	getlogin6	isnanf1	random_r3	vscanf1	
atoll1	getnameinfo7	isnanl1	realloc6	vsscanf1	
basename6	getopt3	jrand486	realpath6	vsyslog3	
bsearch6	getopt_long3	l64a6	remque6	warn3	
calloc6	getopt_long_only3	labs6	seed486	warnx3	
closelog6	getsubopt6	lcong486	setenv3	wordexp6	
confstr6	gettimeofday6	ldiv6	sethostid3	wordfree6	
cuserid6	glob6	lfind6	sethostname3	
	
daemon3	glob643	llabs1	setlogmask6	
	
dirname6	globfree6	lldiv1	setstate6	

Table 13-30. libc - Standard Library Data Interfaces
__environ3	_sys_errlist3	getdate_err6	opterr3	optopt3	
_environ3	environ6	optarg6	optind3	

13.2. Data Definitions for libc
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
13.2.1. assert.h

#define assert(expr)    ((void)0)
13.2.2. ctype.h

enum
{
  _ISupper, _ISlower, _ISalpha, _ISdigit, _ISxdigit, _ISspace, _ISprint,
    _ISgraph, _ISblank, _IScntrl, _ISpunct, _ISalnum
}
 ;
13.2.3. dirent.h

typedef struct __dirstream DIR;

struct dirent
{
  long d_ino;
  off_t d_off;
  unsigned short d_reclen;
  unsigned char d_type;
  char d_name[256];
}
 ;
struct dirent64
{
  uint64_t d_ino;
  int64_t d_off;
  unsigned short d_reclen;
  unsigned char d_type;
  char d_name[256];
}
 ;
13.2.4. errno.h

#define errno   (*__errno_location())

#define EPERM   1
#define ECHILD  10
#define ENETDOWN        100
#define ENETUNREACH     101
#define ENETRESET       102
#define ECONNABORTED    103
#define ECONNRESET      104
#define ENOBUFS 105
#define EISCONN 106
#define ENOTCONN        107
#define ESHUTDOWN       108
#define ETOOMANYREFS    109
#define EAGAIN  11
#define ETIMEDOUT       110
#define ECONNREFUSED    111
#define EHOSTDOWN       112
#define EHOSTUNREACH    113
#define EALREADY        114
#define EINPROGRESS     115
#define ESTALE  116
#define EUCLEAN 117
#define ENOTNAM 118
#define ENAVAIL 119
#define ENOMEM  12
#define EISNAM  120
#define EREMOTEIO       121
#define EDQUOT  122
#define ENOMEDIUM       123
#define EMEDIUMTYPE     124
#define ECANCELED       125
#define EACCES  13
#define EFAULT  14
#define ENOTBLK 15
#define EBUSY   16
#define EEXIST  17
#define EXDEV   18
#define ENODEV  19
#define ENOENT  2
#define ENOTDIR 20
#define EISDIR  21
#define EINVAL  22
#define ENFILE  23
#define EMFILE  24
#define ENOTTY  25
#define ETXTBSY 26
#define EFBIG   27
#define ENOSPC  28
#define ESPIPE  29
#define ESRCH   3
#define EROFS   30
#define EMLINK  31
#define EPIPE   32
#define EDOM    33
#define ERANGE  34
#define EDEADLK 35
#define ENAMETOOLONG    36
#define ENOLCK  37
#define ENOSYS  38
#define ENOTEMPTY       39
#define EINTR   4
#define ELOOP   40
#define ENOMSG  42
#define EIDRM   43
#define ECHRNG  44
#define EL2NSYNC        45
#define EL3HLT  46
#define EL3RST  47
#define ELNRNG  48
#define EUNATCH 49
#define EIO     5
#define ENOANO  55
#define EBADRQC 56
#define EBADSLT 57
#define EBFONT  59
#define ENXIO   6
#define ENOSTR  60
#define ENODATA 61
#define ETIME   62
#define ENOSR   63
#define ENONET  64
#define ENOPKG  65
#define EREMOTE 66
#define ENOLINK 67
#define EADV    68
#define ESRMNT  69
#define E2BIG   7
#define ECOMM   70
#define EPROTO  71
#define EMULTIHOP       72
#define EDOTDOT 73
#define EBADMSG 74
#define EOVERFLOW       75
#define ENOTUNIQ        76
#define EBADFD  77
#define EREMCHG 78
#define ELIBACC 79
#define ENOEXEC 8
#define ELIBBAD 80
#define ELIBSCN 81
#define ELIBMAX 82
#define ELIBEXEC        83
#define EILSEQ  84
#define ERESTART        85
#define ESTRPIPE        86
#define EUSERS  87
#define ENOTSOCK        88
#define EDESTADDRREQ    89
#define EBADF   9
#define EMSGSIZE        90
#define EPROTOTYPE      91
#define ENOPROTOOPT     92
#define EPROTONOSUPPORT 93
#define ESOCKTNOSUPPORT 94
#define EOPNOTSUPP      95
#define EPFNOSUPPORT    96
#define EAFNOSUPPORT    97
#define EADDRINUSE      98
#define EADDRNOTAVAIL   99
#define EWOULDBLOCK     EAGAIN
#define ENOTSUP EOPNOTSUPP
13.2.5. fcntl.h

#define O_RDONLY        00
#define O_ACCMODE       0003
#define O_WRONLY        01
#define O_CREAT 0100
#define O_TRUNC 01000
#define O_SYNC  010000
#define O_RDWR  02
#define O_EXCL  0200
#define O_APPEND        02000
#define O_ASYNC 020000
#define O_NOCTTY        0400
#define O_NDELAY        04000
#define O_NONBLOCK      04000
#define FD_CLOEXEC      1

struct flock
{
  short l_type;
  short l_whence;
  off_t l_start;
  off_t l_len;
  pid_t l_pid;
}
 ;
struct flock64
{
  short l_type;
  short l_whence;
  loff_t l_start;
  loff_t l_len;
  pid_t l_pid;
}
 ;

#define F_DUPFD 0
#define F_RDLCK 0
#define F_GETFD 1
#define F_WRLCK 1
#define F_SETFD 2
#define F_UNLCK 2
#define F_GETFL 3
#define F_SETFL 4
#define F_GETLK 5
#define F_SETLK 6
#define F_SETLKW        7
#define F_SETOWN        8
#define F_GETOWN        9
13.2.6. fmtmsg.h

#define MM_HARD 1
#define MM_NRECOV       128
#define MM_UTIL 16
#define MM_SOFT 2
#define MM_OPSYS        32
#define MM_FIRM 4
#define MM_RECOVER      64
#define MM_APPL 8

#define MM_NOSEV        0
#define MM_HALT 1
#define MM_ERROR        2

#define MM_NULLLBL      ((char *) 0)
13.2.7. fnmatch.h

#define FNM_PATHNAME    (1<<0)
#define FNM_NOESCAPE    (1<<1)
#define FNM_PERIOD      (1<<2)
#define FNM_NOMATCH     1
13.2.8. ftw.h

#define FTW_D   FTW_D
#define FTW_DNR FTW_DNR
#define FTW_DP  FTW_DP
#define FTW_F   FTW_F
#define FTW_NS  FTW_NS
#define FTW_SL  FTW_SL
#define FTW_SLN FTW_SLN

enum
{
  FTW_F, FTW_D, FTW_DNR, FTW_NS, FTW_SL, FTW_DP, FTW_SLN
}
 ;

enum
{
  FTW_PHYS, FTW_MOUNT, FTW_CHDIR, FTW_DEPTH
}
 ;

struct FTW
{
  int base;
  int level;
}
 ;

typedef int (*__ftw_func_t) (char *__filename, struct stat * __status,
                             int __flag);
typedef int (*__ftw64_func_t) (char *__filename, struct stat64 * __status,
                               int __flag);
typedef int (*__nftw_func_t) (char *__filename, struct stat * __status,
                              int __flag, struct FTW * __info);
typedef int (*__nftw64_func_t) (char *__filename, struct stat64 * __status,
                                int __flag, struct FTW * __info);
13.2.9. getopt.h

struct option
{
  char *name;
  int has_arg;
  int *flag;
  int val;
}
 ;
13.2.10. glob.h

typedef struct
{
  size_t gl_pathc;
  char **gl_pathv;
  size_t gl_offs;
  int gl_flags;
  void (*gl_closedir) (void);
  struct dirent *(*gl_readdir) (void);
  void *(*gl_opendir) (void);
  int (*gl_lstat) (void);
  int (*gl_stat) (void);
}
glob_t;

typedef struct
{
  size_t gl_pathc;
  char **gl_pathv;
  size_t gl_offs;
  int gl_flags;
  void (*gl_closedir) (void);
  struct dirent *(*gl_readdir) (void);
  void *(*gl_opendir) (void);
  int (*gl_lstat) (void);
  int (*gl_stat) (void);
}
glob64_t;
#define GLOB_ERR        (1<<0)
#define GLOB_MARK       (1<<1)
#define GLOB_BRACE      (1<<10)
#define GLOB_NOMAGIC    (1<<11)
#define GLOB_TILDE      (1<<12)
#define GLOB_ONLYDIR    (1<<13)
#define GLOB_TILDE_CHECK        (1<<14)
#define GLOB_NOSORT     (1<<2)
#define GLOB_DOOFFS     (1<<3)
#define GLOB_NOCHECK    (1<<4)
#define GLOB_APPEND     (1<<5)
#define GLOB_NOESCAPE   (1<<6)
#define GLOB_PERIOD     (1<<7)
#define GLOB_MAGCHAR    (1<<8)
#define GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC (1<<9)

#define GLOB_NOSPACE    1
#define GLOB_ABORTED    2
#define GLOB_NOMATCH    3
#define GLOB_NOSYS      4
13.2.11. grp.h

struct group
{
  char *gr_name;
  char *gr_passwd;
  gid_t gr_gid;
  char **gr_mem;
}
 ;
13.2.12. iconv.h

typedef void *iconv_t;
13.2.13. inttypes.h

typedef lldiv_t imaxdiv_t;
typedef unsigned int u_int;
typedef unsigned int uint;
typedef unsigned char uint8_t;
typedef unsigned short uint16_t;
typedef unsigned int uint32_t;
typedef unsigned long long uint64_t;
13.2.14. langinfo.h

#define ABDAY_1 0x20000
#define ABDAY_2 0x20001
#define ABDAY_3 0x20002
#define ABDAY_4 0x20003
#define ABDAY_5 0x20004
#define ABDAY_6 0x20005
#define ABDAY_7 0x20006

#define DAY_1   0x20007
#define DAY_2   0x20008
#define DAY_3   0x20009
#define DAY_4   0x2000A
#define DAY_5   0x2000B
#define DAY_6   0x2000C
#define DAY_7   0x2000D

#define ABMON_1 0x2000E
#define ABMON_2 0x2000F
#define ABMON_3 0x20010
#define ABMON_4 0x20011
#define ABMON_5 0x20012
#define ABMON_6 0x20013
#define ABMON_7 0x20014
#define ABMON_8 0x20015
#define ABMON_9 0x20016
#define ABMON_10        0x20017
#define ABMON_11        0x20018
#define ABMON_12        0x20019

#define MON_1   0x2001A
#define MON_2   0x2001B
#define MON_3   0x2001C
#define MON_4   0x2001D
#define MON_5   0x2001E
#define MON_6   0x2001F
#define MON_7   0x20020
#define MON_8   0x20021
#define MON_9   0x20022
#define MON_10  0x20023
#define MON_11  0x20024
#define MON_12  0x20025

#define AM_STR  0x20026
#define PM_STR  0x20027

#define D_T_FMT 0x20028
#define D_FMT   0x20029
#define T_FMT   0x2002A
#define T_FMT_AMPM      0x2002B

#define ERA     0x2002C
#define ERA_D_FMT       0x2002E
#define ALT_DIGITS      0x2002F
#define ERA_D_T_FMT     0x20030
#define ERA_T_FMT       0x20031

#define CODESET 14

#define CRNCYSTR        0x4000F

#define RADIXCHAR       0x10000
#define THOUSEP 0x10001
#define YESEXPR 0x50000
#define NOEXPR  0x50001
#define YESSTR  0x50002
#define NOSTR   0x50003
13.2.15. limits.h

#define OPEN_MAX        256
#define PATH_MAX        4096

#define MB_LEN_MAX      16

#define SCHAR_MIN       (-128)
#define SCHAR_MAX       127
#define UCHAR_MAX       255
#define CHAR_BIT        8

#define SHRT_MIN        (-32768)
#define SHRT_MAX        32767
#define USHRT_MAX       65535

#define INT_MIN (-INT_MAX-1)
#define INT_MAX 2147483647
#define __INT_MAX__     2147483647
#define UINT_MAX        4294967295U

#define LONG_MIN        (-LONG_MAX-1L)
13.2.16. locale.h

#define LC_CTYPE        0
#define LC_NUMERIC      1
#define LC_TELEPHONE    10
#define LC_MEASUREMENT  11
#define LC_IDENTIFICATION       12
#define LC_TIME 2
#define LC_COLLATE      3
#define LC_MONETARY     4
#define LC_MESSAGES     5
#define LC_ALL  6
#define LC_PAPER        7
#define LC_NAME 8
#define LC_ADDRESS      9

struct lconv
{
  char *decimal_point;
  char *thousands_sep;
  char *grouping;
  char *int_curr_symbol;
  char *currency_symbol;
  char *mon_decimal_point;
  char *mon_thousands_sep;
  char *mon_grouping;
  char *positive_sign;
  char *negative_sign;
  char int_frac_digits;
  char frac_digits;
  char p_cs_precedes;
  char p_sep_by_space;
  char n_cs_precedes;
  char n_sep_by_space;
  char p_sign_posn;
  char n_sign_posn;
  char int_p_cs_precedes;
  char int_p_sep_by_space;
  char int_n_cs_precedes;
  char int_n_sep_by_space;
  char int_p_sign_posn;
  char int_n_sign_posn;
}
 ;

typedef struct __locale_struct
{
  struct locale_data *__locales[13];
  const unsigned short *__ctype_b;
  const int *__ctype_tolower;
  const int *__ctype_toupper;
  const char *__names[13];
}
 *__locale_t;

typedef __locale_t locale_t;
13.2.17. net/if.h

#define IF_NAMESIZE     16

#define IFF_UP  0x01
#define IFF_BROADCAST   0x02
#define IFF_DEBUG       0x04
#define IFF_LOOPBACK    0x08
#define IFF_POINTOPOINT 0x10
#define IFF_PROMISC     0x100
#define IFF_MULTICAST   0x1000
#define IFF_NOTRAILERS  0x20
#define IFF_RUNNING     0x40
#define IFF_NOARP       0x80

struct ifaddr
{
  struct sockaddr ifa_addr;
  union
  {
    struct sockaddr ifu_broadaddr;
    struct sockaddr ifu_dstaddr;
  }
  ifa_ifu;
  void *ifa_ifp;
  void *ifa_next;
}
 ;
#define IFNAMSIZ        IF_NAMESIZE

struct ifreq
{
  union
  {
    char ifrn_name[IFNAMSIZ];
  }
  ifr_ifrn;
  union
  {
    struct sockaddr ifru_addr;
    struct sockaddr ifru_dstaddr;
    struct sockaddr ifru_broadaddr;
    struct sockaddr ifru_netmask;
    struct sockaddr ifru_hwaddr;
    short ifru_flags;
    int ifru_ivalue;
    int ifru_mtu;
    char ifru_slave[IFNAMSIZ];
    char ifru_newname[IFNAMSIZ];
    caddr_t ifru_data;
    struct ifmap ifru_map;
  }
  ifr_ifru;
}
 ;

struct ifconf
{
  int ifc_len;
  union
  {
    caddr_t ifcu_buf;
    struct ifreq *ifcu_req;
  }
  ifc_ifcu;
}
 ;
13.2.18. netdb.h

#define h_errno (*__h_errno_location ())
#define NETDB_INTERNAL  -1
#define NETDB_SUCCESS   0
#define HOST_NOT_FOUND  1
#define NI_MAXHOST      1025
#define TRY_AGAIN       2
#define NO_RECOVERY     3
#define NI_MAXSERV      32
#define NO_DATA 4
#define h_addr  h_addr_list[0]
#define NO_ADDRESS      NO_DATA

struct servent
{
  char *s_name;
  char **s_aliases;
  int s_port;
  char *s_proto;
}
 ;
struct hostent
{
  char *h_name;
  char **h_aliases;
  int h_addrtype;
  int h_length;
  char **h_addr_list;
}
 ;
struct protoent
{
  char *p_name;
  char **p_aliases;
  int p_proto;
}
 ;
struct netent
{
  char *n_name;
  char **n_aliases;
  int n_addrtype;
  unsigned int n_net;
}
 ;
#define AI_PASSIVE      0x0001
#define AI_CANONNAME    0x0002
#define AI_NUMERICHOST  0x0004

struct addrinfo
{
  int ai_flags;
  int ai_family;
  int ai_socktype;
  int ai_protocol;
  socklen_t ai_addrlen;
  struct sockaddr *ai_addr;
  char *ai_canonname;
  struct addrinfo *ai_next;
}
 ;
#define NI_NUMERICHOST  1
#define NI_DGRAM        16
#define NI_NUMERICSERV  2
#define NI_NOFQDN       4
#define NI_NAMEREQD     8

#define EAI_BADFLAGS    -1
#define EAI_MEMORY      -10
#define EAI_SYSTEM      -11
#define EAI_NONAME      -2
#define EAI_AGAIN       -3
#define EAI_FAIL        -4
#define EAI_NODATA      -5
#define EAI_FAMILY      -6
#define EAI_SOCKTYPE    -7
#define EAI_SERVICE     -8
#define EAI_ADDRFAMILY  -9
13.2.19. netinet/in.h

#define INADDR_NONE     ((unsigned long int) 0xffffffff)
#define INADDR_BROADCAST        (0xffffffff)
#define INADDR_ANY      0
#define IPPROTO_IP      0
#define SOL_IP  0
#define IPPROTO_ICMP    1
#define IP_TOS  1
#define IPPROTO_UDP     17
#define IPPROTO_IGMP    2
#define IPPROTO_RAW     255
#define IPPROTO_TCP     6

struct in_addr
{
  uint32_t s_addr;
}
 ;
typedef uint32_t in_addr_t;

struct sockaddr_in
{
  sa_family_t sin_family;
  unsigned short sin_port;
  struct in_addr sin_addr;
  unsigned char sin_zero[8];
}
 ;
13.2.20. netinet/tcp.h

#define TCP_NODELAY     1
#define SOL_TCP 6
13.2.21. netinet/udp.h

#define SOL_UDP 17
13.2.22. nl_types.h

#define NL_CAT_LOCALE   1
#define NL_SETD 1

typedef void *nl_catd;

typedef int nl_item;
13.2.23. pwd.h

struct passwd
{
  char *pw_name;
  char *pw_passwd;
  uid_t pw_uid;
  gid_t pw_gid;
  char *pw_gecos;
  char *pw_dir;
  char *pw_shell;
}
 ;
13.2.24. regex.h

#define RE_BACKSLASH_ESCAPE_IN_LISTS    ((unsigned long int)1)
#define RE_BK_PLUS_QM   (RE_BACKSLASH_ESCAPE_IN_LISTS<<1)
#define RE_SYNTAX_AWK   (RE_BACKSLASH_ESCAPE_IN_LISTS|RE_DOT_NOT_NULL|RE_NO_BK_PARENS| RE_NO_BK_REFS| RE_NO_BK_VBAR| RE_NO_EMPTY_RANGES| RE_DOT_NEWLINE| RE_CONTEXT_INDEP_ANCHORS| RE_UNMATCHED_RIGHT_PAREN_ORD | RE_NO_GNU_OPS)
#define RE_CHAR_CLASSES (RE_BK_PLUS_QM<<1)
#define RE_SYNTAX_GREP  (RE_BK_PLUS_QM|RE_CHAR_CLASSES|RE_HAT_LISTS_NOT_NEWLINE|RE_INTERVALS|RE_NEWLINE_ALT)
#define RE_CONTEXT_INDEP_ANCHORS        (RE_CHAR_CLASSES<<1)
#define RE_SYNTAX_EGREP (RE_CHAR_CLASSES|RE_CONTEXT_INDEP_ANCHORS| RE_CONTEXT_INDEP_OPS|RE_HAT_LISTS_NOT_NEWLINE|RE_NEWLINE_ALT|RE_NO_BK_PARENS|RE_NO_BK_VBAR)
#define _RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_COMMON (RE_CHAR_CLASSES|RE_DOT_NEWLINE|RE_DOT_NOT_NULL|RE_INTERVALS|RE_NO_EMPTY_RANGES)
#define RE_CONTEXT_INDEP_OPS    (RE_CONTEXT_INDEP_ANCHORS<<1)
#define RE_CONTEXT_INVALID_OPS  (RE_CONTEXT_INDEP_OPS<<1)
#define RE_DOT_NEWLINE  (RE_CONTEXT_INVALID_OPS<<1)
#define RE_INVALID_INTERVAL_ORD (RE_DEBUG<<1)
#define RE_DOT_NOT_NULL (RE_DOT_NEWLINE<<1)
#define RE_HAT_LISTS_NOT_NEWLINE        (RE_DOT_NOT_NULL<<1)
#define RE_INTERVALS    (RE_HAT_LISTS_NOT_NEWLINE<<1)
#define RE_LIMITED_OPS  (RE_INTERVALS<<1)
#define RE_NEWLINE_ALT  (RE_LIMITED_OPS<<1)
#define RE_NO_BK_BRACES (RE_NEWLINE_ALT<<1)
#define RE_NO_BK_PARENS (RE_NO_BK_BRACES<<1)
#define RE_NO_BK_REFS   (RE_NO_BK_PARENS<<1)
#define RE_NO_BK_VBAR   (RE_NO_BK_REFS<<1)
#define RE_NO_EMPTY_RANGES      (RE_NO_BK_VBAR<<1)
#define RE_UNMATCHED_RIGHT_PAREN_ORD    (RE_NO_EMPTY_RANGES<<1)
#define RE_DEBUG        (RE_NO_GNU_OPS<<1)
#define RE_NO_GNU_OPS   (RE_NO_POSIX_BACKTRACKING<<1)
#define RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_EGREP   (RE_SYNTAX_EGREP|RE_INTERVALS|RE_NO_BK_BRACES|RE_INVALID_INTERVAL_ORD)
#define RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_AWK     (RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_EXTENDED|RE_BACKSLASH_ESCAPE_IN_LISTS|RE_INTERVALS|RE_NO_GNU_OPS)
#define RE_NO_POSIX_BACKTRACKING        (RE_UNMATCHED_RIGHT_PAREN_ORD<<1)
#define RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_BASIC   (_RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_COMMON|RE_BK_PLUS_QM)
#define RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_EXTENDED        (_RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_COMMON|RE_CONTEXT_INDEP_ANCHORS|RE_CONTEXT_INDEP_OPS|RE_NO_BK_BRACES|RE_NO_BK_PARENS|RE_NO_BK_VBAR|RE_CONTEXT_INVALID_OPS|RE_UNMATCHED_RIGHT_PAREN_ORD)
#define RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_MINIMAL_EXTENDED        (_RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_COMMON|RE_CONTEXT_INDEP_ANCHORS|RE_CONTEXT_INVALID_OPS|RE_NO_BK_BRACES|RE_NO_BK_PARENS|RE_NO_BK_REFS|RE_NO_BK_VBAR|RE_UNMATCHED_RIGHT_PAREN_ORD)
#define RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_MINIMAL_BASIC   (_RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_COMMON|RE_LIMITED_OPS)
#define RE_SYNTAX_ED    RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_BASIC
#define RE_SYNTAX_SED   RE_SYNTAX_POSIX_BASIC

typedef unsigned long reg_syntax_t;

typedef struct re_pattern_buffer
{
  unsigned char *buffer;
  unsigned long allocated;
  unsigned long used;
  reg_syntax_t syntax;
  char *fastmap;
  char *translate;
  size_t re_nsub;
  unsigned int can_be_null:1;
  unsigned int regs_allocated:2;
  unsigned int fastmap_accurate:1;
  unsigned int no_sub:1;
  unsigned int not_bol:1;
  unsigned int not_eol:1;
  unsigned int newline_anchor:1;
}
regex_t;
typedef int regoff_t;
typedef struct
{
  regoff_t rm_so;
  regoff_t rm_eo;
}
regmatch_t;
#define REG_NOTEOL      (1<<1)
#define REG_ICASE       (REG_EXTENDED<<1)
#define REG_NEWLINE     (REG_ICASE<<1)
#define REG_NOSUB       (REG_NEWLINE<<1)
#define REG_NOMATCH     -1
#define REG_EXTENDED    1
#define REG_NOTBOL      1
13.2.25. rpc/auth.h

enum auth_stat
{
  AUTH_OK, AUTH_BADCRED = 1, AUTH_REJECTEDCRED = 2, AUTH_BADVERF =
    3, AUTH_REJECTEDVERF = 4, AUTH_TOOWEAK = 5, AUTH_INVALIDRESP =
    6, AUTH_FAILED = 7
}
 ;

union des_block
{
  struct
  {
    u_int32_t high;
    u_int32_t low;
  }
  key;
  char c[8];
}
 ;

struct opaque_auth
{
  enum_t oa_flavor;
  caddr_t oa_base;
  u_int oa_length;
}
 ;

typedef struct AUTH
{
  struct opaque_auth ah_cred;
  struct opaque_auth ah_verf;
  union des_block ah_key;
  struct auth_ops *ah_ops;
  caddr_t ah_private;
}
AUTH;

struct auth_ops
{
  void (*ah_nextverf) (struct AUTH *);
  int (*ah_marshal) (struct AUTH *, struct XDR *);
  int (*ah_validate) (struct AUTH *, struct opaque_auth *);
  int (*ah_refresh) (struct AUTH *);
  void (*ah_destroy) (struct AUTH *);
}
 ;
13.2.26. rpc/clnt.h

#define NULLPROC        ((u_long)0)
#define CLSET_TIMEOUT   1
#define CLGET_XID       10
#define CLSET_XID       11
#define CLGET_VERS      12
#define CLSET_VERS      13
#define CLGET_PROG      14
#define CLSET_PROG      15
#define CLGET_TIMEOUT   2
#define CLGET_SERVER_ADDR       3
#define CLSET_RETRY_TIMEOUT     4
#define CLGET_RETRY_TIMEOUT     5
#define CLGET_FD        6
#define CLGET_SVC_ADDR  7
#define CLSET_FD_CLOSE  8
#define CLSET_FD_NCLOSE 9

enum clnt_stat
{
  RPC_SUCCESS, RPC_CANTENCODEARGS = 1, RPC_CANTDECODERES = 2, RPC_CANTSEND =
    3, RPC_CANTRECV = 4, RPC_TIMEDOUT = 5, RPC_VERSMISMATCH =
    6, RPC_AUTHERROR = 7, RPC_PROGUNAVAIL = 8, RPC_PROGVERSMISMATCH =
    9, RPC_PROCUNAVAIL = 10, RPC_CANTDECODEARGS = 11, RPC_SYSTEMERROR =
    12, RPC_NOBROADCAST = 21, RPC_UNKNOWNHOST = 13, RPC_UNKNOWNPROTO =
    17, RPC_UNKNOWNADDR = 19, RPC_RPCBFAILURE = 14, RPC_PROGNOTREGISTERED =
    15, RPC_N2AXLATEFAILURE = 22, RPC_FAILED = 16, RPC_INTR =
    18, RPC_TLIERROR = 20, RPC_UDERROR = 23, RPC_INPROGRESS =
    24, RPC_STALERACHANDLE = 25
}
 ;
struct rpc_err
{
  enum clnt_stat re_status;
  union
  {
    int RE_errno;
    enum auth_stat RE_why;
    struct
    {
      u_long low;
      u_long high;
    }
    RE_vers;
    struct
    {
      long s1;
      long s2;
    }
    RE_lb;
  }
  ru;
}
 ;

typedef struct CLIENT
{
  struct AUTH *cl_auth;
  struct clnt_ops *cl_ops;
  caddr_t cl_private;
}
CLIENT;

struct clnt_ops
{
  enum clnt_stat (*cl_call) (struct CLIENT *, u_long, xdrproc_t, caddr_t,
                             xdrproc_t, caddr_t, struct timeval);
  void (*cl_abort) (void);
  void (*cl_geterr) (struct CLIENT *, struct rpc_err *);
    bool_t (*cl_freeres) (struct CLIENT *, xdrproc_t, caddr_t);
  void (*cl_destroy) (struct CLIENT *);
    bool_t (*cl_control) (struct CLIENT *, int, char *);
}
 ;
13.2.27. rpc/rpc_msg.h

enum msg_type
{
  CALL, REPLY = 1
}
 ;
enum reply_stat
{
  MSG_ACCEPTED, MSG_DENIED = 1
}
 ;
enum accept_stat
{
  SUCCESS, PROG_UNAVAIL = 1, PROG_MISMATCH = 2, PROC_UNAVAIL =
    3, GARBAGE_ARGS = 4, SYSTEM_ERR = 5
}
 ;
enum reject_stat
{
  RPC_MISMATCH, AUTH_ERROR = 1
}
 ;

struct accepted_reply
{
  struct opaque_auth ar_verf;
  enum accept_stat ar_stat;
  union
  {
    struct
    {
      unsigned long low;
      unsigned long high;
    }
    AR_versions;
    struct
    {
      caddr_t where;
      xdrproc_t proc;
    }
    AR_results;
  }
  ru;
}
 ;

struct rejected_reply
{
  enum reject_stat rj_stat;
  union
  {
    struct
    {
      unsigned long low;
      unsigned long high;
    }
    RJ_versions;
    enum auth_stat RJ_why;
  }
  ru;
}
 ;

struct reply_body
{
  enum reply_stat rp_stat;
  union
  {
    struct accepted_reply RP_ar;
    struct rejected_reply RP_dr;
  }
  ru;
}
 ;

struct call_body
{
  unsigned long cb_rpcvers;
  unsigned long cb_prog;
  unsigned long cb_vers;
  unsigned long cb_proc;
  struct opaque_auth cb_cred;
  struct opaque_auth cb_verf;
}
 ;

struct rpc_msg
{
  unsigned long rm_xid;
  enum msg_type rm_direction;
  union
  {
    struct call_body RM_cmb;
    struct reply_body RM_rmb;
  }
  ru;
}
 ;
13.2.28. rpc/svc.h

typedef struct SVCXPRT
{
  int xp_sock;
  u_short xp_port;
  struct xp_ops *xp_ops;
  int xp_addrlen;
  struct sockaddr_in xp_raddr;
  struct opaque_auth xp_verf;
  caddr_t xp_p1;
  caddr_t xp_p2;
  char xp_pad[256];
}
SVCXPRT;

struct xp_ops
{
  bool_t (*xp_recv) (struct SVCXPRT * __xprt, struct rpc_msg * __msg);
  enum xprt_stat (*xp_stat) (struct SVCXPRT * __xprt);
    bool_t (*xp_getargs) (struct SVCXPRT * __xprt, xdrproc_t __xdr_args,
                          caddr_t args_ptr);
    bool_t (*xp_reply) (struct SVCXPRT * __xprt, struct rpc_msg * __msg);
    bool_t (*xp_freeargs) (struct SVCXPRT * __xprt, xdrproc_t __xdr_args,
                           caddr_t args_ptr);
  void (*xp_destroy) (struct SVCXPRT * __xprt);
}
 ;
13.2.29. rpc/types.h

typedef int bool_t;
typedef int enum_t;
typedef unsigned long rpcvers_t;
13.2.30. rpc/xdr.h

enum xdr_op
{
  XDR_ENCODE, XDR_DECODE, XDR_FREE
}
 ;
typedef struct XDR
{
  enum xdr_op x_op;
  struct xdr_ops *x_ops;
  caddr_t x_public;
  caddr_t x_private;
  caddr_t x_base;
  int x_handy;
}
XDR;

struct xdr_ops
{
  bool_t (*x_getlong) (struct XDR * __xdrs, long *__lp);
  bool_t (*x_putlong) (struct XDR * __xdrs, long *__lp);
  bool_t (*x_getbytes) (struct XDR * __xdrs, caddr_t __addr, u_int __len);
  bool_t (*x_putbytes) (struct XDR * __xdrs, char *__addr, u_int __len);
  u_int (*x_getpostn) (struct XDR * __xdrs);
  bool_t (*x_setpostn) (struct XDR * __xdrs, u_int __pos);
  int32_t *(*x_inline) (struct XDR * __xdrs, int __len);
  void (*x_destroy) (struct XDR * __xdrs);
    bool_t (*x_getint32) (struct XDR * __xdrs, int32_t * __ip);
    bool_t (*x_putint32) (struct XDR * __xdrs, int32_t * __ip);
}
 ;

typedef bool_t (*xdrproc_t) (struct XDR *, void *, ...);

struct xdr_discrim
{
  int value;
  xdrproc_t proc;
}
 ;
13.2.31. sched.h

#define SCHED_OTHER     0
#define SCHED_FIFO      1
#define SCHED_RR        2

struct sched_param
{
  int sched_priority;
}
 ;
13.2.32. search.h

typedef struct entry
{
  char *key;
  void *data;
}
ENTRY;
typedef enum
{
  FIND, ENTER
}
ACTION;
typedef enum
{
  preorder, postorder, endorder, leaf
}
VISIT;

typedef void (*__action_fn_t) (void *__nodep, VISIT __value, int __level);
13.2.33. setjmp.h

#define setjmp(env)     _setjmp(env)
#define sigsetjmp(a,b)  __sigsetjmp(a,b)

struct __jmp_buf_tag
{
  __jmp_buf __jmpbuf;
  int __mask_was_saved;
  sigset_t __saved_mask;
}
 ;

typedef struct __jmp_buf_tag jmp_buf[1];
typedef jmp_buf sigjmp_buf;
13.2.34. signal.h

#define SIGRTMAX        (__libc_current_sigrtmax ())
#define SIGRTMIN        (__libc_current_sigrtmin ())
#define SIG_BLOCK       0
#define SIG_UNBLOCK     1
#define SIG_SETMASK     2
#define NSIG    64

typedef int sig_atomic_t;
struct sigstack
{
  void *ss_sp;
  int ss_onstack;
}
 ;
#define SIG_ERR ((__sighandler_t)-1)
#define SIG_DFL ((__sighandler_t)0)
#define SIG_IGN ((__sighandler_t)1)
#define SIGHUP  1
#define SIGUSR1 10
#define SIGSEGV 11
#define SIGUSR2 12
#define SIGPIPE 13
#define SIGALRM 14
#define SIGTERM 15
#define SIGSTKFLT       16
#define SIGCHLD 17
#define SIGCONT 18
#define SIGSTOP 19
#define SIGINT  2
#define SIGTSTP 20
#define SIGTTIN 21
#define SIGTTOU 22
#define SIGURG  23
#define SIGXCPU 24
#define SIGXFSZ 25
#define SIGVTALRM       26
#define SIGPROF 27
#define SIGWINCH        28
#define SIGIO   29
#define SIGQUIT 3
#define SIGPWR  30
#define SIGSYS  31
#define SIGUNUSED       31
#define SIGILL  4
#define SIGTRAP 5
#define SIGABRT 6
#define SIGIOT  6
#define SIGBUS  7
#define SIGFPE  8
#define SIGKILL 9
#define SIGCLD  SIGCHLD
#define SIGPOLL SIGIO

typedef void (*__sighandler_t) (int);
#define SV_ONSTACK      (1<<0)
#define SV_INTERRUPT    (1<<1)
#define SV_RESETHAND    (1<<2)

typedef union sigval
{
  int sival_int;
  void *sival_ptr;
}
sigval_t;
#define SIGEV_SIGNAL    0
#define SIGEV_NONE      1
#define SIGEV_THREAD    2

typedef struct sigevent
{
  sigval_t sigev_value;
  int sigev_signo;
  int sigev_notify;
  union
  {
    int _pad[SIGEV_PAD_SIZE];
    struct
    {
      void (*sigev_thread_func) (void);
      void *_attribute;
    }
    _sigev_thread;
  }
  _sigev_un;
}
sigevent_t;
#define SI_QUEUE        -1
#define SI_TIMER        -2
#define SI_MESGQ        -3
#define SI_ASYNCIO      -4
#define SI_USER 0
#define si_pid  _sifields._kill._pid
#define si_uid  _sifields._kill._uid
#define si_value        _sifields._rt._sigval
#define si_int  _sifields._rt._sigval.sival_int
#define si_ptr  _sifields._rt._sigval.sival_ptr
#define si_status       _sifields._sigchld._status
#define si_stime        _sifields._sigchld._stime
#define si_utime        _sifields._sigchld._utime
#define si_addr _sifields._sigfault._addr
#define si_band _sifields._sigpoll._band
#define si_fd   _sifields._sigpoll._fd
#define si_timer1       _sifields._timer._timer1
#define si_timer2       _sifields._timer._timer2

typedef struct siginfo
{
  int si_signo;
  int si_errno;
  int si_code;
  union
  {
    int _pad[SI_PAD_SIZE];
    struct
    {
      pid_t _pid;
      uid_t _uid;
    }
    _kill;
    struct
    {
      unsigned int _timer1;
      unsigned int _timer2;
    }
    _timer;
    struct
    {
      pid_t _pid;
      uid_t _uid;
      sigval_t _sigval;
    }
    _rt;
    struct
    {
      pid_t _pid;
      uid_t _uid;
      int _status;
      clock_t _utime;
      clock_t _stime;
    }
    _sigchld;
    struct
    {
      void *_addr;
    }
    _sigfault;
    struct
    {
      int _band;
      int _fd;
    }
    _sigpoll;
  }
  _sifields;
}
siginfo_t;

typedef struct
{
  unsigned long sig[_SIGSET_NWORDS];
}
sigset_t;
#define SA_NOCLDSTOP    0x00000001
#define SA_SIGINFO      0x00000004
#define SA_ONSTACK      0x08000000
#define SA_RESTART      0x10000000
#define SA_INTERRUPT    0x20000000
#define SA_NODEFER      0x40000000
#define SA_RESETHAND    0x80000000
#define SA_NOMASK       SA_NODEFER
#define SA_ONESHOT      SA_RESETHAND

typedef struct sigaltstack
{
  void *ss_sp;
  int ss_flags;
  size_t ss_size;
}
stack_t;
13.2.35. stddef.h

#define offsetof(TYPE,MEMBER)   ((size_t)& ((TYPE*)0)->MEMBER)
#define NULL    (0)

typedef int wchar_t;
13.2.36. stdio.h

#define EOF     (-1)
#define P_tmpdir        "/tmp"
#define FOPEN_MAX       16
#define L_tmpnam        20
#define FILENAME_MAX    4096
#define BUFSIZ  8192
#define L_ctermid       9
#define L_cuserid       9

typedef struct
{
  off_t __pos;
  mbstate_t __state;
}
fpos_t;
typedef struct
{
  off64_t __pos;
  mbstate_t __state;
}
fpos64_t;

typedef struct _IO_FILE FILE;
#define _IOFBF  0
#define _IOLBF  1
#define _IONBF  2
13.2.37. stdlib.h

#define MB_CUR_MAX      (__ctype_get_mb_cur_max())
#define EXIT_SUCCESS    0
#define EXIT_FAILURE    1
#define RAND_MAX        2147483647

typedef int (*__compar_fn_t) (const void *, const void *);
struct random_data
{
  int32_t *fptr;
  int32_t *rptr;
  int32_t *state;
  int rand_type;
  int rand_deg;
  int rand_sep;
  int32_t *end_ptr;
}
 ;

typedef struct
{
  int quot;
  int rem;
}
div_t;

typedef struct
{
  long quot;
  long rem;
}
ldiv_t;

typedef struct
{
  long long quot;
  long long rem;
}
lldiv_t;
13.2.38. sys/file.h

#define LOCK_SH 1
#define LOCK_EX 2
#define LOCK_NB 4
#define LOCK_UN 8
13.2.39. sys/ipc.h

#define IPC_PRIVATE     ((key_t)0)
#define IPC_RMID        0
#define IPC_CREAT       00001000
#define IPC_EXCL        00002000
#define IPC_NOWAIT      00004000
#define IPC_SET 1
#define IPC_STAT        2
13.2.40. sys/mman.h

#define MAP_FAILED      ((void*)-1)
#define PROT_NONE       0x0
#define MAP_SHARED      0x01
#define MAP_PRIVATE     0x02
#define PROT_READ       0x1
#define MAP_FIXED       0x10
#define PROT_WRITE      0x2
#define MAP_ANONYMOUS   0x20
#define PROT_EXEC       0x4
#define MS_ASYNC        1
#define MS_INVALIDATE   2
#define MS_SYNC 4
#define MAP_ANON        MAP_ANONYMOUS
13.2.41. sys/msg.h

#define MSG_NOERROR     010000
13.2.42. sys/param.h

#define NOFILE  256
#define MAXPATHLEN      4096
13.2.43. sys/poll.h

#define POLLIN  0x0001
#define POLLPRI 0x0002
#define POLLOUT 0x0004
#define POLLERR 0x0008
#define POLLHUP 0x0010
#define POLLNVAL        0x0020

struct pollfd
{
  int fd;
  short events;
  short revents;
}
 ;
13.2.44. sys/resource.h

#define RLIM_INFINITY   (~0UL)
#define RLIM_SAVED_CUR  -1
#define RLIM_SAVED_MAX  -1
#define PRIO_PROCESS    0
#define RLIMIT_CPU      0
#define RUSAGE_SELF     0
#define PRIO_PGRP       1
#define RLIMIT_FSIZE    1
#define PRIO_USER       2
#define RLIMIT_DATA     2
#define RLIMIT_STACK    3
#define RLIMIT_CORE     4
#define RLIMIT_NOFILE   7
#define RLIMIT_AS       9

typedef unsigned long rlim_t;
typedef unsigned long long rlim64_t;

struct rlimit
{
  rlim_t rlim_cur;
  rlim_t rlim_max;
}
 ;
struct rlimit64
{
  rlim64_t rlim_cur;
  rlim64_t rlim_max;
}
 ;

struct rusage
{
  struct timeval ru_utime;
  struct timeval ru_stime;
  long ru_maxrss;
  long ru_ixrss;
  long ru_idrss;
  long ru_isrss;
  long ru_minflt;
  long ru_majflt;
  long ru_nswap;
  long ru_inblock;
  long ru_oublock;
  long ru_msgsnd;
  long ru_msgrcv;
  long ru_nsignals;
  long ru_nvcsw;
  long ru_nivcsw;
}
 ;
13.2.45. sys/sem.h

#define SEM_UNDO        0x1000
#define GETPID  11
#define GETVAL  12
#define GETALL  13
#define GETNCNT 14
#define GETZCNT 15
#define SETVAL  16
#define SETALL  17

struct sembuf
{
  short sem_num;
  short sem_op;
  short sem_flg;
}
 ;
13.2.46. sys/shm.h

#define SHM_RDONLY      010000
#define SHM_W   0200
#define SHM_RND 020000
#define SHM_R   0400
#define SHM_REMAP       040000
#define SHM_LOCK        11
#define SHM_UNLOCK      12
13.2.47. sys/socket.h

#define SHUT_RD 0
#define MSG_WAITALL     0x100
#define MSG_TRUNC       0x20
#define MSG_EOR 0x80
#define SIOCGIFCONF     0x8912
#define SIOCGIFFLAGS    0x8913
#define SIOCGIFADDR     0x8915
#define SIOCGIFNETMASK  0x891b
#define MSG_OOB 1
#define SHUT_WR 1
#define MSG_PEEK        2
#define SHUT_RDWR       2
#define MSG_DONTROUTE   4
#define MSG_CTRUNC      8
#define PF_LOCAL        AF_LOCAL
#define PF_UNSPEC       AF_UNSPEC

struct linger
{
  int l_onoff;
  int l_linger;
}
 ;
struct cmsghdr
{
  size_t cmsg_len;
  int cmsg_level;
  int cmsg_type;
}
 ;
struct iovec
{
  void *iov_base;
  size_t iov_len;
}
 ;

typedef unsigned short sa_family_t;
typedef unsigned int socklen_t;

struct sockaddr
{
  sa_family_t sa_family;
  char sa_data[14];
}
 ;

struct msghdr
{
  void *msg_name;
  int msg_namelen;
  struct iovec *msg_iov;
  size_t msg_iovlen;
  void *msg_control;
  size_t msg_controllen;
  unsigned int msg_flags;
}
 ;
#define AF_UNSPEC       0
#define AF_LOCAL        1
#define AF_UNIX 1
#define AF_INET6        10
#define AF_INET 2
#define AF_AX25 3
#define AF_IPX  4
#define AF_APPLETALK    5
#define AF_NETROM       6
#define AF_BRIDGE       7
#define AF_ATMPVC       8
#define AF_X25  9

#define PF_INET AF_INET
#define PF_INET6        AF_INET6
#define PF_UNIX AF_UNIX

#define SOCK_STREAM     1
#define SOCK_PACKET     10
#define SOCK_DGRAM      2
#define SOCK_RAW        3
#define SOCK_RDM        4
#define SOCK_SEQPACKET  5

#define SOL_SOCKET      1
#define SO_DEBUG        1
#define SO_OOBINLINE    10
#define SO_NO_CHECK     11
#define SO_PRIORITY     12
#define SO_LINGER       13
#define SO_REUSEADDR    2
#define SOL_RAW 255
#define SO_TYPE 3
#define SO_ERROR        4
#define SO_DONTROUTE    5
#define SO_BROADCAST    6
#define SO_SNDBUF       7
#define SO_RCVBUF       8
#define SO_KEEPALIVE    9
13.2.48. sys/stat.h

#define S_ISBLK(m)      (((m)& S_IFMT)==S_IFBLK)
#define S_ISCHR(m)      (((m)& S_IFMT)==S_IFCHR)
#define S_ISDIR(m)      (((m)& S_IFMT)==S_IFDIR)
#define S_ISFIFO(m)     (((m)& S_IFMT)==S_IFIFO)
#define S_ISLNK(m)      (((m)& S_IFMT)==S_IFLNK)
#define S_ISREG(m)      (((m)& S_IFMT)==S_IFREG)
#define S_ISSOCK(m)     (((m)& S_IFMT)==S_IFSOCK)
#define S_TYPEISMQ(buf) ((buf)->st_mode - (buf)->st_mode)
#define S_TYPEISSEM(buf)        ((buf)->st_mode - (buf)->st_mode)
#define S_TYPEISSHM(buf)        ((buf)->st_mode - (buf)->st_mode)
#define S_IRWXU (S_IREAD|S_IWRITE|S_IEXEC)
#define S_IROTH (S_IRGRP>>3)
#define S_IRGRP (S_IRUSR>>3)
#define S_IRWXO (S_IRWXG>>3)
#define S_IRWXG (S_IRWXU>>3)
#define S_IWOTH (S_IWGRP>>3)
#define S_IWGRP (S_IWUSR>>3)
#define S_IXOTH (S_IXGRP>>3)
#define S_IXGRP (S_IXUSR>>3)
#define S_ISVTX 01000
#define S_IXUSR 0x0040
#define S_IWUSR 0x0080
#define S_IRUSR 0x0100
#define S_ISGID 0x0400
#define S_ISUID 0x0800
#define S_IFIFO 0x1000
#define S_IFCHR 0x2000
#define S_IFDIR 0x4000
#define S_IFBLK 0x6000
#define S_IFREG 0x8000
#define S_IFLNK 0xa000
#define S_IFSOCK        0xc000
#define S_IFMT  0xf000
#define S_IREAD S_IRUSR
#define S_IWRITE        S_IWUSR
#define S_IEXEC S_IXUSR
13.2.49. sys/time.h

#define ITIMER_REAL     0
#define ITIMER_VIRTUAL  1
#define ITIMER_PROF     2

struct timezone
{
  int tz_minuteswest;
  int tz_dsttime;
}
 ;

struct timespec
{
  time_t tv_sec;
  long tv_nsec;
}
 ;

struct timeval
{
  time_t tv_sec;
  suseconds_t tv_usec;
}
 ;

struct itimerval
{
  struct timeval it_interval;
  struct timeval it_value;
}
 ;
13.2.50. sys/timeb.h

struct timeb
{
  time_t time;
  unsigned short millitm;
  short timezone;
  short dstflag;
}
 ;
13.2.51. sys/times.h

struct tms
{
  clock_t tms_utime;
  clock_t tms_stime;
  clock_t tms_cutime;
  clock_t tms_cstime;
}
 ;
13.2.52. sys/types.h

#define FD_ISSET(d,set) ((set)->fds_bits[0]& (1<<d))
#define FD_CLR(d,set)   ((set)->fds_bits[0]& =~(1<<d))
#define FD_SET(d,set)   ((set)->fds_bits[0]|=(1<<d))
#define FD_SETSIZE      1024
#define FD_ZERO(fdsetp) bzero(fdsetp, sizeof(*(fdsetp)))

typedef signed char int8_t;
typedef short int16_t;
typedef int int32_t;
typedef long long int64_t;
typedef unsigned char u_int8_t;
typedef unsigned short u_int16_t;
typedef unsigned int u_int32_t;
typedef unsigned int uid_t;
typedef int pid_t;
typedef unsigned long off_t;
typedef int key_t;
typedef unsigned int id_t;
typedef long suseconds_t;
typedef struct
{
  int __val[2];
}
fsid_t;
typedef unsigned long blksize_t;
typedef long fd_mask;
typedef int timer_t;
typedef int clockid_t;

typedef unsigned long long ino64_t;
typedef long long loff_t;
typedef unsigned long blkcnt_t;
typedef unsigned long fsblkcnt_t;
typedef unsigned long fsfilcnt_t;
typedef unsigned long long blkcnt64_t;
typedef unsigned long long fsblkcnt64_t;
typedef unsigned long long fsfilcnt64_t;
typedef unsigned char u_char;
typedef unsigned short u_short;
typedef unsigned long u_long;

typedef unsigned long ino_t;
typedef unsigned int gid_t;
typedef unsigned long long dev_t;
typedef unsigned int mode_t;
typedef unsigned long nlink_t;
typedef char *caddr_t;
typedef unsigned short ushort;

typedef struct
{
  unsigned long fds_bits[__FDSET_LONGS];
}
fd_set;

typedef long clock_t;
typedef long time_t;
13.2.53. sys/un.h

#define UNIX_PATH_MAX   108

struct sockaddr_un
{
  sa_family_t sun_family;
  char sun_path[UNIX_PATH_MAX];
}
 ;
13.2.54. sys/utsname.h

struct utsname
{
  char sysname[65];
  char nodename[65];
  char release[65];
  char version[65];
  char machine[65];
  char domainname[65];
}
 ;
13.2.55. sys/wait.h

#define WIFSIGNALED(status)     (!WIFSTOPPED(status) & & !WIFEXITED(status))
#define WIFSTOPPED(status)      (((status) &  0xff) == 0x7f)
#define WEXITSTATUS(status)     (((status) &  0xff00) >> 8)
#define WTERMSIG(status)        ((status) &  0x7f)
#define WCOREDUMP(status)       ((status) &  0x80)
#define WIFEXITED(status)       (WTERMSIG(status) == 0)
#define WNOHANG 0x00000001
#define WUNTRACED       0x00000002
#define WCOREFLAG       0x80
#define WSTOPSIG(status)        WEXITSTATUS(status)

typedef enum
{
  P_ALL, P_PID, P_PGID
}
idtype_t;
13.2.56. syslog.h

#define LOG_EMERG       0
#define LOG_ALERT       1
#define LOG_CRIT        2
#define LOG_ERR 3
#define LOG_WARNING     4
#define LOG_NOTICE      5
#define LOG_INFO        6
#define LOG_DEBUG       7

#define LOG_KERN        (0<<3)
#define LOG_AUTHPRIV    (10<<3)
#define LOG_FTP (11<<3)
#define LOG_USER        (1<<3)
#define LOG_MAIL        (2<<3)
#define LOG_DAEMON      (3<<3)
#define LOG_AUTH        (4<<3)
#define LOG_SYSLOG      (5<<3)
#define LOG_LPR (6<<3)
#define LOG_NEWS        (7<<3)
#define LOG_UUCP        (8<<3)
#define LOG_CRON        (9<<3)

#define LOG_LOCAL0      (16<<3)
#define LOG_LOCAL1      (17<<3)
#define LOG_LOCAL2      (18<<3)
#define LOG_LOCAL3      (19<<3)
#define LOG_LOCAL4      (20<<3)
#define LOG_LOCAL5      (21<<3)
#define LOG_LOCAL6      (22<<3)
#define LOG_LOCAL7      (23<<3)

#define LOG_UPTO(pri)   ((1 << ((pri)+1)) - 1)
#define LOG_MASK(pri)   (1 << (pri))

#define LOG_PID 0x01
#define LOG_CONS        0x02
#define LOG_ODELAY      0x04
#define LOG_NDELAY      0x08
#define LOG_NOWAIT      0x10
#define LOG_PERROR      0x20
13.2.57. termios.h

#define TCIFLUSH        0
#define TCOOFF  0
#define TCSANOW 0
#define BS0     0000000
#define CR0     0000000
#define FF0     0000000
#define NL0     0000000
#define TAB0    0000000
#define VT0     0000000
#define OPOST   0000001
#define OCRNL   0000010
#define ONOCR   0000020
#define ONLRET  0000040
#define OFILL   0000100
#define OFDEL   0000200
#define NL1     0000400
#define TCOFLUSH        1
#define TCOON   1
#define TCSADRAIN       1
#define TCIOFF  2
#define TCIOFLUSH       2
#define TCSAFLUSH       2
#define TCION   3

struct winsize
{
  unsigned short ws_row;
  unsigned short ws_col;
  unsigned short ws_xpixel;
  unsigned short ws_ypixel;
}
 ;

typedef unsigned int speed_t;
typedef unsigned char cc_t;
typedef unsigned int tcflag_t;
#define NCCS    32

struct termios
{
  tcflag_t c_iflag;
  tcflag_t c_oflag;
  tcflag_t c_cflag;
  tcflag_t c_lflag;
  cc_t c_line;
  cc_t c_cc[NCCS];
  speed_t c_ispeed;
  speed_t c_ospeed;
}
 ;
#define VINTR   0
#define VQUIT   1
#define VLNEXT  15
#define VERASE  2
#define VKILL   3
#define VEOF    4

#define IGNBRK  0000001
#define BRKINT  0000002
#define IGNPAR  0000004
#define PARMRK  0000010
#define INPCK   0000020
#define ISTRIP  0000040
#define INLCR   0000100
#define IGNCR   0000200
#define ICRNL   0000400
#define IXANY   0004000
#define IMAXBEL 0020000

#define CS5     0000000

#define ECHO    0000010

#define B0      0000000
#define B50     0000001
#define B75     0000002
#define B110    0000003
#define B134    0000004
#define B150    0000005
#define B200    0000006
#define B300    0000007
#define B600    0000010
#define B1200   0000011
#define B1800   0000012
#define B2400   0000013
#define B4800   0000014
#define B9600   0000015
#define B19200  0000016
#define B38400  0000017
13.2.58. time.h

#define CLOCK_REALTIME  0
#define TIMER_ABSTIME   1
#define CLOCKS_PER_SEC  1000000l

struct tm
{
  int tm_sec;
  int tm_min;
  int tm_hour;
  int tm_mday;
  int tm_mon;
  int tm_year;
  int tm_wday;
  int tm_yday;
  int tm_isdst;
  long tm_gmtoff;
  char *tm_zone;
}
 ;
struct itimerspec
{
  struct timespec it_interval;
  struct timespec it_value;
}
 ;
13.2.59. ulimit.h

#define UL_GETFSIZE     1
#define UL_SETFSIZE     2
13.2.60. unistd.h

#define SEEK_SET        0
#define STDIN_FILENO    0
#define SEEK_CUR        1
#define STDOUT_FILENO   1
#define SEEK_END        2
#define STDERR_FILENO   2

typedef long long off64_t;
#define F_OK    0
#define X_OK    1
#define W_OK    2
#define R_OK    4

#define _POSIX_VDISABLE '\0'
#define _POSIX_ASYNCHRONOUS_IO  1
#define _POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED 1
#define _POSIX_FSYNC    1
#define _POSIX_MAPPED_FILES     1
#define _POSIX_MEMLOCK  1
#define _POSIX_MEMLOCK_RANGE    1
#define _POSIX_MEMORY_PROTECTION        1
#define _POSIX_NO_TRUNC 1
#define _POSIX_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING      1
#define _POSIX_REALTIME_SIGNALS 1
#define _POSIX_SEMAPHORES       1
#define _POSIX_SHARED_MEMORY_OBJECTS    1
#define _POSIX_SYNCHRONIZED_IO  1
#define _POSIX_TIMERS   1
#define _POSIX2_C_VERSION       199209L
#define _POSIX2_VERSION 199209L
#define _POSIX_VERSION  199506L

#define _PC_LINK_MAX    0
#define _PC_MAX_CANON   1
#define _PC_ASYNC_IO    10
#define _PC_PRIO_IO     11
#define _PC_FILESIZEBITS        13
#define _PC_MAX_INPUT   2
#define _PC_NAME_MAX    3
#define _PC_PATH_MAX    4
#define _PC_PIPE_BUF    5
#define _PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED    6
#define _PC_NO_TRUNC    7
#define _PC_VDISABLE    8
#define _PC_SYNC_IO     9

#define _SC_ARG_MAX     0
#define _SC_CHILD_MAX   1
#define _SC_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING 10
#define _SC_TIMERS      11
#define _SC_ASYNCHRONOUS_IO     12
#define _SC_XBS5_ILP32_OFF32    125
#define _SC_XBS5_ILP32_OFFBIG   126
#define _SC_XBS5_LP64_OFF64     127
#define _SC_XBS5_LPBIG_OFFBIG   128
#define _SC_XOPEN_LEGACY        129
#define _SC_PRIORITIZED_IO      13
#define _SC_XOPEN_REALTIME      130
#define _SC_SYNCHRONIZED_IO     14
#define _SC_MAPPED_FILES        16
#define _SC_MEMLOCK     17
#define _SC_MEMLOCK_RANGE       18
#define _SC_MEMORY_PROTECTION   19
#define _SC_CLK_TCK     2
#define _SC_MESSAGE_PASSING     20
#define _SC_SEMAPHORES  21
#define _SC_SHARED_MEMORY_OBJECTS       22
#define _SC_AIO_LISTIO_MAX      23
#define _SC_AIO_MAX     24
#define _SC_AIO_PRIO_DELTA_MAX  25
#define _SC_DELAYTIMER_MAX      26
#define _SC_MQ_OPEN_MAX 27
#define _SC_MQ_PRIO_MAX 28
#define _SC_VERSION     29
#define _SC_NGROUPS_MAX 3
#define _SC_PAGESIZE    30
#define _SC_RTSIG_MAX   31
#define _SC_SEM_NSEMS_MAX       32
#define _SC_SEM_VALUE_MAX       33
#define _SC_SIGQUEUE_MAX        34
#define _SC_TIMER_MAX   35
#define _SC_BC_BASE_MAX 36
#define _SC_BC_DIM_MAX  37
#define _SC_BC_SCALE_MAX        38
#define _SC_BC_STRING_MAX       39
#define _SC_OPEN_MAX    4
#define _SC_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX    40
#define _SC_EXPR_NEST_MAX       42
#define _SC_LINE_MAX    43
#define _SC_RE_DUP_MAX  44
#define _SC_2_VERSION   46
#define _SC_2_C_BIND    47
#define _SC_2_C_DEV     48
#define _SC_2_FORT_DEV  49
#define _SC_STREAM_MAX  5
#define _SC_2_FORT_RUN  50
#define _SC_2_SW_DEV    51
#define _SC_2_LOCALEDEF 52
#define _SC_TZNAME_MAX  6
#define _SC_THREADS     67
#define _SC_THREAD_SAFE_FUNCTIONS       68
#define _SC_JOB_CONTROL 7
#define _SC_THREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS        73
#define _SC_THREAD_KEYS_MAX     74
#define _SC_THREAD_STACK_MIN    75
#define _SC_THREAD_THREADS_MAX  76
#define _SC_THREAD_ATTR_STACKADDR       77
#define _SC_THREAD_ATTR_STACKSIZE       78
#define _SC_THREAD_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING  79
#define _SC_SAVED_IDS   8
#define _SC_THREAD_PRIO_INHERIT 80
#define _SC_THREAD_PRIO_PROTECT 81
#define _SC_THREAD_PROCESS_SHARED       82
#define _SC_PASS_MAX    88
#define _SC_XOPEN_VERSION       89
#define _SC_REALTIME_SIGNALS    9
#define _SC_XOPEN_CRYPT 92
#define _SC_XOPEN_ENH_I18N      93
#define _SC_XOPEN_SHM   94
#define _SC_2_C_VERSION 96
#define _SC_2_UPE       97

#define _CS_PATH        0
#define _CS_XBS5_ILP32_OFF32_CFLAGS     1100
#define _CS_XBS5_ILP32_OFF32_LDFLAGS    1101
#define _CS_XBS5_ILP32_OFF32_LIBS       1102
#define _CS_XBS5_ILP32_OFF32_LINTFLAGS  1103
#define _CS_XBS5_ILP32_OFFBIG_CFLAGS    1104
#define _CS_XBS5_ILP32_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS   1105
#define _CS_XBS5_ILP32_OFFBIG_LIBS      1106
#define _CS_XBS5_ILP32_OFFBIG_LINTFLAGS 1107
#define _CS_XBS5_LP64_OFF64_CFLAGS      1108
#define _CS_XBS5_LP64_OFF64_LDFLAGS     1109
#define _CS_XBS5_LP64_OFF64_LIBS        1110
#define _CS_XBS5_LP64_OFF64_LINTFLAGS   1111
#define _CS_XBS5_LPBIG_OFFBIG_CFLAGS    1112
#define _CS_XBS5_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS   1113
#define _CS_XBS5_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LIBS      1114
#define _CS_XBS5_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LINTFLAGS 1115

#define _XOPEN_REALTIME 1
#define _XOPEN_XPG4     1
#define _XOPEN_XCU_VERSION      4
#define _XOPEN_VERSION  500
13.2.61. utime.h

struct utimbuf
{
  time_t actime;
  time_t modtime;
}
 ;
13.2.62. utmp.h

#define UT_HOSTSIZE     256
#define UT_LINESIZE     32
#define UT_NAMESIZE     32

struct exit_status
{
  short e_termination;
  short e_exit;
}
 ;
struct lastlog
{
  time_t ll_time;
  char ll_line[UT_LINESIZE];
  char ll_host[UT_HOSTSIZE];
}
 ;

struct utmp
{
  short ut_type;
  pid_t ut_pid;
  char ut_line[UT_LINESIZE];
  char ut_id[4];
  char ut_user[UT_NAMESIZE];
  char ut_host[UT_HOSTSIZE];
  struct exit_status ut_exit;
  long ut_session;
  struct timeval ut_tv;
  int32_t ut_addr_v6[4];
  char __unused[20];
}
 ;
#define EMPTY   0
#define RUN_LVL 1
#define BOOT_TIME       2
#define NEW_TIME        3
#define OLD_TIME        4
#define INIT_PROCESS    5
#define LOGIN_PROCESS   6
#define USER_PROCESS    7
#define DEAD_PROCESS    8
#define ACCOUNTING      9
13.2.63. wchar.h

#define WEOF    (0xffffffffu)
#define WCHAR_MAX       0x7FFFFFFF
#define WCHAR_MIN       0x80000000
13.2.64. wctype.h

typedef unsigned long wctype_t;
typedef unsigned int wint_t;
typedef const int32_t *wctrans_t;
typedef struct
{
  int count;
  wint_t value;
}
__mbstate_t;

typedef __mbstate_t mbstate_t;
13.2.65. wordexp.h

enum
{
  WRDE_DOOFFS, WRDE_APPEND, WRDE_NOCMD, WRDE_REUSE, WRDE_SHOWERR, WRDE_UNDEF,
    __WRDE_FLAGS
}
 ;

typedef struct
{
  int we_wordc;
  char **we_wordv;
  int we_offs;
}
wordexp_t;

enum
{
  WRDE_NOSYS, WRDE_NOSPACE, WRDE_BADCHAR, WRDE_BADVAL, WRDE_CMDSUB,
    WRDE_SYNTAX
}
 ;
13.3. Interfaces Definitions for libc
_IO_feof
Name
_IO_feof — alias for feof
Synopsis
int _IO_feof(_IO_FILE *__fp);
Description
_IO_feof tests the end-of-file indicator for the stream pointed to by __fp, returning a non-zero value if it is set. 
_IO_feof is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
_IO_getc
Name
_IO_getc — alias for getc
Synopsis
int _IO_getc(_IO_FILE *__fp);
Description
_IO_getc reads the next character from __fp and returns it as an unsigned char cast to an int, or EOF on end-of-file or error.
_IO_getc is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
_IO_putc
Name
_IO_putc — alias for putc
Synopsis
int _IO_putc(int __c, _IO_FILE *__fp);
Description
_IO_putc writes the character __c, cast to an unsigned char, to __fp.
_IO_putc is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
_IO_puts
Name
_IO_puts — alias for puts
Synopsis
int _IO_puts(const char *__c);
Description
_IO_puts writes the string __s and a trailing newline to stdout.
_IO_puts is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__assert_fail
Name
__assert_fail — abort the program after false assertion
Synopsis
void __assert_fail(const char *assertion, const char *file, unsigned int line, const char *function);
Description
__assert_fail receives a string containing the expression assertion, the filename file, and the line number line, and prints a message on the standard error stream. For example: 
a.c:10: foobar: Assertion a == b failed.
__assert_fail then aborts program execution via a call to abort. The exact form of the message is up to the implementation.
If function is NULL, then omit information about the function.
assertion, file, and line must be non-NULL.
__assert_fail is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__ctype_b
Name
__ctype_b — array index for ctype functions
Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

extern const unsigned short int *ctype_b;
Description
__ctype_b is an array index for ctype functions.
__ctype_b is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__ctype_get_mb_cur_max
Name
__ctype_get_mb_cur_max — maximum length of a multibyte character in the current locale
Synopsis
size_t __ctype_get_mb_cur_max(void);
Description
__ctype_get_mb_cur_max returns the maximum length of a multibyte character in the current locale.
__ctype_get_mb_cur_max is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__ctype_tolower
Name
__ctype_tolower — convert uppercase letter to lowercase letter
Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>
int __ctype_tolower(int c);
Description
__ctype_tolower converts an uppercase letter to the corresponding lowercase letter. If the argument is an uppercase letter, __ctype_tolower returns the corresponding lowercase letter if there is one; otherwise, the argument is returned unchanged.
__ctype_tolower is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__ctype_toupper
Name
__ctype_toupper — convert lowercase letter to uppercase letter
Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>
int __ctype_toupper(int c);
Description
__ctype_toupper converts a lowercase letter to the corresponding uppercase letter. If the argument is a lowercase letter, __ctype_toupper returns the corresponding uppercase letter if there is one; otherwise, the argument is returned unchanged.
__ctype_toupper is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__cxa_atexit
Name
__cxa_atexit — register a function to be called by exit or when a shared library is unloaded
Synopsis
int __cxa_atexit(void (*func) (void *), void *arg, void *d);
Description
__cxa_atexit registers a function to be called by exit or when a shared library is unloaded. This function is only called from code generated by the C++ compiler. 
__cxa_atexit has the same specification as atexit.
__cxa_atexit is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__daylight
Name
 — global variable containing daylight
Synopsis
int __daylight;
Description
__daylight is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2.
__dcgettext
Name
__dcgettext — (deprecated)
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>
extern char *__dcgettext(const char *domainname, const char *msgid, int category);
Description
__dcgettext has been deprecated from the LSB because it is no longer used by dcgettext. Originally, it was intended only for the binary standard.
__environ
Name
__environ — alias for environ - user environment 
Synopsis
extern char **__environ;
Description
__environ is an alias for environ - user environment.
__environ has the same specification as environ.
__environ is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__errno_location
Name
__errno_location — address of errno variable
Synopsis
int *__errno_location(void);
Description
__errno_location is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__fpending
Name
__fpending — returns in bytes the amount of output pending on a stream
Synopsis
#include <stdio_ext.h>
size_t __fpending(FILE *stream);
Description
__fpending returns the amount of output in bytes pending on a stream.
__fpending is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__getpagesize
Name
__getpagesize — alias for getpagesize - get current page size 
Synopsis
extern int __getpagesize(void);
Description
__getpagesize is an alias for getpagesize - get current page size.
__getpagesize has the same specification as getpagesize.
__getpagesize is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__getpgid
Name
__getpgid — get the process group id
Synopsis
pid_t __getpgid(pid_t pid);
Description
__getpgid has the same specification as getpgid.
__getpgid is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__h_errno_location
Name
__h_errno_location — address of h_errno variable
Synopsis
int *__h_errno_location(void);
Description
__h_errno_location returns the address of the h_errno variable, where h_errno is as specified in the Single Unix Specification.
__h_errno_location is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard. Note that h_errno itself is only in the source standard; it is not in the binary standard.
__isinf
Name
__isinf — test for infinity
Synopsis
int __isinf(double arg);
Description
__isinf has the same specification as isinf in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3, except that the argument type for __isinf is known to be double.
__isinf is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__isinff
Name
__isinff — test for infinity
Synopsis
int __isinff(float arg);
Description
__isinff has the same specification as isinf in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3, except that the argument type for __isinff is known to be float.
__isinff is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__isinfl
Name
__isinfl — test for infinity
Synopsis
int __isinfl(long double arg);
Description
__isinfl has the same specification as isinf in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3, except that the argument type for __isinfl is known to be long double.
__isinfl is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__isnan
Name
__isnan — test for infinity
Synopsis
int __isnan(double arg);
Description
__isnan has the same specification as isnan in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3, except that the argument type for __isnan is known to be double.
__isnan is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__isnanf
Name
__isnanf — test for infinity
Synopsis
int __isnanf(float arg);
Description
__isnanf has the same specification as isnan in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3, except that the argument type for __isnanf is known to be float.
__isnanf is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__isnanl
Name
__isnanl — test for infinity
Synopsis
int __isnanl(long double arg);
Description
__isnanl has the same specification as isnan in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3, except that the argument type for __isnanl is known to be long double.
__isnanl is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__libc_current_sigrtmax
Name
__libc_current_sigrtmax — return number of available real-time signal with lowest priority
Synopsis
int __libc_current_sigrtmax(void);
Description
__libc_current_sigrtmax returns the number of an available real-time signal with the lowest priority.
__libc_current_sigrtmax is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__libc_current_sigrtmin
Name
__libc_current_sigrtmin — return number of available real-time signal with highest priority
Synopsis
int __libc_current_sigrtmin(void);
Description
__libc_current_sigrtmin returns the number of an available real-time signal with the highest priority.
__libc_current_sigrtmin is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__libc_start_main
Name
__libc_start_main — initialization routine
Synopsis
BP_SYM __libc_start_main(int (*main) (int, char**, char**), int argc, char *__unbounded *__unbounded ubp_av, void (*init) (void), void (*fini) (void), void (*rtld_fini) (void), void (*__unbounded stack_end));
Description
__libc_start_main initializes glibc.
__libc_start_main is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__lxstat
Name
__lxstat — inline wrapper around call to lxstat
Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>
int __lxstat(int version, char *__path, (struct stat *__statbuf));
Description
__lxstat is an inline wrapper around call to lxstat.
__lxstat is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__mempcpy
Name
__mempcpy — copy given number of bytes of source to destination
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
extern ptr_t __mempcpy(ptr_t restrict dest, const ptr_t restrict src, size_t n);
Description
__mempcpy copies n bytes of source to destination, returning pointer to bytes after the last written byte.
__mempcpy is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__rawmemchr
Name
__rawmemchr — scan memory
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
extern ptr_t __rawmemchr(const ptr_t s, int c);
Description
__rawmemchr searches in s for c.
__rawmemchr is a weak alias to rawmemchr. It is similar to memchr, but it has no length limit. 
__rawmemchr is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__sigsetjmp
Name
__sigsetjmp — save stack context for non-local goto
Synopsis
int __sigsetjmp(jmp_buf env, int savemask);
Description
__sigsetjmp has the same behavior as sigsetjmp as specified by the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2.
__sigsetjmp is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__stpcpy
Name
__stpcpy — copy a string returning a pointer to its end
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
char *__stpcpy(char *dest, const char *src);
Description
__stpcpy copies the string src (including the terminating /0 character) to the array dest. The strings may not overlap, and dest must be large enough to receive the copy.
Return Value
__stpcpy returns a pointer to the end of the string dest (that is, the address of the terminating NULL character) rather than the beginning.
__stpcpy has the same specification as stpcpy.
__stpcpy is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__strdup
Name
__strdup — alias for strdup
Synopsis
char *__strdup(const char string);
Description
__strdup has the same specification as strdup.
__strdup is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__strtod_internal
Name
__strtod_internal — underlying function for strtod
Synopsis
double __strtod_internal(const char *__nptr, char **__endptr, int __group);
Description
__group must be 0 or the behavior of __strtod_internal is undefined. 
__strtod_internal(__nptr, __endptr, 0) has the same specification as strtod(__nptr, __endptr).
__strtod_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__strtof_internal
Name
__strtof_internal — underlying function for strtof
Synopsis
float __strtof_internal(const char *__nptr, char **__endptr, int __group);
Description
__group must be 0 or the behavior of __strtof_internal is undefined. 
__strtof_internal(__nptr, __endptr, 0) has the same specification as strtof(__nptr, __endptr).
__strtof_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__strtok_r
Name
__strtok_r — alias for strtok_r
Synopsis
char *__strtok_r(char *__restrict s, __const char *__restrict delim, char **__restrict save_ptr);
Description
__strtok_r has the same specification as strtok_r.
__strtok_r is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__strtol_internal
Name
__strtol_internal — alias for strtol
Synopsis
long int __strtol_internal(const char *__nptr, char **__endptr, int __base, int __group);
Description
__group must be 0 or the behavior of __strtol_internal is undefined. 
__strtol_internal(__nptr, __endptr, __base, 0) has the same specification as strtol(__nptr, __endptr, __base).
__strtol_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__strtold_internal
Name
__strtold_internal — underlying function for strtold
Synopsis
long double __strtold_internal(const char *__nptr, char **__endptr, int __group);
Description
__group must be 0 or the behavior of __strtold_internal is undefined. 
__strtold_internal(__nptr, __endptr, 0) has the same specification as strtold(__nptr, __endptr).
__strtold_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__strtoll_internal
Name
__strtoll_internal — underlying function for strtoll
Synopsis
long long __strtoll_internal(const char *__nptr, char **__endptr, int __base, int __group);
Description
__group must be 0 or the behavior of __strtoll_internal is undefined. 
__strtoll_internal(__nptr, __endptr, __base, 0) has the same specification as strtoll(__nptr, __endptr, __base).
__strtoll_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__strtoul_internal
Name
__strtoul_internal — underlying function for strtoul
Synopsis
unsigned long int __strtoul_internal(const char *__nptr, char **__endptr, int __base, int __group);
Description
__group must be 0 or the behavior of __strtoul_internal is undefined. 
__strtoul_internal(__nptr, __endptr, __base, 0) has the same specification as strtoul(__nptr, __endptr, __base).
__strtoul_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__strtoull_internal
Name
__strtoull_internal — underlying function for strtoull
Synopsis
unsigned long long __strtoull_internal(const char *__nptr, char **__endptr, int __base, int __group);
Description
__group must be 0 or the behavior of __strtoull_internal is undefined. 
__strtoull_internal(__nptr, __endptr, __base, 0) has the same specification as strtoull(__nptr, __endptr, __base).
__strtoull_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__sysconf
Name
__sysconf — get configuration information at runtime
Synopsis
#include <unistd.h>
long __sysconf(int name);
Description
__sysconf gets configuration information at runtime.
__sysconf is weak alias to sysconf.
__sysconf has the same specification as sysconf.
__sysconf is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__sysv_signal
Name
__sysv_signal — signal handling
Synopsis
__sighandler_t __sysv_signal(int sig, __sighandler_t handler);
Description
__sysv_signal has the same behavior as signal as specified by X/Open.
__sysv_signal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__timezone
Name
 — global variable containing timezone
Synopsis
long int __timezone;
Description
__timezone has the same specification as timezone in the Single UNIX Specification.
__tzname
Name
 — global variable containing the timezone
Synopsis
char *__tzname[2];
Description
__tzname has the same specification as tzname in the Single UNIX Specification.
Note that the array size of 2 is explicit in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3, but not in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2.
__wcstod_internal
Name
__wcstod_internal — underlying function for wcstod
Synopsis
double __wcstod_internal(const wchar_t *nptr, wchar_t **endptr, int group);
Description
group must be 0 or the behavior of __wcstod_internal is undefined. 
__wcstod_internal(nptr, endptr, 0) has the same specification as wcstod(nptr, endptr).
__wcstod_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__wcstof_internal
Name
__wcstof_internal — underlying function for wcstof
Synopsis
float __wcstof_internal(const wchar_t *nptr, wchar_t **endptr, int group);
Description
group must be 0 or the behavior of __wcstof_internal is undefined. 
__wcstof_internal(nptr, endptr, 0) has the same specification as wcstof(nptr, endptr).
__wcstof_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__wcstol_internal
Name
__wcstol_internal — underlying function for wcstol
Synopsis
long __wcstol_internal(const wchar_t *nptr, wchar_t **endptr, int base, int group);
Description
group must be 0 or the behavior of __wcstol_internal is undefined. 
__wcstol_internal(nptr, endptr, base, 0) has the same specification as wcstol(nptr, endptr, base).
__wcstol_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__wcstold_internal
Name
__wcstold_internal — underlying function for wcstold
Synopsis
long double __wcstold_internal(const wchar_t *nptr, wchar_t **endptr, int group);
Description
group must be 0 or the behavior of __wcstold_internal is undefined. 
__wcstold_internal(nptr, endptr, 0) has the same specification as wcstold(nptr, endptr).
__wcstold_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__wcstoul_internal
Name
__wcstoul_internal — underlying function for wcstoul
Synopsis
unsigned long __wcstoul_internal(const wchar_t *restrict nptr, wchar_t **restrict endptr, int base, int group);
Description
group must be 0 or the behavior of __wcstoul_internal is undefined. 
__wcstoul_internal(nptr, endptr, base, 0) has the same specification as wcstoul(nptr, endptr, base).
__wcstoul_internal is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__xmknod
Name
__xmknod — make block or character special file
Synopsis
int __xmknod(int ver, __const char *path, __mode_t mode, __dev_t *dev);
Description
ver must be 1 or the behavior of __xmknod is undefined. 
__xmknod(1, path, mode, dev) has the same specification as mknod(path, mode, dev).
Note that the format of dev_t is not the same as the argument that the kernel syscall uses.
__xmknod is not in the source standard; it is only in the binary standard.
__xstat
Name
__xstat — provide inode information
Synopsis
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <unistd.h>
int __xstat(int __ver, const char *__filename, (struct stat *__stat_buf));
int __lxstat(int __ver, const char *__filename, (struct stat *__stat_buf));
int __fxstat(int __ver, int __filedesc, (struct stat *__stat_buf));
Description
__ver must be 3 or the behavior of these functions is undefined. 
__filename is as specified in POSIX.
__filedesc is as specified in POSIX.
__stat_buf is as specified in POSIX.
__xstat(3, __filename, __stat_buf) has the same specification as stat(__filename, __stat_buf) as specified by POSIX.
__lxstat(3, __filename, __stat_buf) has the same specification as lstat(__filename, __stat_buf) as specified by POSIX.
__fxstat(3, __filedesc, __stat_buf) has the same specification as fstat(__filedesc, __stat_buf) as specified by POSIX.
Note that the struct stat used by these functions is not the one that the kernel uses.
__xstat, __lxstat, and __fxstat are not in the source standard; they are only in the binary standard.
stat, lstat, and fstat are not in the binary standard; they are only in the source standard.
__xstat64
Name
__xstat64 — provide inode information
Synopsis
#define _LARGEFILE_SOURCE 1
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <unistd.h>
int __xstat64(int __ver, const char *__filename, (struct stat64 *__stat_buf));
int __lxstat64(int __ver, const char *__filename, (struct stat64 *__stat_buf));
int __fxstat64(int __ver, int __filedesc, (struct stat64 *__stat_buf));
Description
__ver must be 3 or the behavior of these functions is undefined. 
__filename is as specified by the Large File Summit.
__filedesc is as specified by the Large File Summit.
__stat_buf is as specified by the Large File Summit.
__xstat64(3, __filename, __stat_buf) has the same specification as stat64(__filename, __stat_buf) as specified by the Large File Summit.
__lxstat64(3, __filename, __stat_buf) has the same specification as lstat64(__filename, __stat_buf) as specified by the Large File Summit.
__fxstat64(3, __filedesc, __stat_buf) has the same specification as fstat64(__filedesc, __stat_buf) as specified by the Large File Summit.
__xstat64, __lxstat64, and __fxstat64 are not in the source standard; they are only in the binary standard.
stat64, lstat64, and fstat64 are not in the binary standard; they are only in the source standard.
_environ
Name
_environ — alias for environ - user environment 
Synopsis
extern char **_environ;
Description
_environ is an alias for environ - user environment.
_nl_msg_cat_cntr
Name
_nl_msg_cat_cntr — new catalog load counter
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>

extern int _nl_msg_cat_cntr;
Description
_nl_msg_cat_cntr is incremented each time a new catalong is loaded. It is a variable defined in loadmsgcat.c and is used by Message catalogs for internationalization. 
_obstack_begin
Name
_obstack_begin — initialize an obstack for use
Synopsis
#include <obstack.h>
extern int _obstack_begin(struct obstack *, int, int, void *(*) (long), void (*) (void *));
Description
_obstack_begin initializes an obstack for use.
_obstack_newchunk
Name
_obstack_newchunk — allocate a new current chunk of memory for the obstack
Synopsis
#include <obstack.h>
extern void _obstack_newchunk(struct obstack *, int);
Description
_obstack_newchunk allocates a new current chunk of memory for the obstack. 
_sys_errlist
Name
_sys_errlist — array containing the "C" locale strings used by strerror()
Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

extern const char *const _sys_errlist[];
Description
_sys_errlist is an array containing the "C" locale strings used by strerror. This normally should not be used directly. strerror provides all of the needed functionality.
_sys_siglist
Name
_sys_siglist — array containing the names of the signal names
Synopsis
#include <signal.h>

extern const char *const _sys_siglist[NSIG];
Description
_sys_siglist is an array containing the names of the signal names.
_sys_siglist exists only for compatibility; use strsignal instead. (See string.h).
acct
Name
acct — switch process accounting on or off
Synopsis
#include <dirent.h>
int acct(const char *filename);
Description
When filename is the name of an existing file, acct turns accounting on and appends a record to filename for each terminating process. When filename is NULL, acct turns accounting off.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
ENOSYS 
 	BSD process accounting has not been enabled when the operating system kernel was compiled. The kernel configuration parameter controlling this feature is CONFIG_BSD_PROCESS_ACCT.
ENOMEM 
 	Out of memory.
EPERM 
 	The calling process has no permission to enable process accounting.
EACCES 
 	filename is not a regular file.
EIO 
 	Error writing to the filename.
EUSERS 
 	There are no more free file structures or we run out of memory.
adjtime
Name
adjtime — correct the time to allow synchronization of the system clock
Synopsis
#include <time.h>
int adjtime((const struct timeval *delta), (struct timeval *olddelta));
Description
adjtime makes small adjustments to the system time as returned by gettimeofday(2), advancing or retarding it by the time specified by the timeval delta. If delta is negative, the clock is slowed down by incrementing it more slowly than normal until the correction is complete. If delta is positive, a larger increment than normal is used. The skew used to perform the correction is generally a fraction of one percent. Thus, the time is always a monotonically increasing function. A time correction from an earlier call to adjtime may not be finished when adjtime is called again. If olddelta is non-NULL, the structure pointed to will contain, upon return, the number of microseconds still to be corrected from the earlier call.
adjtime may be used by time servers that synchronize the clocks of computers in a local area network. Such time servers would slow down the clocks of some machines and speed up the clocks of others to bring them to the average network time.
The adjtime is restricted to the super-user.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
EFAULT
 	An argument points outside the process's allocated address space.
EPERM
 	The process's effective user ID is not that of the super-user.
adjtimex
Name
adjtimex — tune kernel clock
Synopsis
#include <sys/timex.h>
int adjtimex((struct timex *buf));
Description
Linux uses David L. Mills' clock adjustment algorithm (see RFC 1305). adjtimex reads and optionally sets adjustment parameters for this algorithm. adjtimex takes a pointer to a timex structure, updates kernel parameters from field values, and returns the same structure with current kernel values. This structure is declared as follows: 
  struct timex {
            int  modes;          /* mode selector */
            long offset;         /* time offset (usec) */
            long freq;           /* frequency offset (scaled ppm) */
            long maxerror;       /* maximum error (usec) */
            long esterror;       /* estimated error (usec) */
            int  status;         /* clock command/status */
            long constant;       /* pll time constant */
            long precision;      /* clock precision (usec) (read only) */
            long tolerance;      /* clock frequency tolerance (ppm)
                                          (read only) */
            struct timeval time; /* current time (read only) */
            long tick;           /* usecs between clock ticks */
  };
modes determines which parameters, if any, to set. modes may contain a bitwise-or combination of zero or more of the following bits: 
  #define ADJ_OFFSET            0x0001  /* time offset */
  #define ADJ_FREQUENCY         0x0002  /* frequency offset */
  #define ADJ_MAXERROR          0x0004  /* maximum time error */
  #define ADJ_ESTERROR          0x0008  /* estimated time error */
  #define ADJ_STATUS            0x0010  /* clock status */
  #define ADJ_TIMECONST         0x0020  /* pll time constant */
  #define ADJ_TICK              0x4000  /* tick value */
  #define ADJ_OFFSET_SINGLESHOT 0x8001  /* old-fashioned adjtime */
Ordinary users are restricted to a 0 value for modes. Only the superuser may set any parameters.
Return Value
On success, adjtimex returns the clock state: 
  #define TIME_OK   0  /* clock synchronized */
  #define TIME_INS  1  /* insert leap second */
  #define TIME_DEL  2  /* delete leap second */
  #define TIME_OOP  3  /* leap second in progress */
  #define TIME_WAIT 4  /* leap second has occurred */
  #define TIME_BAD  5  /* clock not synchronized */
On error, the global variable errno is set to -1.
Errors
EFAULT 
 	buf does not point to writable memory.
EPERM 
 	buf.mode is non-ZERO and the user is not super-user.
EINVAL 
 	An attempt is made to set buf.offset to a value outside of the range -131071 to +131071, or to set buf.status to a value other than those listed above, or to set buf.tick to a value outside of the range 900000/HZ to 1100000/HZ, where HZ is the system timer interrupt frequency.
alphasort
Name
alphasort — compare two directory entries alphabetically (LSB deprecated)
Synopsis
#include <dirent.h>
int alphasort((const struct dirent **a), (const struct dirent **b));
Description
alphasort is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should provide their own routine to sort filenames. 1
alphasort can be used as the comparison function for the scandir function to sort directory entries into alphabetical order. Its parameters are the two directory entries, a and b, to compare.
Return Value
alphasort returns an integer less than, equal to, or greater than 0, where a is considered to be less than, equal to, or greater than b, respectively.
Errors
ENOMEM
 	Insufficient memory to complete the operation.
Notes
1. 	The LSB never has contained scandir.
alphasort64
Name
alphasort64 — compare two directory entries alphabetically (LSB deprecated)
Synopsis
#include <dirent.h>
int alphasort64((const struct dirent64 **a), (const struct dirent64 **b));
Description
alphasort64 is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should provide their own routine to sort filenames. 1
alphasort compares two struct dirent64s alphabetically. This function is like alphasort but it uses the 64-bit dirent structure.
Notes
1. 	The LSB never has contained scandir64; alphasort64 is customarily used with it.
asprintf
Name
asprintf — write formatted output to a string dynamically allocated with malloc and store the address of the string
Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
extern int asprintf(char **restrict ptr, const char *restrict format ...);
Description
asprintf has the same behavior as sprintf, but calls malloc to dynamically allocate space for the output, and then puts the output string in that space.
asprintf stores the address of the string in ptr.
bind_textdomain_codeset
Name
bind_textdomain_codeset — specify encoding for message retrieval from message catalog for domain DOMAINNAME
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>

extern char *bind_textdomain_codeset(const char *domainname, const char *codeset);
Description
The bind_textdomain_codeset function can be used to specify the output codeset for message catalogs for domain domainname. The codeset aregument must be a valid codeset name which can be used tor the iconv_open() funtion, or a null pointer. If the codeset argument is the null pointer, then function returns the currently selected codeset for the domain with the name domainname. It returns null pointer if no codeset has yet been selected
The bind_textdomain_codeset function can be used several times. If used multiple times, with the same domainname argument, the later call overrrides the settings made by the earlier one.
The bind_textdomain_codeset function returns a pointer to a string containing the name of the selected codeset. The string is allocated internally in the function and must not be changed by the user.
Parameters
domainname
 	The domainname argument is applied to the currenlty active LC_MESSAGE locale. It is equivalent in syntax and meaning to the domainname argument to textdomain(), except that the selection of the domain is valid only for the duration of the call.
Return
Returns the currently selected codeset name. It returns null pointer if no codeset has yet been selected.
Errors
The function is not required to set the external errno variable.
See Also
gettext (baselib-gettext.html), dgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcgettext, dcngettext, textdomain, bindtextdomain, bind_textdomain_codeset
bindresvport
Name
bindresvport — bind socket to privileged IP port
Synopsis
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <rpc.rpc.h>
int bindresvport(int sd, struct sockaddr_in *sin);
Description
bindresvport binds a socket to a privileged IP port. This function can be used only by root.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
EPFNOSUPPORT
 	Address of sin did not match address family of sd.
bindtextdomain
Name
bindtextdomain — specify the locale of a message catalog
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>
extern char *bindtextdomain(const char *domainname, const char *dirname);
Description
bindtextdomain specifies that the domainname message catalog will be found in the dirname directory hierarchy, rather than in the system locale data base.
bindtextdomain applies domainname to the currently active LC_MESSAGE locale. This usage is equivalent in syntax and meaning to the textdomain function's application of domainname, except that the selection of the domain in bind_textdomain_codeset is valid only for the duration of the call.
dirname can be an absolute or relative pathname.
On success, bindtextdomain returns the directory pathname currently bound to the domain. On failure, a NULL pointer is returned.
See Also
gettext (baselib-gettext.html), dgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcgettext, dcngettext, textdomain, bindtextdomain, bind_textdomain_codeset
cfmakeraw
Name
cfmakeraw — get and set terminal attributes
Synopsis
#include <termios.h>
int cfmakeraw(struct termios *termios_p);
Description
cfmakeraw sets the terminal attributes as follows: 
  termios_p->c_iflag &= ~(IGNBRK|BRKINT|PARMRK|ISTRIP
                          |INLCR|IGNCR|ICRNL|IXON);

  termios_p->c_oflag &= ~OPOST;

  termios_p->c_lflag &= ~(ECHO|ECHONL|ICANON|ISIG|IEXTEN);

  termios_p->c_cflag &= ~(CSIZE|PARENB);

  termios_p->c_cflag |= CS8;
termios_p points to a termios structure that contains the following members: 
  tcflag_t c_iflag;      /* input modes */
  tcflag_t c_oflag;      /* output modes */
  tcflag_t c_cflag;      /* control modes */
  tcflag_t c_lflag;      /* local modes */
  cc_t c_cc[NCCS];       /* control chars */
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
cfsetspeed
Name
cfsetspeed — manipulate the termios structure
Synopsis
#include <termios.h>
int cfsetspeed(struct termios *t, speedt speed);
Description
cfsetspeed sets the baud rate values in the termios structure. The effects of the function on the terminal as described below do not become effective, nor are all errors detected, until the tcsetattr function is called. Certain values for baud rates set in termios and passed to tcsetattr have special meanings.
Getting and Setting the Baud Rate
Input and output baud rates are found in the termios structure. The unsigned integer speed_t is typdef'd in the include file termios.h. The value of the integer corresponds directly to the baud rate being represented; however, the following symbolic values are defined. 
  #define B0      0
  #define B50     50
  #define B75     75
  #define B110    110
  #define B134    134
  #define B150    150
  #define B200    200
  #define B300    300
  #define B600    600
  #define B1200   1200
  #define B1800   1800
  #define B2400   2400
  #define B4800   4800
  #define B9600   9600
  #define B19200  19200
  #define B38400  38400
  #ifndef _POSIX_SOURCE
  #define EXTA    19200
  #define EXTB    38400
  #endif  /*_POSIX_SOURCE */
cfsetspeed sets both the input and output baud rates in the termios structure referenced by t to speed.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
daemon
Name
daemon — run in the background
Synopsis
#include <unistd.h>
int daemon(int nochdir, int noclose);
Description
daemon allows programs to detach from the controlling terminal and run in the background as system daemons. Unless nochdir is non-ZERO, daemon changes the current working directory to the root (`/'). Unless noclose is non-zero, daemon will redirect standard input, standard output and standard error to /dev/null.
Return Value
On error, -1 is returned, and the global variable errno is set to any of the errors specified for the library functions fork(2) and setsid(2).
dcgettext
Name
dcgettext — perform lookup in message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>
#include <locale.h>
extern char *dcgettext(const char *domainname, const char *msgid, int category);
Description
dcgettext is a domain specified version of gettext.
Parameters
domainname
 	dcgettext applies domainname to the currently active LC_MESSAGE locale. This usage is equivalent in syntax and meaning to the textdomain function's application of domainname, except that the selection of the domain in dcgettext is valid only for the duration of the call.
msgid
 	a NULL-terminated string to be matched in the catalogue with respect to a specific domain and the current locale.
category
 	category is used for retrieving messages string for other than LC_MESSAGES category. Available value for category are LC_CTYPE, LC_COLLATE, LC_MESSAGES, LC_MONETARY,LC_NUMERIC, and LC_TIME.
dcgettext(domainname, msgid, LC_MESSAGES) has the same specification as dgettext(domainname, msgid). Note that LC_ALL must not be used.
Return Value
On success, the translated NULL-terminated string is returned. On error, msgid is returned.
Errors
dcgettext will not modify the errno global variable.
See Also
gettext (baselib-gettext.html), dgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcgettext, dcngettext, textdomain, bindtextdomain, bind_textdomain_codeset
dcngettext
Name
dcngettext — perform lookup in message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>
#include <locale.h>
extern char *dcngettext(const char *domainname, const char *msgid1, const char *msgid2, unsigned long int n, int category);
Description
dcngettext is a plural version of dcgettext. (See dcgettext for more information.)
Parameters
domainname
 	dcngettext applies domainname to the currently active LC_MESSAGE locale. This usage is equivalent in syntax and meaning to the textdomain function's application of domainname, except that the selection of the domain in dcngettext is valid only for the duration of the call.
msgid1
 	a NULL-terminated string to be matched in the catalogue with respect to a specific domain and the current locale. If the value of n is 1 and no message catalogs containing a translation for msgid1 are found, msgid1 is returned.
msgid2
 	a NULL-terminated string to be returned if the value of n is not 1 and no message catalogs are found.
n
 	determines which plural form is returned, in a language and message catalog dependent way.
category
 	category is used for retrieving messages string for other than LC_MESSAGES category. Available value for category are LC_CTYPE, LC_COLLATE, LC_MESSAGES, LC_MONETARY,LC_NUMERIC, and LC_TIME.
dcngettext(domainname, msgid1, msgid2, n, LC_MESSAGES) has the same specification as dngettext(domainname, msgid1, msgid2, n). Note that LC_ALL must not be used.
Return Value
On success of a msgid1 query, the translated NULL-terminated string is returned. On error, the original msgid1 or msgid2 is returned, according to n.
Errors
dcngettext will not modify the errno global variable.
See Also
gettext (baselib-gettext.html), dgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcgettext, dcngettext, textdomain, bindtextdomain, bind_textdomain_codeset
dgettext
Name
dgettext — perform lookup in message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>
extern char *dgettext(const char *domainname, const char *msgid);
Description
dgettext is a domain specified version of gettext.
Parameters
domainname
 	dgettext applies domainname to the currently active LC_MESSAGE locale. This usage is equivalent in syntax and meaning to the textdomain function's application of domainname, except that the selection of the domain in dgettext is valid only for the duration of the call.
msgid
 	a NULL-terminated string to be matched in the catalogue with respect to a specific domain and the current locale.
Return Value
On success of a msgid query, the translated NULL-terminated string is returned. On error, the original msgid is returned. The length of the string returned is undetermined until dgettext is called.
Errors
dgettext will not modify the errno global variable.
See Also
gettext (baselib-gettext.html), dgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcgettext, dcngettext, textdomain, bindtextdomain, bind_textdomain_codeset
dngettext
Name
dngettext — perform lookup in message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>
extern char *dngettext(const char *domainname, const char *msgid1, const char *msgid2, unsigned long int n);
Description
dngettext is a plural version of dgettext. (See dgettext for more information.)
Parameters
domainname
 	dngettext applies domainname to the currently active LC_MESSAGE locale. This usage is equivalent in syntax and meaning to the textdomain function's application of domainname, except that the selection of the domain in dngettext is valid only for the duration of the call.
msgid1
 	a NULL-terminated string to be matched in the catalogue with respect to a specific domain and the current locale. If the value of n is 1 and no message catalogs containing a translation for msgid1 are found, msgid1 is returned.
msgid2
 	a NULL-terminated string to be returned if the value of n is not 1 and no message catalogs are found.
n
 	determines which plural form is returned, in a language and message catalog dependent way.
Return Value
On success of a msgid1 query, the translated NULL-terminated string is returned. On error, the original msgid1 or msgid2 is returned, according to n.
Errors
dcngettext will not modify the errno global variable.
See Also
gettext (baselib-gettext.html), dgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcgettext, dcngettext, textdomain, bindtextdomain, bind_textdomain_codeset
err
Name
err — display formatted error messages
Synopsis
#include <err.h>
void err(int eval, const char *fmt ...);
Description
err displays a formatted error message on the standard error output. The last component of the program name, a colon character, and a space are output. If fmt is non-NULL, the formatted error message, a colon character, and a space are output. The error message string affiliated with the current value of the global variable errno is output. The output is followed by a newline character.
err does not return, but exits with the value of eval.
error
Name
error — print error message
Synopsis
void error(int exitstatus, int errnum, const char *format ...);
Description
error prints a message to standard error.
error builds the message from the following elements in their specified order: 
	1.	the program name. If the application has provided a function named error_print_progname, error calls this to supply the program name; otherwise, error uses the content of the global variable program_name.
	2.	the COLON and SPACE characters, then the result of using the printf-style format and the optional arguments.
	3.	if errnum is non-ZERO, error adds the COLON and SPACE characters, then the result of strerror(errnum).
	4.	a newline.
If exitstatus is non-ZERO, error calls exit(exitstatus).
errx
Name
errx — format error messages
Synopsis
#include <err.h>
void errx(int eval, const char *fmt ...);
Description
errx displays a formatted error message on the standard error output. The last component of the program name, a colon character, and a space are output. If fmt is non-NULL, the formatted error message, a colon character, and a space are output. The output is followed by a newline character.
errx does not return, but exits with the value of eval.
fcntl
Name
fcntl — file control
Description
fcntl is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3, but with differences as listed below.
Implementation may set O_LARGEFILE
According to the Single UNIX Specification, only an application sets fcntl flags, for example O_LARGEFILE. However, this specification also allows implementations to set O_LARGEFILE in a case in which the default behavior matches the O_LARGEFILE behavior. 1 Or in other words, calling fcntl with the F_GETFL command may return O_LARGEFILE as well as flags explicitly set by the application.
Notes
1. 	For example, if off_t is 64 bits.
flock
Name
flock — apply or remove an advisory lock on an open file
Synopsis
int flock(int fd, int operation);
Description
flock applies or removes an advisory lock on the open file fd. Valid operation types are:
LOCK_SH
 	Shared lock. More than one process may hold a shared lock for a given file at a given time.
LOCK_EX
 	Exclusive lock. Only one process may hold an exclusive lock for a given file at a given time.
LOCK_UN
 	Unlock.
LOCK_NB
 	Don't block when locking. May be specified (by oring) along with one of the other operations.
A single file may not simultaneously have both shared and exclusive locks.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
EWOULDBLOCK
 	The file is locked and the LOCK_NB flag was selected.
fstatfs
Name
fstatfs — (deprecated)
Synopsis
#include <sys/vfs.h>
int fstatfs(int fd, struct statfs *buf);
Description
fstatfs is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should call the fstatvfs interface.
fstatfs returns information about a mounted file system. fd is the open file descriptor of any file within the mounted filesystem. buf is a pointer to a statfs structure defined as follows: 
  struct statfs {
             long   f_type;      /* type of filesystem (see below) */
             long   f_bsize;     /* optimal transfer block size */
             long   f_blocks;    /* total data blocks in file system */
             long   f_bfree;     /* free blocks in fs */
             long   f_bavail;    /* free blocks avail to non-superuser */
             long   f_files;     /* total file nodes in file system */
             long   f_ffree;     /* free file nodes in fs */
             fsid_t f_fsid;      /* file system id */
             long   f_namelen;   /* maximum length of filenames */
             long   f_spare[6];  /* spare for later */
  };
Fields that are undefined for a particular file system are set to 0.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
EBADF
 	fd is not a valid open file descriptor.
EFAULT
 	buf points to an invalid address.
EIO
 	An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
ENOSYS
 	The filesystem fd is open on does not support statfs.
fstatfs64
Name
fstatfs64 — (deprecated)
Synopsis
#include <errno.h>
#include <sys/statfs.h>
int fstatfs64(int fd, struct statfs64 *buf);
Description
fstatfs64 is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should call the fstatvfs64 interface.
fstatfs64 returns information about a mounted file system. fd is the open file descriptor of any file within the mounted filesystem.
fstatfs64 is the 64-bit version of fstatfs.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
getdomainname
Name
getdomainname — get NIS domain name.
Synopsis
#include <unistd.h>

extern int getdomainname(char *name, size_t namelen);
Description
If NIS is in use, provide the NIS domain name. Note that this is not the same as the domain name which provides the domain portion of a fully qualified domain name (for example, in DNS). If NIS is not in use, provide the string "(none)".
If the string which is provided is strictly less than namelen characters in length, getdomainname places it in the array pointed to by name followed by a terminating null character. If not, getdomainname may either truncate it to namelen characters and place it in name (without a terminating null character), or may fail with EINVAL.
Return Value
getdomainname returns 0 if successful; -1 if not (in which case errno is set to indicate the error).
gethostbyname
Name
gethostbyname — get network host entry
Synopsis
#include <netdb.h>
struct hostent *gethostbyname(const char name);
Description
gethostbyname returns a hostent structure for the given host name. Here, name is either a host name, or an IPv4 address in standard dot notation, or an IPv6 address in colon (and possibly dot) notation. (See RFC 1884 for the description of IPv6 addresses.) If name is an IPv4 or IPv6 address, no lookup is performed and gethostbyname simply copies name into the h_name field and its struct in_addr equivalent into the h_addr_list[0] field of the returned hostent structure. If name doesn't end in a dot and the environment variable HOSTALIASES is set, the alias file pointed to by HOSTALIASES will first be searched for name (see hostname(7) for the file format). The current domain and its parents are searched unless name ends in a dot.
The domain name queries carried out by gethostbyname use a combination of any or all of the name server named(8), a broken out line from /etc/hosts, and the Network Information Service (NIS or YP), depending upon the contents of the order line in /etc/host.conf. (See resolv+(8)). The default action is to query named(8), followed by /etc/hosts.
The hostent structure is defined in netdb.h as follows: 
  struct hostent {
              char  *h_name;        /* official name of host */
              char  **h_aliases;    /* alias list */
              int   h_addrtype;     /* host address type */
              int   h_length;       /* length of address */
              char  **h_addr_list;  /* list of addresses */
  }

  #define  h_addr  h_addr_list[0]   /* for backward compatibility */
Return Value
gethostbyname returns the hostent structure or a NULL pointer if an error occurs. On error, the h_errno variable holds an error number.
Errors
ENOMEM
 	Insufficient memory to complete the operation. 
gethostbyname_r
Name
gethostbyname_r — find network host database entry matching host name
Synopsis
extern int gethostbyname_r(__const char *__restrict __name, (struct hostent *__restrict __result_buf), char *__restrict __buf, size_t __buflen, (struct hostent **__restrict __result), int *__restrict __h_errnop);
Description
gethostbyname_r is a reentrant version of gethostbyname that searches the network host database for a host name match.
getloadavg
Name
getloadavg — get system load averages
Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>
int getloadavg(double loadavg[], int nelem);
Description
getloadavg returns the number of processes in the system run queue averaged over various periods of time. Up to nelem samples are retrieved and assigned to successive elements of loadavg[]. The system imposes a maximum of 3 samples, representing averages over the last 1, 5, and 15 minutes, respectively.
getopt
Name
getopt — parse command line options
Synopsis
int getopt(int argc, char * const argv[], const char *opstring);
extern char *optarg;
extern int optind, opterr, optopt;
GNU supports the following extensions of getopt:
int getopt_long(int argc, char * const argv[], const char *opstring, (const struct option *longopts), int *longindex);
int getopt_long_only(int argc, char * const argv[], const char *opstring, (const struct option *longopts), int *longindex);
Description
getopt parses command line arguments. GNU and POSIX specifications for this function vary in the following areas.
Option Characteristics
GNU specifies that: 
•	an element of argv that starts with "-" (and is not exactly "-" or "--") is an option element.
•	characters of an option element, aside from the initial "-", are option characters.
POSIX specifies that: 
•	applications using getopt must obey the following syntax guidelines: 
•	option name is a single alphanumeric character from the portable character set
•	option is preceded by the "-" delimiter character
•	options without option-arguments should be accepted when grouped behind one "-" delimiter
•	each option and option-argument is a separate argument
•	option-arguments are not optional
•	all options should precede operands on the command line
•	the argument "--" is accepted as a delimiter indicating the end of options and the consideration of subsequent arguments, if any, as operands
•	historical implementations of getopt support other characters as options as an allowed extension, but applications that use extensions are not maximally portable.
•	support for multi-byte option characters is only possible when such characters can be represented as type int.
•	applications that call any utility with a first operand starting with "-" should usually specify "--" to mark the end of the options. Standard utilities that do not support this guideline indicate that fact in the OPTIONS section of the utility description.
Extensions
GNU specifies that: 
•	if a character is followed by two colons, the option takes an optional arg; if there is text in the current argv element, it is returned in optarg, otherwise optarg is set to 0.
•	if optstring contains W followed by a ;, then -W foo is treated as the long option --foo. (Not available with libraries before GNU libc 2.)
•	getopt_long works like getopt except that getopt_long also accepts "long options", or, options that are prefaced with two dashes instead of one.
•	long option names may be abbreviated if the abbreviation is unique or an exact match for some defined option.
•	a long option may take a parameter, of the form --arg=param or --arg param.
•	getopt_long_only works like getopt_long, except that both "-" and "--" indicate long option. If an option that starts with "-" (not "--") doesn't match a long option, but does match a short option, it is parsed instead as a short option.
POSIX specifies that: 
•	the -W option is reserved for implementation extensions.
Return Values
GNU specifies the following getopt return values: 
•	the next option character is returned, if found successfully.
•	":" is returned if a parameter is missing for one of the options.
•	"?" is returned if an unknown option character is encountered.
•	-1 is returned for the end of the option list.
GNU specifies the following getopt_long and getopt_long_only return values: 
•	when short option is recognized, the option character is returned.
•	when long option is recognized, val is returned if flag is NULL, otherwise, 0 is returned.
•	error and -1 returns are the same as for getopt.
•	"?" is returned for an ambiguous match or an extraneous parameter.
POSIX specifies the following getopt return values: 
•	the next option character is returned, if found successfully.
•	":" is returned if a parameter is missing for one of the options and the first character of opstring is ":".
•	"?" is returned if an unknown option character not in optstring is encountered, or if getopt detects a missing argument and the first character of optstring is not ":".
•	-1 is returned for the end of the option list.
Environmental Variables
GNU specifies that: 
•	if the variable POSIXLY_CORRECT is set, option processing stops as soon as a non-option argument is encountered.
•	if POSIXLY_CORRECT is set, GNU getopt conforms to POSIX.2.
•	the variable _[PID]_GNU_nonoption_argv_flags_ was used by bash 2.0 to communicate to GNU libc which arguments resulted from wildcard expansion and so should not be considered as options. This behavior was removed in bash version 2.01, but the support remains in GNU libc.
Environmental Variables
POSIX.2 Interpretation 150 reports a technical error in the function of getopt. GNU implements the correct behavior of getopt.
getopt_long
Name
getopt_long — parse command line options
Synopsis
#define _GNU_SOURCE
#include <getopt.h>
int getopt_long(int argc, char * const argv[], const char *opstring, (const struct option *longopts), int *longindex);
Description
getopt_long works like getopt except that it also accepts long options, started out by two dashes. Long option names may be abbreviated if the abbreviation is unique or is an exact match for some defined option. A long option may take a parameter, of the form --arg=param or --arg param.
longopts is a pointer to the first element of an array of struct option declared in getopt.h as: 
  struct option {
             const char *name;
             int *flag;
             int has_arg;
             int val;
  };
Return Value
getopt_long returns the option character if the option was found successfully, or ":" if there was a missing parameter for one of the options, or "?" for an unknown option character, or -1 for the end of the option list.
getopt_long also returns the option character when a short option is recognized. For a long option, they return val if flag is NULL, and 0 otherwise. Error and -1 returns are the same as for getopt, plus "?" for an ambiguous match or an extraneous parameter.
getopt_long_only
Name
getopt_long_only — parse command line options
Synopsis
#define _GNU_SOURCE
#include <getopt.h>
int getopt_long_only(int argc, char * const argv[], const char *opstring, (const struct option *longopts), int *longindex);
Description
getopt_long_only is like getopt_long, but "-" as well as "--" can indicate a long option. If an option that starts with "-" (not "--") doesn't match a long option, but does match a short option, it is parsed as a short option instead.
Return Value
getopt_long_only returns the option character if the option was found successfully, or ":" if there was a missing parameter for one of the options, or "?" for an unknown option character, or -1 for the end of the option list.
getopt_long_only also returns the option character when a short option is recognized. For a long option, they return val if flag is NULL, and 0 otherwise. Error and -1 returns are the same as for getopt, plus "?" for an ambiguous match or an extraneous parameter.
getpwnam_r
Name
getpwnam_r — reentrant version of getpwnam
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
extern int getpwnam_r(const char *name, (struct passwd *resultbuf), char *buffer, size_t buflen, (struct passwd **result));
Description
getpwnam_ris a reentrant version of getpwnam. The additional arguments resultsbuf and buffer are for internal storage, buflen the size of the buffer, and result is the password structure used to return the requested information.
gets
Name
gets — get a line of input (deprecated)
Description
gets is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should call the fgets interface. 1
gets is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification.
Notes
1. 	Programs that use gets are almost always vulnerable to overflowing the buffer supplied to gets.
getservbyname
Name
getservbyname — get service entry by name
Synopsis
#include <netdb.h>
struct servent *getservbyname(const char *name, const char *proto);
Description
getservbyname returns a servent structure for the line from /etc/services that matches the service name using protocol proto.
The servent structure is defined in netdb.h as follows: 
  struct servent {
              char  *s_name;      /* official service name */
              char  **s_aliases;  /* alias list */
              int   s_port;       /* port number */
              char  *s_proto;     /* protocol to use */
  }
Return Value
getservbyname returns the servent structure, or a NULL pointer if an error occurs or the end of the file is reached.
Files
/etc/services services database file
getservent
Name
getservent — get service entry
Synopsis
#include <netdb.h>
struct servent *getservent(void);
Description
getservent reads the next line from the file /etc/services and returns a structure servent containing the broken out fields from the line. The /etc/services file is opened if necessary.
The servent structure is defined in netdb.h as follows: 
  struct servent {
              char  *s_name;      /* official service name */
              char  **s_aliases;  /* alias list */
              int   s_port;       /* port number */
              char  *s_proto;     /* protocol to use */
  }
Return Value
getservent returns the servent structure, or a NULL pointer if an error occurs or the end of the file is reached.
Files
/etc/services services database file
gettext
Name
gettext — perform lookup in message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>
extern char *gettext(const char *msgid);
Description
gettext attempts to retrieve a target string based on the specified key from msgid within the context of a specific domain and the current locale. 
The LANGUAGE environment variable is examined first to determine the message catalogs to be used. LANGUAGE is a list of locale names separated by ":" character. If LANGUAGE is defined, each locale name is tried in the specified order and if a message catalog containing the requested message is found, the message is returned. If LANGUAGE is defined but failed to locate a message catalog, the msgid string is returned. If LANGUAGE is not defined, the LC_ALL, LC_xxx, and LANG environment variables are examined to locate the message catalog, following the convention used by the setlocale function.
The pathname used to locate the message catalog is dirname/locale/category/domainname.mo, where dirname is the directory specified by the bindtextdomain function, locale is a locale name determined by the definition of environment variables, and category is LC_MESSAGES.
If the LC_MESSAGES locale category of the current locale is the standard C locale or the standard POSIX locale, gettext returns msgid without looking in any message catalog.
Parameters
msgid
 	A NULL-terminated string to be matched in the catalogue with respect to a specific domain and the current locale. 
Return Value
If the function query above succeeds with msgid, then a translated NULL-terminated string is returned. If the search fails, then the original msgid is returned. The length of the string returned is undetermined until the function is called. 
Errors
gettext does not modify the global variable errno.
See Also
gettext (baselib-gettext.html), dgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcgettext, dcngettext, textdomain, bindtextdomain, bind_textdomain_codeset
getutent
Name
getutent — access utmp file entries 
Synopsis
#include <utmp.h>
struct utmp *getutent(void);
Description
getutent reads a line from the current file position in the utmp file. It returns a pointer to a structure containing the fields of the line.
Return Value
getutent returns a pointer to a static struct utmp.
Errors
On error, (struct utmp*)0 is returned.
Files
/var/run/utmp database of currently logged-in users
/var/log/wtmp database of past user logins
getutent_r
Name
getutent_r — access utmp file entries
Synopsis
extern int getutent_r((struct utmp *__buffer), (struct utmp **__result));
Description
getutent_r is a reentrant version of the getutent utmp file handler.
glob64
Name
glob64 — find pathnames matching a pattern (Large File Support)
Synopsis
#include <glob.h>
int glob64(const char *pattern, int flags, int (*errfunc) (const char *, int), glob64_t *pglob);
Description
glob64 searches for all the pathnames matching pattern according to the rules used by the shell. (See glob(7).) No tilde expansion or parameter substitution is done; if you want these, use wordexp(3).
The results of a glob64 call are stored in the structure pointed to by pglob, which is a glob64_t declared in glob.h and includes the following elements defined by POSIX.2 (more may be present as an extension):
glob64 is a 64-bit version of glob.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. Other possible returns are:
GLOB_NOSPACE
 	out of memory
GLOB_ABORTED
 	read error
GLOB_NOMATCH
 	no match found
globfree64
Name
globfree64 — free memory from glob64() (Large File Support)
Synopsis
#include <glob.h>
void globfree64(glob64_t *pglob);
Description
globfree64 frees the dynamically allocated storage from an earlier call to glob64.
globfree64 is a 64-bit version of globfree.
initgroups
Name
initgroups — initialize the supplementary group access list
Synopsis
#include <grp.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
int initgroups(const char *user, gid_t group);
Description
initgroups initializes the group access list by reading the group database and using all groups of which user is a member. The additional group group is also added to the list.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
EPERM 
 	The calling process does not have sufficient privileges.
ENOMEM 
 	Insufficient memory to allocate group information structure.
ioctl
Name
ioctl — control device
Synopsis
#include <sys/ioctl.h>
int ioctl(int d, int request ...);
Description
ioctl manipulates the underlying device parameters of special files. d must be an open file descriptor. The type and value of the third parameter is dependent on the device and request.
An application may not call ioctl except for situations explicitly stated in this specification.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. An ioctl may use the return value as an output parameter and return a non-negative value on success. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
EBADF 
 	d is not a valid descriptor.
EFAULT 
 	The third parameter references an inaccessible memory area.
ENOTTY 
 	d is not associated with a character special device.
ENOTTY 
 	The specified request does not apply to the kind of object that d references.
EINVAL 
 	request or the third parameter is not valid.
sockio
Name
sockio — socket ioctl commands
Synopsis
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <net/if.h>
int ioctl(int sockfd, int request, char *argp);
Description
Socket ioctl commands are a subset of the ioctl calls, which can perform a variety of functions on sockets. sockfd must contain the value of a file descriptor that was created with the socket or accept calls.
Socket ioctl commands apply to the underlying network interfaces, and affect the entire system, not just the file descriptor used to issue the ioctl.
The following ioctls are provided:
SIOCGIFCONF
 	Gets the interface configuration list for the system. 1 argp is a pointer to a ifconf structure. Before calling, the caller must allocate the ifc_ifcu.ifcu_req field to point to an array of ifreq structures, and set if_len to the size of this allocated array (in bytes). Upon return, if_len will contain the amount of the array which was actually used (again, in bytes). If it is the same as the length upon calling, the caller should assume that the array was too small and try again with a larger array.
On success, SIOCGIFCONF can return any nonnegative value. 2
SIOCGIFFLAGS 
 	Gets the interface flags for the indicated interface. argp is a pointer to a ifreq structure. Before calling, the caller should fill in the ifr_name field with the interface name, and upon return, the ifr_ifru.ifru_flags field is set with the interface flags.
SIOCGIFADDR 
 	Gets the interface address list for the system. argp is a pointer to a ifreq structure. Before calling, the caller should fill in the ifr_name field with the interface name, and upon return, the ifr_ifru.ifru_addr field is set with the interface address.
SIOCGIFNETMASK 
 	Gets the network mask for the indicated interface. argp is a pointer to a ifreq structure. Before calling, the caller should fill in the ifr_name field with the interface name, and upon return, the ifr_ifru.ifru_netmask field is set with the network mask.
The sockaddr structure is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
EBADF 
 	sockfd is not a valid descriptor.
EFAULT 
 	argp references an inaccessible memory area.
ENOTTY 
 	sockfd is not associated with a character special device.
ENOTTY 
 	The specified request does not apply to the kind of object that the descriptor sockfd references.
EINVAL 
 	request and argp are not valid.
Notes
1. 	SIOCGIFCONF is similar to the if_nameindex family found in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3 or the getifaddrs family found in BSD.
2. 	Historical UNIX systems disagree on the meaning of the return value.
iswctype
Name
iswctype — wide character classification
Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>
int iswctype(wint_t wc, wctype_t desc);
Description
iswctype tests wc to determine if it is a wide character whose property is designated by the character class desc.
desc must be a character property descriptor returned by the wctype function.
Return Value
If wc belongs to the character class desc, a non-ZERO value is returned. Otherwise, 0 is returned. 
Note that if wc is WEOF, 0 is returned.
Notes
The behavior of iswctype depends on the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
kill
Name
kill — send a signal
Synopsis
int kill(pid_t pid, int sig);
Description
kill is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2, but with differences as listed below.
Process ID -1 doesn't affect calling process
If pid is specified as -1, sig shall not be sent to the calling process. 1 Other than this, the rules in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2 apply.
Notes
1. 	This was a deliberate Linus decision after an unpopular experiment in including the calling process in the 2.5.1 kernel. See "What does it mean to signal everybody?", Linux Weekly News, 20 December 2001, http://lwn.net/2001/1220/kernel.php3
mbsnrtowcs
Name
mbsnrtowcs — convert a multibyte string to a wide character string
Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>
size_t mbsnrtowcs(wchar_t *dest, const char **src, size_t nms, size_t len, mbstate_t *ps);
Description
mbsnrtowcs is like mbsrtowcs, except that the number of bytes to be converted, starting at src, is limited to nms.
If dest is not a NULL pointer, mbsnrtowcs converts at most nms bytes from the multibyte string src to a wide-character string starting at dest. At most, len wide characters are written to dest. The state ps is updated.
The conversion is effectively performed by repeatedly calling: 
 
mbrtowc(dest, *src, n, ps)
where n is some positive number, as long as this call succeeds, and then incrementing dest by one and src by the number of bytes consumed.
The conversion can stop for three reasons:
•	An invalid multibyte sequence has been encountered. In this case src is left pointing to the invalid multibyte sequence, (size_t)(-1) is returned, and errno is set to EILSEQ.
•	The nms limit forces a stop, or len non-L'\0' wide characters have been stored at dest. In this case, src is left pointing to the next multibyte sequence to be converted, and the number of wide characters written to dest is returned.
•	The multibyte string has been completely converted, including the terminating '\0' (which has the side effect of bringing back ps to the initial state). In this case, src is set to NULL, and the number of wide characters written to dest, excluding the terminating L'\0' character, is returned.
If dest is NULL, len is ignored, and the conversion proceeds as above, except that the converted wide characters are not written out to memory, and that no destination length limit exists.
In both of the above cases, if ps is a NULL pointer, a static anonymous state only known to mbsnrtowcs is used instead.
The programmer must ensure that there is room for at least len wide characters at dest.
Return Value
mbsnrtowcs returns the number of wide characters that make up the converted part of the wide character string, not including the terminating null wide character. If an invalid multibyte sequence was encountered, (size_t)(-1) is returned, and the global variable errno is set to EILSEQ.
Notes
The behavior of mbsnrtowcs depends on the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
Passing NULL as ps is not multi-thread safe.
memmem
Name
memmem — locate a substring
Synopsis
#define _GNU_SOURCE
#include <string.h>
void *memmem(const void *haystack, size_t haystacklen, const void *needle, size_t needlelen);
Description
memmem finds the start of the first occurrence of the substring needle of length needlelen in the memory area haystack of length haystacklen.
Return Value
memmem returns a pointer to the beginning of the substring, or NULL if the substring is not found.
Notes
memmem was broken in Linux libraries up to and including libc 5.0.9; there the needle and haystack arguments were interchanged, and a pointer to the end of the first occurrence of needle was returned. Since libc 5.0.9 is still widely used, this is a dangerous function to use.
Both old and new libc's have the bug that if needle is empty, haystack-1 is returned (instead of haystack). And glibc 2.0 makes it worse, returning a pointer to the last byte of haystack. This is fixed in glibc 2.1.
memrchr
Name
memrchr — scan memory for a character
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
void *memrchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n);
Description
memrchr returns a pointer to the last occurrence of c in the first n characters of the string represented by s.
ngettext
Name
ngettext — perform lookup in message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>
extern char *ngettext(const char *msgid1, const char *msgid2, unsigned long int n);
Description
ngettext is the plural version of gettext, which searches for the message string using the msgid1 arguments as the key, using the argument n to determine the plural form. If no message catalogs containing a translation for msgid1 are found, msgid1 is returned if n == 1, otherwise, msgid2 is returned. (See gettext for more details.)
Parameters
msgid1
 	A NULL-terminated string to be matched in the catalogue with respect to a specific domain and the current locale. If no message catalogs are found, msgid1 is returned if n == 1.
msgid2
 	A NULL-terminated string to be returned if no message catalogs are found and n != 1.
n
 	Determines in which plural form a message string is returned, in a language and message catalog dependent way.
Return
If the function query above succeeds with msgid1, then a translated NULL-terminated string is returned. If the search fails, then the original msgid1 or msgid2 is returned, according to n.
Errors
ngettext will not modify the errno global variable.
See Also
gettext (baselib-gettext.html), dgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcgettext, dcngettext, textdomain, bindtextdomain, bind_textdomain_codeset
nice
Name
nice — set nice value
Description
nice is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, but with differences as listed below.
As deprecated behavior, the return value of a successful call to nice may be 0 (rather than the new nice value). A future version of the LSB is expected to require the new nice value, as specified in the Single UNIX Specification. But until then, applications need to call the getpriority, rather than rely on the return value from nice.
obstack_free
Name
obstack_free — free an object in the obstack
Synopsis
#include <obstack.h>
void obstack_free((struct obstack *obstack), void *block);
Description
obstack_free frees an object in the obstack.
opterr
Name
opterr — external variable used in getopt()
Synopsis
extern int opterr;
Description
opterr is used as a flag to suppress an error message generated by getopt. When opterr is set to 0, it suppresses the error message generated by getopt when that function does not recognize an option character.
optind
Name
optind — external variable used in getopt()
Synopsis
extern int optind;
Description
optind holds the current index of the array argr[], which contains the command line options being parsed by getopt.
optopt
Name
optopt — external variable used in getopt()
Synopsis
extern int optopt;
Description
optopt holds the unknown option character when that option character is not recognized by getopt.
psignal
Name
psignal — print signal message
Synopsis
#include <signal.h>
void psignal(int sig, const char *s);
extern const char *const sys_siglist[]
Description
psignal displays a message on stderr consisting of the string s, a colon, a space, and a string describing the signal number sig. If sig is invalid, the message displayed will indicate an unknown signal.
The array sys_siglist holds the signal description strings indexed by signal number.
Return Value
psignal returns no value.
random_r
Name
random_r — generate random number
Synopsis
extern int random_r((struct random_data *__restrict __buf), int32_t *__restrict __result);
Description
random_r is a reentrant version of random, which generates a pseudorandom number.
setbuffer
Name
setbuffer — stream buffering operation
Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
void setbuffer(FILE *stream, char *buf, size_t size);
Description
setbuffer is an alias for the call to setvbuf. It works the same, except that the size of the buffer in setbuffer is up to the caller, rather than being determined by the default BUFSIZ. 
setdomainname
Name
setdomainname — set NIS domain name.
Synopsis
#include <unistd.h>

extern int setdomainname(char *name, size_t namelen);
Description
If NIS is in use, set the NIS domain name. Note that this is not the same as the domain name which provides the domain portion of a fully qualified domain name (for example, in DNS). If NIS is not in use, this function may set the domain name anyway, or it may fail.
This call shall fail unless the caller has appropriate privileges.
namelen shall be the length of the string pointed to by name.
Return Value
setdomainname returns 0 if successful; -1 if not (in which case errno is set to indicate the error).
setegid
Name
setegid — set effective group ID
Description
setegid is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3.
setenv
Name
setenv — change or add an environment variable
Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>
int setenv(const char *name, const char *value, int overwrite);
Description
setenv is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3.
seteuid
Name
seteuid — set effective user ID
Description
seteuid is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3.
setgroups
Name
setgroups — set list of supplementary group IDs
Synopsis
#include <grp.h>
int setgroups(size_t size, const gid_t *list);
Description
setgroups sets the supplementary groups for the process. Only the super-user may use this function.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
EFAULT 
 	list has an invalid address.
EPERM
 	The user is not the super-user.
EINVA
 	size is greater than NGROUPS (32 for Linux 2.0.32).
sethostid
Name
sethostid — set the unique identifier of the current host
Synopsis
#include <unistd.h>
int sethostid(long int hostid);
Description
sethostid sets a unique 32-bit identifier for the current machine. The 32-bit identifier is intended to be unique among all UNIX systems in existence. This normally resembles the Internet address for the local machine as returned by gethostbyname(3), and thus usually never needs to be set.
The sethostid call is restricted to the superuser.
hostid is stored in the file /etc/hostid.
Return Value
gethostid returns the 32-bit identifier for the current host as set by sethostid(2).
Files
/etc/hostid
sethostname
Name
sethostname — set host name
Synopsis
#include <unistd.h>
int sethostname(const char *name, size_t len);
Description
sethostname changes the host name of the current processor.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
EINVAL 
 	len is negative or larger than the maximum allowed size.
EPERM 
 	the caller was not the superuser.
EFAULT 
 	name is an invalid address.
Notes
The Single UNIX Specification, Version 2 guarantees that: 
Host names are limited to 255 bytes.
setmntent
Name
setmntent — (deprecated)
Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
#include <mntent.hgrt;
FILE *setmntent(const char *filename, const char *type);
Description
setmntent is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should avoid its use. 1
setnmtent accesses the file system description file /etc/fstab and the mounted file system description file /etc/mtab.
setmntent opens the file system description file filep and returns a file pointer that can be used by getmntent. type is the type of access required and can take the same values as the mode argument of fopen(3).
The mntent structure is defined in mntent.h as follows: 
  struct mntent {
             char  *mnt_fsname;  /* name of mounted file system */
             char  *mnt_dir;     /* file system path prefix */
             char  *mnt_type;    /* mount type (see mntent.h) */
             char  *mnt_opts;    /* mount options (see mntent.h) */
             int   mnt_freq;     /* dump frequency in days */
             int   mnt_passno;   /* pass number on parallel fsck */
  };
Files
/etc/fstab file system description file /etc/mtab mounted file system description file
Notes
1. 	setmntent is believed to be mainly of interest to system administration packages. Most other uses can be accomplished in better ways (for example, compare st_dev values to detect crossing a file system or call statvfs to check available space on the file system containing a particular directory). In addition the specification that the LSB has had for setmntent is incomplete; for example it is of little use without the missing function getmntent.
setutent
Name
setutent — access utmp file entries
Synopsis
#include <utmp.h>
void setutent(void);
Description
setutent rewinds the file pointer to the beginning of the utmp file. It is generally a Good Idea to call it before any of the other functions.
Errors
On error, (struct utmp*)0 will be returned.
Files
/var/run/utmp database of currently logged-in users /var/log/wtmp database of past user logins
sigandset
Name
sigandset — build a new signal set by combining the two input sets using logical AND
Synopsis
#include <signal.h>
extern int sigandset(sigset_t *set, const sigset_t *left, const sigset_t *right);
Description
sigandset is a signal function that builds a new signal set by combining the two input sets using logical AND.
sigblock
Name
sigblock — manipulate the signal mask
Synopsis
#include <signal.h>
int sigblock(int mask);
Description
sigblock is made obsolete by sigprocmask(2).
sigblock adds the signals specified in mask to the set of signals currently being blocked from delivery.
Notes
Prototype for sigblock is only available if _BSD_SOURCE is defined before the inclusion of any system.
siggetmask
Name
siggetmask — manipulate the signal mask
Synopsis
#include <signal.h>
int siggetmask(void);
Description
siggetmask is made obsolete by sigprocmask(2).
siggetmask returns the current set of masked signals.
Notes
Prototype for siggetmask is only available if _BSD_SOURCE is defined before the inclusion of any system header file.
sigisemptyset
Name
sigisemptyset — check for empty signal set
Synopsis
#include <signal.h>
extern int sigisemptyset(const sigset_t *set);
Description
sigisemptyset checks for empty signal set. It returns a non-empty value if set is not empty.
sigorset
Name
sigorset — build a new signal set by combining the two input sets using logical OR
Synopsis
#include <signal.h>
extern int sigorset(sigset_t *set, const sigset_t *left, const sigset_t *right);
Description
sigorset is a signal function that builds a new signal set by combining the two input sets using logical OR.
sigreturn
Name
sigreturn — return from signal handler and cleanup stack frame
Synopsis
int sigreturn(unsigned long __unused);
Description
When the Linux kernel creates the stack frame for a signal handler, a call to sigreturn is inserted into the stack frame so that the the signal handler will call sigreturn upon return. This inserted call to sigreturn cleans up the stack so that the process can restart from where it was interrupted by the signal.
Return Value
sigreturn never returns.
Warning
sigreturn is used by the kernel to implement signal handlers. It should never be called directly. Better yet, the specific use of __unused varies depending on the architecture.
Files
/usr/src/linux/arch/i386/kernel/signal.c
/usr/src/linux/arch/alpha/kernel/entry.s
statfs
Name
statfs — (deprecated)
Synopsis
#include <sys/vfs.h>
int statfs(const char *path, (struct statfs *buf));
Description
statfs is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should call the statvfs interface.
statfs returns information about a mounted file system. path is the path name of any file within the mounted filesystem.
buf is a pointer to a statfs structure defined as follow: 
  struct statfs {
             long    f_type;      /* type of filesystem (see below) */
             long    f_bsize;     /* optimal transfer block size */
             long    f_blocks;    /* total data blocks in file system */
             long    f_bfree;     /* free blocks in fs */
             long    f_bavail;    /* free blocks avail to non-superuser */
             long    f_files;     /* total file nodes in file system */
             long    f_ffree;     /* free file nodes in fs */
             long    f_ffree;     /* free file nodes in fs */
             fsid_t  f_fsid;      /* file system id */
             long    f_namelen;   /* maximum length of filenames */
             long    f_spare[6];  /* spare for later */
  };
Fields that are undefined for a particular file system are set to 0.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
ENOTDIR
 	A component of the path prefix of path is not a directory.
ENAMETOOLONG
 	path is too long.
ENOENT 
 	The file referred to by path does not exist.
EACCES 
 	Search permission is denied for a component of the path prefix of path.
ELOOP
 	Too many symbolic links were encountered in translating path.
EFAULT 
 	buf or path points to an invalid address.
EIO 
 	An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
ENOMEM 
 	Insufficient kernel memory was available.
ENOSYS 
 	The filesystem path is on does not support statfs.
statfs64
Name
statfs64 — (deprecated)
Synopsis
#include <sys/statfs.h>
int statfs64(__const char *__file, (struct statfs64 *__buf));
Description
statfs64 is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should call the statvfs64 interface.
statfs64 returns information about a mounted file system.
statfs64 is the 64-bit version of statfs.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
stime
Name
stime — set time
Synopsis
#define _SVID_SOURCE  /* glibc needs this */
#include <time.h>
int stime(time_t *t);
Description
stime sets the system's idea of the time and date. Time, pointed to by t, is measured in seconds from 00:00:00 GMT January 1, 1970. stime may only be executed by the super user.
Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. On error, -1 is returned and the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
EPERM
 	The caller is not the super-user.
Notes
Under glibc2, time.h only provides a prototype when _SVID_SOURCE is defined.
stpcpy
Name
stpcpy — copy a string returning a pointer to its end
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
char *stpcpy(char *dest, const char *src);
Description
stpcpy copies the string pointed to by src (including the terminating \0 character) to the array pointed to by dest. The strings may not overlap, and the destination string dest must be large enough to receive the copy.
Return Value
stpcpy returns a pointer to the end of the string dest (that is, the address of the terminating NULL character) rather than the beginning.
Example
This program uses stpcpy to concatenate foo and bar to produce foobar, which it then prints. 
  #include <string.h>

  int
  main (void)
  {
    char *to = buffer;
    to = stpcpy (to, "foo");
    to = stpcpy (to, "bar");
    printf ("%s\n", buffer);
  }
stpncpy
Name
stpncpy — copy a fixed-size string, returning a pointer to its end
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
char *stpncpy(char *dest, const char *src, size_t n);
Description
stpncpy copies at most n characters from the string pointed to by src, including the terminating \0 character, to the array pointed to by dest. Exactly n characters are written at dest. If the length strlen(src) is smaller than n, the remaining characters in dest are filled with \0 characters. If the length strlen(src) is greater than or equal to n, dest will not be \0 terminated.
The strings may not overlap.
The programmer must ensure that there is room for at least n characters at dest.
Return Value
stpncpy returns a pointer to the terminating NULL in dest, or, if dest is not NULL-terminated, dest + n.
strcasestr
Name
strcasestr — locate a substring - ignores the case of both strings
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
char *strcasestr(const char *haystack, const char *needle);
Description
strcasestr is similar to strstr, but ignores the case of both strings.
strerror_r
Name
strerror_r — reentrant version of strerror
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
extern char *strerror_r(int errnum, char *buf, size_t buflen);
Description
strerror_r is a reentrant version of strerror. strerror_r returns a pointer to an error message corresponding to error number errnum. The returned pointer may point within the buffer buf (at most buflen bytes). 1 
Notes
1. 	Note the optional use of the buffer, unlike the strerror_r found in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3, in which the message is always copied into the supplied buffer. The return types also differ.
strfry
Name
strfry — randomize a string
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
char *strfry(char *string);
Description
strfry randomizes the contents of string by using rand(3) to randomly swap characters in the string. The result is an anagram of string.
Return Value
strfry returns a pointer to the randomized string.
strndup
Name
strndup — return a malloc'd copy of at most the specified number of bytes of a string 
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
extern char *strndup(const char *string, size_t n);
Description
strndup returns a malloc'd copy of at most n bytes of string. The resultant string is terminated even if no NULL terminator appears before STRING[N].
strnlen
Name
strnlen — determine the length of a fixed-size string
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
size_t strnlen(const char *s, size_t maxlen);
Description
strnlen returns the number of characters in the string s, not including the terminating \0 character, but at most maxlen. In doing this, strnlen looks only at the first maxlen characters at s and never beyond s + maxlen.
Return Value
strnlen returns strlen(s), if that is less than maxlen, or maxlen if there is no \0 character among the first maxlen characters pointed to by s.
strptime
Name
strptime — parse a time string
Description
strptime is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2 with differences as listed below.
Number of leading zeroes limited
The Single UNIX Specification, Version 2 specifies fields for which "leading zeros are permitted but not required"; however, applications must not expect to be able to supply more leading zeroes for these fields than would be implied by the range of the field. Implementations may choose to either match an input with excess leading zeroes, or treat this as a non-matching input. For example, %j has a range of 001 to 366, so 0, 00, 000, 001, and 045 are acceptable inputs, but inputs such as 0000, 0366 and the like are not.
Rationale
glibc developers consider it appropriate behavior to forbid excess leading zeroes. When trying to parse a given input against several format strings, forbidding excess leading zeroes could be helpful. For example, if one matches 0011-12-26 against %m-%d-%Y and then against %Y-%m-%d, it seems useful for the first match to fail, as it would be perverse to parse that date as November 12, year 26. The second pattern parses it as December 26, year 11.
The Single UNIX Specification is not explicit that an unlimited number of leading zeroes are required, although it may imply this. The LSB explicitly allows implementations to have either behavior. Future versions of this standard may require implementations to forbid excess leading zeroes.
strsep
Name
strsep — extract token from string
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
char *strsep(char **stringp, const char *delim);
Description
If stringp is NULL, strsep returns NULL and does nothing else. 
If stringp is non-NULL, strsep finds the first token in the stringp, where tokens are delimited by symbols in the string delim. This token is terminated with a \0 character (by overwriting the delimiter) and stringp is updated to point past the token. In case no delimiter was found, the token is taken to be the entire string stringp, and stringp is made NULL.
Return Value
strsep returns a pointer to the token, that is, it returns the original value of stringp.
Notes
strsep was introduced as a replacement for strtok, since the latter cannot handle empty fields. However, strtok conforms to ANSI-C and hence is more portable.
Bugs
strsep suffers from the same problems as strtok. In particular, strsep modifies the original string. Avoid it.
strsignal
Name
strsignal — return string describing signal
Synopsis
#define _GNU_SOURCE
#include <string.h>
char *strsignal(int sig);
extern const char * const sys_siglist[];
Description
strsignal returns a string describing the signal number sig. The string can only be used until the next call to strsignal.
The array sys_siglist holds the signal description strings indexed by signal number. strsignal should be used if possible instead of this array.
Return Value
strsignal returns the appropriate description string, or an unknown signal message if the signal number is invalid. On some systems (but not on Linux), a NULL pointer may be returned instead for an invalid signal number.
strtok_r
Name
strtok_r — extract tokens from strings
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
char *strtok_r(char *s, const char *delim, char **ptrptr);
Description
strtok_r parses the string s into tokens. 1 The first call to strtok_r should have s as its first argument. Subsequent calls should have the first argument set to NULL. Each call returns a pointer to the next token, or NULL when no more tokens are found.
If a token ends with a delimiter, this delimiting character is overwritten with a \0 and a pointer to the next character is saved for the next call to strtok_r. The delimiter string delim may be different for each call.
ptrptr is a user allocated char* pointer. It must be the same while parsing the same string.
Bugs
Never use this function. Note that: 
•	It modifies its first argument.
•	The identity of the delimiting character is lost.
•	It cannot be used on constant strings.
Return Value
strtok_r returns a pointer to the next token, or NULL if there are no more tokens.
Notes
1. 	A token is a nonempty string of characters not occurring in the string delim, followed by \0 or by a character occurring in delim.
strtoq
Name
strtoq — convert string value to a long or quad_t integer
Synopsis
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <limits.h>
quadt strtoq(const char *nptr, char **endptr, int base);
Description
strtoq converts the string nptr to a quadt value. The conversion is done according to the given base, which must be between 2 and 36 inclusive, or be the special value 0.
nptr may begin with an arbitrary amount of white space (as determined by isspace(3)), followed by a single optional + or - sign character. If base is 0 or 16, the string may then include a 0x prefix, and the number will be read in base 16; otherwise, a 0 base is taken as 10 (decimal), unless the next character is 0, in which case it is taken as 8 (octal).
The remainder of the string is converted to a long value in the obvious manner, stopping at the first character which is not a valid digit in the given base. (In bases above 10, the letter A in either upper or lower case represents 10, B represents 11, and so forth, with Z representing 35.)
Return Value
strtoq returns the result of the conversion, unless the value would underflow or overflow. If an underflow occurs, strtoq returns QUAD_MIN. If an overflow occurs, strtoq returns QUAD_MAX. In both cases, the global variable errno is set to ERANGE.
Errors
ERANGE
 	The given string was out of range; the value converted has been clamped.
strtouq
Name
strtouq — convert a string to an uquad_t
Synopsis
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <limits.h>
uquadt strtouq(const char *nptr, char **endptr, int base);
Description
strtouq converts the string nptr to a uquadt value. The conversion is done according to the given base, which must be between 2 and 36 inclusive, or be the special value 0.
nptr may begin with an arbitrary amount of white space (as determined by isspace(3)), followed by a single optional + or - sign character. If base is 0 or 16, the string may then include a 0x prefix, and the number will be read in base 16; otherwise, a 0 base is taken as 10 (decimal), unless the next character is 0, in which case it is taken as 8 (octal).
The remainder of the string is converted to an unsigned long value in the obvious manner, stopping at the end of the string or at the first character that does not produce a valid digit in the given base. (In bases above 10, the letter A in either upper or lower case represents 10, B represents 11, and so forth, with Z representing 35.)
Return Value
On success, strtouq returns either the result of the conversion or, if there was a leading minus sign, the negation of the result of the conversion, unless the original (non-negated) value would overflow. In the case of an overflow the function returns UQUAD_MAX and the global variable errno is set to ERANGE.
Errors
ERANGE
 	The given string was out of range; the value converted has been clamped.
strverscmp
Name
strverscmp — compare strings holding name and indices/version numbers
Synopsis
#include <string.h>
extern int strverscmp(const char *s1, const char *s2);
Description
strverscmp compares s1 and s2 as strings holding name and indices/version numbers.
system
Name
system — execute a shell command
Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>
int system(const char *string);
Description
system executes a command specified in string by calling /bin/sh -c string, and returns after the command has been completed. During execution of the command, SIGCHLD will be blocked, and SIGINT and SIGQUIT will be ignored.
Return Value
The value 127 returned if the execve call for /bin/sh fails, -1 if there was another error and the return code of the command otherwise.
If the value of string is NULL, system returns a non-ZERO value if the shell is available, and ZERO if not.
system does not affect the wait status of any other children.
Notes
The fact that system ignores interrupts is often not what a program wants. The Single UNIX Specification describes some of the consequences; an additional consequence is that a program calling system from a loop cannot be reliably interrupted. Many programs will want to use the exec(3) family of functions instead.
Do not use system from a program with suid or sgid privileges, because strange values for some environment variables might be used to subvert system integrity. Use the exec(3) family of functions instead, but not execlp(3) or execvp(3). system will not, in fact, work properly from programs with suid or sgid privileges on systems on which /bin/sh is bash version 2, since bash 2 drops privileges on startup. (Debian uses a modified bash which does not do this when invoked as sh.)
The check for the availability of /bin/sh is not actually performed; it is always assumed to be available. ISO C specifies the check, but POSIX.2 specifies that the return shall always be non-ZERO, since a system without the shell is not conforming, and it is this that is implemented.
It is possible for the shell command to return 127, so that code is not a sure indication that the execve call failed; check the global variable errno to make sure.
textdomain
Name
textdomain — set the current default message catalog
Synopsis
#include <libintl.h>
extern char *textdomain(const char *domainname);
Description
textdomain sets the current default message catalog to domainname, which remains valid across subsequent calls to setlocale, and gettext.
Return
On success, textdomain returns the currently selected domain. On error, a NULL pointer is returned.
If domainname is NULL, textdomain returns the current default.
If domainname is "", reset to the default of "messages". 
Errors
ENOMEM
 	The function may have failed if there was "insufficent memory available."
unlink
Name
unlink — remove a directory entry
Synopsis
int unlink(const char *path);
Description
unlink is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2, but with differences as listed below.
See also Additional behaviors: unlink/link on directory>.
May return EISDIR on directories
If path specifies a directory, the implementation may return EISDIR instead of EPERM as specified by Single UNIX Specification, Version 2. 1
Notes
1. 	The Linux kernel has deliberately chosen EISDIR for this case and does not expect to change (Al Viro, personal communication).
unsetenv
Name
unsetenv — delete an environment variable
Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>
void unsetenv(const char *name);
Description
unsetenv is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3.
vasprintf
Name
vasprintf — write formatted output to a string dynamically allocated with malloc and store the address of the string
Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
extern int vasprintf(char **restrict ptr, const char *restrict f, G_va_list arg);
Description
vasprintf writes formatted output to a string dynamically allocated with malloc, and stores the address of the string in ptr.
vdprintf
Name
vdprintf — write formatted output to a file descriptor
Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
extern int vdprintf(int fd, const char *restrict fmt, G_va_list arg);
Description
vdprintf writes formatted output to a file descriptor.
verrx
Name
verrx — display formatted error messages
Synopsis
#include <err.h>
void verrx(int eval, const char *fmt, valist args);
Description
verrx displays a formatted error message on the standard error output. The last component of the program name, a COLON character, and a SPACE are output. If fmt is not NULL, the formatted error message, a COLON, and a SPACE are output. The output is followed by a newline character.
verrx does not return, but exits with the value of eval.
vsyslog
Name
vsyslog — log to system log
Synopsis
void vsyslog(int priority, char *message, va_list arglist);
Description
vsyslog is identical to syslog as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, except that arglist (as defined by stdarg.h) replaces the variable number of arguments.
The caller is responsible for running va_end after calling vsyslog.
wait3
Name
wait3 — wait for child process
Description
wait3 is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2, but with differences as listed below.
Notes
Implementations need not support the functionality of WCONTINUED or WIFCONTINUED.
wait4
Name
wait4 — wait for process termination, BSD style
Synopsis
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/resource.h>
#include <sys/wait.h>
pid_t wait4(pid_t pid, int *status, int options, (struct rusage *rusage));
Description
wait4 suspends execution of the current process until a child (as specified by pid) has exited, or until a signal is delivered whose action is to terminate the current process or to call a signal handling function. If a child (as requested by pid) has already exited by the time of the call (a so-called "zombie" process), the function returns immediately. Any system resources used by the child are freed.
The value of pid can be one of:
< -1 
 	wait for any child process whose process group ID is equal to the absolute value of pid.
-1 
 	wait for any child process; this is equivalent to calling wait3.
0 
 	wait for any child process whose process group ID is equal to that of the calling process.
> 0 
 	wait for the child whose process ID is equal to the value of pid.
The value of options is a bitwise OR of zero or more of the following constants:
WNOHANG
 	return immediately if no child is there to be waited for.
WUNTRACED
 	return for children that are stopped, and whose status has not been reported.
If status is not NULL, wait4 stores status information in the location status. This status can be evaluated with the following macros: 1
WIFEXITED(status)
 	is non-ZERO if the child exited normally.
WEXITSTATUS(status)
 	evaluates to the least significant eight bits of the return code of the child that terminated, which may have been set as the argument to a call to exit or as the argument for a return statement in the main program. This macro can only be evaluated if WIFEXITED returned non-ZERO.
WIFSIGNALED(status)
 	returns true if the child process exited because of a signal that was not caught.
WTERMSIG(status)
 	returns the number of the signal that caused the child process to terminate. This macro can only be evaluated if WIFSIGNALED returned non-ZERO.
WIFSTOPPED(status)
 	returns true if the child process that caused the return is currently stopped; this is only possible if the call was done using WUNTRACED.
WSTOPSIG(status)
 	returns the number of the signal that caused the child to stop. This macro can only be evaluated if WIFSTOPPED returned non-ZERO.
If rusage is not NULL, the struct rusage (as defined in sys/resource.h) that it points to will be filled with accounting information. (See getrusage(2) for details.
Return Value
On success, the process ID of the child that exited is returned. On error, -1 is returned (in particular, when no unwaited-for child processes of the specified kind exist), or 0 if WNOHANG was used and no child was available yet. In the latter two cases, the global variable errno is set appropriately.
Errors
ECHILD 
 	No unwaited-for child process as specified does exist.
ERESTARTSYS
 	A WNOHANG was not set and an unblocked signal or a SIGCHILD was caught. This error is returned by the system call. The library interface is not allowed to return ERESTARTSYS, but will return EINTR.
Notes
1. 	These macros take the stat buffer (an int) as an argument -- not a pointer to the buffer!
waitid
Name
waitid — (deprecated)
Description
waitid is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should call the waitpid interface.
waitid is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2.
waitpid
Name
waitpid — wait for child process
Description
waitpid is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, but with differences as listed below.
Need not support WCONTINUED
Implementations need not support the functionality of WCONTINUED or WIFCONTINUED.
warn
Name
warn — formatted error messages
Synopsis
#include <err.h>
void warn(const char *fmt ...);
Description
warn displays a formatted error message on the standard error output. The last component of the program name, a COLON character, and a SPACE are output. If fmt is not NULL, the formatted error message, a COLON, and SPACE are output. The error message string affiliated with the current value of the global variable errno is output. The output is followed by a newline character.
warnx
Name
warnx — formatted error messages
Synopsis
#include <err.h>
void warnx(const char *fmt ...);
Description
warnx displays a formatted error message on the standard error output. The last component of the program name, a COLON character, and a SPACE are output. If fmt is not NULL, the formatted error message, a COLON, and SPACE are output. The output is followed by a newline character.
wcpcpy
Name
wcpcpy — copy a wide character string, returning a pointer to its end
Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wcpcpy(wchar_t *dest, const wchar_t *src);
Description
wcpcpy is the wide-character equivalent of stpcpy. It copies the wide character string src, including the terminating L'\0' character, to the array dest.
The strings may not overlap.
The programmer must ensure that there is room for at least wcslen(src)+1 wide characters at dest.
Return Value
wcpcpy returns a pointer to the end of the wide-character string dest, that is, a pointer to the terminating L'\0' character.
wcpncpy
Name
wcpncpy — copy a fixed-size string of wide characters, returning a pointer to its end
Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wcpncpy(wchar_t *dest, const wchar_t *src, size_t n);
Description
wcpncpy is the wide-character equivalent of stpncpy. It copies at most n wide characters from the wide-character string src, including the terminating L'\0' character, to the array dest. Exactly n wide characters are written at dest. If the length wcslen(src) is smaller than n, the remaining wide characters in the array dest are filled with L'\0' characters. If the length wcslen(src) is greater than or equal to n, the string dest will not be L'\0' terminated.
The strings may not overlap.
The programmer must ensure that there is room for at least n wide characters at dest.
Return Value
wcpncpy returns a pointer to the last wide character written, i.e., dest + n - 1.
wcscasecmp
Name
wcscasecmp — compare two wide-character strings, ignoring case
Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>
int wcscasecmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
Description
wcscasecmp is the wide-character equivalent of strcasecmp. It compares the wide-character string s1 and the wide-character string s2, ignoring case differences (towupper, towlower).
Return Value
wcscasecmp returns 0 if the wide-character strings s1 and s2 are equal except for case distinctions. It returns a positive integer if s1 is greater than s2, ignoring case. It returns a negative integer if s1 is smaller than s2, ignoring case.
Notes
The behavior of wcscasecmp depends upon the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
wcsdup
Name
wcsdup — duplicate a wide-character string
Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wcsdup(const wchar_t *s);
Description
wcsdup is the wide-character equivalent of strdup. It allocates and returns a new wide-character string whose initial contents is a duplicate of the wide-character string s.
Memory for the new wide-character string is obtained with malloc(3), and can be freed with free(3).
Return Value
wcsdup returns a pointer to the new wide-character string, or NULL if sufficient memory was not available.
wcsncasecmp
Name
wcsncasecmp — compare two fixed-size wide-character strings, ignoring case
Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

int wcsncasecmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n);
Description
wcsncasecmp is the wide-character equivalent of strncasecmp. It compares the wide-character string s1 and the wide-character string s2, but at most n wide characters from each string, ignoring case differences (towupper, towlower).
Return Value
wcscasecmp returns 0 if the wide-character strings s1 and s2, truncated to at most length n, are equal except for case distinctions. It returns a positive integer if truncated s1 is greater than truncated s2, ignoring case. It returns a negative integer if truncated s1 is smaller than truncated s2, ignoring case.
Notes
The behavior of wcsncasecmp depends upon the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
wcsnlen
Name
wcsnlen — determine the length of a fixed-size wide-character string
Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>
size_t wcsnlen(const wchar_t *s, size_t maxlen);
Description
wcsnlen is the wide-character equivalent of strnlen. It returns the number of wide-characters in the string s, not including the terminating L'\0' character, but at most maxlen. In doing this, wcsnlen looks only at the first maxlen wide-characters at s and never beyond s + maxlen.
Return Value
wcsnlen returns wcslen(s) if that is less than maxlen, or maxlen if there is no L'\0' character among the first maxlen wide characters pointed to by s.
Notes
The behavior of wcsncasecmp depends on the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
wcsnrtombs
Name
wcsnrtombs — convert a wide character string to a multi-byte string
Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>
size_t wcsnrtombs(char *dest, const wchar_t **src, size_t nwc, size_t len, mbstate_t *ps);
Description
wcsnrtombs is like wcsrtombs, except that the number of wide characters to be converted, starting at src, is limited to nwc.
If dest is not a NULL pointer, wcsnrtombs converts at most nwc wide characters from the wide-character string src to a multibyte string starting at dest. At most len bytes are written to dest. The state ps is updated.
The conversion is effectively performed by repeatedly calling: 
wcrtomb(dest, *src, ps)
as long as this call succeeds, and then incrementing dest by the number of bytes written and src by 1.
The conversion can stop for three reasons:
•	A wide character has been encountered that cannot be represented as a multibyte sequence (according to the current locale). In this case src is left pointing to the invalid wide character, (size_t)(-1) is returned, and errno is set to EILSEQ.
•	nws wide characters have been converted without encountering a L'\0', or the length limit forces a stop. In this case, src is left pointing to the next wide character to be converted, and the number bytes written to dest is returned.
•	The wide-character string has been completely converted, including the terminating L'\0' (which has the side effect of bringing back ps to the initial state). In this case, src is set to NULL, and the number of bytes written to dest, excluding the terminating '\0' byte, is returned.
If dest is NULL, len is ignored, and the conversion proceeds as above, except that the converted bytes are not written out to memory, and that no destination length limit exists.
In both of the above cases, if ps is a NULL pointer, a static anonymous state only known to wcsnrtombs is used instead.
The programmer must ensure that there is room for at least len bytes at dest.
Return Value
wcsnrtombs returns the number of bytes that make up the converted part of multibyte sequence, not including the terminating NULL byte. If a wide character was encountered which could not be converted, (size_t)(-1) is returned, and the global variable errno set to EILSEQ.
Notes
The behavior of wcsnrtombs depends on the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
Passing NULL as ps is not multi-thread safe.
wcstoq
Name
wcstoq — convert initial portion of wide string NPTR to long int representation
Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>
extern long long int wcstoq(const wchar_t *restrict nptr, wchar_t **restrict endptr, int base);
Description
wcstoq converts the initial portion of the wide string nptr to long int representation.
wcstouq
Name
wcstouq — convert initial portion of wide string NPTR to unsigned long long int representation
Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>
extern unsigned long long int wcstouq(const wchar_t *restrict nptr, wchar_t **restrict endptr, int base);
Description
wcstouq converts the initial portion of the wide string nptr to unsigned long long int representation.
xdr_u_int
Name
xdr_u_int — library routines for external data representation
Synopsis
int xdr_u_int(XDR * xdrs, unsigned int * up);
Description
xdr_u_int is a filter primitive that translates between C unsigned integers and their external representations.
Return Value
On success, 1 is returned. On error, 0 is returned.
13.4. Interfaces for libm
Table 13-31. libm Definition
Library:	libm	
SONAME:	See archLSB.	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
ISO/IEC 9899: 1999, Programming Languages --C22	
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)23	

13.4.1. Math
Table 13-32. libm - Math Function Interfaces
acos23	cexp22	expf22	jnf22	remquof22	
acosf22	cexpf22	expl22	jnl22	remquol22	
acosh23	cexpl22	expm123	ldexp23	rint23	
acoshf22	cimag22	fabs23	ldexpf22	rintf22	
acoshl22	cimagf22	fabsf22	ldexpl22	rintl22	
acosl22	cimagl22	fabsl22	lgamma23	round22	
asin23	clog22	fdim22	lgamma_r22	roundf22	
asinf22	clog1022	fdimf22	lgammaf22	roundl22	
asinh23	clog10f22	fdiml22	lgammaf_r22	scalb23	
asinhf22	clog10l22	feclearexcept22	lgammal22	scalbf22	
asinhl22	clogf22	fegetenv22	lgammal_r22	scalbl22	
asinl22	clogl22	fegetexceptflag22	llrint22	scalbln22	
atan23	conj22	fegetround22	llrintf22	scalblnf22	
atan223	conjf22	feholdexcept22	llrintl22	scalblnl22	
atan2f22	conjl22	feraiseexcept22	llround22	scalbn22	
atan2l22	copysign22	fesetenv22	llroundf22	scalbnf22	
atanf22	copysignf22	fesetexceptflag22	llroundl22	scalbnl22	
atanh23	copysignl22	fesetround22	log23	significand22	
atanhf22	cos23	fetestexcept22	log1023	significandf22	
atanhl22	cosf22	feupdateenv22	log10f22	significandl22	
atanl22	cosh23	finite23	log10l22	sin23	
cabs23	coshf22	finitef22	log1p23	sincos22	
cabsf22	coshl22	finitel22	logb23	sincosf22	
cabsl22	cosl22	floor23	logf22	sincosl22	
cacos22	cpow22	floorf22	logl22	sinf22	
cacosf22	cpowf22	floorl22	lrint22	sinh23	
cacosh22	cpowl22	fma22	lrintf22	sinhf22	
cacoshf22	cproj22	fmaf22	lrintl22	sinhl22	
cacoshl22	cprojf22	fmal22	lround22	sinl22	
cacosl22	cprojl22	fmax22	lroundf22	sqrt23	
carg22	creal22	fmaxf22	lroundl22	sqrtf22	
cargf22	crealf22	fmaxl22	matherr22	sqrtl22	
cargl22	creall22	fmin22	modf23	tan23	
casin22	csin22	fminf22	modff22	tanf22	
casinf22	csinf22	fminl22	modfl22	tanh23	
casinh22	csinh22	fmod23	nan22	tanhf22	
casinhf22	csinhf22	fmodf22	nanf22	tanhl22	
casinhl22	csinhl22	fmodl22	nanl22	tanl22	
casinl22	csinl22	frexp23	nearbyint22	tgamma22	
catan22	csqrt22	frexpf22	nearbyintf22	tgammaf22	
catanf22	csqrtf22	frexpl22	nearbyintl22	tgammal22	
catanh22	csqrtl22	gamma23	nextafter23	trunc22	
catanhf22	ctan22	gammaf22	nextafterf22	truncf22	
catanhl22	ctanf22	gammal22	nextafterl22	truncl22	
catanl22	ctanh22	hypot23	nexttoward22	y023	
cbrt23	ctanhf22	hypotf22	nexttowardf22	y0f22	
cbrtf22	ctanhl22	hypotl22	nexttowardl22	y0l22	
cbrtl22	ctanl22	ilogb23	pow22	y123	
ccos22	dremf22	ilogbf22	pow1022	y1f22	
ccosf22	dreml22	ilogbl22	pow10f22	y1l22	
ccosh22	erf23	j023	pow10l22	yn23	
ccoshf22	erfc23	j0f22	powf22	ynf22	
ccoshl22	erfcf22	j0l22	powl22	ynl22	
ccosl22	erfcl22	j123	remainder23	
	
ceil23	erff22	j1f22	remainderf22	
	
ceilf22	erfl22	j1l22	remainderl22	
	
ceill22	exp23	jn23	remquo22	

Table 13-33. libm - Math Data Interfaces
signgam23	

	

13.5. Data Definitions for libm
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
13.5.1. math.h

#define HUGE_VAL        0x7FF00000UL
#define DOMAIN  1
#define SING    2

struct exception
{
  int type;
  char *name;
  double arg1;
  double arg2;
  double retval;
}
 ;
#define M_1_PI  0.31830988618379067154
#define M_LOG10E        0.43429448190325182765
#define M_2_PI  0.63661977236758134308
#define M_LN2   0.69314718055994530942
#define M_SQRT1_2       0.70710678118654752440
#define M_PI_4  0.78539816339744830962
#define M_2_SQRTPI      1.12837916709551257390
#define M_SQRT2 1.41421356237309504880
#define M_LOG2E 1.4426950408889634074
#define M_PI_2  1.57079632679489661923
#define M_LN10  2.30258509299404568402
#define M_E     2.7182818284590452354
#define M_PI    3.14159265358979323846
13.6. Interfaces for libpthread
Table 13-34. libpthread Definition
Library:	libpthread	
SONAME:	libpthread.so.0	

LSB systems support POSIX threads with the following exceptions. This list is intended to match the behavior of historical Linux implementations. Applications should be written to deal with either POSIX threads or the thread behaviors described here. 
•	POSIX specifies a concept of per-process rather than per-thread signals. The LSB does not require this behavior; traditional Linux implementations have had per-thread signals only. A related issue is that applications cannot rely on getpid() returning the same value in different threads.
•	Note: one implication of per-thread signals is that a core dump (for example) may not stop all threads in a given process. This may be an issue when designing ways to stop/start applications.
•	Applications which create child processes (using fork() and the like) must then wait for them (using waitpid() family of functions) in the same thread as they created them. Note that coding applications this way will work both with full POSIX threads and legacy Linux thread implementations.
•	POSIX specifies that changing the user or group id instantly affects the behavior of all threads. This behavior is not specified; applications must use their own lock if they need this behavior. Rationale: it seems unnecessary and it is a performance hit (an SMP kernel must lock the user id).
•	Although this standard doesn't have a way to list processes (/proc or "ps" command line isn't in, right?), it is our intention to not specify one way or the other whether multiple threads appear as separate processes or as a single process.
•	Applications cannot rely on resource limits (getrusage and setrusage) being maintained per-process rather than per-thread.
•	Applications must disconnect from the controlling tty before calling pthread_create.
•	times() doesn't account for all threads, just the caller.
•	Applications must not call pthread_cancel if they call any system libraries (most notably X Window System libraries), as system libraries are not guaranteed to be thread safe. Likewise, for such libraries, only one thread per process may call them.
•	Applications cannot rely on fcntl/lockf locks being visible per-process rather than per-thread. Likewise for mandatory file locks.
•	Threaded applications cannot use SIGUSR1 or SIGUSR2.
The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
Linux Standard Base24	
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)25	

13.6.1. Posix Threads
Table 13-35. libpthread - Posix Threads Function Interfaces
pthread_attr_destroy25	pthread_attr_setstackaddr25	pthread_getspecific25	pthread_once25	pthread_setcanceltype25	
pthread_attr_getdetachstate25	pthread_attr_setstacksize25	pthread_join25	pthread_rwlock_destroy25	pthread_setconcurrency25	
pthread_attr_getguardsize25	pthread_cancel25	pthread_key_create25	pthread_rwlock_init25	pthread_setschedparam25	
pthread_attr_getinheritsched25	pthread_cond_broadcast25	pthread_key_delete25	pthread_rwlock_rdlock25	pthread_setspecific25	
pthread_attr_getschedparam25	pthread_cond_destroy25	pthread_kill25	pthread_rwlock_timedrdlock25	pthread_sigmask25	
pthread_attr_getschedpolicy25	pthread_cond_init25	pthread_mutex_destroy25	pthread_rwlock_timedwrlock25	pthread_testcancel25	
pthread_attr_getscope25	pthread_cond_signal25	pthread_mutex_init25	pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock25	sem_close25	
pthread_attr_getstackaddr25	pthread_cond_timedwait25	pthread_mutex_lock25	pthread_rwlock_trywrlock25	sem_destroy25	
pthread_attr_getstacksize25	pthread_cond_wait25	pthread_mutex_trylock25	pthread_rwlock_unlock25	sem_getvalue25	
pthread_attr_init25	pthread_condattr_destroy25	pthread_mutex_unlock25	pthread_rwlock_wrlock25	sem_init25	
pthread_attr_setdetachstate25	pthread_condattr_init25	pthread_mutexattr_destroy25	pthread_rwlockattr_destroy25	sem_open25	
pthread_attr_setguardsize25	pthread_create25	pthread_mutexattr_getpshared25	pthread_rwlockattr_getpshared25	sem_post25	
pthread_attr_setinheritsched25	pthread_detach25	pthread_mutexattr_gettype25	pthread_rwlockattr_init25	sem_timedwait24	
pthread_attr_setschedparam25	pthread_equal25	pthread_mutexattr_init25	pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared25	sem_trywait25	
pthread_attr_setschedpolicy25	pthread_exit25	pthread_mutexattr_setpshared25	pthread_self25	sem_unlink25	
pthread_attr_setscope25	pthread_getschedparam25	pthread_mutexattr_settype25	pthread_setcancelstate25	sem_wait25	

13.7. Data Definitions for libpthread
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
13.7.1. pthread.h

#define PTHREAD_MUTEX_DEFAULT   1
#define PTHREAD_MUTEX_NORMAL    1
#define PTHREAD_MUTEX_TIMED_NP  1
#define PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE 2
#define PTHREAD_RWLOCK_DEFAULT_NP       2
#define PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK        3
#define __LOCK_INITIALIZER      { 0, 0 }
#define PTHREAD_RWLOCK_INITIALIZER      { __LOCK_INITIALIZER, 0, NULL, NULL, NULL,PTHREAD_RWLOCK_DEFAULT_NP, PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE }
#define PTHREAD_MUTEX_INITIALIZER       {0,0,0,PTHREAD_MUTEX_TIMED_NP,__LOCK_INITIALIZER}
#define PTHREAD_COND_INITIALIZER        {__LOCK_INITIALIZER,0}

typedef unsigned int pthread_key_t;
typedef int pthread_once_t;

typedef unsigned long pthread_t;
struct _pthread_fastlock
{
  long __status;
  int __spinlock;
}
 ;

typedef struct _pthread_descr_struct *_pthread_descr;

typedef struct
{
  int __m_reserved;
  int __m_count;
  _pthread_descr __m_owner;
  int __m_kind;
  struct _pthread_fastlock __m_lock;
}
pthread_mutex_t;
typedef struct
{
  int __mutexkind;
}
pthread_mutexattr_t;

typedef struct
{
  int __detachstate;
  int __schedpolicy;
  struct sched_param __schedparam;
  int __inheritsched;
  int __scope;
  size_t __guardsize;
  int __stackaddr_set;
  void *__stackaddr;
  unsigned long __stacksize;
}
pthread_attr_t;

typedef struct
{
  struct _pthread_fastlock lock;
  _pthread_descr wait_chain;
}
pthread_cond_t;
typedef struct
{
  int __dummy;
}
pthread_condattr_t;

typedef struct _pthread_rwlock_t
{
  struct _pthread_fastlock __rw_lock;
  int __rw_readers;
  _pthread_descr __rw_writer;
  _pthread_descr __rw_read_waiting;
  _pthread_descr __rw_write_waiting;
  int __rw_kind;
  int __rw_pshared;
}
pthread_rwlock_t;
typedef struct
{
  int __lockkind;
  int __pshared;
}
pthread_rwlockattr_t;

#define PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE 0
#define PTHREAD_INHERIT_SCHED   0
#define PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT       0
#define PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE 0
#define PTHREAD_SCOPE_SYSTEM    0
#define PTHREAD_CREATE_DETACHED 1
#define PTHREAD_EXPLICIT_SCHED  1
#define PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED  1
#define PTHREAD_SCOPE_PROCESS   1

#define PTHREAD_CANCELED        ((void*)-1)
#define PTHREAD_CANCEL_DEFERRED 0
#define PTHREAD_CANCEL_ENABLE   0
#define PTHREAD_CANCEL_ASYNCHRONOUS     1
#define PTHREAD_CANCEL_DISABLE  1
13.7.2. semaphore.h

typedef struct
{
  struct _pthread_fastlock __sem_lock;
  int __sem_value;
  _pthread_descr __sem_waiting;
}
sem_t;
#define SEM_FAILED      ((sem_t*)0)

#define SEM_VALUE_MAX   ((int)((~0u)>>1))
13.8. Interfaces Definitions for libpthread
sem_timedwait
Name
sem_timedwait — operation on semaphore
Synopsis
#include <semaphore.h>
int sem_timedwait(sem_t *__restrict __sem, (__const struct timespec *__restrict __abstime));
Description
sem_timedwait waits for semaphore object SEM being posted. It is a new function from IEEE Std. 1003.1-200x that is similar to sem_wait but waits only until ABSTIME.
13.9. Interfaces for libgcc_s
Table 13-36. libgcc_s Definition
Library:	libgcc_s	
SONAME:	libgcc_s.so.1	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
Linux Standard Base26	

13.9.1. Unwind Library
Table 13-37. libgcc_s - Unwind Library Function Interfaces
_Unwind_DeleteException(GCC_3.0)26	_Unwind_GetDataRelBase(GCC_3.0)26	_Unwind_GetLanguageSpecificData(GCC_3.0)26	_Unwind_RaiseException(GCC_3.0)26	_Unwind_SetIP(GCC_3.0)26	
_Unwind_Find_FDE(GCC_3.0)26	_Unwind_GetGR(GCC_3.0)26	_Unwind_GetRegionStart(GCC_3.0)26	_Unwind_Resume(GCC_3.0)26	
	
_Unwind_ForcedUnwind(GCC_3.0)26	_Unwind_GetIP(GCC_3.0)26	_Unwind_GetTextRelBase(GCC_3.0)26	_Unwind_SetGR(GCC_3.0)26	

13.10. Data Definitions for libgcc_s
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
13.10.1. unwind.h

struct dwarf_eh_base
{
  void *tbase;
  void *dbase;
  void *func;
}
 ;
struct _Unwind_Context;

typedef unsigned int _Unwind_Ptr;
typedef unsigned int _Unwind_Word;

typedef enum
{
  _URC_NO_REASON, _URC_FOREIGN_EXCEPTION_CAUGHT = 1, _URC_FATAL_PHASE2_ERROR =
    2, _URC_FATAL_PHASE1_ERROR = 3, _URC_NORMAL_STOP = 4, _URC_END_OF_STACK =
    5, _URC_HANDLER_FOUND = 6, _URC_INSTALL_CONTEXT =
    7, _URC_CONTINUE_UNWIND = 8
}
_Unwind_Reason_Code;

struct _Unwind_Exception
{
  _Unwind_Exception_Class;
  _Unwind_Exception_Cleanup_Fn;
  _Unwind_Word;
  _Unwind_Word;
}
 ;
#define _UA_SEARCH_PHASE        1
#define _UA_END_OF_STACK        16
#define _UA_CLEANUP_PHASE       2
#define _UA_HANDLER_FRAME       4
#define _UA_FORCE_UNWIND        8
13.11. Interfaces Definitions for libgcc_s
_Unwind_DeleteException
Name
_Unwind_DeleteException — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
void _Unwind_DeleteException((struct _Unwind_Exception *object));
Description
_Unwind_DeleteException deletes the given exception object. If a given runtime resumes normal execution after catching a foreign exception, it will not know how to delete that exception. Such an exception will be deleted by calling _Unwind_DeleteException. This is a convenience function that calls the function pointed to by the exception_cleanup field of the exception header.
_Unwind_Find_FDE
Name
_Unwind_Find_FDE — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
fde * _Unwind_Find_FDE(void *pc, (struct dwarf_eh_bases *bases));
Description
_Unwind_Find_FDE looks for the object containing pc, then inserts into bases.
_Unwind_ForcedUnwind
Name
_Unwind_ForcedUnwind — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
_Unwind_Reason_Code _Unwind_ForcedUnwind((struct _Unwind_Exception *object), _Unwind_Stop_Fn stop, void *stop_parameter);
Description
_Unwind_ForcedUnwind raises an exception for forced unwinding, passing along the given exception object, which should have its exception_class and exception_cleanup fields set. The exception object has been allocated by the language-specific runtime, and has a language-specific format, except that it must contain an _Unwind_Exception struct.
Forced unwinding is a single-phase process. stop and stop_parameter control the termination of the unwind process instead of the usual personality routine query. stop is called for each unwind frame, with the parameteres described for the usual personality routine below, plus an additional stop_parameter.
Return Value
When stop identifies the destination frame, it transfers control to the user code as appropriate without returning, normally after calling _Unwind_DeleteException. If not, then it should return an _Unwind_Reason_Code value.
If stop returns any reason code other than _URC_NO_REASON, then the stack state is indeterminate from the point of view of the caller of _Unwind_ForcedUnwind. Rather than attempt to return, therefore, the unwind library should use the exception_cleanup entry in the exception, and then call abort.
_URC_NO_REASON
 	This is not the destination from. The unwind runtime will call frame's personality routine with the _UA_FORCE_UNWIND and _UA_CLEANUP_PHASE flag set in actions, and then unwind to the next frame and call the stop function again.
_URC_END_OF_STACK
 	In order to allow _Unwind_ForcedUnwind to perform special processing when it reaches the end of the stack, the unwind runtime will call it after the last frame is rejected, with a NULL stack pointer in the context, and the stop function must catch this condition. It may return this code if it cannot handle end-of-stack.
_URC_FATAL_PHASE2_ERROR
 	The stop function may return this code for other fatal conditions like stack corruption.
_Unwind_GetDataRelBase
Name
_Unwind_GetDataRelBase — private IA64 C++ error handling method
Synopsis
_Unwind_Ptr _Unwind_GetDataRelBase((struct _Unwind_Context *context));
Description
_Unwind_GetDataRelBase returns the global pointer in register one for context.
_Unwind_GetGR
Name
_Unwind_GetGR — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
_Unwind_Word _Unwind_GetGR((struct _Unwind_Context *context), int index);
Description
_Unwind_GetGR returns data at index found in context. The register is identified by its index: 0 to 31 are for the fixed registers, and 32 to 127 are for the stacked registers.
During the two phases of unwinding, only GR1 has a guaranteed value, which is the global pointer of the frame referenced by the unwind context. If the register has its NAT bit set, the behavior is unspecified.
_Unwind_GetIP
Name
_Unwind_GetIP — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
_Unwind_Ptr _Unwind_GetIP((struct _Unwind_Context *context));
Description
_Unwind_GetIP returns the instruction pointer value for the routine identified by the unwind context.
_Unwind_GetLanguageSpecificData
Name
_Unwind_GetLanguageSpecificData — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
_Unwind_Ptr _Unwind_GetLanguageSpecificData((struct _Unwind_Context *context), uint value);
Description
_Unwind_GetLanguageSpecificData returns the address of the language specific data area for the current stack frame.
_Unwind_GetRegionStart
Name
_Unwind_GetRegionStart — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
_Unwind_Ptr _Unwind_GetRegionStart((struct _Unwind_Context *context));
Description
_Unwind_GetRegionStart routine returns the address (i.e., 0) of the beginning of the procedure or code fragment described by the current unwind descriptor block.
_Unwind_GetTextRelBase
Name
_Unwind_GetTextRelBase — private IA64 C++ error handling method
Synopsis
_Unwind_Ptr _Unwind_GetTextRelBase((struct _Unwind_Context *context));
Description
_Unwind_GetTextRelBase calls the abort method, then returns.
_Unwind_RaiseException
Name
_Unwind_RaiseException — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
_Unwind_Reason_Code _Unwind_RaiseException((struct _Unwind_Exception *object));
Description
_Unwind_RaiseException raises an exception, passing along the given exception object, which should have its exception_class and exception_cleanup fields set. The exception object has been allocated by the language-specific runtime, and has a language-specific format, exception that it must contain an _Unwind_Exception.
Return Value
_Unwind_RaiseException does not return unless an error condition is found. If an error condition occurs, an _Unwind_Reason_Code is returnd:
_URC_END_OF_STACK
 	The unwinder encountered the end of the stack during phase one without finding a handler. The unwind runtime will not have modified the stack. The C++ runtime will normally call uncaught_exception in this case.
_URC_FATAL_PHASE1_ERROR
 	The unwinder encountered an unexpected error during phase one, because of something like stack corruption. The unwind runtime will not have modified the stack. The C++ runtime will normally call terminate in this case.
_URC_FATAL_PHASE2_ERROR
 	The unwinder encountered an unexpected error during phase two. This is usually a throw, which will call terminate.
_Unwind_Resume
Name
_Unwind_Resume — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
void _Unwind_Resume((struct _Unwind_Exception *object));
Description
_Unwind_Resume resumes propagation of an existing exception object. A call to this routine is inserted as the end of a landing pad that performs cleanup, but does not resume normal execution. It causes unwinding to proceed further.
_Unwind_SetGR
Name
_Unwind_SetGR — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
void _Unwind_SetGR((struct _Unwind_Context *context), int index, uint value);
Description
_Unwind_SetGR sets the value of the register indexed for the routine identified by the unwind context.
_Unwind_SetIP
Name
_Unwind_SetIP — private C++ error handling method
Synopsis
void _Unwind_SetIP((struct _Unwind_Context *context), uint value);
Description
_Unwind_SetIP sets the value of the instruction pointer for the routine identified by the unwind context
13.12. Interfaces for libdl
Table 13-38. libdl Definition
Library:	libdl	
SONAME:	libdl.so.2	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
Linux Standard Base27	
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)28	

13.12.1. Dynamic Loader
Table 13-39. libdl - Dynamic Loader Function Interfaces
dladdr(GLIBC_2.0)27	dlclose(GLIBC_2.0)28	dlerror(GLIBC_2.0)28	dlopen(GLIBC_2.0)28	dlsym(GLIBC_2.0)28	

13.13. Data Definitions for libdl
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
13.13.1. dlfcn.h

#define RTLD_LOCAL      0
#define RTLD_LAZY       0x00001
#define RTLD_NOW        0x00002
#define RTLD_GLOBAL     0x00100

typedef struct
{
  char *dli_fname;
  void *dli_fbase;
  char *dli_sname;
  void *dli_saddr;
}
Dl_info;
13.14. Interfaces Definitions for libdl
dladdr
Name
dladdr — library routine for dynamic linking of object files
Synopsis
cc ... -ldl ...

#include <dlfcn.h>

typedef struct {
             const char  *dli_fname;
             void        *dli_fbase;
             const char  *dli_sname;
             void        *dli_saddr;
} Dl_info;
int dladdr(void *address, Dlinfo *dlip);
Description
dladdr implements the System V dynamic linking routines.
Return Value
dladdr is the inverse of dlsym. If address is successfully located inside a module, dladdr returns a non-ZERO value, otherwise, it returns a 0. On success, dladdr fills in the fields of dlip as follows:
dli_fname
 	the pathname of the module
dli_fbase 
 	the base address of the module
dli_sname 
 	the name of the highest addressed symbol whose address precedes the given address 
dli_saddr 
 	the address of that symbol
Shared objects must be linked using the -shared option to the linker ld(1). The linker flag -rpath may be used to add a directory to the default search path for shared objects and shared libraries. The linker flag -E or the C compiler flag -rdynamic should be used to cause the application to export its symbols to the shared objects.
Environment
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
 	directory search-path for object files
13.15. Interfaces for libcrypt
Table 13-40. libcrypt Definition
Library:	libcrypt	
SONAME:	libcrypt.so.1	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)29	

13.15.1. Encryption
Table 13-41. libcrypt - Encryption Function Interfaces
crypt(GLIBC_2.0)29	encrypt(GLIBC_2.0)29	setkey(GLIBC_2.0)29	

13.16. Data Definitions for libcrypt
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
13.17. Interfaces for libpam
Table 13-42. libpam Definition
Library:	libpam	
SONAME:	libpam.so.0	

A single service name, other, must always be present. The behavior of this service shall be determined by the system administrator. Additional service names may also exist. 30
The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
Linux Standard Base31	

13.17.1. Pluggable Authentication API
Table 13-43. libpam - Pluggable Authentication API Function Interfaces
pam_acct_mgmt31	pam_close_session31	pam_get_item31	pam_set_item31	pam_strerror31	
pam_authenticate31	pam_end31	pam_getenvlist31	pam_setcred31	
	
pam_chauthtok31	pam_fail_delay31	pam_open_session31	pam_start31	

13.18. Data Definitions for libpam
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
13.18.1. security/pam_appl.h

typedef struct pam_handle pam_handle_t;
struct pam_message
{
  int msg_style;
  const char *msg;
}
 ;
struct pam_response
{
  char *resp;
  int resp_retcode;
}
 ;

struct pam_conv
{
  int (*conv) (int num_msg, const struct pam_message * *msg,
               struct pam_response * *resp, void *appdata_ptr);
  void *appdata_ptr;
}
 ;
#define PAM_PROMPT_ECHO_OFF     1
#define PAM_PROMPT_ECHO_ON      2
#define PAM_ERROR_MSG   3
#define PAM_TEXT_INFO   4

#define PAM_SERVICE     1
#define PAM_USER        2
#define PAM_TTY 3
#define PAM_RHOST       4
#define PAM_CONV        5
#define PAM_RUSER       8
#define PAM_USER_PROMPT 9

#define PAM_SUCCESS     0
#define PAM_OPEN_ERR    1
#define PAM_USER_UNKNOWN        10
#define PAM_MAXTRIES    11
#define PAM_NEW_AUTHTOK_REQD    12
#define PAM_ACCT_EXPIRED        13
#define PAM_SESSION_ERR 14
#define PAM_CRED_UNAVAIL        15
#define PAM_CRED_EXPIRED        16
#define PAM_CRED_ERR    17
#define PAM_CONV_ERR    19
#define PAM_SYMBOL_ERR  2
#define PAM_AUTHTOK_ERR 20
#define PAM_AUTHTOK_RECOVER_ERR 21
#define PAM_AUTHTOK_LOCK_BUSY   22
#define PAM_AUTHTOK_DISABLE_AGING       23
#define PAM_TRY_AGAIN   24
#define PAM_ABORT       26
#define PAM_AUTHTOK_EXPIRED     27
#define PAM_BAD_ITEM    29
#define PAM_SERVICE_ERR 3
#define PAM_SYSTEM_ERR  4
#define PAM_BUF_ERR     5
#define PAM_PERM_DENIED 6
#define PAM_AUTH_ERR    7
#define PAM_CRED_INSUFFICIENT   8
#define PAM_AUTHINFO_UNAVAIL    9

#define PAM_DISALLOW_NULL_AUTHTOK       0x0001U
#define PAM_ESTABLISH_CRED      0x0002U
#define PAM_DELETE_CRED 0x0004U
#define PAM_REINITIALIZE_CRED   0x0008U
#define PAM_REFRESH_CRED        0x0010U
#define PAM_CHANGE_EXPIRED_AUTHTOK      0x0020U
#define PAM_SILENT      0x8000U
13.19. Interfaces Definitions for libpam
pam_acct_mgmt
Name
pam_acct_mgmt — establish the status of a user's account
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_acct_mgmt(pam_handle_t *pamh, int flags);
Description
pam_acct_mgmt establishes the account's usability and the user's accessibility to the system. It is typically called after the user has been authenticated.
flags may be specified as any valid flag (namely, one of those applicable to the flags argument of pam_authenticate). Additionally, the value of flags may be logically OR'd with PAM_SILENT.
Return Value
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
PAM_AUTHTOKEN_REQD
 	User is valid, but user's authentication token has expired. The correct response to this return-value is to require that the user satisfy the pam_chauthtok function before obtaining service. It may not be possible for an application to do this. In such a case, the user should be denied access until the account password is updated.
PAM_ACCT_EXPIRED
 	User is no longer permitted access to the system.
PAM_AUTH_ERR
 	Authentication error.
PAM_PERM_DENIED
 	User is not permitted to gain access at this time.
PAM_USER_UNKNOWN
 	User is not known to a module's account management component.
Errors
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_authenticate
Name
pam_authenticate — authenticate the user
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_authenticate(pam_handle_t *pamh, int flags);
Description
pam_authenticate serves as an interface to the authentication mechanisms of the loaded modules. 
flags is an optional parameter that may be specified by the following value:
PAM_DISALLOW_NULL_AUTHTOK
 	Instruct the authentication modules to return PAM_AUTH_ERR if the user does not have a registered authorization token.
Additionally, the value of flags may be logically OR'd with PAM_SILENT.
Return Value
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
PAM_AUTH_ERR
 	User was not authenticated.
PAM_CRED_INSUFFICIENT
 	Application does not have sufficient credentials to authenticate the user.
PAM_AUTHINFO_UNAVAIL
 	Modules were not able to access the authentication information. This might be due to a network or hardware failure, etc.
PAM_USER_UNKNOWN
 	Supplied username is not known to the authentication service.
PAM_MAXTRIES
 	One or more authentication modules has reached its limit of tries authenticating the user. Do not try again.
PAM_ABORT
 	One or more authentication modules failed to load.
Errors
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_chauthtok
Name
pam_chauthtok — change the authentication token for a given user
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_chauthtok(pam_handle_t *pamh, const int flags);
Description
pam_chauthtok is used to change the authentication token for a given user as indicated by the state associated with the handle pamh.
flags is an optional parameter that may be specified by the following value:
PAM_CHANGE_EXPIRED_AUTHTOK
 	User's authentication token should only be changed if it has expired.
Additionally, the value of flags may be logically OR'd with PAM_SILENT.
RETURN VALUE
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
PAM_AUTHTOK_ERR
 	A module was unable to obtain the new authentication token.
PAM_AUTHTOK_RECOVER_ERR
 	A module was unable to obtain the old authentication token.
PAM_AUTHTOK_LOCK_BUSY
 	One or more modules were unable to change the authentication token since it is currently locked.
PAM_AUTHTOK_DISABLE_AGING
 	Authentication token aging has been disabled for at least one of the modules.
PAM_PERM_DENIED
 	Permission denied.
PAM_TRY_AGAIN
 	Not all modules were in a position to update the authentication token(s). In such a case, none of the user's authentication tokens are updated.
PAM_USER_UNKNOWN
 	User is not known to the authentication token changing service.
ERRORS
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_close_session
Name
pam_close_session — indicate that an authenticated session has ended
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_close_session(pam_handle_t *pamh, int flags);
Description
pam_close_session is used to indicate that an authenticated session has ended. It is used to inform the module that the user is exiting a session. It should be possible for the PAM library to open a session and close the same session from different applications.
flags may have the value PAM_SILENT to indicate that no output should be generated as a result of this function call.
Return Value
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
PAM_SESSION_ERR
 	One of the required loaded modules was unable to close a session for the user.
Errors
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_end
Name
pam_end — terminate the use of the PAM library
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_end(pam_handle_t *pamh, int pam_status);
Description
pam_end terminates use of the PAM library. On success, the contents of *pamh are no longer valid, and all memory associated with it is invalid.
Normally, pam_status is passed the value PAM_SUCCESS, but in the event of an unsuccessful service application, the appropriate PAM error return value should be used.
Return Value
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
Errors
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_fail_delay
Name
pam_fail_delay — specify delay time to use on authentication error
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_fail_delay(pam_handle_t *pamh, unsigned int micro_sec);
Description
pam_fail_delay specifies the minimum delay for the PAM library to use when an authentication error occurs. The actual delay will vary by as much at 25%. If this function is called multiple times, the longest time specified by any of the call will be used.
The delay is invoked if an authentication error occurs during the pam_authenticate or pam_chauthtok function calls.
Independent of the success of pam_authenticate or pam_chauthtok, the delay time is reset to its default value of 0 when the PAM library returns control to the application from these two functions.
Return Value
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
Errors
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_get_item
Name
pam_get_item — obtain the value of the indicated item.
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_get_item(const pam_handle_t *pamh, int item_type, const void **item);
Description
pam_get_item obtains the value of the indicated item_type. The possible values of item_type are the same as listed for pam_set_item.
On success, item contains a pointer to the value of the corresponding item. Note that this is a pointer to the actual data and should not be free'd or over-written.
Return Value
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
PAM_PERM_DENIED
 	Application passed a NULL pointer for item.
PAM_BAD_ITEM
 	Application attempted to get an undefined item.
Errors
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_getenvlist
Name
pam_getenvlist — returns a pointer to the complete PAM environment.
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern char * const *pam_getenvlist(pam_handle_t *pamh);
Description
pam_getenvlist returns a pointer to the complete PAM environment. This pointer points to an array of pointers to NUL-terminated strings and must be terminated by a NULL pointer. Each string has the form "name=value".
The PAM library module allocates memory for the returned value and the associated strings. The calling application is responsible for freeing this memory. 
Return Value
pam_getenvlist returns an array of string pointers containing the PAM environment. On error, NULL is returned.
pam_open_session
Name
pam_open_session — used to indicate that an authenticated session has been initiated
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_open_session(pam_handle_t *pamh, int flags);
Description
pam_handle_t is used to indicate that an authenticated session has begun. It is used to inform the module that the user is currently in a session. It should be possible for the PAM library to open a session and close the same session from different applications.
flags may have the value PAM_SILENT to indicate that no output be generated as a rsult of this function call.
Return Value
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
PAM_SESSION_ERR
 	One of the loaded modules was unable to open a session for the user.
ERRORS
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_set_item
Name
pam_set_item — (re)set the value of an item.
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_set_item(pam_handle_t *pamh, int item_type, const void *item);
Description
pam_set_item (re)sets the value of one of the following item_types:
PAM_SERVICE
 	service name
PAM_USER
 	user name
PAM_TTY
 	terminal name
The value for a device file should include the /dev/ prefix. The value for graphical, X-based, applications should be the $DISPLAY variable.
PAM_RHOST
 	remote host name
PAM_CONV
 	conversation structure
PAM_RUSER
 	remote user name
PAM_USER_PROMPT
 	string to be used when prompting for a user's name
The default value for this string is Please enter username: .
For all item_types other than PAM_CONV, item is a pointer to a NULL-terminated character string. In the case of PAM_CONV, item points to an initialized pam_conv structure.
Return Value
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
PAM_PERM_DENIED
 	An attempt was made to replace the conversation structure with a NULL value.
PAM_BUF_ERR
 	Function ran out of memory making a copy of the item.
PAM_BAD_ITEM
 	Application attempted to set an undefined item.
Errors
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_setcred
Name
pam_setcred — set the module-specific credentials of the user
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_setcred(pam_handle_t *pamh, int flags);
Description
pam_setcred sets the module-specific credentials of the user. It is usually called after the user has been authenticated, after the account management function has been called and after a session has been opened for the user.
flags maybe specified from among the following values:
PAM_ESTABLISH_CRED
 	set credentials for the authentication service
PAM_DELETE_CRED
 	delete credentials associated with the authentication service
PAM_REINITIALIZE_CRED
 	reinitialize the user credentials
PAM_REFRESH_CRED
 	extend lifetime of the user credentials
Additionally, the value of flags may be logically OR'd with PAM_SILENT.
Return Value
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
PAM_CRED_UNAVAIL
 	Module cannot retrieve the user's credentials.
PAM_CRED_EXPIRED
 	User's credentials have expired.
PAM_USER_UNKNOWN
 	User is not known to an authentication module.
PAM_CRED_ERR
 	Module was unable to set the credentials of the user.
Errors
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_start
Name
pam_start — initialize the PAM library
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_start(const char *service_name, const char *user, const (struct pam_conv *pam_conversation), pam_handle_t **pamh);
Description
pam_start is used to initialize the PAM library. It must be called prior to any other usage of the PAM library. On success, *pamh becomes a handle that provides continuity for successive calls to the PAM library. pam_start expects arguments as follows: the service_name of the program, the username of the individual to be authenticated, a pointer to an application-supplied pam_conv structure, and a pointer to a pam_handle_t pointer.
An application must provide the conversation function used for direct communication between a loaded module and the application. The application also typically provides a means for the module to prompt the user for a password, etc.
The structure, pam_conv, is defined to be, 
  struct pam_conv {
               int (*conv) (int num_msg,
                            const struct pam_message * *msg,
                            struct pam_response * *resp,
                            void *appdata_ptr);
               void *appdata_ptr;
  };
It is initialized by the application before it is passed to the library. The contents of this structure are attached to the *pamh handle. The point of this argument is to provide a mechanism for any loaded module to interact directly with the application program; this is why it is called a conversation structure.
When a module calls the referenced conv function, appdata_ptr is set to the second element of this structure.
The other arguments of a call to conv concern the information exchanged by module and application. num_msg holds the length of the array of pointers passed via msg. On success, the pointer resp points to an array of num_msg pam_response structures, holding the application-supplied text. Note that resp is a struct pam_response array and not an array of pointers.
Return Value
PAM_SUCCESS
 	Success.
PAM_BUF_ERR
 	Memory allocation error.
PAM_ABORT
 	Internal failure.
ERRORS
May be translated to text with pam_strerror.
pam_strerror
Name
pam_strerror — returns a string describing the PAM error
Synopsis
#include <security/pam_appl.h>
extern int pam_strerror(pam_handle_t *pamh, int errnum);
Description
pam_strerror returns a string describing the PAM error associated with errnum.
Return Value
On success, this function returns a description of the indicated error. If the error is not recognized, a string beginning with Unknown Linux-PAM error is returned. The application should not free or modify this string. This returned string will not be translated.
Notes
1. 	ISO/IEC 9899: 1999, Programming Languages --C
2. 	Large File Support
3. 	Linux Standard Base
4. 	IEEE Std POSIX.1-1996 [ISO/IEC 9945-1:1996]
5. 	CAE Specification, February 1997, Networking Services (XNS), Issue 5(ISBN: 1-85912-165-9, C523)
6. 	CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)
7. 	The Single UNIX® Specification(SUS) Version 3
8. 	System V Interface Definition, Issue 3 (ISBN 0201566524)
9. 	System V Interface Definition,Fourth Edition
1. 	The LSB never has contained scandir.
1. 	The LSB never has contained scandir64; alphasort64 is customarily used with it.
1. 	For example, if off_t is 64 bits.
1. 	Programs that use gets are almost always vulnerable to overflowing the buffer supplied to gets.
1. 	SIOCGIFCONF is similar to the if_nameindex family found in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3 or the getifaddrs family found in BSD.
2. 	Historical UNIX systems disagree on the meaning of the return value.
1. 	This was a deliberate Linus decision after an unpopular experiment in including the calling process in the 2.5.1 kernel. See "What does it mean to signal everybody?", Linux Weekly News, 20 December 2001, http://lwn.net/2001/1220/kernel.php3
1. 	setmntent is believed to be mainly of interest to system administration packages. Most other uses can be accomplished in better ways (for example, compare st_dev values to detect crossing a file system or call statvfs to check available space on the file system containing a particular directory). In addition the specification that the LSB has had for setmntent is incomplete; for example it is of little use without the missing function getmntent.
1. 	Note the optional use of the buffer, unlike the strerror_r found in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3, in which the message is always copied into the supplied buffer. The return types also differ.
1. 	A token is a nonempty string of characters not occurring in the string delim, followed by \0 or by a character occurring in delim.
1. 	The Linux kernel has deliberately chosen EISDIR for this case and does not expect to change (Al Viro, personal communication).
1. 	These macros take the stat buffer (an int) as an argument -- not a pointer to the buffer!
22. 	ISO/IEC 9899: 1999, Programming Languages --C
23. 	CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)
24. 	Linux Standard Base
25. 	CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)
26. 	Linux Standard Base
27. 	Linux Standard Base
28. 	CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)
29. 	CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)
30. 	Future versions of this specification will likely define additional service names.
31. 	Linux Standard Base

V. Utility Libraries

Chapter 14. Libraries
An LSB-conforming implementation may also support some utility libraries which are built on top of the interfaces provided by the base libraries. These libraries implement common functionality, and hide additional system dependent information such as file formats and device names.
14.1. Interfaces for libz
Table 14-1. libz Definition
Library:	libz	
SONAME:	libz.so.1	

1
The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
zlib 1.1.3 Manual2	

14.1.1. Compression Library
Table 14-2. libz - Compression Library Function Interfaces
adler322	deflateInit_2	gzerror2	gzread2	inflateInit2_2	
compress2	deflateParams2	gzflush2	gzrewind2	inflateInit_2	
compress22	deflateReset2	gzgetc2	gzseek2	inflateReset2	
crc322	deflateSetDictionary2	gzgets2	gzsetparams2	inflateSetDictionary2	
deflate2	get_crc_table2	gzopen2	gztell2	inflateSync2	
deflateCopy2	gzclose2	gzprintf2	gzwrite2	inflateSyncPoint2	
deflateEnd2	gzdopen2	gzputc2	inflate2	uncompress2	
deflateInit2_2	gzeof2	gzputs2	inflateEnd2	zError2	

14.2. Data Definitions for libz
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
14.2.1. zlib.h

#define Z_NULL  0
#define MAX_WBITS       15
#define MAX_MEM_LEVEL   9
#define deflateInit2(strm,level, method, windowBits, memLevel, stratgey)        deflateInit2_((strm),(level),(method),(windowBits),(memLevel),(strategy),           ZLIB_VERSION, sizeof(z_stream))
#define deflateInit(strm,level) deflateInit_((strm), (level),       ZLIB_VERSION, sizeof(z_stream))
#define inflateInit2(strm,windowBits)   inflateInit2_((strm), (windowBits), ZLIB_VERSION, sizeof(z_stream))
#define inflateInit(strm)       inflateInit_((strm),                ZLIB_VERSION, sizeof(z_stream))

typedef int intf;

typedef void *voidpf;
typedef unsigned int uInt;
typedef unsigned long uLong;
typedef uLong uLongf;
typedef void *voidp;
typedef unsigned char Byte;
typedef off_t z_off_t;

typedef voidpf (*alloc_func) (voidpf opaque, uInt items, uInt size);
typedef void (*free_func) (voidpf opaque, voidpf address);
struct internal_state
{
  int dummy;
}
 ;
typedef Byte Bytef;
typedef uInt uIntf;

typedef struct z_stream_s
{
  Bytef *next_in;
  uInt avail_in;
  uLong total_in;
  Bytef *next_out;
  uInt avail_out;
  uLong total_out;
  char *msg;
  struct internal_state *state;
  alloc_func zalloc;
  free_func zfree;
  voidpf opaque;
  int data_type;
  uLong adler;
  uLong reserved;
}
z_stream;

typedef z_stream *z_streamp;
typedef voidp gzFile;
#define Z_NO_FLUSH      0
#define Z_PARTIAL_FLUSH 1
#define Z_SYNC_FLUSH    2
#define Z_FULL_FLUSH    3
#define Z_FINISH        4

#define Z_ERRNO (-1)
#define Z_STREAM_ERROR  (-2)
#define Z_DATA_ERROR    (-3)
#define Z_MEM_ERROR     (-4)
#define Z_BUF_ERROR     (-5)
#define Z_OK    0
#define Z_STREAM_END    1
#define Z_NEED_DICT     2

#define Z_DEFAULT_COMPRESSION   (-1)
#define Z_NO_COMPRESSION        0
#define Z_BEST_SPEED    1
#define Z_BEST_COMPRESSION      9

#define Z_DEFAULT_STRATEGY      0
#define Z_FILTERED      1
#define Z_HUFFMAN_ONLY  2

#define Z_BINARY        0
#define Z_ASCII 1
#define Z_UNKNOWN       2

#define Z_DEFLATED      8
14.3. Interfaces for libncurses
Table 14-3. libncurses Definition
Library:	libncurses	
SONAME:	libncurses.so.5	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
CAE Specification, May 1996, X/Open Curses, Issue 4, Version 2 (ISBN: 1-85912-171-3, C610), plus Corrigendum U0183	

14.3.1. Curses
Table 14-4. libncurses - Curses Function Interfaces
addch3	has_il3	mvwaddchstr3	scr_set3	waddnstr3	
addchnstr3	hline3	mvwaddnstr3	scrl3	waddstr3	
addchstr3	idcok3	mvwaddstr3	scroll3	wattr_get3	
addnstr3	idlok3	mvwchgat3	scrollok3	wattr_off3	
addstr3	immedok3	mvwdelch3	set_term3	wattr_on3	
attr_get3	inch3	mvwgetch3	setscrreg3	wattr_set3	
attr_off3	inchnstr3	mvwgetnstr3	setupterm3	wattroff3	
attr_on3	inchstr3	mvwgetstr3	slk_attr_set3	wattron3	
attr_set3	init_color3	mvwhline3	slk_attroff3	wattrset3	
attroff3	init_pair3	mvwin3	slk_attron3	wbkgd3	
attron3	initscr3	mvwinch3	slk_attrset3	wbkgdset3	
attrset3	innstr3	mvwinchnstr3	slk_clear3	wborder3	
baudrate3	insch3	mvwinchstr3	slk_color3	wchgat3	
beep3	insdelln3	mvwinnstr3	slk_init3	wclear3	
bkgd3	insertln3	mvwinsch3	slk_label3	wclrtobot3	
bkgdset3	insnstr3	mvwinsnstr3	slk_noutrefresh3	wclrtoeol3	
border3	insstr3	mvwinsstr3	slk_refresh3	wcolor_set3	
box3	instr3	mvwinstr3	slk_restore3	wcursyncup3	
can_change_color3	intrflush3	mvwprintw3	slk_set3	wdelch3	
cbreak3	is_linetouched3	mvwscanw3	slk_touch3	wdeleteln3	
chgat3	is_wintouched3	mvwvline3	standend3	wechochar3	
clear3	isendwin3	napms3	standout3	werase3	
clearok3	keyname3	newpad3	start_color3	wgetch3	
clrtobot3	keypad3	newterm3	subpad3	wgetnstr3	
clrtoeol3	killchar3	newwin3	subwin3	wgetstr3	
color_content3	leaveok3	nl3	syncok3	whline3	
color_set3	longname3	nocbreak3	termattrs3	winch3	
copywin3	meta3	nodelay3	termname3	winchnstr3	
curs_set3	move3	noecho3	tgetent3	winchstr3	
def_prog_mode3	mvaddch3	nonl3	tgetflag3	winnstr3	
def_shell_mode3	mvaddchnstr3	noqiflush3	tgetnum3	winsch3	
delay_output3	mvaddchstr3	noraw3	tgetstr3	winsdelln3	
delch3	mvaddnstr3	notimeout3	tgoto3	winsertln3	
deleteln3	mvaddstr3	overlay3	tigetflag3	winsnstr3	
delscreen3	mvchgat3	overwrite3	tigetnum3	winsstr3	
delwin3	mvcur3	pair_content3	tigetstr3	winstr3	
derwin3	mvdelch3	pechochar3	timeout3	wmove3	
doupdate3	mvderwin3	pnoutrefresh3	touchline3	wnoutrefresh3	
dupwin3	mvgetch3	prefresh3	touchwin3	wprintw3	
echo3	mvgetnstr3	printw3	tparm3	wredrawln3	
echochar3	mvgetstr3	putp3	tputs3	wrefresh3	
endwin3	mvhline3	putwin3	typeahead3	wscanw3	
erase3	mvinch3	qiflush3	ungetch3	wscrl3	
erasechar3	mvinchnstr3	raw3	untouchwin3	wsetscrreg3	
filter3	mvinchstr3	redrawwin3	use_env3	wstandend3	
flash3	mvinnstr3	refresh3	vidattr3	wstandout3	
flushinp3	mvinsch3	reset_prog_mode3	vidputs3	wsyncdown3	
getbkgd3	mvinsnstr3	reset_shell_mode3	vline3	wsyncup3	
getch3	mvinsstr3	resetty3	vw_printw3	wtimeout3	
getnstr3	mvinstr3	ripoffline3	vw_scanw3	wtouchln3	
getstr3	mvprintw3	savetty3	vwprintw3	wvline3	
getwin3	mvscanw3	scanw3	vwscanw3	
	
halfdelay3	mvvline3	scr_dump3	waddch3	
	
has_colors3	mvwaddch3	scr_init3	waddchnstr3	
	
has_ic3	mvwaddchnstr3	scr_restore3	waddchstr3	

Table 14-5. libncurses - Curses Data Interfaces
COLS3	LINES3	curscr3	stdscr3	

14.4. Data Definitions for libncurses
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
14.4.1. curses.h

#define NCURSES_BITS(mask,shift)        ((mask)<<((shift)+8))
#define ERR     (-1)
#define OK      (0)
#define A_CHARTEXT      (NCURSES_BITS(1UL,0)-1UL)
#define getmaxyx(win,y,x)       (y=(win)?((win)->_maxy+1):ERR,x=(win)?((win)->_maxx+1):ERR)
#define getbegyx(win,y,x)       (y=(win)?(win)->_begy:ERR,x=(win)?(win)->_begx:ERR)
#define getyx(win,y,x)  (y=(win)?(win)->_cury:ERR,x=(win)?(win)->_curx:ERR)
#define getparyx(win,y,x)       (y=(win)?(win)->_pary:ERR,x=(win)?(win)->_parx:ERR)
#define A_NORMAL        0L
#define A_COLOR NCURSES_BITS(((1UL)<<8)-1UL,0)
#define A_REVERSE       NCURSES_BITS(1UL,10)
#define A_BLINK NCURSES_BITS(1UL,11)
#define A_DIM   NCURSES_BITS(1UL,12)
#define A_BOLD  NCURSES_BITS(1UL,13)
#define A_ALTCHARSET    NCURSES_BITS(1UL,14)
#define A_INVIS NCURSES_BITS(1UL,15)
#define A_PROTECT       NCURSES_BITS(1UL,16)
#define A_HORIZONTAL    NCURSES_BITS(1UL,17)
#define A_LEFT  NCURSES_BITS(1UL,18)
#define A_LOW   NCURSES_BITS(1UL,19)
#define A_RIGHT NCURSES_BITS(1UL,20)
#define A_TOP   NCURSES_BITS(1UL,21)
#define A_VERTICAL      NCURSES_BITS(1UL,22)
#define A_STANDOUT      NCURSES_BITS(1UL,8)
#define A_UNDERLINE     NCURSES_BITS(1UL,9)
#define A_ATTRIBUTES    NCURSES_BITS(~(1UL-1UL),0)

#define WA_ALTCHARSET   A_ALTCHARSET
#define WA_ATTRIBUTES   A_ATTRIBUTES
#define WA_BLINK        A_BLINK
#define WA_BOLD A_BOLD
#define WA_DIM  A_DIM
#define WA_HORIZONTAL   A_HORIZONTAL
#define WA_INVIS        A_INVIS
#define WA_LEFT A_LEFT
#define WA_LOW  A_LOW
#define WA_NORMAL       A_NORMAL
#define WA_PROTECT      A_PROTECT
#define WA_REVERSE      A_REVERSE
#define WA_RIGHT        A_RIGHT
#define WA_STANDOUT     A_STANDOUT
#define WA_TOP  A_TOP
#define WA_UNDERLINE    A_UNDERLINE
#define WA_VERTICAL     A_VERTICAL

#define COLOR_BLACK     0
#define COLOR_RED       1
#define COLOR_GREEN     2
#define COLOR_YELLOW    3
#define COLOR_BLUE      4
#define COLOR_MAGENTA   5
#define COLOR_CYAN      6
#define COLOR_WHITE     7

#define _SUBWIN 0x01
#define _ENDLINE        0x02
#define _FULLWIN        0x04
#define _ISPAD  0x10
#define _HASMOVED       0x20

typedef unsigned long chtype;
typedef struct screen SCREEN;
typedef struct _win_st WINDOW;
typedef chtype attr_t;
typedef struct
{
  attr_t attr;
  wchar_t chars[5];
}
cchar_t;
struct pdat
{
  short _pad_y;
  short _pad_x;
  short _pad_top;
  short _pad_left;
  short _pad_bottom;
  short _pad_right;
}
 ;

struct _win_st
{
  short _cury;
  short _curx;
  short _maxy;
  short _maxx;
  short _begy;
  short _begx;
  short _flags;
  attr_t _attrs;
  chtype _bkgd;
  bool _notimeout;
  bool _clear;
  bool _leaveok;
  bool _scroll;
  bool _idlok;
  bool _idcok;
  bool _immed;
  bool _sync;
  bool _use_keypad;
  int _delay;
  struct ldat *_line;
  short _regtop;
  short _regbottom;
  int _parx;
  int _pary;
  WINDOW *_parent;
  struct pdat _pad;
  short _yoffset;
  cchar_t _bkgrnd;
}
 ;
#define KEY_CODE_YES    0400
#define KEY_BREAK       0401
#define KEY_MIN 0401
#define KEY_DOWN        0402
#define KEY_UP  0403
#define KEY_LEFT        0404
#define KEY_RIGHT       0405
#define KEY_HOME        0406
#define KEY_BACKSPACE   0407
#define KEY_F0  0410
#define KEY_DL  0510
#define KEY_IL  0511
#define KEY_DC  0512
#define KEY_IC  0513
#define KEY_EIC 0514
#define KEY_CLEAR       0515
#define KEY_EOS 0516
#define KEY_EOL 0517
#define KEY_SF  0520
#define KEY_SR  0521
#define KEY_NPAGE       0522
#define KEY_PPAGE       0523
#define KEY_STAB        0524
#define KEY_CTAB        0525
#define KEY_CATAB       0526
#define KEY_ENTER       0527
#define KEY_SRESET      0530
#define KEY_RESET       0531
#define KEY_PRINT       0532
#define KEY_LL  0533
#define KEY_A1  0534
#define KEY_A3  0535
#define KEY_B2  0536
#define KEY_C1  0537
#define KEY_C3  0540
#define KEY_BTAB        0541
#define KEY_BEG 0542
#define KEY_CANCEL      0543
#define KEY_CLOSE       0544
#define KEY_COMMAND     0545
#define KEY_COPY        0546
#define KEY_CREATE      0547
#define KEY_END 0550
#define KEY_EXIT        0551
#define KEY_FIND        0552
#define KEY_HELP        0553
#define KEY_MARK        0554
#define KEY_MESSAGE     0555
#define KEY_MOVE        0556
#define KEY_NEXT        0557
#define KEY_OPEN        0560
#define KEY_OPTIONS     0561
#define KEY_PREVIOUS    0562
#define KEY_REDO        0563
#define KEY_REFERENCE   0564
#define KEY_REFRESH     0565
#define KEY_REPLACE     0566
#define KEY_RESTART     0567
#define KEY_RESUME      0570
#define KEY_SAVE        0571
#define KEY_SBEG        0572
#define KEY_SCANCEL     0573
#define KEY_SCOMMAND    0574
#define KEY_SCOPY       0575
#define KEY_SCREATE     0576
#define KEY_SDC 0577
#define KEY_SDL 0600
#define KEY_SELECT      0601
#define KEY_SEND        0602
#define KEY_SEOL        0603
#define KEY_SEXIT       0604
#define KEY_SFIND       0605
#define KEY_SHELP       0606
#define KEY_SHOME       0607
#define KEY_SIC 0610
#define KEY_SLEFT       0611
#define KEY_SMESSAGE    0612
#define KEY_SMOVE       0613
#define KEY_SNEXT       0614
#define KEY_SOPTIONS    0615
#define KEY_SPREVIOUS   0616
#define KEY_SPRINT      0617
#define KEY_SREDO       0620
#define KEY_SREPLACE    0621
#define KEY_SRIGHT      0622
#define KEY_SRSUME      0623
#define KEY_SSAVE       0624
#define KEY_SSUSPEND    0625
#define KEY_SUNDO       0626
#define KEY_SUSPEND     0627
#define KEY_UNDO        0630
#define KEY_MOUSE       0631
#define KEY_RESIZE      0632
#define KEY_MAX 0777
14.5. Interfaces for libutil
Table 14-6. libutil Definition
Library:	libutil	
SONAME:	libutil.so.1	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
Linux Standard Base4	

14.5.1. Utility Functions
Table 14-7. libutil - Utility Functions Function Interfaces
forkpty(GLIBC_2.0)4	login_tty(GLIBC_2.0)4	logwtmp(GLIBC_2.0)4	

login(GLIBC_2.0)4	logout(GLIBC_2.0)4	openpty(GLIBC_2.0)4	

14.6. Interfaces Definitions for libutil
forkpty
Name
forkpty — find and open an available pseudo-tty
Synopsis
int forkpty(int *amaster, 
        char *name,
        struct termios *termp,
        struct winsize *winp);
Description
The forkpty() function joins openpty(), fork(), and login_tty() to create a new process operating on a pseudo-tty. The file descriptor of the master side of the pseudo-tty is returned in amaster, and null or the filename of the slave in name. If non-null, the termp and winp parameters will determine the terminal attributes and window size of the slave side of the pseudo-tty.
Return Value
On success of the child process, zero is returned. When the parent process receives the PID of its child process, pid is returned. On error, -1 is returned, and errno is set appropriately.
login
Name
login — login utility function
Synopsis
void login(struct utmp *ut);
Description
The login() function updates the /var/run/utmp and /var/log/wtmp files with user information contained in ut.
login_tty
Name
login_tty — find and open an available pseudo-tty
Synopsis
int login_tty(int fdr);
Description
login_tty() sets up for a login on the tty referenced by the file descriptor fdr. This function creates a new session, makes the tty for the current process the controlling terminal, sets the standard input, output, and error streams of the current process, and closes fdr.
Return Value
On success, zero is returned. On error, -1 is returned, and errno is set appropriately.
logout
Name
logout — logout utility function
Synopsis
int logout(const char *line);
Description
Given the device line, the logout() function removes the entry from the corresponding /var/run/utmp system file.
Return Value
Zero is returned if there was no entry to remove. A non-zero return value indicates success.
logwtmp
Name
logwtmp — append an entry to the wtmp file
Synopsis
#include <utmp.h>

void logwtmp(const char *line, const char *name, const char *host);
Description
logwtmp() constructs an utmp structure using line, name, host, current time and current process id. Then it calls updwtmp() to append the structure to the utmp file.
Availability
Both functions are available under glibc2, but not under libc5. However, logwtmp occurs in the old libbsd.
Files
/var/log/wtmp database of past user logins
openpty
Name
openpty — find and open an available pseudo-tty
Synopsis
int openpty(int *amaster, 
        int *aslave, 
        char *name,
        struct termios *termp,
        struct winsize *winp);
Description
The openpty() function finds an available pseudo-tty and returns file descriptors for the amaster and aslave. The filename of the slave is returned in name, otherwise a null. The terminal parameters of the slave will be set to the values in termp, otherwise a null. The window size of the slave will be set to the values in winp, otherwise a null.
Return Value
On success, zero is returned. On error, -1 is returned, and errno is set appropriately.
Errors
ENOENT
 	There are no available ttys.
Notes
1. 	The reference to the zlib 1.1.3 manual, of course, is to the specification found in the manual, not to the implementation. The zlib 1.1.4 manual, for example, is identical (except for the version number, which we do not specify). The only reason not to just say "zlib 1.1.x" is that it is hard to know whether a hypothetical future release would be compatible.
2. 	zlib 1.1.3 Manual
3. 	CAE Specification, May 1996, X/Open Curses, Issue 4, Version 2 (ISBN: 1-85912-171-3, C610), plus Corrigendum U018
4. 	Linux Standard Base

VI. Graphic Libraries

Chapter 15. Libraries
The X Libraries should be built thread-safe.
15.1. Interfaces for libX11
Table 15-1. libX11 Definition
Library:	libX11	
SONAME:	libX11.so.6	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
X11R6.4 Xlib - C library1	

15.1.1. X Windows System Interface
Table 15-2. libX11 - X Windows System Interface Function Interfaces
XActivateScreenSaver1	XFreePixmap1	XSetClipRectangles1	XkbAllocCompatMap1	
XAddConnectionWatch1	XFreeStringList1	XSetCloseDownMode1	XkbAllocControls1	
XAddExtension1	XGContextFromGC1	XSetCommand1	XkbAllocGeomColors1	
XAddHost1	XGeometry1	XSetDashes1	XkbAllocGeomDoodads1	
XAddHosts1	XGetAtomName1	XSetErrorHandler1	XkbAllocGeomKeyAliases1	
XAddPixel1	XGetAtomNames1	XSetFillRule1	XkbAllocGeomKeys1	
XAddToExtensionList1	XGetClassHint1	XSetFillStyle1	XkbAllocGeomOutlines1	
XAddToSaveSet1	XGetCommand1	XSetFont1	XkbAllocGeomOverlayKeys1	
XAllPlanes1	XGetDefault1	XSetFontPath1	XkbAllocGeomOverlayRows1	
XAllocClassHint1	XGetErrorDatabaseText1	XSetForeground1	XkbAllocGeomOverlays1	
XAllocColor1	XGetErrorText1	XSetFunction1	XkbAllocGeomPoints1	
XAllocColorCells1	XGetFontPath1	XSetGraphicsExposures1	XkbAllocGeomProps1	
XAllocColorPlanes1	XGetFontProperty1	XSetICFocus1	XkbAllocGeomRows1	
XAllocIconSize1	XGetGCValues1	XSetICValues1	XkbAllocGeomSectionDoodads1	
XAllocNamedColor1	XGetGeometry1	XSetIMValues1	XkbAllocGeomSections1	
XAllocSizeHints1	XGetICValues1	XSetIOErrorHandler1	XkbAllocGeomShapes1	
XAllocStandardColormap1	XGetIMValues1	XSetIconName1	XkbAllocGeometry1	
XAllocWMHints1	XGetIconName1	XSetIconSizes1	XkbAllocIndicatorMaps1	
XAllowEvents1	XGetIconSizes1	XSetInputFocus1	XkbAllocKeyboard1	
XAutoRepeatOff1	XGetImage1	XSetLineAttributes1	XkbAllocNames1	
XAutoRepeatOn1	XGetInputFocus1	XSetLocaleModifiers1	XkbAllocServerMap1	
XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet1	XGetKeyboardControl1	XSetModifierMapping1	XkbApplyCompatMapToKey1	
XBell1	XGetKeyboardMapping1	XSetNormalHints1	XkbBell1	
XBitmapBitOrder1	XGetModifierMapping1	XSetOCValues1	XkbBellEvent1	
XBitmapPad1	XGetMotionEvents1	XSetOMValues1	XkbChangeEnabledControls1	
XBitmapUnit1	XGetNormalHints1	XSetPlaneMask1	XkbChangeMap1	
XBlackPixel1	XGetOCValues1	XSetPointerMapping1	XkbChangeNames1	
XBlackPixelOfScreen1	XGetOMValues1	XSetRGBColormaps1	XkbChangeTypesOfKey1	
XCellsOfScreen1	XGetPixel1	XSetRegion1	XkbComputeEffectiveMap1	
XChangeActivePointerGrab1	XGetPointerControl1	XSetScreenSaver1	XkbComputeRowBounds1	
XChangeGC1	XGetPointerMapping1	XSetSelectionOwner1	XkbComputeSectionBounds1	
XChangeKeyboardControl1	XGetRGBColormaps1	XSetSizeHints1	XkbComputeShapeBounds1	
XChangeKeyboardMapping1	XGetScreenSaver1	XSetStandardColormap1	XkbComputeShapeTop1	
XChangePointerControl1	XGetSelectionOwner1	XSetStandardProperties1	XkbCopyKeyType1	
XChangeProperty1	XGetSizeHints1	XSetState1	XkbCopyKeyTypes1	
XChangeSaveSet1	XGetStandardColormap1	XSetStipple1	XkbFindOverlayForKey1	
XChangeWindowAttributes1	XGetSubImage1	XSetSubwindowMode1	XkbForceBell1	
XCheckIfEvent1	XGetTextProperty1	XSetTSOrigin1	XkbFreeClientMap1	
XCheckMaskEvent1	XGetTransientForHint1	XSetTextProperty1	XkbFreeCompatMap1	
XCheckTypedEvent1	XGetVisualInfo1	XSetTile1	XkbFreeComponentList1	
XCheckTypedWindowEvent1	XGetWMClientMachine1	XSetTransientForHint1	XkbFreeControls1	
XCheckWindowEvent1	XGetWMColormapWindows1	XSetWMClientMachine1	XkbFreeGeomColors1	
XCirculateSubwindows1	XGetWMHints1	XSetWMColormapWindows1	XkbFreeGeomDoodads1	
XCirculateSubwindowsDown1	XGetWMIconName1	XSetWMHints1	XkbFreeGeomKeyAliases1	
XCirculateSubwindowsUp1	XGetWMName1	XSetWMIconName1	XkbFreeGeomKeys1	
XClearArea1	XGetWMNormalHints1	XSetWMName1	XkbFreeGeomOutlines1	
XClearWindow1	XGetWMProtocols1	XSetWMNormalHints1	XkbFreeGeomOverlayKeys1	
XClipBox1	XGetWMSizeHints1	XSetWMProperties1	XkbFreeGeomOverlayRows1	
XCloseDisplay1	XGetWindowAttributes1	XSetWMProtocols1	XkbFreeGeomOverlays1	
XCloseIM1	XGetWindowProperty1	XSetWMSizeHints1	XkbFreeGeomPoints1	
XCloseOM1	XGetZoomHints1	XSetWindowBackground1	XkbFreeGeomProperties1	
XConfigureWindow1	XGrabButton1	XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap1	XkbFreeGeomRows1	
XConnectionNumber1	XGrabKey1	XSetWindowBorder1	XkbFreeGeomSections1	
XContextDependentDrawing1	XGrabKeyboard1	XSetWindowBorderPixmap1	XkbFreeGeomShapes1	
XContextualDrawing1	XGrabPointer1	XSetWindowBorderWidth1	XkbFreeGeometry1	
XConvertCase1	XGrabServer1	XSetWindowColormap1	XkbFreeIndicatorMaps1	
XConvertSelection1	XHeightMMOfScreen1	XSetZoomHints1	XkbFreeKeyboard1	
XCopyArea1	XHeightOfScreen1	XShrinkRegion1	XkbFreeNames1	
XCopyColormapAndFree1	XIMOfIC1	XStoreBuffer1	XkbFreeServerMap1	
XCopyGC1	XIconifyWindow1	XStoreBytes1	XkbGetAutoRepeatRate1	
XCopyPlane1	XIfEvent1	XStoreColor1	XkbGetCompatMap1	
XCreateBitmapFromData1	XImageByteOrder1	XStoreColors1	XkbGetControls1	
XCreateColormap1	XInitExtension1	XStoreName1	XkbGetGeometry1	
XCreateFontCursor1	XInitImage1	XStoreNamedColor1	XkbGetIndicatorMap1	
XCreateFontSet1	XInitThreads1	XStringListToTextProperty1	XkbGetIndicatorState1	
XCreateGC1	XInsertModifiermapEntry1	XStringToKeysym1	XkbGetKeyActions1	
XCreateGlyphCursor1	XInstallColormap1	XSubImage1	XkbGetKeyBehaviors1	
XCreateIC1	XInternAtom1	XSubtractRegion1	XkbGetKeyExplicitComponents1	
XCreateImage1	XInternAtoms1	XSupportsLocale1	XkbGetKeyModifierMap1	
XCreateOC1	XInternalConnectionNumbers1	XSync1	XkbGetKeySyms1	
XCreatePixmap1	XIntersectRegion1	XSynchronize1	XkbGetKeyTypes1	
XCreatePixmapCursor1	XKeycodeToKeysym1	XTextExtents1	XkbGetKeyboard1	
XCreatePixmapFromBitmapData1	XKeysymToKeycode1	XTextExtents161	XkbGetKeyboardByName1	
XCreateRegion1	XKeysymToString1	XTextPropertyToStringList1	XkbGetMap1	
XCreateSimpleWindow1	XKillClient1	XTextWidth1	XkbGetMapChanges1	
XCreateWindow1	XLastKnownRequestProcessed1	XTextWidth161	XkbGetNamedGeometry1	
XDefaultColormap1	XListDepths1	XTranslateCoordinates1	XkbGetNamedIndicator1	
XDefaultColormapOfScreen1	XListExtensions1	XUndefineCursor1	XkbGetNames1	
XDefaultDepth1	XListFonts1	XUngrabButton1	XkbGetState1	
XDefaultDepthOfScreen1	XListFontsWithInfo1	XUngrabKey1	XkbGetUpdatedMap1	
XDefaultGC1	XListHosts1	XUngrabKeyboard1	XkbGetVirtualMods1	
XDefaultGCOfScreen1	XListInstalledColormaps1	XUngrabPointer1	XkbGetXlibControls1	
XDefaultRootWindow1	XListPixmapFormats1	XUngrabServer1	XkbIgnoreExtension1	
XDefaultScreen1	XListProperties1	XUninstallColormap1	XkbInitCanonicalKeyTypes1	
XDefaultScreenOfDisplay1	XLoadFont1	XUnionRectWithRegion1	XkbKeyTypesForCoreSymbols1	
XDefaultString1	XLoadQueryFont1	XUnionRegion1	XkbKeycodeToKeysym1	
XDefaultVisual1	XLocaleOfFontSet1	XUnloadFont1	XkbKeysymToModifiers1	
XDefaultVisualOfScreen1	XLocaleOfIM1	XUnlockDisplay1	XkbLatchGroup1	
XDefineCursor1	XLocaleOfOM1	XUnmapSubwindows1	XkbLatchModifiers1	
XDeleteContext1	XLockDisplay1	XUnmapWindow1	XkbLibraryVersion1	
XDeleteModifiermapEntry1	XLookupColor1	XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback1	XkbListComponents1	
XDeleteProperty1	XLookupKeysym1	XUnsetICFocus1	XkbLockGroup1	
XDestroyIC1	XLookupString1	XVaCreateNestedList1	XkbLockModifiers1	
XDestroyImage1	XLowerWindow1	XVendorRelease1	XkbLookupKeyBinding1	
XDestroyOC1	XMapRaised1	XVisualIDFromVisual1	XkbLookupKeySym1	
XDestroyRegion1	XMapSubwindows1	XWMGeometry1	XkbNoteControlsChanges1	
XDestroySubwindows1	XMapWindow1	XWarpPointer1	XkbNoteMapChanges1	
XDestroyWindow1	XMaskEvent1	XWhitePixel1	XkbNoteNameChanges1	
XDirectionalDependentDrawing1	XMatchVisualInfo1	XWhitePixelOfScreen1	XkbOpenDisplay1	
XDisableAccessControl1	XMaxCmapsOfScreen1	XWidthMMOfScreen1	XkbQueryExtension1	
XDisplayCells1	XMaxRequestSize1	XWidthOfScreen1	XkbRefreshKeyboardMapping1	
XDisplayHeight1	XMinCmapsOfScreen1	XWindowEvent1	XkbResizeKeyActions1	
XDisplayHeightMM1	XMoveResizeWindow1	XWithdrawWindow1	XkbResizeKeySyms1	
XDisplayKeycodes1	XMoveWindow1	XWriteBitmapFile1	XkbResizeKeyType1	
XDisplayMotionBufferSize1	XNewModifiermap1	XXorRegion1	XkbSelectEventDetails1	
XDisplayName1	XNextEvent1	XauDisposeAuth1	XkbSelectEvents1	
XDisplayOfIM1	XNextRequest1	XauFileName1	XkbSetAtomFuncs1	
XDisplayOfOM1	XNoOp1	XauGetBestAuthByAddr1	XkbSetAutoRepeatRate1	
XDisplayOfScreen1	XOMOfOC1	XauReadAuth1	XkbSetAutoResetControls1	
XDisplayPlanes1	XOffsetRegion1	XcmsAddColorSpace1	XkbSetCompatMap1	
XDisplayString1	XOpenDisplay1	XcmsAddFunctionSet1	XkbSetControls1	
XDisplayWidth1	XOpenIM1	XcmsAllocColor1	XkbSetDebuggingFlags1	
XDisplayWidthMM1	XOpenOM1	XcmsAllocNamedColor1	XkbSetDetectableAutoRepeat1	
XDoesBackingStore1	XParseColor1	XcmsCCCOfColormap1	XkbSetGeometry1	
XDoesSaveUnders1	XParseGeometry1	XcmsCIELabClipL1	XkbSetIgnoreLockMods1	
XDrawArc1	XPeekEvent1	XcmsCIELabClipLab1	XkbSetIndicatorMap1	
XDrawArcs1	XPeekIfEvent1	XcmsCIELabClipab1	XkbSetMap1	
XDrawImageString1	XPending1	XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC1	XkbSetNamedIndicator1	
XDrawImageString161	XPlanesOfScreen1	XcmsCIELabQueryMaxL1	XkbSetNames1	
XDrawLine1	XPointInRegion1	XcmsCIELabQueryMaxLC1	XkbSetServerInternalMods1	
XDrawLines1	XPolygonRegion1	XcmsCIELabQueryMinL1	XkbSetXlibControls1	
XDrawPoint1	XProcessInternalConnection1	XcmsCIELabToCIEXYZ1	XkbToControl1	
XDrawPoints1	XProtocolRevision1	XcmsCIELabWhiteShiftColors1	XkbTranslateKeyCode1	
XDrawRectangle1	XProtocolVersion1	XcmsCIELuvClipL1	XkbTranslateKeySym1	
XDrawRectangles1	XPutBackEvent1	XcmsCIELuvClipLuv1	XkbUpdateMapFromCore1	
XDrawSegments1	XPutImage1	XcmsCIELuvClipuv1	XkbUseExtension1	
XDrawString1	XPutPixel1	XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC1	XkbVirtualModsToReal1	
XDrawString161	XQLength1	XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxL1	XmbDrawImageString1	
XDrawText1	XQueryBestCursor1	XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxLC1	XmbDrawString1	
XDrawText161	XQueryBestSize1	XcmsCIELuvQueryMinL1	XmbDrawText1	
XEHeadOfExtensionList1	XQueryBestStipple1	XcmsCIELuvToCIEuvY1	XmbLookupString1	
XESetBeforeFlush1	XQueryBestTile1	XcmsCIELuvWhiteShiftColors1	XmbResetIC1	
XESetCloseDisplay1	XQueryColor1	XcmsCIEXYZToCIELab1	XmbSetWMProperties1	
XESetCopyGC1	XQueryColors1	XcmsCIEXYZToCIEuvY1	XmbTextEscapement1	
XESetCreateFont1	XQueryExtension1	XcmsCIEXYZToCIExyY1	XmbTextExtents1	
XESetCreateGC1	XQueryFont1	XcmsCIEXYZToRGBi1	XmbTextListToTextProperty1	
XESetError1	XQueryKeymap1	XcmsCIEuvYToCIELuv1	XmbTextPerCharExtents1	
XESetErrorString1	XQueryPointer1	XcmsCIEuvYToCIEXYZ1	XmbTextPropertyToTextList1	
XESetEventToWire1	XQueryTextExtents1	XcmsCIEuvYToTekHVC1	XrmCombineDatabase1	
XESetFlushGC1	XQueryTextExtents161	XcmsCIExyYToCIEXYZ1	XrmCombineFileDatabase1	
XESetFreeFont1	XQueryTree1	XcmsClientWhitePointOfCCC1	XrmDestroyDatabase1	
XESetFreeGC1	XRaiseWindow1	XcmsConvertColors1	XrmEnumerateDatabase1	
XESetPrintErrorValues1	XReadBitmapFile1	XcmsCreateCCC1	XrmGetDatabase1	
XESetWireToError1	XReadBitmapFileData1	XcmsDefaultCCC1	XrmGetFileDatabase1	
XESetWireToEvent1	XRebindKeysym1	XcmsDisplayOfCCC1	XrmGetResource1	
XEmptyRegion1	XRecolorCursor1	XcmsFormatOfPrefix1	XrmGetStringDatabase1	
XEnableAccessControl1	XReconfigureWMWindow1	XcmsFreeCCC1	XrmInitialize1	
XEqualRegion1	XRectInRegion1	XcmsLookupColor1	XrmLocaleOfDatabase1	
XEventMaskOfScreen1	XRefreshKeyboardMapping1	XcmsPrefixOfFormat1	XrmMergeDatabases1	
XEventsQueued1	XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback1	XcmsQueryBlack1	XrmParseCommand1	
XExtendedMaxRequestSize1	XRemoveConnectionWatch1	XcmsQueryBlue1	XrmPermStringToQuark1	
XExtentsOfFontSet1	XRemoveFromSaveSet1	XcmsQueryColor1	XrmPutFileDatabase1	
XFetchBuffer1	XRemoveHost1	XcmsQueryColors1	XrmPutLineResource1	
XFetchBytes1	XRemoveHosts1	XcmsQueryGreen1	XrmPutResource1	
XFetchName1	XReparentWindow1	XcmsQueryRed1	XrmPutStringResource1	
XFillArc1	XResetScreenSaver1	XcmsQueryWhite1	XrmQGetResource1	
XFillArcs1	XResizeWindow1	XcmsRGBToRGBi1	XrmQGetSearchList1	
XFillPolygon1	XResourceManagerString1	XcmsRGBiToCIEXYZ1	XrmQGetSearchResource1	
XFillRectangle1	XRestackWindows1	XcmsRGBiToRGB1	XrmQPutResource1	
XFillRectangles1	XRootWindow1	XcmsScreenNumberOfCCC1	XrmQPutStringResource1	
XFilterEvent1	XRootWindowOfScreen1	XcmsScreenWhitePointOfCCC1	XrmQuarkToString1	
XFindContext1	XRotateBuffers1	XcmsSetCCCOfColormap1	XrmSetDatabase1	
XFindOnExtensionList1	XRotateWindowProperties1	XcmsSetCompressionProc1	XrmStringToBindingQuarkList1	
XFlush1	XSaveContext1	XcmsSetWhiteAdjustProc1	XrmStringToQuark1	
XFlushGC1	XScreenCount1	XcmsSetWhitePoint1	XrmStringToQuarkList1	
XFontsOfFontSet1	XScreenNumberOfScreen1	XcmsStoreColor1	XrmUniqueQuark1	
XForceScreenSaver1	XScreenOfDisplay1	XcmsStoreColors1	Xutf8TextListToTextProperty	
XFree1	XScreenResourceString1	XcmsTekHVCClipC1	Xutf8TextPropertyToTextList	
XFreeColormap1	XSelectInput1	XcmsTekHVCClipV1	XwcDrawImageString1	
XFreeColors1	XSendEvent1	XcmsTekHVCClipVC1	XwcDrawString1	
XFreeCursor1	XServerVendor1	XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC1	XwcDrawText1	
XFreeExtensionList1	XSetAccessControl1	XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxV1	XwcFreeStringList1	
XFreeFont1	XSetAfterFunction1	XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVC1	XwcLookupString1	
XFreeFontInfo1	XSetArcMode1	XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVSamples1	XwcResetIC1	
XFreeFontNames1	XSetAuthorization1	XcmsTekHVCQueryMinV1	XwcTextEscapement1	
XFreeFontPath1	XSetBackground1	XcmsTekHVCToCIEuvY1	XwcTextExtents1	
XFreeFontSet1	XSetClassHint1	XcmsTekHVCWhiteShiftColors1	XwcTextListToTextProperty1	
XFreeGC1	XSetClipMask1	XcmsVisualOfCCC1	XwcTextPerCharExtents1	
XFreeModifiermap1	XSetClipOrigin1	XkbAllocClientMap1	XwcTextPropertyToTextList1	

15.2. Data Definitions for libX11
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
15.2.1. X11/X.h

typedef unsigned long XID;
typedef unsigned long Atom;
typedef unsigned long VisualID;
typedef unsigned long Time;
typedef XID Window;
typedef XID Font;
typedef XID Pixmap;
typedef unsigned char KeyCode;
typedef XID Drawable;
typedef XID Cursor;
typedef XID Colormap;
typedef XID GContext;
typedef XID KeySym;
#define AllTemporary    0L
#define AnyButton       0L
#define AnyKey  0L
#define AnyPropertyType 0L
#define CopyFromParent  0L
#define CurrentTime     0L
#define NoSymbol        0L
#define None    0L
#define PointerWindow   0L
#define InputFocus      1L
#define ParentRelative  1L
#define PointerRoot     1L

#define KeyPressMask    (1L<<0)
#define KeyReleaseMask  (1L<<1)
#define Button3MotionMask       (1L<<10)
#define Button4MotionMask       (1L<<11)
#define Button5MotionMask       (1L<<12)
#define ButtonMotionMask        (1L<<13)
#define KeymapStateMask (1L<<14)
#define ExposureMask    (1L<<15)
#define VisibilityChangeMask    (1L<<16)
#define StructureNotifyMask     (1L<<17)
#define ResizeRedirectMask      (1L<<18)
#define SubstructureNotifyMask  (1L<<19)
#define ButtonPressMask (1L<<2)
#define SubstructureRedirectMask        (1L<<20)
#define FocusChangeMask (1L<<21)
#define PropertyChangeMask      (1L<<22)
#define ColormapChangeMask      (1L<<23)
#define ButtonReleaseMask       (1L<<3)
#define EnterWindowMask (1L<<4)
#define LeaveWindowMask (1L<<5)
#define PointerMotionMask       (1L<<6)
#define PointerMotionHintMask   (1L<<7)
#define Button1MotionMask       (1L<<8)
#define Button2MotionMask       (1L<<9)

#define NoEventMask     0L
#define FocusOut        10
#define KeymapNotify    11
#define Expose  12
#define GraphicsExpose  13
#define NoExpose        14
#define VisibilityNotify        15
#define CreateNotify    16
#define DestroyNotify   17
#define UnmapNotify     18
#define MapNotify       19
#define KeyPress        2
#define MapRequest      20
#define ReparentNotify  21
#define ConfigureNotify 22
#define ConfigureRequest        23
#define GravityNotify   24
#define ResizeRequest   25
#define CirculateNotify 26
#define CirculateRequest        27
#define PropertyNotify  28
#define SelectionClear  29
#define KeyRelease      3
#define SelectionRequest        30
#define SelectionNotify 31
#define ColormapNotify  32
#define ClientMessage   33
#define MappingNotify   34
#define LASTEvent       35
#define ButtonPress     4
#define ButtonRelease   5
#define MotionNotify    6
#define EnterNotify     7
#define LeaveNotify     8
#define FocusIn 9

#define ShiftMask       (1<<0)
#define LockMask        (1<<1)
#define ControlMask     (1<<2)
#define Mod1Mask        (1<<3)
#define Mod2Mask        (1<<4)
#define Mod3Mask        (1<<5)
#define Mod4Mask        (1<<6)
#define Mod5Mask        (1<<7)

#define ShiftMapIndex   0
#define LockMapIndex    1
#define ControlMapIndex 2
#define Mod1MapIndex    3
#define Mod2MapIndex    4
#define Mod3MapIndex    5
#define Mod4MapIndex    6
#define Mod5MapIndex    7

#define Button3Mask     (1<<10)
#define Button4Mask     (1<<11)
#define Button5Mask     (1<<12)
#define AnyModifier     (1<<15)
#define Button1Mask     (1<<8)
#define Button2Mask     (1<<9)

#define Button1 1
#define Button2 2
#define Button3 3
#define Button4 4
#define Button5 5

#define NotifyNormal    0
#define NotifyGrab      1
#define NotifyHint      1
#define NotifyUngrab    2
#define NotifyWhileGrabbed      3

#define NotifyAncestor  0
#define NotifyVirtual   1
#define NotifyInferior  2
#define NotifyNonlinear 3
#define NotifyNonlinearVirtual  4
#define NotifyPointer   5
#define NotifyPointerRoot       6
#define NotifyDetailNone        7

#define VisibilityUnobscured    0
#define VisibilityPartiallyObscured     1
#define VisibilityFullyObscured 2

#define PlaceOnTop      0
#define PlaceOnBottom   1

#define FamilyInternet  0
#define FamilyDECnet    1
#define FamilyChaos     2

#define PropModeReplace 0
#define PropertyNewValue        0
#define PropertyDelete  1

#define ColormapUninstalled     0
#define ColormapInstalled       1

#define GrabModeSync    0
#define GrabModeAsync   1

#define GrabSuccess     0
#define AlreadyGrabbed  1
#define GrabInvalidTime 2
#define GrabNotViewable 3
#define GrabFrozen      4

#define AsyncPointer    0
#define SyncPointer     1
#define ReplayPointer   2
#define AsyncKeyboard   3
#define SyncKeyboard    4
#define ReplayKeyboard  5
#define AsyncBoth       6
#define SyncBoth        7

#define RevertToNone    (int)None
#define RevertToPointerRoot     (int)PointerRoot
#define RevertToParent  2

#define Success 0
#define BadRequest      1
#define BadAccess       10
#define BadAlloc        11
#define BadColor        12
#define FirstExtensionError     128
#define BadGC   13
#define BadIDChoice     14
#define BadName 15
#define BadLength       16
#define BadImplementation       17
#define BadValue        2
#define LastExtensionError      255
#define BadWindow       3
#define BadPixmap       4
#define BadAtom 5
#define BadCursor       6
#define BadFont 7
#define BadMatch        8
#define BadDrawable     9

#define CWX     (1<<0)
#define InputOutput     1
#define InputOnly       2

#define CWBackPixmap    (1L<<0)
#define CWBackPixel     (1L<<1)
#define CWSaveUnder     (1L<<10)
#define CWEventMask     (1L<<11)
#define CWDontPropagate (1L<<12)
#define CWColormap      (1L<<13)
#define CWCursor        (1L<<14)
#define CWBorderPixmap  (1L<<2)
#define CWBorderPixel   (1L<<3)
#define CWBitGravity    (1L<<4)
#define CWWinGravity    (1L<<5)
#define CWBackingStore  (1L<<6)
#define CWBackingPlanes (1L<<7)
#define CWBackingPixel  (1L<<8)
#define CWOverrideRedirect      (1L<<9)

#define CWY     (1<<1)
#define CWWidth (1<<2)
#define CWHeight        (1<<3)
#define CWBorderWidth   (1<<4)
#define CWSibling       (1<<5)
#define CWStackMode     (1<<6)

#define ForgetGravity   0
#define UnmapGravity    0
#define NorthWestGravity        1
#define StaticGravity   10
#define NorthGravity    2
#define NorthEastGravity        3
#define WestGravity     4
#define CenterGravity   5
#define EastGravity     6
#define SouthWestGravity        7
#define SouthGravity    8
#define SouthEastGravity        9

#define NotUseful       0
#define WhenMapped      1
#define Always  2

#define IsUnmapped      0
#define IsUnviewable    1
#define IsViewable      2

#define SetModeInsert   0
#define SetModeDelete   1

#define DestroyAll      0
#define RetainPermanent 1
#define RetainTemporary 2

#define Above   0
#define Below   1
#define TopIf   2
#define BottomIf        3

#define RaiseLowest     0
#define LowerHighest    1

#define PropModePrepend 1
#define PropModeAppend  2

#define GXclear 0x0
#define GXand   0x1
#define GXandReverse    0x2
#define GXcopy  0x3
#define GXandInverted   0x4
#define GXnoop  0x5
#define GXxor   0x6
#define GXor    0x7
#define GXnor   0x8
#define GXequiv 0x9
#define GXinvert        0xa
#define GXorReverse     0xb
#define GXcopyInverted  0xc
#define GXorInverted    0xd
#define GXnand  0xe
#define GXset   0xf

#define LineSolid       0
#define LineOnOffDash   1
#define LineDoubleDash  2

#define CapNotLast      0
#define CapButt 1
#define CapRound        2
#define CapProjecting   3

#define JoinMiter       0
#define JoinRound       1
#define JoinBevel       2

#define FillSolid       0
#define FillTiled       1
#define FillStippled    2
#define FillOpaqueStippled      3

#define EvenOddRule     0
#define WindingRule     1

#define ClipByChildren  0
#define IncludeInferiors        1

#define Unsorted        0
#define XYBitmap        0
#define YSorted 1
#define YXSorted        2
#define YXBanded        3

#define CoordModeOrigin 0
#define CoordModePrevious       1

#define Complex 0
#define Nonconvex       1
#define Convex  2

#define ArcChord        0
#define ArcPieSlice     1

#define GCFunction      (1L<<0)
#define GCPlaneMask     (1L<<1)
#define GCTile  (1L<<10)
#define GCStipple       (1L<<11)
#define GCTileStipXOrigin       (1L<<12)
#define GCTileStipYOrigin       (1L<<13)
#define GCFont  (1L<<14)
#define GCSubwindowMode (1L<<15)
#define GCGraphicsExposures     (1L<<16)
#define GCClipXOrigin   (1L<<17)
#define GCClipYOrigin   (1L<<18)
#define GCClipMask      (1L<<19)
#define GCForeground    (1L<<2)
#define GCDashOffset    (1L<<20)
#define GCDashList      (1L<<21)
#define GCArcMode       (1L<<22)
#define GCBackground    (1L<<3)
#define GCLineWidth     (1L<<4)
#define GCLineStyle     (1L<<5)
#define GCCapStyle      (1L<<6)
#define GCJoinStyle     (1L<<7)
#define GCFillStyle     (1L<<8)
#define GCFillRule      (1L<<9)
#define GCLastBit       22
#define FontChange      255

#define FontLeftToRight 0
#define FontRightToLeft 1

#define XYPixmap        1
#define ZPixmap 2

#define AllocNone       0
#define AllocAll        1

#define DoRed   (1<<0)
#define DoGreen (1<<1)
#define DoBlue  (1<<2)

#define CursorShape     0
#define TileShape       1
#define StippleShape    2

#define AutoRepeatModeOff       0
#define LedModeOff      0
#define AutoRepeatModeOn        1
#define LedModeOn       1
#define AutoRepeatModeDefault   2

#define KBKeyClickPercent       (1L<<0)
#define KBBellPercent   (1L<<1)
#define KBBellPitch     (1L<<2)
#define KBBellDuration  (1L<<3)
#define KBLed   (1L<<4)
#define KBLedMode       (1L<<5)
#define KBKey   (1L<<6)
#define KBAutoRepeatMode        (1L<<7)
#define MappingModifier 0
#define MappingSuccess  0
#define MappingBusy     1
#define MappingKeyboard 1
#define MappingFailed   2
#define MappingPointer  2

#define DisableScreenInterval   0
#define DisableScreenSaver      0
#define DontAllowExposures      0
#define DontPreferBlanking      0
#define AllowExposures  1
#define PreferBlanking  1
#define DefaultBlanking 2
#define DefaultExposures        2

#define ScreenSaverReset        0
#define ScreenSaverActive       1

#define HostInsert      0
#define HostDelete      1

#define DisableAccess   0
#define EnableAccess    1

#define StaticGray      0
#define GrayScale       1
#define StaticColor     2
#define PseudoColor     3
#define TrueColor       4
#define DirectColor     5

#define LSBFirst        0
#define MSBFirst        1
15.2.2. X11/Xauth.h

typedef struct xauth
{
  unsigned short family;
  unsigned short address_length;
  char *address;
  unsigned short number_length;
  char *number;
  unsigned short name_length;
  char *name;
  unsigned short data_length;
  char *data;
}
Xauth;
15.2.3. X11/Xcms.h

typedef struct _XcmsFunctionSet
{
  XcmsColorSpace **DDColorSpaces;
  XcmsScreenInitProc screenInitProc;
  XcmsScreenFreeProc screenFreeProc;
}
XcmsFunctionSet;

typedef unsigned long XcmsColorFormat;
typedef double XcmsFloat;
typedef struct
{
  unsigned short red;
  unsigned short green;
  unsigned short blue;
}
XcmsRGB;
typedef struct
{
  XcmsFloat red;
  XcmsFloat green;
  XcmsFloat blue;
}
XcmsRGBi;
typedef struct
{
  XcmsFloat X;
  XcmsFloat Y;
  XcmsFloat Z;
}
XcmsCIEXYZ;
typedef struct
{
  XcmsFloat u_prime;
  XcmsFloat v_prime;
  XcmsFloat Y;
}
XcmsCIEuvY;
typedef struct
{
  XcmsFloat x;
  XcmsFloat y;
  XcmsFloat Y;
}
XcmsCIExyY;
typedef struct
{
  XcmsFloat L_star;
  XcmsFloat a_star;
  XcmsFloat b_star;
}
XcmsCIELab;
typedef struct
{
  XcmsFloat L_star;
  XcmsFloat u_star;
  XcmsFloat v_star;
}
XcmsCIELuv;
typedef struct
{
  XcmsFloat H;
  XcmsFloat V;
  XcmsFloat C;
}
XcmsTekHVC;
typedef struct
{
  XcmsFloat pad0;
  XcmsFloat pad1;
  XcmsFloat pad2;
  XcmsFloat pad3;
}
XcmsPad;

typedef union
{
  XcmsRGB RGB;
  XcmsRGBi RGBi;
  XcmsCIEXYZ CIEXYZ;
  XcmsCIEuvY CIEuvY;
  XcmsCIExyY CIExyY;
  XcmsCIELab CIELab;
  XcmsCIELuv CIELuv;
  XcmsTekHVC TekHVC;
  XcmsPad Pad;
}
XcmsColor;

typedef struct _XcmsPerScrnInfo
{
  XcmsColor screenWhitePt;
  XPointer functionSet;
  XPointer screenData;
  unsigned char state;
  char pad[1];
}
XcmsPerScrnInfo;

typedef int (*XcmsCompressionProc) (void);
typedef int (*XcmsWhiteAdjustProc) (void);
typedef int (*XcmsScreenInitProc) (void);
typedef void (*XcmsScreenFreeProc) (void);
typedef int (*XcmsConversionProc) (void);
typedef int (*XcmsParseStringProc) (void);

typedef struct _XcmsCCC
{
  Display *dpy;
  int screenNumber;
  Visual *visual;
  XcmsColor clientWhitePt;
  XcmsCompressionProc gamutCompProc;
  XPointer gamutCompClientData;
  XcmsWhiteAdjustProc whitePtAdjProc;
  XPointer whitePtAdjClientData;
  XcmsPerScrnInfo *pPerScrnInfo;
}
 *XcmsCCC;

typedef XcmsConversionProc *XcmsFuncListPtr;

typedef struct _XcmsColorSpace
{
  char *prefix;
  XcmsColorFormat id;
  XcmsParseStringProc parseString;
  XcmsFuncListPtr to_CIEXYZ;
  XcmsFuncListPtr from_CIEXYZ;
  int inverse_flag;
}
XcmsColorSpace;
15.2.4. X11/Xlib.h

struct _XDisplay;
typedef struct XColor;
typedef void *XVaNestedList;
typedef int (*XErrorHandler) (void);
typedef int (*XIOErrorHandler) (void);
typedef void (*XConnectionWatchProc) (void);

typedef char *XPointer;

typedef struct _XExtData
{
  int number;
  struct _XExtData *next;
  int (*free_private) (struct _XExtData * extension);
  XPointer private_data;
}
XExtData;
typedef struct XExtCodes;

typedef struct XPixmapFormatValues;

typedef struct XGCValues;

typedef struct _XGC *GC;

typedef struct Visual;

typedef struct Depth;

typedef struct Screen;

typedef struct ScreenFormat;

typedef struct XSetWindowAttributes;
typedef struct XWindowAttributes;

typedef struct XHostAddress;

typedef struct _XImage
{
  int width;
  int height;
  int xoffset;
  int format;
  char *data;
  int byte_order;
  int bitmap_unit;
  int bitmap_bit_order;
  int bitmap_pad;
  int depth;
  int bytes_per_line;
  int bits_per_pixel;
  unsigned long red_mask;
  unsigned long green_mask;
  unsigned long blue_mask;
  XPointer obdata;
  struct funcs f;
}
XImage;

typedef struct XWindowChanges;

typedef struct XSegment;
typedef struct XPoint;
typedef struct XRectangle;
typedef struct XArc;

typedef struct XKeyboardControl;

typedef struct XKeyboardState;

typedef struct XTimeCoord;

typedef struct XModifierKeymap;

typedef struct _XDisplay Display;

typedef struct XKeyEvent;
typedef XKeyEvent XKeyPressedEvent;
typedef XKeyEvent XKeyReleasedEvent;
typedef struct XButtonEvent;
typedef XButtonEvent XButtonPressedEvent;
typedef XButtonEvent XButtonReleasedEvent;
typedef struct XMotionEvent;
typedef XMotionEvent XPointerMovedEvent;
typedef struct XCrossingEvent;
typedef XCrossingEvent XEnterWindowEvent;
typedef XCrossingEvent XLeaveWindowEvent;
typedef struct XFocusChangeEvent;
typedef XFocusChangeEvent XFocusInEvent;
typedef XFocusChangeEvent XFocusOutEvent;
typedef struct XKeymapEvent;
typedef struct XExposeEvent;
typedef struct XGraphicsExposeEvent;
typedef struct XNoExposeEvent;
typedef struct XVisibilityEvent;
typedef struct XCreateWindowEvent;
typedef struct XDestroyWindowEvent;
typedef struct XUnmapEvent;
typedef struct XMapEvent;
typedef struct XMapRequestEvent;
typedef struct XReparentEvent;
typedef struct XConfigureEvent;
typedef struct XGravityEvent;
typedef struct XResizeRequestEvent;
typedef struct XConfigureRequestEvent;
typedef struct XCirculateEvent;
typedef struct XCirculateRequestEvent;
typedef struct XPropertyEvent;
typedef struct XSelectionClearEvent;
typedef struct XSelectionRequestEvent;
typedef struct XSelectionEvent;
typedef struct XColormapEvent;
typedef union XClientMessageEvent;
typedef struct XMappingEvent;
typedef struct XErrorEvent;
typedef struct XAnyEvent;

typedef union _XEvent
{
  int type;
  XAnyEvent xany;
  XKeyEvent xkey;
  XButtonEvent xbutton;
  XMotionEvent xmotion;
  XCrossingEvent xcrossing;
  XFocusChangeEvent xfocus;
  XExposeEvent xexpose;
  XGraphicsExposeEvent xgraphicsexpose;
  XNoExposeEvent xnoexpose;
  XVisibilityEvent xvisibility;
  XCreateWindowEvent xcreatewindow;
  XDestroyWindowEvent xdestroywindow;
  XUnmapEvent xunmap;
  XMapEvent xmap;
  XMapRequestEvent xmaprequest;
  XReparentEvent xreparent;
  XConfigureEvent xconfigure;
  XGravityEvent xgravity;
  XResizeRequestEvent xresizerequest;
  XConfigureRequestEvent xconfigurerequest;
  XCirculateEvent xcirculate;
  XCirculateRequestEvent xcirculaterequest;
  XPropertyEvent xproperty;
  XSelectionClearEvent xselectionclear;
  XSelectionRequestEvent xselectionrequest;
  XSelectionEvent xselection;
  XColormapEvent xcolormap;
  XClientMessageEvent xclient;
  XMappingEvent xmapping;
  XErrorEvent xerror;
  XKeymapEvent xkeymap;
  long pad[1];
}
XEvent;

typedef struct XCharStruct;

typedef struct XFontProp;
typedef struct XFontStruct;
typedef struct XFontSetExtents;

typedef struct XTextItem;
typedef struct XChar2b;
typedef struct XTextItem16;

typedef union XEDataObject;

typedef struct _XOM *XOM;
typedef struct _XOC *XOC;
typedef struct _XOC *XFontSet;

typedef struct XmbTextItem;
typedef struct XwcTextItem;

typedef struct _XIM *XIM;
typedef struct _XIC *XIC;
typedef void (*XIDProc) (void);
15.2.5. X11/Xutil.h

typedef struct XSizeHints;
typedef struct XWMHints;
typedef struct XTextProperty;
typedef struct XIconSize;
typedef struct XClassHint;
typedef struct _XComposeStatus
{
  XPointer compose_ptr;
  int chars_matched;
}
XComposeStatus;
typedef struct _XRegion *Region;
typedef struct XVisualInfo;
typedef struct XStandardColormap;
typedef int XContext;
typedef enum XICCEncodingStyle;
15.3. Interfaces for libXext
Table 15-3. libXext Definition
Library:	libXext	
SONAME:	libXext.so.6	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
Double Buffer Extension Library2	
X Display Power Management Signaling (DPMS) Extension, Library Specification3	
Security Extension Specification, Version 7.14	
X Nonrectangular Window Shape Extension Library Version 1.05	
MIT-SHM--The MIT Shared Memory Extension6	
X Synchronization Extension Library7	

15.3.1. X Shape Extension
Table 15-4. libXext - X Shape Extension Function Interfaces
XShapeCombineMask5	XShapeCombineShape5	XShapeOffsetShape5	XShapeQueryVersion5	
XShapeCombineRectangles5	XShapeGetRectangles5	XShapeQueryExtension5	XShapeSelectInput5	
XShapeCombineRegion5	XShapeInputSelected5	XShapeQueryExtents5	

15.3.2. X Display Power Management Signaling Extension
Table 15-5. libXext - X Display Power Management Signaling Extension Function Interfaces
DPMSCapable3	DPMSForceLevel3	DPMSInfo3	
	
DPMSDisable3	DPMSGetTimeouts3	DPMSQueryExtension3	
	
DPMSEnable3	DPMSGetVersion3	DPMSSetTimeouts3	

15.3.3. X Shared Memory Extensions
Table 15-6. libXext - X Shared Memory Extensions Function Interfaces
XShmAttach6	XShmDetach6	XShmPixmapFormat6	XShmQueryVersion6	
XShmCreateImage6	XShmGetEventBase6	XShmPutImage6	
	
XShmCreatePixmap6	XShmGetImage6	XShmQueryExtension6	

15.3.4. MIT-MISC Extension
15.3.5. X Synchronization Extension
Table 15-7. libXext - X Synchronization Extension Function Interfaces
XSyncAwait7	XSyncGetPriority7	XSyncQueryCounter7	XSyncValueHigh327	
XSyncChangeAlarm7	XSyncInitialize7	XSyncQueryExtension7	XSyncValueIsNegative7	
XSyncChangeCounter7	XSyncIntToValue7	XSyncSetCounter7	XSyncValueIsPositive7	
XSyncCreateAlarm7	XSyncIntsToValue7	XSyncSetPriority7	XSyncValueIsZero7	
XSyncCreateCounter7	XSyncListSystemCounters7	XSyncValueAdd7	XSyncValueLessOrEqual7	
XSyncDestroyAlarm7	XSyncMaxValue7	XSyncValueEqual7	XSyncValueLessThan7	
XSyncDestroyCounter7	XSyncMinValue7	XSyncValueGreaterOrEqual7	XSyncValueLow327	
XSyncFreeSystemCounterList7	XSyncQueryAlarm7	XSyncValueGreaterThan7	XSyncValueSubtract7	

15.3.6. X Security Extension
Table 15-8. libXext - X Security Extension Function Interfaces
XSecurityAllocXauth4	XSecurityGenerateAuthorization4	XSecurityRevokeAuthorization4	
	
XSecurityFreeXauth4	XSecurityQueryExtension4	

15.3.7. X Double Buffer Extension
Table 15-9. libXext - X Double Buffer Extension Function Interfaces
XdbeAllocateBackBufferName2	XdbeEndIdiom2	XdbeGetVisualInfo2	
	
XdbeBeginIdiom2	XdbeFreeVisualInfo2	XdbeQueryExtension2	
	
XdbeDeallocateBackBufferName2	XdbeGetBackBufferAttributes2	XdbeSwapBuffers2	

15.4. Data Definitions for libXext
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
15.4.1. X11/extensions/security.h

typedef unsigned long XSecurityAuthorization;
typedef struct
{
  unsigned int timeout;
  unsigned int trust_level;
  XID group;
  long event_mask;
}
XSecurityAuthorizationAttributes;
15.4.2. X11/extensions/sync.h

typedef struct _XSyncSystemCounter
{
  char *name;
  XSyncCounter counter;
  XSyncValue resolution;
}
XSyncSystemCounter;
typedef struct
{
  XSyncCounter counter;
  XSyncValueType value_type;
  XSyncValue wait_value;
  XSyncTestType test_type;
}
XSyncTrigger;
typedef struct
{
  XSyncTrigger trigger;
  XSyncValue event_threshold;
}
XSyncWaitCondition;
typedef struct
{
  XSyncTrigger trigger;
  XSyncValue delta;
  int events;
  XSyncAlarmState state;
}
XSyncAlarmAttributes;

typedef XID XSyncCounter;
typedef XID XSyncAlarm;
typedef struct _XSyncValue
{
  int hi;
  unsigned int lo;
}
XSyncValue;
typedef enum
{
  XSyncAbsolute, XSyncRelative
}
XSyncValueType;
typedef enum
{
  XSyncPositiveTransition, XSyncNegativeTransition, XSyncPositiveComparison,
    XSyncNegativeComparison
}
XSyncTestType;
typedef enum
{
  XSyncAlarmActive, XSyncAlarmInactive, XSyncAlarmDestroyed
}
XSyncAlarmState;
15.5. Interfaces for libSM
Table 15-10. libSM Definition
Library:	libSM	
SONAME:	libSM.so.6	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
X11R6.4 X Session Management Library8	

15.5.1. Session Management Functions
Table 15-11. libSM - Session Management Functions Function Interfaces
SmFreeProperty8	SmcOpenConnection8	SmsCleanUp8	SmsRegisterClientReply8	
SmFreeReasons8	SmcProtocolRevision8	SmsClientHostName8	SmsReturnProperties8	
SmcClientID8	SmcProtocolVersion8	SmsClientID8	SmsSaveComplete8	
SmcCloseConnection8	SmcRelease8	SmsDie8	SmsSaveYourself8	
SmcDeleteProperties8	SmcRequestSaveYourself8	SmsGenerateClientID8	SmsSaveYourselfPhase28	
SmcGetIceConnection8	SmcRequestSaveYourselfPhase28	SmsGetIceConnection8	SmsSetErrorHandler8	
SmcGetProperties8	SmcSaveYourselfDone8	SmsInitialize8	SmsShutdownCancelled8	
SmcInteractDone8	SmcSetErrorHandler8	SmsInteract8	
	
SmcInteractRequest8	SmcSetProperties8	SmsProtocolRevision8	
	
SmcModifyCallbacks8	SmcVendor8	SmsProtocolVersion8	

15.6. Data Definitions for libSM
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
15.6.1. X11/SM/SMlib.h

typedef IcePointer SmPointer;
typedef struct _SmcConn *SmcConn;
typedef struct _SmsConn *SmsConn;

typedef struct
{
  int length;
  SmPointer value;
}
SmPropValue;
typedef struct
{
  char *name;
  char *type;
  int num_vals;
  SmPropValue *vals;
}
SmProp;

typedef enum
{
  SmcClosedNow, SmcClosedASAP, SmcConnectionInUse
}
SmcCloseStatus;

typedef void (*SmcSaveYourselfPhase2Proc) (void);
typedef void (*SmcInteractProc) (void);
typedef void (*SmcDieProc) (void);
typedef void (*SmcShutdownCancelledProc) (void);
typedef void (*SmcSaveCompleteProc) (void);
typedef void (*SmcPropReplyProc) (void);

typedef struct
{
  SmcShutdownCancelledProc callback;
  SmPointer client_data;
}
SmcCallbacks;

typedef void (*SmsSetPropertiesProc) (void);
typedef void (*SmsDeletePropertiesProc) (void);
typedef void (*SmsGetPropertiesProc) (void);

typedef struct
{
  SmsGetPropertiesProc callback;
  SmPointer manager_data;
}
SmsCallbacks;

typedef int (*SmsNewClientProc) (void);

typedef void (*SmcErrorHandler) (void);
typedef void (*SmsErrorHandler) (void);
15.7. Interfaces for libICE
Table 15-12. libICE Definition
Library:	libICE	
SONAME:	libICE.so.6	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
X11R6.4 X Inter-Client Exchange (ICE) Protocol9	

15.7.1. ICE Functions
Table 15-13. libICE - ICE Functions Function Interfaces
IceAcceptConnection9	IceFreeAuthFileEntry9	IceListenForWellKnownConnections9	IceRemoveConnectionWatch9	
IceAddConnectionWatch9	IceFreeListenObjs9	IceLockAuthFile9	IceSetErrorHandler9	
IceAllocScratch9	IceGenerateMagicCookie9	IceOpenConnection9	IceSetHostBasedAuthProc9	
IceAppLockConn9	IceGetAuthFileEntry9	IcePing9	IceSetIOErrorHandler9	
IceAppUnlockConn9	IceGetConnectionContext9	IceProcessMessages9	IceSetPaAuthData9	
IceAuthFileName9	IceGetInBufSize9	IceProtocolRevision9	IceSetShutdownNegotiation9	
IceCheckShutdownNegotiation9	IceGetListenConnectionNumber9	IceProtocolSetup9	IceSwapping9	
IceCloseConnection9	IceGetListenConnectionString9	IceProtocolShutdown9	IceUnlockAuthFile9	
IceComposeNetworkIdList9	IceGetOutBufSize9	IceProtocolVersion9	IceVendor9	
IceConnectionNumber9	IceInitThreads9	IceReadAuthFileEntry9	IceWriteAuthFileEntry9	
IceConnectionStatus9	IceLastReceivedSequenceNumber9	IceRegisterForProtocolReply9	
	
IceConnectionString9	IceLastSentSequenceNumber9	IceRegisterForProtocolSetup9	
	
IceFlush9	IceListenForConnections9	IceRelease9	

15.8. Data Definitions for libICE
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
15.8.1. X11/ICE/ICElib.h

typedef void *IcePointer;
typedef enum
{
  IcePoAuthHaveReply, IcePoAuthRejected, IcePoAuthFailed, IcePoAuthDoneCleanup
}
IcePoAuthStatus;
typedef enum
{
  IcePaAuthContinue, IcePaAuthAccepted, IcePaAuthRejected, IcePaAuthFailed
}
IcePaAuthStatus;
typedef enum
{
  IceConnectPending, IceConnectAccepted, IceConnectRejected, IceConnectIOError
}
IceConnectStatus;
typedef enum
{
  IceProtocolSetupSuccess, IceProtocolSetupFailure, IceProtocolSetupIOError,
    IceProtocolAlreadyActive
}
IceProtocolSetupStatus;
typedef enum
{
  IceAcceptSuccess, IceAcceptFailure, IceAcceptBadMalloc
}
IceAcceptStatus;
typedef enum
{
  IceClosedNow, IceClosedASAP, IceConnectionInUse,
    IceStartedShutdownNegotiation
}
IceCloseStatus;
typedef enum
{
  IceProcessMessagesSuccess, IceProcessMessagesIOError,
    IceProcessMessagesConnectionClosed
}
IceProcessMessagesStatus;

typedef struct
{
  unsigned long sequence_of_request;
  int major_opcode_of_request;
  int minor_opcode_of_request;
  IcePointer reply;
}
IceReplyWaitInfo;

typedef struct _IceConn *IceConn;
typedef struct _IceListenObj *IceListenObj;

typedef void (*IceWatchProc) (void);
typedef void (*IcePoProcessMsgProc) (void);
typedef void (*IcePaProcessMsgProc) (void);
typedef IcePoAuthStatus (*IcePoAuthProc) (void);
typedef IcePaAuthStatus (*IcePaAuthProc) (void);
typedef int (*IceHostBasedAuthProc) (void);
typedef int (*IceProtocolSetupProc) (void);
typedef void (*IceProtocolActivateProc) (void);
typedef void (*IceIOErrorProc) (void);
typedef void (*IcePingReplyProc) (void);
typedef void (*IceErrorHandler) (void);
typedef void (*IceIOErrorHandler) (void);

typedef struct
{
  int major_version;
  int minor_version;
  IcePoProcessMsgProc process_msg_proc;
}
IcePoVersionRec;
typedef struct
{
  int major_version;
  int minor_version;
  IcePaProcessMsgProc process_msg_proc;
}
IcePaVersionRec;
15.8.2. X11/ICE/ICEutil.h

typedef struct
{
  char *protocol_name;
  unsigned short protocol_data_length;
  char *protocol_data;
  char *network_id;
  char *auth_name;
  unsigned short auth_data_length;
  char *auth_data;
}
IceAuthFileEntry;
typedef struct
{
  char *protocol_name;
  char *network_id;
  char *auth_name;
  unsigned short auth_data_length;
  char *auth_data;
}
IceAuthDataEntry;
15.9. Interfaces for libXt
Table 15-14. libXt Definition
Library:	libXt	
SONAME:	libXt.so.6	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
Linux Standard Base10	
X11R6.4 X Toolkit Intrinsics11	

15.9.1. X Toolkit
Table 15-15. libXt - X Toolkit Function Interfaces
XtAddActions11	XtCvtColorToPixel11	XtGrabKeyboard11	XtRemoveEventHandler11	
XtAddCallback11	XtCvtIntToBool11	XtGrabPointer11	XtRemoveEventTypeHandler11	
XtAddCallbacks11	XtCvtIntToBoolean11	XtHasCallbacks11	XtRemoveGrab11	
XtAddConverter11	XtCvtIntToColor11	XtHooksOfDisplay11	XtRemoveInput11	
XtAddEventHandler11	XtCvtIntToFloat11	XtInitialize11	XtRemoveRawEventHandler11	
XtAddExposureToRegion11	XtCvtIntToFont11	XtInitializeWidgetClass11	XtRemoveSignal11	
XtAddGrab11	XtCvtIntToPixel11	XtInsertEventHandler11	XtRemoveTimeOut11	
XtAddInput11	XtCvtIntToPixmap11	XtInsertEventTypeHandler11	XtRemoveWorkProc11	
XtAddRawEventHandler11	XtCvtIntToShort11	XtInsertRawEventHandler11	XtReservePropertyAtom11	
XtAddSignal11	XtCvtIntToUnsignedChar11	XtInstallAccelerators11	XtResizeWidget11	
XtAddTimeOut11	XtCvtStringToAcceleratorTable11	XtInstallAllAccelerators11	XtResizeWindow11	
XtAddWorkProc11	XtCvtStringToAtom11	XtIsApplicationShell11	XtResolvePathname11	
XtAllocateGC11	XtCvtStringToBool11	XtIsComposite11	XtScreen11	
XtAppAddActionHook11	XtCvtStringToBoolean11	XtIsConstraint11	XtScreenDatabase11	
XtAppAddActions11	XtCvtStringToCommandArgArray11	XtIsManaged11	XtScreenOfObject11	
XtAppAddBlockHook11	XtCvtStringToCursor11	XtIsObject11	XtSendSelectionRequest11	
XtAppAddConverter11	XtCvtStringToDimension11	XtIsOverrideShell11	XtSessionGetToken11	
XtAppAddInput11	XtCvtStringToDirectoryString11	XtIsRealized11	XtSessionReturnToken11	
XtAppAddSignal11	XtCvtStringToDisplay11	XtIsRectObj11	XtSetErrorHandler11	
XtAppAddTimeOut11	XtCvtStringToFile11	XtIsSensitive11	XtSetErrorMsgHandler11	
XtAppAddWorkProc11	XtCvtStringToFloat11	XtIsSessionShell11	XtSetEventDispatcher11	
XtAppCreateShell11	XtCvtStringToFont11	XtIsShell11	XtSetKeyTranslator11	
XtAppError11	XtCvtStringToFontSet11	XtIsSubclass11	XtSetKeyboardFocus11	
XtAppErrorMsg11	XtCvtStringToFontStruct11	XtIsTopLevelShell11	XtSetLanguageProc11	
XtAppGetErrorDatabase11	XtCvtStringToGravity11	XtIsTransientShell11	XtSetMappedWhenManaged11	
XtAppGetErrorDatabaseText11	XtCvtStringToInitialState11	XtIsVendorShell11	XtSetMultiClickTime11	
XtAppGetExitFlag11	XtCvtStringToInt11	XtIsWMShell11	XtSetSelectionParameters11	
XtAppGetSelectionTimeout11	XtCvtStringToPixel11	XtIsWidget11	XtSetSelectionTimeout11	
XtAppInitialize11	XtCvtStringToRestartStyle11	XtKeysymToKeycodeList11	XtSetSensitive11	
XtAppLock11	XtCvtStringToShort11	XtLastEventProcessed11	XtSetSubvalues11	
XtAppMainLoop11	XtCvtStringToTranslationTable11	XtLastTimestampProcessed11	XtSetTypeConverter11	
XtAppNextEvent11	XtCvtStringToUnsignedChar11	XtMainLoop11	XtSetValues11	
XtAppPeekEvent11	XtCvtStringToVisual11	XtMakeGeometryRequest11	XtSetWMColormapWindows11	
XtAppPending11	XtDatabase11	XtMakeResizeRequest11	XtSetWarningHandler11	
XtAppProcessEvent11	XtDestroyApplicationContext11	XtMalloc11	XtSetWarningMsgHandler11	
XtAppReleaseCacheRefs11	XtDestroyGC11	XtManageChild11	XtStringConversionWarning11	
XtAppSetErrorHandler11	XtDestroyWidget11	XtManageChildren11	XtSuperclass11	
XtAppSetErrorMsgHandler11	XtDirectConvert11	XtMapWidget11	XtToolkitInitialize11	
XtAppSetExitFlag11	XtDisownSelection11	XtMenuPopupAction11	XtToolkitThreadInitialize11	
XtAppSetFallbackResources11	XtDispatchEvent11	XtMergeArgLists11	XtTranslateCoords11	
XtAppSetSelectionTimeout11	XtDispatchEventToWidget11	XtMoveWidget11	XtTranslateKey11	
XtAppSetTypeConverter11	XtDisplay11	XtName11	XtTranslateKeycode11	
XtAppSetWarningHandler11	XtDisplayInitialize11	XtNameToWidget11	XtUngrabButton11	
XtAppSetWarningMsgHandler11	XtDisplayOfObject11	XtNewString11	XtUngrabKey11	
XtAppUnlock11	XtDisplayStringConversionWarning11	XtNextEvent11	XtUngrabKeyboard11	
XtAppWarning11	XtDisplayToApplicationContext11	XtNoticeSignal11	XtUngrabPointer11	
XtAppWarningMsg11	XtError11	XtOpenApplication11	XtUninstallTranslations11	
XtAugmentTranslations11	XtErrorMsg11	XtOpenDisplay11	XtUnmanageChild11	
XtBuildEventMask11	XtFindFile11	XtOverrideTranslations11	XtUnmanageChildren11	
XtCallAcceptFocus11	XtFree11	XtOwnSelection11	XtUnmapWidget11	
XtCallActionProc11	XtGetActionKeysym11	XtOwnSelectionIncremental11	XtUnrealizeWidget11	
XtCallCallbackList11	XtGetActionList11	XtParent11	XtUnregisterDrawable11	
XtCallCallbacks11	XtGetApplicationNameAndClass11	XtParseAcceleratorTable11	XtVaAppCreateShell11	
XtCallConverter11	XtGetApplicationResources11	XtParseTranslationTable11	XtVaAppInitialize11	
XtCallbackExclusive11	XtGetClassExtension11	XtPeekEvent11	XtVaCreateArgsList11	
XtCallbackNone11	XtGetConstraintResourceList11	XtPending11	XtVaCreateManagedWidget11	
XtCallbackNonexclusive11	XtGetDisplays11	XtPopdown11	XtVaCreatePopupShell11	
XtCallbackPopdown11	XtGetErrorDatabase11	XtPopup11	XtVaCreateWidget11	
XtCallbackReleaseCacheRef11	XtGetErrorDatabaseText11	XtPopupSpringLoaded11	XtVaGetApplicationResources11	
XtCallbackReleaseCacheRefList11	XtGetGC11	XtProcessEvent11	XtVaGetSubresources11	
XtCalloc11	XtGetKeyboardFocusWidget11	XtProcessLock11	XtVaGetSubvalues11	
XtCancelSelectionRequest11	XtGetKeysymTable11	XtProcessUnlock11	XtVaGetValues11	
XtChangeManagedSet11	XtGetMultiClickTime11	XtQueryGeometry11	XtVaOpenApplication11	
XtClass11	XtGetResourceList11	XtRealizeWidget11	XtVaSetSubvalues11	
XtCloseDisplay11	XtGetSelectionParameters11	XtRealloc11	XtVaSetValues11	
XtConfigureWidget11	XtGetSelectionRequest11	XtRegisterCaseConverter11	XtWarning11	
XtConvert11	XtGetSelectionTimeout11	XtRegisterDrawable11	XtWarningMsg11	
XtConvertAndStore11	XtGetSelectionValue11	XtRegisterExtensionSelector11	XtWidgetToApplicationContext11	
XtConvertCase11	XtGetSelectionValueIncremental11	XtRegisterGrabAction11	XtWindow11	
XtCreateApplicationContext11	XtGetSelectionValues11	XtReleaseGC11	XtWindowOfObject11	
XtCreateApplicationShell11	XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental11	XtReleasePropertyAtom11	XtWindowToWidget11	
XtCreateManagedWidget11	XtGetSubresources11	XtRemoveActionHook11	_XtCheckSubclassFlag11	
XtCreatePopupShell11	XtGetSubvalues11	XtRemoveAllCallbacks11	_XtCopyFromArg10	
XtCreateSelectionRequest11	XtGetValues11	XtRemoveBlockHook11	_XtInherit10	
XtCreateWidget11	XtGrabButton11	XtRemoveCallback11	_XtIsSubclassOf10	
XtCreateWindow11	XtGrabKey11	XtRemoveCallbacks11	

Table 15-16. libXt - X Toolkit Data Interfaces
XtCXtToolkitError11	constraintClassRec11	rectObjClass11	topLevelShellWidgetClass11	
XtShellStrings11	constraintWidgetClass11	rectObjClassRec11	transientShellClassRec11	
XtStrings11	coreWidgetClass11	sessionShellClassRec11	transientShellWidgetClass11	
_XtInheritTranslations10	objectClass11	sessionShellWidgetClass11	widgetClass11	
applicationShellWidgetClass11	objectClassRec11	shellClassRec11	widgetClassRec11	
compositeClassRec11	overrideShellClassRec11	shellWidgetClass11	wmShellClassRec11	
compositeWidgetClass11	overrideShellWidgetClass11	topLevelShellClassRec11	wmShellWidgetClass11	

15.10. Data Definitions for libXt
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
15.10.1. X11/Composite.h

typedef Cardinal (*XtOrderProc) (Widget child);
typedef void (*XtDoChangeProc) (Widget composite_parent,
                                WidgetList unmanage_children,
                                Cardinal * num_unmanage_children,
                                WidgetList manage_children,
                                Cardinal * num_manage_children,
                                XtPointer client_data);
15.10.2. X11/CompositeP.h

#define XtInheritGeometryManager        ((XtGeometryHandler) _XtInherit)
#define XtInheritDeleteChild    ((XtWidgetProc) _XtInherit)
#define XtInheritInsertChild    ((XtWidgetProc) _XtInherit)
#define XtCompositeExtensionVersion     2L

typedef struct _CompositeClassPart CompositeClassPart;

typedef struct _CompositeClassRec CompositeClassRec;
15.10.3. X11/ConstrainP.h

#define XtConstraintExtensionVersion    1L

typedef struct _ConstraintPart ConstraintPart;
typedef struct _ConstraintClassPart ConstraintClassPart;
typedef struct _ConstraintClassRec
{
  CoreClassPart core_class;
  CompositeClassPart composite_class;
  ConstraintClassPart constraint_class;
}
ConstraintClassRec;
15.10.4. X11/Constraint.h

typedef struct _ConstraintClassRec *ConstraintWidgetClass;
15.10.5. X11/Intrinsic.h

typedef struct _WidgetRec *Widget;
typedef Widget *WidgetList;
typedef struct _WidgetClassRec *WidgetClass;
typedef struct _CompositeRec *CompositeWidget;
typedef struct _XtActionsRec *XtActionList;
typedef struct _XtEventRec *XtEventTable;
typedef struct _XtAppStruct *XtAppContext;
typedef unsigned long XtValueMask;
typedef unsigned long XtIntervalId;
typedef unsigned long XtInputId;
typedef unsigned long XtSignalId;
typedef unsigned int XtGeometryMask;
typedef unsigned long XtGCMask;
typedef unsigned long Pixel;
typedef int XtCacheType;
typedef char Boolean;
typedef long XtArgVal;
typedef unsigned char XtEnum;
typedef unsigned int Cardinal;
typedef unsigned short Dimension;
typedef short Position;
typedef void *XtPointer;
typedef XtPointer Opaque;
15.10.6. X11/ObjectP.h

#define XtInheritAllocate       ((XtAllocateProc) _XtInherit)
#define XtInheritDeallocate     ((XtDeallocateProc) _XtInherit)
#define XtObjectExtensionVersion        1L

typedef struct _ObjectPart
{
  Widget self;
  WidgetClass widget_class;
  Widget parent;
  XrmName xrm_name;
  Boolean being_destroyed;
  XtCallbackList destroy_callbacks;
  XtPointer constraints;
}
ObjectPart;

typedef struct _ObjectRec
{
  ObjectPart object;
}
ObjectRec;

typedef struct _ObjectClassPart
{
  WidgetClass superclass;
  String class_name;
  Cardinal widget_size;
  XtProc class_initialize;
  XtWidgetClassProc class_part_initialize;
  XtEnum class_inited;
  XtInitProc initialize;
  XtArgsProc initialize_hook;
  XtProc obj1;
  XtProc obj2;
  XtProc obj3;
  XtResourceList resources;
  Cardinal num_resources;
  XrmClass xrm_class;
  Boolean obj4;
  XtEnum obj5;
  Boolean obj6;
  Boolean obj7;
  XtWidgetProc destroy;
  XtProc obj8;
  XtProc obj9;
  XtSetValuesFunc set_values;
  XtArgsFunc set_values_hook;
  XtProc obj10;
  XtArgsProc get_values_hook;
  XtProc obj11;
  XtVersionType version;
  XtPointer callback_private;
  String obj12;
  XtProc obj13;
  XtProc obj14;
  XtPointer extension;
}
ObjectClassPart;

struct
{
  XtPointer next_extension;
  XrmQuark record_type;
  long version;
  Cardinal record_size;
  XtAllocateProc allocate;
  XtDeallocateProc deallocate;
}
 ;

typedef struct
{
  XtPointer next_extension;
  XrmQuark record_type;
  long version;
  Cardinal record_size;
  XtAllocateProc allocate;
  XtDeallocateProc deallocate;
}
ObjectClassExtensionRec;
typedef struct
{
  XtPointer next_extension;
  XrmQuark record_type;
  long version;
  Cardinal record_size;
  XtAllocateProc allocate;
  XtDeallocateProc deallocate;
}
 *ObjectClassExtension;

typedef struct _ObjectClassRec
{
  ObjectClassPart object_class;
}
ObjectClassRec;
15.11. Interfaces Definitions for libXt
_XtCopyFromArg
Name
_XtCopyFromArg — Copy "size" bytes from src to dst. 
Synopsis
void _XtCopyFromArg(XtArgVal src,char* dst,unsigned int size);
Description
The _XtCopyFromArg() function copies "size" bytes from src to dst. This is an internal X function call.
_XtInherit
Name
_XtInherit — inheritance operation.
Synopsis
#include <IntrinsicP.h>

extern void _XtInherit(
#if NeedFunctionPrototypes
    void
#endif
);
Description
_XtInherit() is a procedure that issues an error message if it is actually called.
_XtInheritTranslations
Name
_XtInheritTranslations — an inheritance constant
Synopsis
#include <CoreP.h>

externalref int _XtInheritTranslations;
Description
_XtInheritTranslations is an inheritance constant.
_XtIsSubclassOf
Name
_XtIsSubclassOf — determine if Widget is a subclass of WidgetClass.
Synopsis
#include <Intrinsic.h>

extern Boolean _XtIsSubclassOf(
    Widget              /* object*  /,
    WidgetClass         /* widget_class */,
    WidgetClass         /* flag_class */,
    _XtXtEnum           /* type_flag */,
);

Description
Determine if Widget(object) is a subclass of WidgetClass(widget_class).
15.12. Interfaces for libGL
Table 15-17. libGL Definition
Library:	libGL	
SONAME:	libGL.so.1	

The behavior of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following standards.
OpenGL® Application Binary Interface for Linux12	

15.12.1. GL X interface
Table 15-18. libGL - GL X interface Function Interfaces
glXChooseVisual12	glXDestroyGLXPixmap12	glXGetCurrentDisplay12	glXMakeContextCurrent12	glXSelectEvent12	
glXCopyContext12	glXDestroyPbuffer12	glXGetCurrentDrawable12	glXMakeCurrent12	glXSwapBuffers12	
glXCreateContext12	glXDestroyPixmap12	glXGetCurrentReadDrawable12	glXQueryContext12	glXUseXFont12	
glXCreateGLXPixmap12	glXDestroyWindow12	glXGetFBConfigAttrib12	glXQueryContextInfoEXT12	glXWaitGL12	
glXCreateNewContext12	glXFreeContextEXT12	glXGetProcAddressARB12	glXQueryDrawable12	glXWaitX12	
glXCreatePbuffer12	glXGetClientString12	glXGetSelectedEvent12	glXQueryExtension12	
	
glXCreatePixmap12	glXGetConfig12	glXGetVisualFromFBConfig12	glXQueryExtensionsString12	
	
glXCreateWindow12	glXGetContextIDEXT12	glXImportContextEXT12	glXQueryServerString12	
	
glXDestroyContext12	glXGetCurrentContext12	glXIsDirect12	glXQueryVersion12	

15.12.2. OpenGL
Table 15-19. libGL - OpenGL Function Interfaces
glAccum12	glDisable12	glIndexPointer12	glNormal3bv12	glTexCoord1dv12	
glActiveTextureARB12	glDisableClientState12	glIndexd12	glNormal3d12	glTexCoord1f12	
glAlphaFunc12	glDrawArrays12	glIndexdv12	glNormal3dv12	glTexCoord1fv12	
glAreTexturesResident12	glDrawBuffer12	glIndexf12	glNormal3f12	glTexCoord1i12	
glArrayElement12	glDrawElements12	glIndexfv12	glNormal3fv12	glTexCoord1iv12	
glBegin12	glDrawPixels12	glIndexi12	glNormal3i12	glTexCoord1s12	
glBindTexture12	glDrawRangeElements12	glIndexiv12	glNormal3iv12	glTexCoord1sv12	
glBitmap12	glEdgeFlag12	glIndexs12	glNormal3s12	glTexCoord2d12	
glBlendColor12	glEdgeFlagPointer12	glIndexsv12	glNormal3sv12	glTexCoord2dv12	
glBlendEquation12	glEdgeFlagv12	glIndexub12	glNormalPointer12	glTexCoord2f12	
glBlendFunc12	glEnable12	glIndexubv12	glOrtho12	glTexCoord2fv12	
glCallList12	glEnableClientState12	glInitNames12	glPassThrough12	glTexCoord2i12	
glCallLists12	glEnd12	glInterleavedArrays12	glPixelMapfv12	glTexCoord2iv12	
glClear12	glEndList12	glIsEnabled12	glPixelMapuiv12	glTexCoord2s12	
glClearAccum12	glEvalCoord1d12	glIsList12	glPixelMapusv12	glTexCoord2sv12	
glClearColor12	glEvalCoord1dv12	glIsTexture12	glPixelStoref12	glTexCoord3d12	
glClearDepth12	glEvalCoord1f12	glLightModelf12	glPixelStorei12	glTexCoord3dv12	
glClearIndex12	glEvalCoord1fv12	glLightModelfv12	glPixelTransferf12	glTexCoord3f12	
glClearStencil12	glEvalCoord2d12	glLightModeli12	glPixelTransferi12	glTexCoord3fv12	
glClientActiveTextureARB12	glEvalCoord2dv12	glLightModeliv12	glPixelZoom12	glTexCoord3i12	
glClipPlane12	glEvalCoord2f12	glLightf12	glPointSize12	glTexCoord3iv12	
glColor3b12	glEvalCoord2fv12	glLightfv12	glPolygonMode12	glTexCoord3s12	
glColor3bv12	glEvalMesh112	glLighti12	glPolygonOffset12	glTexCoord3sv12	
glColor3d12	glEvalMesh212	glLightiv12	glPolygonStipple12	glTexCoord4d12	
glColor3dv12	glEvalPoint112	glLineStipple12	glPopAttrib12	glTexCoord4dv12	
glColor3f12	glEvalPoint212	glLineWidth12	glPopClientAttrib12	glTexCoord4f12	
glColor3fv12	glFeedbackBuffer12	glListBase12	glPopMatrix12	glTexCoord4fv12	
glColor3i12	glFinish12	glLoadIdentity12	glPopName12	glTexCoord4i12	
glColor3iv12	glFlush12	glLoadMatrixd12	glPrioritizeTextures12	glTexCoord4iv12	
glColor3s12	glFogf12	glLoadMatrixf12	glPushAttrib12	glTexCoord4s12	
glColor3sv12	glFogfv12	glLoadName12	glPushClientAttrib12	glTexCoord4sv12	
glColor3ub12	glFogi12	glLogicOp12	glPushMatrix12	glTexCoordPointer12	
glColor3ubv12	glFogiv12	glMap1d12	glPushName12	glTexEnvf12	
glColor3ui12	glFrontFace12	glMap1f12	glRasterPos2d12	glTexEnvfv12	
glColor3uiv12	glFrustum12	glMap2d12	glRasterPos2dv12	glTexEnvi12	
glColor3us12	glGenLists12	glMap2f12	glRasterPos2f12	glTexEnviv12	
glColor3usv12	glGenTextures12	glMapGrid1d12	glRasterPos2fv12	glTexGend12	
glColor4b12	glGetBooleanv12	glMapGrid1f12	glRasterPos2i12	glTexGendv12	
glColor4bv12	glGetClipPlane12	glMapGrid2d12	glRasterPos2iv12	glTexGenf12	
glColor4d12	glGetColorTable12	glMapGrid2f12	glRasterPos2s12	glTexGenfv12	
glColor4dv12	glGetColorTableParameterfv12	glMaterialf12	glRasterPos2sv12	glTexGeni12	
glColor4f12	glGetColorTableParameteriv12	glMaterialfv12	glRasterPos3d12	glTexGeniv12	
glColor4fv12	glGetConvolutionFilter12	glMateriali12	glRasterPos3dv12	glTexImage1D12	
glColor4i12	glGetConvolutionParameterfv12	glMaterialiv12	glRasterPos3f12	glTexImage2D12	
glColor4iv12	glGetConvolutionParameteriv12	glMatrixMode12	glRasterPos3fv12	glTexImage3D12	
glColor4s12	glGetDoublev12	glMinmax12	glRasterPos3i12	glTexParameterf12	
glColor4sv12	glGetError12	glMultMatrixd12	glRasterPos3iv12	glTexParameterfv12	
glColor4ub12	glGetFloatv12	glMultMatrixf12	glRasterPos3s12	glTexParameteri12	
glColor4ubv12	glGetHistogram12	glMultiTexCoord1dARB12	glRasterPos3sv12	glTexParameteriv12	
glColor4ui12	glGetHistogramParameterfv12	glMultiTexCoord1dvARB12	glRasterPos4d12	glTexSubImage1D12	
glColor4uiv12	glGetHistogramParameteriv12	glMultiTexCoord1fARB12	glRasterPos4dv12	glTexSubImage2D12	
glColor4us12	glGetIntegerv12	glMultiTexCoord1fvARB12	glRasterPos4f12	glTexSubImage3D12	
glColor4usv12	glGetLightfv12	glMultiTexCoord1iARB12	glRasterPos4fv12	glTranslated12	
glColorMask12	glGetLightiv12	glMultiTexCoord1ivARB12	glRasterPos4i12	glTranslatef12	
glColorMaterial12	glGetMapdv12	glMultiTexCoord1sARB12	glRasterPos4iv12	glVertex2d12	
glColorPointer12	glGetMapfv12	glMultiTexCoord1svARB12	glRasterPos4s12	glVertex2dv12	
glColorSubTable12	glGetMapiv12	glMultiTexCoord2dARB12	glRasterPos4sv12	glVertex2f12	
glColorTable12	glGetMaterialfv12	glMultiTexCoord2dvARB12	glReadBuffer12	glVertex2fv12	
glColorTableParameterfv12	glGetMaterialiv12	glMultiTexCoord2fARB12	glReadPixels12	glVertex2i12	
glColorTableParameteriv12	glGetMinmax12	glMultiTexCoord2fvARB12	glRectd12	glVertex2iv12	
glConvolutionFilter1D12	glGetMinmaxParameterfv12	glMultiTexCoord2iARB12	glRectdv12	glVertex2s12	
glConvolutionFilter2D12	glGetMinmaxParameteriv12	glMultiTexCoord2ivARB12	glRectf12	glVertex2sv12	
glConvolutionParameterf12	glGetPixelMapfv12	glMultiTexCoord2sARB12	glRectfv12	glVertex3d12	
glConvolutionParameterfv12	glGetPixelMapuiv12	glMultiTexCoord2svARB12	glRecti12	glVertex3dv12	
glConvolutionParameteri12	glGetPixelMapusv12	glMultiTexCoord3dARB12	glRectiv12	glVertex3f12	
glConvolutionParameteriv12	glGetPointerv12	glMultiTexCoord3dvARB12	glRects12	glVertex3fv12	
glCopyColorSubTable12	glGetPolygonStipple12	glMultiTexCoord3fARB12	glRectsv12	glVertex3i12	
glCopyColorTable12	glGetSeparableFilter12	glMultiTexCoord3fvARB12	glRenderMode12	glVertex3iv12	
glCopyConvolutionFilter1D12	glGetString12	glMultiTexCoord3iARB12	glResetHistogram12	glVertex3s12	
glCopyConvolutionFilter2D12	glGetTexEnvfv12	glMultiTexCoord3ivARB12	glResetMinmax12	glVertex3sv12	
glCopyPixels12	glGetTexEnviv12	glMultiTexCoord3sARB12	glRotated12	glVertex4d12	
glCopyTexImage1D12	glGetTexGendv12	glMultiTexCoord3svARB12	glRotatef12	glVertex4dv12	
glCopyTexImage2D12	glGetTexGenfv12	glMultiTexCoord4dARB12	glScaled12	glVertex4f12	
glCopyTexSubImage1D12	glGetTexGeniv12	glMultiTexCoord4dvARB12	glScalef12	glVertex4fv12	
glCopyTexSubImage2D12	glGetTexImage12	glMultiTexCoord4fARB12	glScissor12	glVertex4i12	
glCopyTexSubImage3D12	glGetTexLevelParameterfv12	glMultiTexCoord4fvARB12	glSelectBuffer12	glVertex4iv12	
glCullFace12	glGetTexLevelParameteriv12	glMultiTexCoord4iARB12	glSeparableFilter2D12	glVertex4s12	
glDeleteLists12	glGetTexParameterfv12	glMultiTexCoord4ivARB12	glShadeModel12	glVertex4sv12	
glDeleteTextures12	glGetTexParameteriv12	glMultiTexCoord4sARB12	glStencilFunc12	glVertexPointer12	
glDepthFunc12	glHint12	glMultiTexCoord4svARB12	glStencilMask12	glViewport12	
glDepthMask12	glHistogram12	glNewList12	glStencilOp12	glXChooseFBConfig12	
glDepthRange12	glIndexMask12	glNormal3b12	glTexCoord1d12	

15.13. Data Definitions for libGL
This section contains standard data definitions that describe system data. These definitions are organized into groups that correspond to system headers. This convention is used as a convenience for the reader, and does not imply the existence of these headers, or their content.
ISO C serves as the LSB reference programming language, and data definitions are specified in ISO C format. The C language is used here as a convenient notation. Using a C language description of these data objects does not preclude their use by other programming languages.
15.13.1. GL/gl.h

typedef unsigned int GLenum;
typedef unsigned char GLboolean;
typedef unsigned int GLbitfield;
typedef void GLvoid;
typedef char GLbyte;
typedef short GLshort;
typedef int GLint;
typedef unsigned char GLubyte;
typedef unsigned short GLushort;
typedef unsigned int GLuint;
typedef int GLsizei;
typedef float GLfloat;
typedef float GLclampf;
typedef double GLdouble;
typedef double GLclampd;

#define GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE        0x1401
#define GL_SHORT        0x1402
#define GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT       0x1403
#define GL_INT  0x1404
#define GL_UNSIGNED_INT 0x1405
#define GL_FLOAT        0x1406
#define GL_2_BYTES      0x1407
#define GL_3_BYTES      0x1408
#define GL_4_BYTES      0x1409
#define GL_DOUBLE       0x140A

#define GL_POINTS       0x0000
#define GL_LINES        0x0001
#define GL_LINE_LOOP    0x0002
#define GL_LINE_STRIP   0x0003
#define GL_TRIANGLES    0x0004
#define GL_TRIANGLE_STRIP       0x0005
#define GL_TRIANGLE_FAN 0x0006
#define GL_QUADS        0x0007
#define GL_QUAD_STRIP   0x0008
#define GL_POLYGON      0x0009

#define GL_V2F  0x2A20
#define GL_V3F  0x2A21
#define GL_C4UB_V2F     0x2A22
#define GL_C4UB_V3F     0x2A23
#define GL_C3F_V3F      0x2A24
#define GL_N3F_V3F      0x2A25
#define GL_C4F_N3F_V3F  0x2A26
#define GL_T2F_V3F      0x2A27
#define GL_T4F_V4F      0x2A28
#define GL_T2F_C4UB_V3F 0x2A29
#define GL_T2F_C3F_V3F  0x2A2A
#define GL_T2F_N3F_V3F  0x2A2B
#define GL_T2F_C4F_N3F_V3F      0x2A2C
#define GL_T4F_C4F_N3F_V4F      0x2A2D
#define GL_VERTEX_ARRAY 0x8074
#define GL_NORMAL_ARRAY 0x8075
#define GL_COLOR_ARRAY  0x8076
#define GL_INDEX_ARRAY  0x8077
#define GL_TEXTURE_COORD_ARRAY  0x8078
#define GL_EDGE_FLAG_ARRAY      0x8079
#define GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_SIZE    0x807A
#define GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_TYPE    0x807B
#define GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_STRIDE  0x807C
#define GL_NORMAL_ARRAY_TYPE    0x807E
#define GL_NORMAL_ARRAY_STRIDE  0x807F
#define GL_COLOR_ARRAY_SIZE     0x8081
#define GL_COLOR_ARRAY_TYPE     0x8082
#define GL_COLOR_ARRAY_STRIDE   0x8083
#define GL_INDEX_ARRAY_TYPE     0x8085
#define GL_INDEX_ARRAY_STRIDE   0x8086
#define GL_TEXTURE_COORD_ARRAY_SIZE     0x8088
#define GL_TEXTURE_COORD_ARRAY_TYPE     0x8089
#define GL_TEXTURE_COORD_ARRAY_STRIDE   0x808A
#define GL_EDGE_FLAG_ARRAY_STRIDE       0x808C
#define GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_POINTER 0x808E
#define GL_NORMAL_ARRAY_POINTER 0x808F
#define GL_COLOR_ARRAY_POINTER  0x8090
#define GL_INDEX_ARRAY_POINTER  0x8091
#define GL_TEXTURE_COORD_ARRAY_POINTER  0x8092

#define GL_MATRIX_MODE  0x0BA0
#define GL_MODELVIEW    0x1700
#define GL_PROJECTION   0x1701
#define GL_TEXTURE      0x1702
15.13.2. GL/glx.h

typedef struct __GLXcontextRec *GLXContext;
typedef struct __GLXFBConfigRec *GLXFBConfig;
typedef XID GLXContextID;
typedef XID GLXPixmap;
typedef XID GLXDrawable;
typedef XID GLXPbuffer;
typedef XID GLXWindow;
Notes
1. 	X11R6.4 Xlib - C library
2. 	Double Buffer Extension Library
3. 	X Display Power Management Signaling (DPMS) Extension, Library Specification
4. 	Security Extension Specification, Version 7.1
5. 	X Nonrectangular Window Shape Extension Library Version 1.0
6. 	MIT-SHM--The MIT Shared Memory Extension
7. 	X Synchronization Extension Library
8. 	X11R6.4 X Session Management Library
9. 	X11R6.4 X Inter-Client Exchange (ICE) Protocol
10. 	Linux Standard Base
11. 	X11R6.4 X Toolkit Intrinsics
12. 	OpenGL® Application Binary Interface for Linux

VII. Package Format and Installation

Chapter 16. Software Installation
Applications should be provided in the RPM packaging format as defined in this specification.
Distributions must provide a mechanism for installing applications in this packaging format with some restrictions listed below. 1
16.1. Package File Format
An RPM format file consists of 4 sections, the Lead, Signature, Header, and the Payload. All values are stored in network byte order.
Table 16-1. RPM File Format
Lead	
Signature	
Header	
Payload	

These 4 sections must exist in the order specified. 
The lead section is used to identify the package file.
The signature section is used to verify the integrity, and optionally, the authenticity of the majority of the package file.
The header section contains all available information about the package. Entries such as the package's name, version, and file list, are contained in the header.
The payload section holds the files to be install.
16.1.1. Lead Section
struct rpmlead {
    unsigned char magic[4];
    unsigned char major, minor;
    short type;
    short archnum;
    char name[66];
    short osnum;
    short signature_type;
    char reserved[16];
} ;
magic
 	Value identifying this file as an RPM format file. This value must be "\355\253\356\333".
major
 	Value indicating the major version number of the file format version. This value must be 3.
minor
 	Value indicating the minor revision number of file format version. This value must be 0.
type
 	Value indicating whether this is a source or binary package. This value must be 0 to indicate a binary package.
archnum
 	Value indicating the architecture for which this package is valid. This value is specified in the architecture-specific LSB specification.
name
 	A NUL terminated string that provides the package name. This name must conform with the Package Naming section of this specification.
osnum
 	Value indicating the Operating System for which this package is valid. This value must be 1.
signature_type
 	Value indicating the type of the signature used in the Signature part of the file. This value must be 5.
reserved
 	Reserved space. The value is undefined.
16.1.2. Header Structure
The Header structure is used for both the Signature and Header Sections. A Header Structure consists of 3 parts, a Header record, followed by 1 or more Index records, followed by 0 or more bytes of data associated with the Index records. A Header structure must be aligned to an 8 byte boundary.
Table 16-2. Signature Format
Header Record	
Array of Index Records	
Store of Index Values	

16.1.2.1. Header Record
struct rpmheader {
    unsigned char magic[4];
    unsigned char reserved[4];
    int nindex;
    int hsize;
    } ;
magic
 	Value identifying this record as an RPM header record. This value must be "\216\255\350\001".
reserved
 	Reserved space. This value must be "\000\000\000\000".
nindex
 	The number of Index Records that follow this Header Record. There should be at least 1 Index Record.
hsize
 	The size in bytes of the storage area for the data pointed to by the Index Records.
16.1.2.2. Index Record
struct rpmhdrindex {
    int tag;
    int type;
    int offset;
    int count;
    } ;
tag
 	Value identifying the purpose of the data associated with this Index Record. This value of this field is dependent on the context in which the Index Record is used, and is defined below and in later sections.
type
 	Value identifying the type of the data associated with this Index Record. The possible type values are defined below.
offset
 	Location in the Store of the data associated with this Index Record. This value should between 0 and the value contained in the hsize of the Header Structure.
count
 	Size of the data associated with this Index Record. The count is the number of elements whose size is defined by the type of this Record.
16.1.2.2.1. Index Type Values
The possible values for the type field are defined in this table.
Table 16-3. Index Type values
Type	Value	Size (in bytes)	Alignment	
RPM_NULL_TYPE	0	Not Implemented.	
	
RPM_CHAR_TYPE	1	1	1	
RPM_INT8_TYPE	2	1	1	
RPM_INT16_TYPE	3	2	2	
RPM_INT32_TYPE	4	4	4	
RPM_INT64_TYPE	5	Reserved.	
	
RPM_STRING_TYPE	6	variable, NUL terminated	1	
RPM_BIN_TYPE	7	1	1	
RPM_STRING_ARRAY_TYPE	8	Variable, sequence of NUL terminated strings	1	
RPM_I18NSTRING_TYPE	9	variable, sequence of NUL terminated strings	1	

The string arrays specified for enties of type RPM_STRING_ARRAY_TYPE and RPM_I18NSTRING_TYPE are vectors of strings in a contiguous block of memory, each element separated from its neighbors by a NUL character.
Index records with type RPM_I18NSTRING_TYPE must always have a count of 1. The array entries in an index of type RPM_I18NSTRING_TYPE correspond to the locale names contained in the HDRTAG_HDRI18NTABLE index.
16.1.2.2.2. Index Tag Values
Some values are designated as header private, and may appear in any header structure. These are defined here. Additional values are defined in later sections.
Table 16-4. Header Private Tag Values
Name	Tag Value	Type	Count	Status	
RPMTAG_HEADERSIGNATURES	62	BIN	16	Optional	
RPMTAG_HEADERIMMUTABLE	63	BIN	16	Optional	
RPMTAG_HEADERI18NTABLE	100	STRING_ARRAY	
	Required	

RPMTAG_HEADERSIGNATURES
 	The signature tag differentiates a signature header from a metadata header, and identifies the original contents of the signature header.
RPMTAG_HEADERIMMUTABLE
 	This tag contains an index record which specifies the portion of the Header Record which was used for the calculation of a signature. This data must be preserved or any header-only signature will be invalidated.
RPMTAG_HEADERI18NTABLE
 	Contains a list of locales for which strings are provided in other parts of the package.
Not all Index records defined here will be present in all packages. Each tag value has a status which is defined here.
Required
 	This Index Record must be present.
Optional
 	This Index Record may be present.
Deprecated
 	This Index Record should not be present.
Obsolete
 	This Index Record must not be present.
Reserved
 	This Index Record must not be present.
16.1.2.3. Header Store
The header store contains the values specified by the Index structures. These values are aligned according to their type and padding is used if needed. The store is located immediately following the Index structures.
16.1.3. Signature Section
The Signature section is implemented using the Header structure. The signature section defines the following additional tag values which may be used in the Index structures.
These values exist to provide additional information about the rest of the package.
Table 16-5. Signature Tag Values
Name	Tag Value	Type	Count	Status	
SIGTAG_SIGSIZE	1000	INT32	1	Required	
SIGTAG_PAYLOADSIZE	1007	INT32	1	Optional	

SIGTAG_SIGSIZE
 	This tag specifies the combined size of the Header and Payload sections.
SIGTAG_PAYLOADSIZE
 	This tag specifies the uncompressed size of the Payload archive, including the cpio headers.
These values exist to ensure the integrity of the rest of the package.
Table 16-6. Signature Digest Tag Values
Name	Tag Value	Type	Count	Status	
SIGTAG_MD5	1004	BIN	16	Required	
SIGTAG_SHA1HEADER	1010	STRING	1	Optional	

SIGTAG_MD5
 	This tag specifies the 128-bit MD5 checksum of the combined Header and Archive sections.
SIGTAG_SHA1HEADER
 	This index contains the SHA1 checksum of the entire Header Section, including the Header Record, Index Records and Header store.
These values exist to provide authentication of the package.
Table 16-7. Signature Signing Tag Values
Name	Tag Value	Type	Count	Status	
SIGTAG_PGP	1002	BIN	1	Optional	
SIGTAG_GPG	1005	BIN	1	Optional	
SIGTAG_DSAHEADER	1011	BIN	1	Optional	
SIGTAG_RSAHEADER	1012	BIN	1	Optional	

SIGTAG_PGP
 	This tag specifies the RSA signature of the combined Header and Payload sections. The data is formatted as a Version 3 Signature Packet as specified in RFC 2440: OpenPGP Message Format.
SIGTAG_GPG
 	The tag contains the DSA signature of the combined Header and Payload sections. The data is formatted as a Version 3 Signature Packet as specified in RFC 2440: OpenPGP Message Format.
SIGTAG_DSAHEADER
 	The tag contains the DSA signature of the Header section. The data is formatted as a Version 3 Signature Packet as specified in RFC 2440: OpenPGP Message Format. If this tag is present,then the SIGTAG_GPG tag must also be present.
SIGTAG_RSAHEADER
 	The tag contains the RSA signature of the Header section.The data is formatted as a Version 3 Signature Packet as specified in RFC 2440: OpenPGP Message Format. If this tag is present, then the SIGTAG_PGP must also be present.
16.1.4. Header Section
The Header section is implemented using the Header structure. The Header section defines the following additional tag values which may be used in the Index structures.
16.1.4.1. Package Information
The following tag values are used to indicate information that describes the package as a whole.
Table 16-8. Package Info Tag Values
Name	Tag Value	Type	Count	Status	
RPMTAG_NAME	1000	STRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_VERSION	1001	STRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_RELEASE	1002	STRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_SUMMARY	1004	I18NSTRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_DESCRIPTION	1005	I18NSTRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_SIZE	1009	INT32	1	Required	
RPMTAG_LICENSE	1014	STRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_GROUP	1016	I18NSTRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_OS	1021	STRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_ARCH	1022	STRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_SOURCERPM	1044	STRING	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_ARCHIVESIZE	1046	INT32	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_RPMVERSION	1064	STRING	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_COOKIE	1094	STRING	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_PAYLOADFORMAT	1124	STRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_PAYLOADCOMPRESSOR	1125	STRING	1	Required	
RPMTAG_PAYLOADFLAGS	1126	STRING	1	Required	

RPMTAG_NAME
 	This tag specifies the name of the package.
RPMTAG_VERSION
 	This tag specifies the version of the package.
RPMTAG_RELEASE
 	This tag specifies the release of the package.
RPMTAG_SUMMARY
 	This tag specifies the summary description of the package. The summary value pointed to by this index record contains a one line description of the package.
RPMTAG_DESCRIPTION
 	This tag specifies the description of the package. The description value pointed to by this index record contains a full desription of the package.
RPMTAG_SIZE
 	This tag specifies the sum of the sizes of the regular files in the archive.
RPMTAG_LICENSE
 	This tag specifies the license which applies to this package.
RPMTAG_GROUP
 	This tag specifies the administrative group to which this package belongs.
RPMTAG_OS
 	This tag specifies the OS of the package. The OS value pointed to by this index record must be "linux".
RPMTAG_ARCH
 	This tag specifies the architecture of the package. The architecture value pointed to by this index record is defined in architecture specific LSB specification.
RPMTAG_SOURCERPM
 	This tag specifies the name of the source RPM
RPMTAG_ARCHIVESIZE
 	This tag specifies the uncompressed size of the Payload archive, including the cpio headers.
RPMTAG_RPMVERSION
 	This tag indicates the version of RPM tool used to build this package. The value is unused.
RPMTAG_COOKIE
 	This tag contains an opaque string whose contents are undefined.
RPMTAG_PAYLOADFORMAT
 	This tag specifies the format of the Archive section. The format value pointed to by this index record must be 'cpio'.
RPMTAG_PAYLOADCOMPRESSOR
 	This tag specifies the compression used on the Archive section. The compression value pointed to by this index record must be 'gzip'
RPMTAG_PAYLOADFLAGS
 	This tag indicates the compression level used for the Payload. This value must always be '9'.
16.1.4.2. Installation Information
The following tag values are used to provide information needed during the installation of the package.
Table 16-9. Installation Tag Values
Name	Tag Value	Type	Count	Status	
RPMTAG_PREINPROG	1085	STRING	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_POSTINPROG	1086	STRING	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_PREUNPROG	1087	STRING	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_POSTUNPROG	1088	STRING	1	Optional	

RPMTAG_PREINPROG
 	This tag specifies the name of the intepreter to which the preinstall scriptlet will be passed.
RPMTAG_POSTINPROG
 	This tag specifies the name of the intepreter to which the postinstall scriptlet will be passed.
RPMTAG_PREUNPROG
 	This tag specifies the name of the intepreter to which the preuninstall scriptlet will be passed.
RPMTAG_POSTUNPROG
 	This program specifies the name of the intepreter to which the postuninstall scriptlet will be passed
16.1.4.3. File Information
The following tag values are used to provide information about the files in the payload. This information is provided in the header to allow more efficient access of the information.
Table 16-10. File Info Tag Values
Name	Tag Value	Type	Count	Status	
RPMTAG_OLDFILENAMES	1027	STRING_ARRAY	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_FILESIZES	1028	INT32	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILEMODES	1030	INT16	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILERDEVS	1033	INT16	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILEMTIMES	1034	INT32	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILEMD5S	1035	STRING_ARRAY	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILELINKTOS	1036	STRING_ARRAY	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILEFLAGS	1037	INT32	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILEUSERNAME	1039	STRING_ARRAY	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILEGROUPNAME	1040	STRING_ARRAY	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILEDEVICES	1095	INT32	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILEINODES	1096	INT32	
	Required	
RPMTAG_FILELANGS	1097	STRING_ARRAY	
	Required	
RPMTAG_DIRINDEXES	1116	INT32	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_BASENAMES	1117	STRING_ARRAY	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_DIRNAMES	1118	STRING_ARRAY	
	Optional	

RPMTAG_OLDFILENAMES
 	This tag specifies the filenames when not in a compressed format as determined by the absense of rpmlib(CompressedFileNames) in the RPMTAG_REQUIRENAME index.
RPMTAG_FILESIZES
 	This tag specifies the size of each file in the archive.
RPMTAG_FILEMODES
 	This tag specifies the mode of each file in the archive.
RPMTAG_FILERDEVS
 	This tag specifies the device number from which the file was copied.
RPMTAG_FILEMTIMES
 	This tag specifies the modification time in seconds since the epoch of each file in the archive.
RPMTAG_FILEMD5S
 	This tag specifies the ASCII representation of the MD5 sum of the corresponding file contents. This value is empty if the corresponding archive entry is not a regular file.
RPMTAG_FILELINKTOS
 	The target for a symlink, otherwise NULL.
RPMTAG_FILEFLAGS
 	This tag specifies the bit(s) to classify and control how files are to be installed.
RPMTAG_FILEUSERNAME
 	This tag specifies the owner of the corresponding file.
RPMTAG_FILEGROUPNAME
 	This tag specifies the of the corresponding file.
RPMTAG_FILEDEVICES
 	This tag specifies the 16 bit device number from which the file was copied.
RPMTAG_FILEINODES
 	This tag specifies the inode value from the original file on the build host.
RPMTAG_FILELANGS
 	This tag specifies a per-file locale marker used to install only locale specific subsets of files when the package is installed.
RPMTAG_DIRINDEXES
 	This tag specifies the index into the array provided by the RPMTAG_DIRNAMES Index which contains the directory name for the corresponding filename.
RPMTAG_BASENAMES
 	This tag specifies the base portion of the corresponding filename.
RPMTAG_DIRNAMES
 	This tag specifies the directory portion of the corresponding filename. Each directory name must contain a trailing '/'.
One of RPMTAG_OLDFILENAMES or the tuple RPMTAG_DIRINDEXES,RPMTAG_BASENAMES,RPMTAG_DIRNAMES must be present, but not both.
16.1.4.4. Dependency Information
The following tag values are used to provide information about interdependencies between packages.
Table 16-11. Package Dependency Tag Values
Name	Tag Value	Type	Count	Status	
RPMTAG_PROVIDENAME	1047	STRING_ARRAY	1	Required	
RPMTAG_REQUIREFLAGS	1048	INT32	
	Required	
RPMTAG_REQUIRENAME	1049	STRING_ARRAY	
	Required	
RPMTAG_REQUIREVERSION	1050	STRING_ARRAY	
	Required	
RPMTAG_CONFLICTFLAGS	1053	INT32	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_CONFLICTNAME	1054	STRING_ARRAY	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_CONFLICTVERSION	1055	STRING_ARRAY	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_OBSOLETENAME	1090	STRING_ARRAY	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_PROVIDEFLAGS	1112	INT32	
	Required	
RPMTAG_PROVIDEVERSION	1113	STRING_ARRAY	
	Required	
RPMTAG_OBSOLETEFLAGS	1114	INT32	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_OBSOLETEVERSION	1115	INT32	1	Optional	

RPMTAG_PROVIDENAME
 	This tag indicates the name of the dependency provided by this package.
RPMTAG_REQUIREFLAGS
 	Bits(s) to specify the dependency range and context.
RPMTAG_REQUIRENAME
 	This tag indicates the dependencies for this package.
RPMTAG_REQUIREVERSION
 	This tag indicates the versions associated with the values found in the RPMTAG_REQUIRENAME Index.
RPMTAG_CONFLICTFLAGS
 	Bits(s) to specify the conflict range and context.
RPMTAG_CONFLICTNAME
 	This tag indicates the conflictind dependencies for this package.
RPMTAG_CONFLICTVERSION
 	This tag indicates the versions associated with the values found in the RPMTAG_CONFLICTNAME Index.
RPMTAG_OBSOLETENAME
 	This tag indicates the obsoleted dependencies for this package.
RPMTAG_PROVIDEFLAGS
 	Bits(s) to specify the conflict range and context.
RPMTAG_PROVIDEVERSION
 	This tag indicates the versions associated with the values found in the RPMTAG_PROVIDENAME Index.
RPMTAG_OBSOLETEFLAGS
 	Bits(s) to specify the conflict range and context.
RPMTAG_OBSOLETEVERSION
 	This tag indicates the versions associated with the values found in the RPMTAG_OBSOLETENAME Index.
16.1.4.4.1. Package Dependency Values
The package dependencies are stored in the RPMTAG_REQUIRENAME and RPMTAG_REQUIREVERSION index records. The following values may be used.
Table 16-12. Index Type values
Name	Version	Meaning	Status	
lsb	1.3	Indicates this is an LSB conforming package.	Required	
rpmlib(VersionedDependencies)	3.0.3-1	Indicates That the package contains PMTAG_PROVIDENAME, RPMTAG_OBSOLETENAME or RPMTAG_PREREQ records that have a version associated with them.	Optional	
rpmlib(PayloadFilesHavePrefix)	4.0-1	Indicates the filenames in the Archive have had "." prepended to them.	Optional	
rpmlib(CompressedFileNames)	3.0.4-1	Indicates that the filenames in the Payload are represented in the RPMTAG_DIRINDEXES, RPMTAG_DIRNAME and RPMTAG_BASENAMES indexes.	Optional	
/bin/sh	
	Interpreter usually required for installation scripts.	Optional	

16.1.4.4.2. Package Dependencies Attributes
The package dependency attributes are stored in the RPMTAG_REQUIREFLAGS, RPMTAG_PROVIDEFLAGS and RPMTAG_OBSOLETEFLAGS index records. The following values may be used.
Table 16-13. Package Dependency Attributes
Name	Value	Meaning	
RPMSENSE_LESS	0x02	
	
RPMSENSE_GREATER	0x04	
	
RPMSENSE_EQUAL	0x08	
	
RPMSENSE_PREREQ	0x40	
	
RPMSENSE_INTERP	0x100	
	
RPMSENSE_SCRIPT_PRE	0x200	
	
RPMSENSE_SCRIPT_POST	0x400	
	
RPMSENSE_SCRIPT_PREUN	0x800	
	
RPMSENSE_SCRIPT_POSTUN	0x1000	
	
RPMSENSE_RPMLIB	0x1000000	

16.1.4.5. Other Information
The following tag values are also found in the Header section.
Table 16-14. Other Tag Values
Name	Tag Value	Type	Count	Status	
RPMTAG_BUILDTIME	1006	INT32	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_BUILDHOST	1007	STRING	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_FILEVERIFYFLAGS	1045	INT32	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_CHANGELOGTIME	1080	INT32	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_CHANGELOGNAME	1081	STRING_ARRAY	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_CHANGELOGTEXT	1082	STRING_ARRAY	
	Optional	
RPMTAG_OPTFLAGS	1122	STRING	1	Optional	
RPMTAG_RHNPLATFORM	1131	STRING	1	Deprecated	
RPMTAG_PLATFORM	1132	STRING	1	Optional	

RPMTAG_BUILDTIME
 	This tag specifies the time as seconds since the epoch at which the package was built.
RPMTAG_BUILDHOST
 	This tag specifies the on which which the package was built.
RPMTAG_FILEVERIFYFLAGS
 	This tag specifies the bit(s) to control how files are to be verified after install, specifying which checks should be performed.
RPMTAG_CHANGELOGTIME
 	This tag specifies the Unix time in seconds since the epoch associated with each entry in the Changelog file.
RPMTAG_CHANGELOGNAME
 	This tag specifies the name of who made a change to this package
RPMTAG_CHANGELOGTEXT
 	This tag specifies the changes asssociated with a changelog entry.
RPMTAG_OPTFLAGS
 	This tag indicates additional flags which may have been passed to the compiler when building this package.
RPMTAG_RHNPLATFORM
 	This tag contains an opaque string whose contents are undefined.
RPMTAG_PLATFORM
 	This tag contains an opaque string whose contents are undefined.
16.1.5. Payload Section
The Payload section contains a compressed cpio archive. The format of this section is defined by RFC 1952: GZIP file format specification version 4.3.
When uncompressed, the cpio archive contains a sequence of records for each file. Each record contains a CPIO Header, Filename, Padding, and File Data.
Table 16-15. CPIO File Format
CPIO Header	Header structure as defined below.	
Filename	NUL terminated ASCII string containing the name of the file.	
Padding	0-3 bytes as needed to align the file stream to a 4 byte boundary.	
File data	The contents of the file.	
Padding	0-3 bytes as needed to align the file stream to a 4 byte boundary.	

The CPIO Header uses the following header structure (sometimes referred to as "new ASCII" or "SVR4 cpio"). All numbers are stored as ASCII representations of their hexadecimal value with leading zeros as needed to fill the field. With the exception of c_namesize and the corresponding name string, and c_checksum, all information contained in the CPIO Header is also represented in the Header Section. The values in in the CPIO Header must match the values contained in the Header Section.
struct {
        char    c_magic[6];
        char    c_ino[8];
        char    c_mode[8];
        char    c_uid[8];
        char    c_gid[8];
        char    c_nlink[8];
        char    c_mtime[8];
        char    c_filesize[8];
        char    c_devmajor[8];
        char    c_devminor[8];
        char    c_rdevmajor[8];
        char    c_rdevminor[8];
        char    c_namesize[8];
        char    c_checksum[8];
        };
c_magic
 	Value identifying this cpio format. This value must be "070701".
c_ino
 	This field contains the inode number from the filesystem from which the file was read. This field is ignored when installing a package. This field must match the corresponding value in the RPMTAG_FILEINODES index in the Header section.
c_mode
 	Permission bits of the file. This is an ascii representation of the hexadecimal number representing the bit as defined for the st_mode field of the stat structure defined for the stat function. This field must match the corresponding value in the RPMTAG_FILEMODES index in the Header section.
c_uid
 	Value identifying this owner of this file. This value matches the uid value of the corresponding user in the RPMTAG_FILEUSERNAME as found on the system where this package was built. The username specified in RPMTAG_FILEUSERNAME should take precedence when installing the package.
c_gid
 	Value identifying this group of this file. This value matches the gid value of the corresponding user in the RPMTAG_FILEGROUPNAME as found on the system where this package was built. The groupname specified in RPMTAG_FILEGROUPNAME should take precedence when installing the package.
c_nlink
 	Value identifying the number of links associated with this file. If the value is greater than 1, then this filename will be linked to 1 or more files in this archive that has a matching value for the c_ino, c_devmajor and c_devminor fields.
c_mtime
 	Value identifying the modification time of the file when it was read. This field must match the corresponding value in the RPMTAG_FILEMTIMES index in the Header section.
c_filesize
 	Value identifying the size of the file. This field must match the corresponding value in the RPMTAG_FILESIZES index in the Header section.
c_devmajor
 	The major number of the device containing the file system from which the file was read. With the exception of processing files with c_nlink >1, this field is ignored when installing a package. This field must match the corresponding value in the RPMTAG_FILEDEVICES index in the Header section.
c_devminor
 	The minor number of the device containing the file system from which the file was read. With the exception of processing files with c_nlink >1, this field is ignored when installing a package. This field must match the corresponding value in the RPMTAG_FILEDEVICES index in the Header section.
c_rdevmajor
 	The major number of the raw device containing the file system from which the file was read. This field is ignored when installing a package. This field must match the corresponding value in the RPMTAG_RDEVS index in the Header section.
c_rdevminor
 	The minor number of the raw device containing the file system from which the file was read. This field is ignored when installing a package. This field must match the corresponding value in the RPMTAG_RDEVS index in the Header section.
c_namesize
 	Value identifying the length of the filename, which is located immediately following the CPIO Header structure.
c_checksum
 	Value containing the CRC checksum of the file data. This field is not used, and must contain the value "00000000". This field is ignored when installing a package.
A record with the filename "TRAILER!!!" indicates the last record in the archive.
16.2. Package Script Restrictions
Scripts used as part of the package install and uninstall may only use commands and interfaces that are specified by the LSB. All other commands are not guaranteed to be present, or to behave in expected ways.
Packages may not use RPM triggers.
Packages may not depend on the order in which scripts are executed (pre-install, pre-uninstall, &c), when doing an upgrade.
16.3. Package Tools
The LSB does not specify the interface to the tools used to manipulate LSB-conformant packages. Each conforming distribution will provide documentation for installing LSB packages.
16.4. Package Naming
Because there is no consistent packaging naming among the various Linux distributions, it is necessary for LSB-conformant packages to adhere the following naming rules to avoid conflicts with packages provided by the distributions.
•	All LSB package names must begin with the prefix "lsb-" to avoid conflicting with existing packages used by Linux distributions.
•	If the package name contains only one hyphen (including the one in the "lsb-" prefix) then the package name must be assigned by the Linux Assigned Names and Numbers Authority (http://www.lanana.org) (LANANA), which shall maintain a registry of LSB names.
•	If the package name contains more than one hyphen (i.e., "lsb-www.redhat.com-redhat-database", "lsb-gnome-gnumeric"), then the portion of the package name between first and second hyphens must either be an LSB provider name assigned by the LANANA, or it may be one of the owners' fully-qualified domain name in lower case (e.g., "debian.org", "staroffice.sun.com"). The LSB provider name assigned by LANANA must only consist of the ASCII characters [a-z0-9].
16.5. Package Dependencies
Packages must depend on a dependency "lsb". They may not depend on other system-provided dependencies. They must not depend on non-system-provided dependencies unless the dependencies are fulfilled by packages which are part of the same application. If a package includes "Provides" it must only provide a virtual package name which is registered to that application.
16.6. Package Architecture Considerations
Additional specifications or restrictions may be found in the architecture specific LSB specification.
Notes
1. 	The distribution itself may use a different packaging format for its own packages, and of course it may use any available mechanism for installing the LSB-conformant packages.

VIII. Commands and Utilities

Chapter 17. Commands and Utilities
17.1. Commands and Utilities
 The following table lists the Commands and Utilities. Unless otherwise specified the command or utility is described in the Single UNIX Specification (SUS). When an interface is not defined in the Single UNIX Specification, then the next prevailing standard is referenced (ie., POSIX, SVID). 
The behavior of the interfaces described in this section are specified by the following standards.
Linux Standard Base 1	
CAE Specification, January 1997, Commands and Utilities (XCU), Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-191-8, C604) 2	

Table 17-1. Commands and Utilities
[ 2	ar 1	at 1	awk 1	basename 2	
batch 1	bc 1	cat 1	chfn 1	chgrp 1	
chmod 1	chown 1	chsh 1	cksum 2	cmp 2	
col 1	comm 2	cp 1	cpio 1	crontab 1	
csplit 1	cut 1	date 1	dd 2	df 1	
diff 1	dirname 2	dmesg 1	du 1	echo 1	
egrep 1	env 1	expand 1	expr 1	false 2	
fgrep 1	file 1	find 1	fold 2	fuser 1	
gencat 1	getconf 2	gettext 1	grep 1	groupadd 1	
groupdel 1	groupmod 1	groups 1	gunzip 1	gzip 1	
head 1	hostname 1	iconv 1	id 2	install 1	
install_initd 1	ipcrm 1	ipcs 1	join 2	kill 2	
killall 1	ln 1	locale 2	localedef 1	logname 2	
lpr 1	ls 1	lsb_release 1	m4 1	make 1	
man 1	md5sum 1	mkdir 1	mkfifo 2	mknod 1	
mktemp 1	more 1	mount 1	msgfmt 1	mv 1	
newgrp 1	nice 1	nl 1	nohup 1	od 1	
passwd 1	paste 1	patch 1	pathchk 1	pidof 1	
pr 1	printf 1	ps 2	pwd 1	remove_initd 1	
renice 1	rm 1	rmdir 1	rsync 1	sed 1	
sendmail 1	sh 2	shutdown 1	sleep 1	sort 1	
split 1	strip 1	stty 2	su 1	sum 1	
sync 1	tail 1	tar 1	tee 1	test 1	
time 2	touch 1	tr 1	true 2	tsort 2	
tty 1	umount 1	uname 1	unexpand 1	uniq 1	
useradd 1	userdel 1	usermod 1	wc 1	xargs 1	

17.2. Command Behavior
This section contains descriptions for commands and utilities whose specified behavior in the LSB contradicts or extends the standards referenced. It also contains commands and utilities only required by the LSB and not specified by other standards.
ar
Name
ar — create and maintain library archives
Description
ar is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-T
-C
 	need not be accepted.
-l
 	has unspecified behavior.
-q
 	has unspecified behavior; using -r is suggested.
at
Name
at — examine or delete jobs for later execution
Description
at is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-d
 	is functionally equivalent to the -r option specified in the Single UNIX Specification.
-r
 	need not be supported, but the '-d' option is equivalent.
-t time
 	need not be supported.
Files
The files at.allow and at.deny reside in /etc rather than /usr/lib/cron.
LSB Deprecated Differences
-c
 	cats the jobs listed on the command line to standard output.
-V
 	prints the version number to standard error.
-v
 	shows the time the job will be executed.
awk
Name
awk — pattern scanning and processing language
Description
awk is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
Certain aspects of internationalized regular expressions are optional; see Internationalization and Regular Expressions>.
LSB Deprecated Differences
gawk and mawk shall be Single UNIX Specification compliant implementations of the awk language. However, gawk and mawk are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; LSB applications should invoke awk instead.
batch
Name
batch — execute commands when the system load permits
Description
The specification for batch is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with the following differences as listed below.
Files
The files at.allow and at.deny reside in /etc rather than /usr/lib/cron.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-f file
 	reads the job from file rather than standard input.
-m
 	sends mail to the user when the job has completed even if there was no output.
-q queue
 	uses the specified queue. A queue designation consists of a single letter; valid queue designations range from a to z. and A to Z. The a queue is the default for at and the b queue for batch. Queues with higher letters run with increased niceness. The special queue "=" is reserved for jobs which are currently running.
-V
 	prints the version number to standard error.
-v
 	shows the time the job will be executed.
bc
Name
bc — An arbitrary precision calculator language
Description
bc is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-s, --standard
 	processes exactly the POSIX bc language.
-w, --warn
 	gives warnings for extensions to POSIX bc.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-q, --quiet
 	does not print the normal welcome message.
-v, --version
 	prints the version number and copyright and quits.
cat
Name
cat — concatenate and print files
Description
cat is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-A, --show-all
 	is equivalent to -vET.
-b, --number-nonblank
 	numbers nonblank output lines.
-e
 	is equivalent to -vE.
-E, --show-ends
 	displays $ at end of each line.
-n, --number
 	numbers all output lines.
-s, --squeeze-blank
 	displays never more than one single blank line.
-t
 	is equivalent to -vT.
-T, --showtabs
 	displays TAB characters as ^I.
-u
 	has unspecified behavior.
-v, --show-nonprinting
 	uses ^ and M- notation, except for LFD and TAB.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
chfn
Name
chfn — change user name and information
Synopsis
chfn [-f full_name] [-h home-phone] [user]
Description
chfn changes user fullname and other information for a user's account. This information is typically printed by finger and similar programs. A normal user may only change the fields for their own account, the super user may change the fields for any account.
The only restrictions placed on the contents of the fields is that no control characters may be present, nor any of comma, colon, or equal sign.
If none of the options are selected, chfn operates in an interactive fashion. The prompts and expected input in interactive mode are unspecified and should not be relied upon.
As it is possible for the system to be configured to restrict which fields a non-privileged user is permitted to change, applications should be written to gracefully handle these situations.
Standard Options
-f full_name
 	sets the user's full name.
-h home-phone
 	sets the user's home phone number.
1
Notes
1. 	The following two options are expected to be added in a future version of the LSB:
-o office
 	sets the user's office room number.
-p office-phone
 	sets the user's office phone number.
Note that some implementations contain a "-o other" option which specifies an additional field called "other". Traditionally, this field is not subject to the constraints about legitimate characters in fields. Also, one traditionally must have appropriate privileges to change the other field. At this point there is no consensus about whether it is desirable to specify the other field; applications may wish to avoid using it.
The "-w work_phone" field found in some implementations should be replaced by the "-p office_phone" field. The "-r room_number" field found in some implementations is the equivalent of the "-o office" option mentioned above; which one of these two options to specify will depend on implementation experience and the decision regarding the other field.
The intention is for chfn to match the behavior of finger; some historical implementations have been broken in the sense that finger and chfn do not agree on what the fields are.
chgrp
Name
chgrp — change group ownership
Synopsis
chgrp [OPTION]... GROUP FILE...
chgrp [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
Description
chgrp is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-c, --changes
 	is like verbose, but reports only when a change is made.
--dereference
 	affects the referent of each symbolic link, rather than the symbolic link itself.
-h, --no-dereference
 	affects symbolic links instead of any referenced file. (Available only on systems that can change the ownership of a symlink.)
-f, --silent, --quiet
 	suppresses most error messages.
--reference=RFILE
 	uses RFILE's group rather than the specified GROUP value.
-v, --verbose
 	outputs a diagnostic for every file processed.
--version
 	outputs version information and exit.
chmod
Name
chmod — change file access permissions
Synopsis
chmod [OPTION]... MODE[,MODE]... FILE...
chmod [OPTION]... OCTAL-MODE FILE...
chmod [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
Description
chmod is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-c, --changes
 	is like verbose, but reports only when a change is made.
-f, --silent, --quiet
 	suppresses most error messages.
--reference=RFILE
 	uses RFILE's mode instead of MODE values.
-v, --verbose
 	outputs a diagnostic for every file processed.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
chown
Name
chown — change file owner and group
Synopsis
chown [OPTION]... OWNER[:[GROUP]] FILE...
chown [OPTION]... :GROUP FILE...
chown [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
Description
chown is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
The use of the '.' character as a separator between the specification of the user name and group name is supported (in addition to the use of the ':' character as specified in the Single UNIX Specification).
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-c, --changes
 	is like verbose, but reports only when a change is made.
--dereference
 	affects the referent of each symbolic link, rather than the symbolic link itself.
-h, --no-dereference
 	affects symbolic links instead of any referenced file. (Available only on systems that can change the ownership of a symlink.)
--from=CURRENT_OWNER:CURRENT_GROUP
 	changes the owner and/or group of each file only if its current owner and/or group match those specified here. Either may be omitted, in which case a match is not required for the omitted attribute.
-f, --silent, --quiet
 	suppresses most error messages.
--reference=RFILE
 	uses RFILE's owner and group rather than the specified OWNER:GROUP values.
-v, --verbose
 	outputs a diagnostic for every file processed.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
chsh
Name
chsh — change login shell
Synopsis
chsh [-s login_shell] [user]
Description
chsh changes the user login shell. This determines the name of the user's initial login command. A normal user may only change the login shell for their own account, the super user may change the login shell for any account.
The only restrictions placed on the login shell is that the command name must be listed in /etc/shells, unless the invoker is the super-user, and then any value may be added. Accounts which are restricted (in an implementation-defined manner) may not change their login shell.
If the -s option is not selected, chsh operates in an interactive mode. The prompts and expected input in this mode are implementation-defined.
Standard Options
-s login_shell
 	sets the login shell.
col
Name
col — filter reverse line feeds from input
Description
col is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2 with the difference that the -p option has unspecified behavior.
Although col is shown as legacy in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2, it is not (yet) deprecated in the LSB.
cp
Name
cp — copy files and directories
Synopsis
Description
cp is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-a archive
 	is the same as -dpR.
--backup[=CONTROL]
 	makes a backup of each existing destination file.
-b
 	is like --backup but does not accept an argument.
-d, --no-dereference
 	never follows symbolic links.
-H
 	follows command-line symbolic links.
-l, --link
 	links files instead of copying.
-L, --dereference
 	always follows symbolic links.
--parents
 	appends source path to DIRECTORY.
--remove-destination
 	removes each existing destination file before attempting to open it. (Contrast with --force.)
--sparse=WHEN
 	controls creation of sparse files.
By default, sparse SOURCE files are detected by a crude heuristic and the corresponding DEST file is made sparse as well. That is the behavior selected by --sparse=auto. Specify --sparse=always to create a sparse DEST file whenever the SOURCE file contains a long enough sequence of zero bytes. Use --sparse=never to inhibit creation of sparse files.
--strip-trailing-slashes
 	removes any trailing slashes from each SOURCE argument.
-s, --symbolic-link
 	makes symbolic links instead of copying.
-S, --suffix=SUFFIX
 	overrides the usual backup suffix.
--target-directory=DIRECTORY
 	moves all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY.
-u, --update
 	copies only when the SOURCE file is newer than the destination file or when the destination file is missing.
-v, --verbose
 	explains what is being done.
-x, --one-file-system
 	stays on this file system.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
cpio
Name
cpio — copy file archives in and out
Description
cpio is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
Certain aspects of internationalized filename globbing are optional; see Internationalization and Filename Globbing>.
crontab
Name
crontab — maintain crontab files for individual users
Synopsis
crontab [ -u user ] file
crontab [ -u user ] { -l | -r | -e }
Description
crontab is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Files
The files cron.allow and cron.deny reside in /etc rather than /usr/lib/cron.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-u user
 	specifies the name of the user whose crontab is to be used, rather than the user who is running crontab.
csplit
Name
csplit — split a file into sections determined by context lines
Description
csplit is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-b, --sufix-format=FORMAT
 	uses sprintf FORMAT instead of %d.
--quiet, --silent
 	are equivalent to the -s option as specified in the Single UNIX Specification.
-z, --elide-empty-files
 	removes empty output files.
--version
 	outputs version information and exit.
cut
Name
cut — split a file into sections determined by context lines
Description
cut is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-n
 	has unspecified behavior.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
date
Name
date — print or set the system date and time
Description
date is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-d, --date=STRING
 	displays time described by STRING, not now.
-f, --file=DATAFILE
 	is like --date once for each line of DATEFILE.
-r, --reference=FILE
 	displays the last modification time of FILE.
-R, --rfc-822
 	outputs RFC2822-compliant date string.
-s, --set=STRING
 	sets time described by STRING.
--utc, --universal
 	is equivalent to the -u option as specified in the Single UNIX Specification.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
df
Name
df — report filesystem disk space usage
Description
df is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with the following differences.
If the -k option is not specified, disk space is shown in unspecified units. Applications should specify -k.
If an argument is the absolute file name of a disk device node containing a mounted filesystem, df shows the space available on that filesystem rather than on the filesystem containing the device node (which is always the root filesystem).
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-a, --all
 	includes filesystems having 0 blocks.
--block-size=SIZE
 	uses SIZE-byte blocks.
-h, --human-readable
 	prints sizes in human-readable format (e.g., 1K, 234M, 2G).
-H, --si
 	prints sizes in human-readable format, but uses powers of 1000 (not 1024).
-i, --inodes
 	lists inode information instead of block usage.
-l, --local
 	limits listing to local filesystems.
-m, --megabytes
 	is like --block-size=1048576
--no-sync
 	does not invoke sync before getting usage info. (default)
-P, --portability
 	uses the POSIX output format.
--sync
 	invokes sync before getting usage info.
-t, --type=TYPE
 	has unspecified behavior.
--portability
 	is same as -P as specified in the Single UNIX Specification.
--sync
 	invokes sync before getting usage info.
-t, --type=TYPE
 	limits listing to filesystems of type TYPE. (Different from behavior as specified in the Single UNIX Specification.)
-T, --print-type
 	prints filesystem type.
-x, --exclude-type=TYPE
 	limits listing to filesystems not of type TYPE.
diff
Name
diff — find differences between two files
Description
diff is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-a
 	treats all files as text and compares them line-by-line, even if they do not seem to be text.
-B
 	ignores changes that just insert or delete blank lines.
--brief
 	reports only whether the files differ, not the details of the differences.
--context[=lines]
 	is equivalent to -C as specified in the Single UNIX Specification.
-d
 	changes the algorithm to perhaps find a smaller set of changes; this makes diff slower (sometimes much slower).
-D name
 	makes merged if-then-else format output conditional on the preprocessor macro name.
--ed
 	is equivalent to -e as specified in the Single UNIX Specification.
--exclude=pattern
 	when comparing directories, ignores files and subdirectories whose basenames match pattern.
--exclude-from=file
 	when comparing directories, ignores files and subdirectories whose basenames match any pattern contained in file.
--expand-tabs
 	expands tabs to spaces in the output to preserve the alignment of tabs in the input files.
-F regexp
 	in context and unified format, shows some of the last preceding line that matches regexp for each hunk of differences.
--forward-ed
 	makes output that looks vaguely like an ed script, but has changes in the order they appear in the file.
-H
 	uses heuristics to speed handling of large files that have numerous scattered small changes.
--horizon-lines=lines
 	does not discard the last lines lines of the common prefix and the first lines lines of the common suffix.
-i
 	ignores changes in case; considers upper and lower case letters equivalent.
-I regexp
 	ignores changes that just insert or delete lines that match regexp.
--ifdef=name
 	makes merged if-then-else format output conditional on the preprocessor macro name.
--ignore-all-space
 	ignores white space when comparing lines.
--ignore-case
 	ignores changes in case; considers upper and lower case to be the same.
--ignore-matching-lines=regexp
 	ignores changes that just insert or delete lines that match regexp.
--ignore-space-change
 	ignores changes in amount of white space.
--initial-tab
 	outputs a tab rather than a space before the text of a line in normal or context format. This causes the alignment of tabs in the line to look normal.
-l
 	passes the output through pr to paginate it.
--ignore-case
 	ignores changes in case; considers upper and lower case to be the same.
dmesg
Name
dmesg — print or control the kernel ring buffer
Synopsis
dmesg [ -c ] [ -n level ] [ -s bufsize ]
Description
dmesg examines or controls the kernel ring buffer.
Standard Options
-c 
 	clears the ring buffer contents after printing.
-n level
 	sets the level at which logging of messages is done to the console.
-s bufsize
 	uses a buffer of bufsize to query the kernel ring buffer. This is 8196 by default (this matches the default kernel syslog buffer size in 2.0.33 and 2.1.103). If you have set the kernel buffer to larger than the default then this option can be used to view the entire buffer.
du
Name
du — estimate file space usage
Description
du is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
If the -k option is not specified, disk space is shown in unspecified units. Applications should specify -k.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--block-size=SIZE
 	uses SIZE-byte blocks.
-b, --bytes
 	prints size in bytes.
-c, --total
 	produces a grand total.
-D, --dereference-args
 	dereferences PATHs when symbolic link.
-h, --human-readable 
 	prints sizes in human-readable format (e.g., 1K, 234M, 2G).
--kilobytes
 	is equivalent to --block-size=1024.
--l, --count-links
 	counts sizes many times if hard-linked.
-L, --dereference
 	dereferences all symbolic links.
-m, --megabytes
 	is equivalent to --block-size=1048576.
-r
 	has unspecified behavior.
-S, --separate-dirs
 	does not include size of subdirectories.
-X FILE, --exclude-from=FILE
 	excludes files that match any pattern in FILE.
--exclude=PAT
 	excludes files that match PAT.
--max-depth=N
 	prints the total for a directory (or file, with --all) only if it is N or fewer levels below the command line argument; --max-depth=0 is the same as --summarize.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
echo
Name
echo — display a line of text
Synopsis
echo [STRING]... 
Description
The echo command is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with the following differences.
Unlike the behavior specified in the Single UNIX Specification, whether echo supports options is implementation defined. The behavior of echo if any arguments contain backslashes is also implementation defined. Applications must not run echo with a first argument starting with a hyphen, or with any arguments containing backslashes; they must use printf in those cases.
egrep
Name
egrep — search a file with an ERE pattern
Description
egrep is equivalent to grep -E. For further details, see the specification for grep.
env
Name
env — run a program in a modified environment
Description
env is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--ignore-environment
 	is equivalent to -i.
-u, --unset=NAME
 	removes variable from the environment.
expand
Name
expand — convert tabs to spaces
Description
expand is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-i, --initial
 	does not convert TABs after non-whitespace.
-t, --tabs=NUMBER
 	supplements behavior as specified in the Single UNIX Specification by allowing argument to specify the number of characters-apart tabs are (instead of 8).
expr
Name
expr — evaluate expressions
Description
expr is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but supports extra operands as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
The following are extra operands:
match STRING REGEXP
 	is same as STRING : REGEXP.
substr STRING POS LENGTH
 	is substring of STRING, POS counted from 1.
index STRING CHARS
 	is index in STRING where any CHARS is found, or 0.
length STRING
 	is length of STRING.
quote STRING
 	interprets TOKEN as a string, even if it is a keyword like match or an operator like /.
fgrep
Name
fgrep — search a file with a fixed pattern
Description
fgrep is equivalent to grep -F. For further details, see the specification for grep.
file
Name
file — determine file type
Description
file is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with additional options as specified below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-b, --brief
 	does not prepend filenames to output lines.
-c, --checking-printout
 	causes a checking printout of the parsed form of the magic file. This is usually used in conjunction with -m to debug a new magic file before installing it.
-f, --files-from namefile
 	reads the names of the files to be examined from namefile (one per line) before the argument list. Either namefile or at least one filename argument must be present; to test the standard input, use `-' as a filename argument.
-i, --mime
 	causes the file command to output mime type strings rather than the more traditional human-readable ones. Thus, it may say `text/plain; charset=us-ascii' rather than `ASCII text'. In order for this option to work, file changes the way it handles files recognized by the command itself (such as many of the text file types, directories, etc.), and makes use of an alternative `magic' file.
-k, --keep-going
 	does not stop at the first match, keeps going.
-m, --magic-file list
 	specifies an alternate list of files containing magic numbers. This can be a single file, or a colon-separated list of files.
-n, --no-buffer
 	forces stdout to be flushed after checking each file. This is only useful if checking a list of files. It is intended to be used by programs that want filetype output from a pipe.
-z, --uncompress
 	tries to look inside compressed files.
-L, --dereference
 	causes symlinks to be followed.
-s, --special-files
 	causes block or character special files (that are potentially problematic when processed by file) to be read in addition to the argument files ordinarily identified by stat(2). This is useful for determining the filesystem types of the data in raw disk partitions, which are block special files. This option also causes file to disregard the file size as reported by stat(2) since on some systems it reports a zero size for raw disk partitions.
find
Name
find — search for files in a directory hierarchy
Description
find is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with additional options as specified below.
Differences
Certain aspects of internationalized filename globbing are optional; see Internationalization and Filename Globbing>.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-daystart
 	measures times (for -amin, -atime, -cmin, -ctime, -mmin, and -mtime) from the beginning of today rather than from 24 hours ago.
-follow
 	dereferences symbolic links. Implies -noleaf.
-maxdepth levels
 	descends at most levels (a non-negative integer) levels of directories below the command line arguments. -maxdepth 0 means only apply the tests and actions to the command line arguments.
-mindepth levels
 	applies no tests or actions at levels less than levels (a non-negative integer). -mindepth 1 means process all files except the command line arguments.
-mount
 	is equivalent to -xdev as specified in the Single UNIX Specification.
-noleaf
 	does not optimize by assuming that directories contain 2 fewer subdirectories than their hard link count.
-version
 	prints the find version number and exits.
-amin n
 	displays files last accessed n minutes ago.
-anewer file
 	displays files last accessed more recently than file was modified. -anewer is affected by -follow only if -follow comes before -anewer on the command line.
-cmin n
 	displays files with status last changed n minutes ago.
-cnewer file
 	displays files with status last changed more recently than file was modified. -cnewer is affected by -follow only if -follow comes before -cnewer on the command line.
-empty
 	displays files that are empty and are either regular or directory files.
-false
 	is always false.
-fstype type
 	displays files on a filesystem of type type.
-gid n
 	displays files with numeric group ID of n.
-ilname pattern
 	is like -lname, but the match is case-insensitive.
-iname pattern
 	is like -name, but the match is case-insensitive.
-inum n
 	displays files with inode number of n.
-ipath path
 	is like -path, but the match is case-insensitive.
-iregex pattern
 	is like -regex, but the match is case-insensitive.
-lname
 	displays files that are symbolic links whose contents match shell pattern pattern. The metacharacters do not treat / or . specially.
-mmin n
 	displays files with data last modified n minutes ago.
-nouser
 	displays files with numeric user ID corresponding to no user.
-nogroup
 	displays files with numeric group ID corresponding to no group.
-path pattern
 	displays files with name matching shell pattern pattern.
-perm +mode
 	displays files with any of the permission bits mode set.
-regex
 	displays files with names matching regular expression pattern. This is a match on the whole path, not a search.
-true
 	is always true.
-type c
 	supplements types as specified in the Single UNIX Specification with the letters l and s (symbolic links and sockets, respectively).
-uid n
 	displays files with numeric user ID of n.
-used
 	displays files last accessed n days after status was last changed.
-xtype c
 	is equivalent to -type unless the file is a symbolic link. For symbolic links: if -follow has not been given, true if the file is a link to a file of type c; if -follow has been given, true if c is l. In other words, for symbolic links, -xtype checks the type of the file that -type does not check.
-fls file
 	is true. Is like -ls but write to file like -fprint.
-fprint file
 	is true. Prints the full file name into file file. If file does not exist when find is run, it is created; if it does exist, it is truncated. The file names `/dev/stdout' and `/dev/stderr' are handled specially; they refer to the standard output and standard error output, respectively.
-fprint0 file
 	is true. Is like -print0 but write to file like -fprint.
-fprintf file format
 	is true. Like -printf but write to file like -fprint.
-print0
 	is true. Prints the full file name on the standard output, followed by a null character. This allows file names that contain newlines to be correctly interpreted by programs that process the find output.
-printf format
 	is true. Prints format on the standard output, interpreting \ escapes and % directives. Field widths and precisions can be specified as with the printf C function. Unlike -print, -printf does not add a newline at the end of the string. The escapes and directives are: 
\a
 	alarm bell.
\b
 	backspace.
\c
 	stops printing from this format immediately and flushes the output.
\f
 	form feed.
\n
 	newline.
\r
 	carriage return.
\t
 	horizontal tab.
\v
 	vertical tab.
\\
 	literal backslash (\).
%%
 	literal percent sign.
%a
 	last file access time in the format returned by the C ctime function.
%Ak
 	last file access time in the format specified by k, which is either @ or a directive for the C strftime function. The possible values for k are listed below; some of them might not be available on all systems, due to differences in strftime between systems. 
@
 	seconds since Jan. 1, 1970, 00:00 GMT.
H
 	hour (00..23).
I
 	hour (01..12).
k
 	hour ( 0..23).
l
 	hour ( 1..12).
M
 	minute (00..59).
p
 	locale's AM or PM.
r
 	time, 12-hour (hh:mm:ss [AP]M).
S
 	second (00..61).
T
 	time, 24-hour (hh:mm:ss).
X
 	locale's time representation (H:M:S).
Z
 	time zone (e.g., EDT), or nothing if no time zone is determinable.
a
 	locale's abbreviated weekday name (Sun..Sat).
A
 	locale's full weekday name, variable length (Sunday..Saturday).
b
 	locale's abbreviated month name (Jan..Dec).
B
 	locale's full month name, variable.
c
 	locale's date and time (Sat Nov 04 12:02:33 EST 1989).
d
 	day of month (01..31).
D
 	date (mm/dd/yy).
h
 	same as b.
j
 	day of year (001.366).
m
 	month (01..12).
U
 	week number of year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53).
w
 	day of week (0..6).
W
 	week number of year with Monday as first day of week (00..53).
x
 	locale's date representation (mm/dd/yy).
y
 	last two digits of year (00..99).
Y
 	year (1970...).
%b
 	file's size in 512-byte blocks (rounded up).
%c
 	last file status change time in the format returned by the C ctime function.
%Ck
 	last file status change time in the format specified by k, which is the same as for %A.
%d
 	file's depth in the directory tree; 0 means the file is a command line argument.
%f
 	file's name with any leading directories removed (only the last element).
%F
 	type of the filesystem the file is on; this value can be used for -fstype.
%g
 	file's group name, or numeric group ID if the group has no name.
%G
 	file's numeric group ID.
%h
 	leading directories of file's name (all but the last element).
%H
 	mommand line argument under which file was found.
%i
 	file's inode number (in decimal).
%k
 	file's size in 1K blocks (rounded up).
%l
 	object of symbolic link (empty string if file is not a symbolic link).
%m
 	file's permission bits (in octal).
%n
 	number of hard links to file.
%p
 	file's name.
%P
 	file's name with the name of the command line argument under which it was found removed.
%s
 	file's size in bytes.
%t
 	file's last modification time in the format returned by the C ctime function.
%Tk
 	file's last modification time in the format specified by k, which is the same as for %A.
%u
 	file's user name, or numeric user ID if the user has no name.
%U
 	file's numeric user ID.
-ls
 	is true. Lists current file in ls -dils format on standard output. The block counts are of 1K blocks, unless the environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT is set, in which case 512-byte blocks are used.
Extra Operators
 	The following operators are supported in order of decreasing precedence and override what is specified in the Single UNIX Specification. 
( expr )
 	force precedence.
! expr
 	true if expr is false
-not expr
 	same as ! expr.
expr1 expr2
 	and (implied); expr2 is not evaluated if expr1 is false.
expr1 -a expr2
 	same as expr1 expr2.
expr1 -and expr2
 	same as expr1 expr2.
expr1 -o expr2
 	or; expr2 is not evaluated if expr1 is true.
expr1 -or expr2
 	same as expr1 -o expr2.
expr1, expr2
 	list; both expr1 and expr2 are always evaluated. The value of expr1 is discarded; the value of the list is the value of expr2.
fuser
Name
fuser — identify processes using files or sockets
Description
fuser is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-c
 	has unspecified behavior.
-f
 	has unspecified behavior.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-a
 	shows all files specified on the command line. By default, only files that are accessed by at least one process are shown.
-k
 	kills processes accessing the file. Unless changed with -signal, SIGKILL is sent. An fuser process never kills itself, but may kill other fuser processes. The effective user ID of the process executing fuser is set to its real user ID before attempting to kill.
-i
 	asks the user for confirmation before killing a process. This option is silently ignored if -k is not present too.
-l
 	lists all known signal names.
-m
 	name specifies a file on a mounted file system or a block device that is mounted. All processes accessing files on that file system are listed. If a directory file is specified, it is automatically changed to name/. to use any file system that might be mounted on that directory.
-n space
 	selects a different name space. The name spaces file (file names, the default), udp (local UDP ports), and tcp (local TCP ports) are supported. For ports, either the port number or the symbolic name can be specified. If there is no ambiguity, the shortcut notation name/space (e.g. name/proto) can be used.
-s
 	operates silently. -u and -v are ignored in this mode. -a must not be used with -s.
-signal
 	uses the specified signal instead of SIGKILL when killing processes. Signals can be specified either by name (e.g. -HUP) or by number (e.g. -1).
-v
 	verbose mode.
-V
 	displays version information.
-
 	resets all options and set the signal back to SIGKILL.
gencat
Name
gencat — generate a formatted message catalogue
Description
gencat is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-H, --header=NAME
 	creates C header file NAME containing symbol definitions.
--new
 	does not use existing catalog, forces new output file.
-o, --output=NAME
 	writes output to file NAME.
gettext
Name
gettext — retrieve text string from message database
Synopsis
gettext [ options ] [ textdomain ] msgid

gettext -s [ options ] msgid ...
Description
The gettext utility retrieves a translated text string corresponding to string msgid from a message object generated with msgfmt utility.
The message object name is derived from the optional argument textdomain if present, otherwise from the TEXTDOMAIN environment. If no domain is specified, or if a corresponding string cannot be found, gettext prints msgid.
Ordinarily gettext looks for its message object in dirname/lang/LC_MESSAGES where dirname is the implementation-defined default directory and lang is the locale name. If present, the TEXTDOMAINDIR environment variable replaces the dirname.
This utility interprets C escape sequences such as \t for tab. Use \\ to print a backslash. To produce a message on a line of its own, either put a \n at the end of msgid, or use this command in conjunction with printf utility.
When used with the -s option the utility behaves like the echo utility. But it does not simply copy its arguments to standard output. Instead those messages found in the selected catalog are translated.
Options
-d domainname
--domain=domainname
 	Retrieve translated messages from domainname.
-e
 	Enable expansion of some escape sequences.
-n
 	Suppress trailing newline.
Operands
The following operands are supported:
textdomain
 	A domain name used to retrieve the messages.
msgid
 	A key to retrieve the localized message.
Environment Variables
LANGUAGE
 	Specifies one or more locale names. See gettext message handling functions for more information.
LANG
 	Specifies locale name.
LC_MESSAGES
 	Specifies messaging locale, and if present overrides LANG for messages.
TEXTDOMAIN
 	Specifies the text domain name, which is identical to the message object filename without .mo suffix.
TEXTDOMAINDIR
 	Specifies the pathname to the message database, and if present replaces the implementation-defined default directory.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
 	Successful completion.
>0
 	An error occurred.
grep
Name
grep — print lines matching a pattern
Description
grep is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Differences
Certain aspects of internationalized regular expressions are optional; see Internationalization and Regular Expressions>.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-A NUM, --after-context=NUM
 	prints NUM lines of trailing context after matching lines.
-a, --text
 	processes a binary file as if it were text; this is equivalent to the --binary-files=text option.
-B NUM, --before-context=NUM
 	prints NUM lines of leading context before matching lines.
-C [NUM], -NUM, --context[=NUM]
 	prints NUM lines (default 2) of output context.
-b, --byte-offset
 	prints the byte offset within the input file before each line of output.
--binary-files=TYPE
 	assumes that the file is of type TYPE if its first few bytes indicate it contains binary data. By default, TYPE is binary, and grep normally outputs either a one-line message saying that a binary file matches, or no message if there is no match. If TYPE is without-match, grep assumes that a binary file does not match; this is equivalent to the -I option. If TYPE is text, grep processes a binary file as if it were text; this is equivalent to the -a option. Warning: grep --binary-files=text might output binary garbage, which can have nasty side effects if the output is a terminal and if the terminal driver interprets some of it as commands.
-c, --count
 	suppresses normal output; instead, prints a count of matching lines for each input file. With the -v, --invert-match option (see below), counts non-matching lines.
-d ACTION, --directories=ACTION
 	processes the input file as a directory with ACTION. By default, ACTION is read, which means that directories are read just as if they were ordinary files. If ACTION is skip, directories are silently skipped. If ACTION is recurse, grep reads all files under each directory, recursively; this is equivalent to the -r option.
-G, --basic-regexp
 	interprets PATTERN as a basic regular expression. (default)
-H, --with-filename
 	prints the filename for each match.
-h, --no-filename
 	suppresses the prefixing of filenames on output when multiple files are searched.
-I
 	processes a binary file as if it did not contain matching data; this is equivalent to the --binary-files=without-match option.
--ignore-case
 	equivalent to -i.
-L, --files-without-match
 	suppresses normal output; instead, prints the name of each input file from which no output would normally have been printed. The scanning will stop on the first match.
--files-with-matches
 	equivalent to -l.
--map
 	uses the mmap(2) system call to read input, if possible, instead of the default read(2) system call. In some situations, --mmap yields better performance. However, --mmap can cause undefined behavior (including core dumps) if an input file shrinks while grep is operating, or if an I/O error occurs.
--line-number
 	equivalent to -n.
--quiet
 	equivalent to -q.
-r, --recursive
 	reads all files under each directory, recursively; this is equivalent to the -d recurse option.
--no-messages
 	equivalent to -s.
-V, --version
 	prints the version number of grep to standard error.
--invert-match
 	equivalent to -v.
-w, --word-regexp
 	selects only those lines containing matches that form whole words. The test is that the matching substring must either be at the beginning of the line, or preceded by a non-word constituent character. Similarly, it must be either at the end of the line or followed by a non-word constituent character. Word-constituent characters are letters, digits, and the underscore.
--line-regexp
 	equivalent to -x.
-Z, --null
 	outputs a zero byte (the ASCII NUL character) instead of the character that normally follows a file name. 
groupadd
Name
groupadd — create a new group
Synopsis
groupadd [-g gid [-o]] group
Options
-g gid [-o]
 	specifies the numerical value of the group's ID. This value must be unique, unless the -o option is used. The value must be non-negative. 
groupdel
Name
groupdel — delete a group
Synopsis
groupdel group
Description
groupdel modifies the system account files, deleting all entries that refer to group. The named group must exist.
groupmod
Name
groupmod — modify a group
Synopsis
groupmod [-g gid [-o]] [-n group_name ] group
Options
-g gid [-o]
 	specifies the numerical value of the group's ID. This value must be unique, unless the -o option is used. The value must be non-negative. Any files which the old group ID is the file group ID must have the file group ID changed manually.
-n groupname
 	changes the name of the group from group to group_name.
groups
Name
groups — display a group
Synopsis
groups [user]
Description
groups displays the current group ID names or values. If the value does not have a corresponding entry in the group database, the value will be displayed as the numerical group value. The optional user parameter will display the groups for the named user.
gunzip
Name
gunzip — uncompress files
Description
gunzip is equivalent to gzip -d. See the specification for gzip for further details.
gzip
Name
gzip — compress or expand files
Synopsis
gzip [ -acdfhlLnNrtvV19 ] [-S suffix] [ name ...  ]
Description
gzip tries to reduce the size of the named files. Whenever possible, each file is replaced by one with the extension .gz, while keeping the same ownership modes, access and modification times. If no files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is compressed to the standard output. gzip will only attempt to compress regular files. In particular, it will ignore symbolic links.
When compressing, gzip uses the deflate algorithm specified in RFC1951 and stores the result in a file using the gzip file format specified in RFC1952.
Options
-a, --ascii
 	does nothing on Linux systems.
-c, --stdout, --to-stdout
 	writes output on standard output; keeps original files unchanged. If there are several input files, the output consists of a sequence of independently compressed members. To obtain better compression, concatenate all input files before compressing them.
-d, --decompress, --uncompress
 	decompresses.
-f, --force
 	forces compression or decompression even if the file has multiple links or the corresponding file already exists, or if the compressed data is read from or written to a terminal. If the input data is not in a format recognized by gzip, and if the option --stdout is also given, copy the input data without change to the standard ouput: let gzip behave as cat. If -f is not given, and when not running in the background, gzip prompts to verify whether an existing file should be overwritten.
-l, --list
 	lists the compressed size, uncompressed size, ration and uncompressed name for each compressed file. Gives the uncompressed size as -1 for files not in gzip format. Additionally displays method, crc and timestamp for the uncompress file when used in combination with --verbose.
The compression methods currently supported are deflate, compress, lzh (SCO compress -H) and pack. The crc is given as ffffffff for a file not in gzip format.
With --name, the uncompressed name, date and time are those stored within the compress file, if present.
With --verbose, the size totals and compression ratio for all files is also displayed, unless some sizes are unknown. With --quiet, the title and totals lines are not displayed.
-L, --license
 	displays the gzip license and quit.
-n, --no-name
 	does not save the original file name and time stamp by default when compressing. (The original name is always saved if the name had to be truncated.) When decompressing, do not restore the original file name if present (remove only the gzip suffix from the compressed file name) and do not restore the original time stamp if present (copy it from the compressed file). This option is the default when decompressing.
-N, --name
 	always saves the original file name and time stamp when compressing; this is the default. When decompressing, restore the original file name and time stamp if present. This option is useful on systems which have a limit on file name length or when the time stamp has been lost after a file transfer.
-q, --quiet
 	suppresses all warnings.
-r, --recursive
 	travels the directory structure recursively. If any of the file names specified on the command line are directories, gzip will descend into the directory and compress all the files it finds there (or decompress them in the case of gunzip).
-S .suf, --sufix .suf
 	uses suffix .suf instead of .gz.
-t, --test
 	checks the compressed file integrity.
-v, --verbose
 	displays the name and percentage reduction for each file compressed or decompressed.
-V, --version
 	displays the version number and compilation options, then quits.
-#, --fast, --best
 	regulates the speed of compression using the specified digit #, where -1 or --fast indicates the fastest compression method (less compression) and -9 or --best indicates the slowest compression method (best compression). The default compression level is -6 (that is, biased towards high compression at expense of speed).
head
Name
head — output the first part of files
Description
head is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with additional options as specified below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-c, --bytes=SIZE
 	prints first SIZE bytes. SIZE may have a multiplier suffix: b for 512, k for 1K, m for 1 Meg.
--lines=NUMBER
 	is equivalent to -n.
-q, --quiet, --silent
 	does not print headers giving file names.
-v
 	prints headers giving file names.
hostname
Name
hostname — show the system's host name
Synopsis
hostname [-v] [-a] [--alias] [-d] [--domain] [-f] [--fqdn]
[-i] [--ip-address] [--long] [-s]  [--short]  [-y]  [--yp]
[--nis]

hostname [-v] [-F filename] [--file filename] [hostname]

hostname [-v] [-h] [--help] [-V] [--version]
Description
hostname is used to either set or display the current host or domain name of the system. This name is used by many of the networking programs to identify the machine. The domain name is also used by NIS/YP.
When called without any arguments, the program displays the name of the system as returned by the gethostname(2) function.
When called with one argument or with the --file option, the commands set the host name or the NIS/YP domain name. Note, that only the super-user can change the names.
Options
-a, --alias
 	displays the alias name of the host (if used).
-d, --domain
 	displays the name of the DNS domain. 
-F, --file filename
 	reads the host name from the specified file. Comments (lines starting with a #) are ignored.
-f, --fqdn, --long
 	displays the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name).
-i, --ip-address
 	displays the IP address(es) of the host.
-s, --short
 	displays the short host name. This is the host name cut at the first dot.
-V, --version
 	prints version information on standard output and exits successfully.
-v, --verbose
 	tells what's going on.
-y, --yp, --nis
 	displays the NIS domain name. If a parameter is given (or --file name) then root can also set a new NIS domain.
iconv
Name
iconv — convert file character encoding
Synopsis
iconv -f encoding -t encoding [--list] [-o file] [--output file] [--verbose] inputfile
Description
The specification for "iconv" is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2 but with the following differences as listed below.
LSB-deprecated Options
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--list
 	lists known coded character sets (synonym for the -l option which is found in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3 but not yet specified here).
-o, --output file
 	write output to specified output file (instead of stdin).
--verbose
 	prints progress information.
install
Name
install — copy files and set attributes
Synopsis
install [OPTION]... SOURCE DEST           (1st format)
install [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY   (2nd format)
install -d [OPTION]... DIRECTORY...       (3rd format)
Description
In the first two formats, copy SOURCE to DEST or multiple SOURCE(s) to the existing DIRECTORY, while setting permission modes and owner/group. In the third format, create all components of the given DIRECTORY(ies).
Standard Options
--backup[=CONTROL]
 	makes a backup of each existing destination file.
-b
 	is like --backup, but does not accept an argument.
-d, --directory
 	treats all arguments as directory names; creates all components of the specified directories.
-D
 	creates all leading components of DEST except the last, then copies SOURCE to DEST; useful in the 1st format.
-g, --group=GROUP
 	sets group ownership, instead of process' current group.
-m, --mode=MODE
 	sets permission mode (as in chmod), instead of rwxr-xr-x.
-o, --owner=OWNER
 	sets ownership (super-user only).
-p, --preserve-timestamps
 	applies access/modification times of SOURCE files to corresponding destination files.
-s, --strip
 	strips symbol tables, only for 1st and 2nd formats.
-S, --suffix=SUFFIX
 	overrides the usual backup suffix.
--verbose
 	prints the name of each directory as it is created.
install_initd
Name
install_initd — install an init.d file
Synopsis
/usr/lib/lsb/install_initd initd_file
Description
install_initd installs an init.d file that has been copied to the /etc/init.d location or symlink. In the postinstall script of a package, the program /usr/lib/lsb/install_initd configures a distribution's boot script system to call the init.d file of the package at an appropriate time. See also Section 24.4.
ipcrm
Name
ipcrm — provide information on ipc facilities
Synopsis
ipcrm [ shm | msg | sem ] id...
Description
ipcrm removes the resource(s) specified by id.
ipcs
Name
ipcs — provide information on ipc facilities
Synopsis
ipcs [ -smq ] [ -tcp ]
Description
ipcs provides information on the ipc facilities for which the calling process has read access.
Resource display options
-m
 	shared memory segments.
-q
 	message queues.
-s
 	semaphore arrays.
Output format options
-t
 	time.
-p
 	pid.
-c
 	creator.
Application Usage
In some implementations of ipcs the -a option will print all information available. In other implementations the -a option will print all resource types. Therefore, applications must not use the -a option.
Some implements of ipcs implement more output formats than are specified here. These options are not consistent between differing implementations of ipcs. Therefore, only the -t -c and -p option flags may be used. At least one of the -t -c and -p options must be specified.
killall
Name
killall — kill processes by name
Synopsis
killall [-egiqvw] [-signal] name ...
killall -l
killall -V
Description
killall sends a signal to all processes running any of the specified commands. If no signal name is specified, SIGTERM is sent.
Signals can be specified either by name (e.g. -HUP) or by number (e.g. -1). Signal 0 (check if a process exists) can only be specified by number.
If the command name contains a slash (/), processes executing that particular file will be selected for killing, independent of their name.
killall returns a non-zero return code if no process has been killed for any of the listed commands. If at least one process has been killed for each command, killall returns zero.
A killall process never kills itself (but may kill other killall processes).
Standard Options
-e
 	requires an exact match for very long names. If a command name is longer than 15 characters, the full name may be unavailable (i.e. it is swapped out). In this case, killall will kill everything that matches within the first 15 characters. With -e, such entries are skipped. killall prints a message for each skipped entry if -v is specified in addition to -e.
-g
 	kills the process group to which the process belongs. The kill signal is only sent once per group, even if multiple processes belonging to the same process group were found.
-i
 	asks interactively for confirmation before killing.
-l
 	lists all known signal names.
-q
 	does not complain if no processes were killed.
-v
 	reports if the signal was successfully sent.
-V
 	displays version information.
ln
Name
ln — make links between files
Description
ln is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2 but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-s
 	as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-b, --backup[=CONTROL]
 	makes a backup of each existing destination file.
-n, --no-dereference
 	treats destination that is a symlink to a directory as if it were a normal file.
-i, --interactive
 	prompts whether to remove destinations.
--symbolic
 	synonym for -s.
-S, --suffix=SUFFIX
 	overrides the usual backup suffix.
--target-directory=DIR
 	moves all SOURCE arguments into directory DIR.
-v, --verbose
 	prints name of each file before linking.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
Notes
The backup suffix is ~, unless set with --suffix or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX. The version control method may be selected via the --backup option or through the VERSION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values:
none, off
 	never makes backups (even if --backup is given).
numbered, t
 	makes numbered backups.
existing, nil
 	numbered if numbered backups exist, simple otherwise
simple, never
 	always makes simple backups.
localedef
Name
localedef — compile locale definition files
Description
localedef is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--charmap=charmapfile
 	is equivalent to -f.
--inputfile=intputfile
 	is equivalent to -i.
--force
 	is equivalent to -c.
-v, --verbose
 	generates extra warnings about errors that are normally ignored.
--quiet
 	suppresses all notifications and warnings, and reports only fatal errors.
lpr
Name
lpr — off line print
Synopsis
lpr [-l] [-p] [-Pprinter] [-h] [-s] [-#copies] [-J name]
    [-T title] [name ...]
Description
lpr uses a spooling daemon to print the named files when facilities become available. If no names appear, the standard input is assumed.
Standard Options
-l
 	identifies binary data that is not to be filtered but sent as raw input to printer.
-p
 	formats with "pr" before sending to printer.
-Pprinter
 	sends output to the printer named printer instead of the default printer.
-h
 	suppresses header page.
-s
 	uses symbolic links.
-#copies
 	specifies copies as the number of copies to print.
-J name
 	specifies name as the job name for the header page.
-T title
 	specifies title as the title used for "pr".
ls
Name
ls — list directory contents
Description
ls is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, but with differences listed below.
Differences
-p
 	in addition to the Single UNIX Specification behavior of printing a slash for a directory, ls -p may display other characters for other file types.
Certain aspects of internationalized filename globbing are optional; see Internationalization and Filename Globbing>.
lsb_release
Name
lsb_release — print distribution specific information
Synopsis
lsb_release [OPTION]...
Description
The lsb_release command prints certain LSB (Linux Standard Base) and Distribution information.
With no option, same as -v.
Options
-v, --version
 	displays version of LSB against which distribution is compliant.
-i, --id
 	displays string id of distributor.
-d, --description
 	displays single line text description of distribution.
-r, --release
 	displays release number of distribution.
-c, --codename
 	displays codename according to distribution release.
-a, --all
 	displays all of the above information.
-s, --short
 	displays all of the above information in short output format.
-h, --help
 	displays a human-readable help message.
m4
Name
m4 — macro processor
Description
m4 is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-P
 	forces a m4_ prefix to all builtins.
-I directory
 	Add directory to the end of the search path for includes.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
-e, --interactive
 	unbuffers output, ignores interrupts.
-E, --fatal-warnings
 	stops execution after first warning.
-Q, --quiet, --silent
 	suppresses some warnings for builtins.
--prefix-builtins
 	is equivalent to -P.
--include=DIRECTORY
 	is equivalent to -I.
--define=NAME[=VALUE]
 	is equivalent to -D.
--undefine=NAME
 	deletes builtin NAME.
--synclines
 	is equivalent to -s.
-G, --traditional 
 	suppresses all GNU extensions.
-H, --hashsize=PRIME
 	sets symbol lookup hash table size.
-L, --nesting-limit=NUMBER
 	changes artificial nesting limit.
-F, --freeze-state=FILE
 	produces a frozen state on FILE at end.
-R, --reload-state=FILE
 	reloads a frozen state from FILE at start.
-d, --debug=[FLAGS]
 	sets debug level (no FLAGS implies 'aeq'). FLAGS is any of:
t
 	traces for all macro calls, not only 'ed.
a
 	shows actual arguments.
e
 	shows expansion.
q
 	quotes values as necessary, with a or e flag.
c
 	shows before collect, after collect and after call.
x
 	adds a unique macro call id, useful with c flag.
f
 	says current input file name.
l
 	says current input line number.
p
 	shows results of path searches.
i
 	shows changes in input files.
V
 	is shorthand for all of the above flags.
-t, --trace=NAME
 	traces NAME when it will be defined.
-l, --arglength=NUM
 	restricts macro tracing size.
-o, --error-output=FILE
 	redirects debug and traces output.
make
Name
make — maintain, update and regenerate groups of programs
Description
make is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
The GNU make command contains syntax extensions beyond those specified in the Single UNIX Specification. Use of these extensions is deprecated.
-C dir
 	changes to directory dir before reading the makefiles or doing anything else. If multiple -C options are specified, each is interpreted relative to the previous one: -C / -C etc is equivalent to -C /etc. This is typically used with recursive invocations of make.
-d
 	prints debugging information in addition to normal processing. The debugging information says which files are being considered for remaking, which filetimes are being compared and with what results, which files actually need to be remade, which implicit rules are considered and which are applied---everything interesting about how make decides what to do.
-I dir
 	specifies a directory dir to search for included makefiles. If several -I options are used to specify several directories, the directories are searched in the order specified. Unlike the arguments to other flags of make, directories given with -I flags may come directly after the flag: -Idir is allowed, as well as -I dir. This syntax is allowed for compatibility with the C preprocessor's -I flag.
-j jobs
 	specifies the number of jobs (commands) to run simultaneously. If there is more than one -j option, the last one is effective. If the -j option is given without an argument, make will not limit the number of jobs that can run simultaneously.
-l [load]
 	specifies that no new jobs (commands) should be started if there are others jobs running and the load average is at least load (a floating-point number). With no argument, removes a previous load limit.
-o file
 	does not remake the file file even if it is older than its dependencies, and do not remake anything on account of changes in file. Essentially the file is treated as very old and its rules are ignored.
-v
 	prints the version of the make program plus a copyright, a list of authors and a notice that there is no warranty.
-w
 	prints a message containing the working directory before and after other processing. This may be use ful for tracking down errors from complicated nests of recursive make commands.
-W file
 	pretends that the target file has just been modified. When used with the -n flag, this shows you what would happen if you were to modify that file. Without -n, it is almost the same as running a touch command on the given file before running make, except that the modification time is changed only in the imagination of make.
man
Name
man — display system documentation
Description
man is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification. While additional features my be found in Linux versions of this command, the Single UNIX Specification specified interface is correctly and completely implemented.
md5sum
Name
md5sum — generates or checks MD5 message digests
Synopsis
md5sum [-b] [-c [file]] | [file...]
Description
For each file, write to standard output a line containing the MD5 checksum of that file, followed by one or more blank characters, followed by the name of the file. The MD5 checksum shall be calculated according to RFC1321 and output as 32 hexadecimal digits (as RFC1321 does).
If no file names are specified as operands, read from standard input and use "-" as the file name in the output.
Options
-b
 	uses binary mode. 
-c [file]
 	checks md5sum of all files listed in file against the checksum listed in the same file. The actual format of that file is the same as output of md5sum. That is, each line in the file describes a file.
mkdir
Name
mkdir — make directories
Description
mkdir is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--verbose
 	prints a message for each created directory.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
mknod
Name
mknod — make block or character special files
Synopsis
mknod [OPTION]... NAME TYPE [MAJOR MINOR]
Description
Create the special file NAME of the given TYPE.
MAJOR MINOR are forbidden for TYPE p, mandatory otherwise. TYPE may be:
b
 	creates a block (buffered) special file.
c, u
 	creates a character (unbuffered) special file.
p
 	creates a FIFO.
Standard Options
-m, --mode=MODE
 	sets permission mode (as in chmod), not a=rw - umask.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
mktemp
Name
mktemp — make temporary file name (unique)
Synopsis
mktemp [-q] [-u] template
Description
mktemp takes the given file name template and overwrites a portion of it to create a file name. This file name is unique and suitable for use by the application.
Options
-q
 	fails silently if an error occurs. This is useful if a script does not want error output to go to standard error.
-u
 	operates in `unsafe' mode. The temp file will be unlinked before mktemp exits. This is slightly better than mktemp(3) but still introduces a race condition. Use of this option is not encouraged.
more
Name
more — file perusal filter for crt viewing
Description
more is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
The more command need not respect the LINES and COLUMNS environment variables.
The more command need not support the following interactive commands: 
g	
G	
u	
control u	
control f	
newline	
j	
k	
r	
R	
m	
' (return to mark)	
/!	
?	
N	
:e	
:t	
control g	
ZZ	

-num
 	specifies an integer which is the screen size (in lines).
-e
 	has unspecified behavior.
-i
 	has unspecified behavior.
-n
 	has unspecified behavior.
-p
 	Either (1) clear the whole screen and then display the text (instead of the usual scrolling behavior), or (2) provide the behavior specified by the Single UNIX Specification. In the latter case, the syntax is "-p command".
-t
 	has unspecified behavior.
+num
 	starts at line number num.
+/string
 	specifies a string that will be searched for before each file is displayed.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-d
 	prompts user with the message "[Press space to continue, 'q' to quit.]" and will display "[Press 'h' for instructions.]" instead of ringing the bell when an illegal key is pressed.
-l
 	prevents the typical behavior where more treats ^L (form feed) as a special character and pauses after any line that contains a form feed. 
-f
 	counts logical, rather than screen lines (i.e., long lines are not folded).
Rationale
The +num and +/string options are deprecated in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2; however we must continue to specify them because util-linux-2.11f does not support the replacement (-p command). The +command option as found in the Single UNIX Specification is more general than what we specify, but util-linux-2.11f appears to only support the more specific +num and +/string forms.
mount
Name
mount — mount a file system 
Synopsis
mount [-hV]
mount -a [-fFnrsvw] [-t vfstype]
mount [-fnrsvw] [-o options [,...]] device | dir
mount [-fnrsvw] [-t vfstype] [-o options] device dir
Description
Files are named in a big tree, the file hierarchy, rooted at /. These files can be spread out over several devices. mount serves to attach the file system found on some device to the big file tree. Conversely, umount(8) will detach it again.
Standard Options
-V
 	outputs version.
-v
 	invokes verbose mode.
-a
 	mounts all filesystems (of the given types) mentioned in fstab.
-F
 	combines with -a. to fork off a new incarnation of mount for each device. This will do the mounts on different devices or different NFS servers in parallel. 
-f
 	causes everything to be done except for the actual system call; if it's not obvious, this `fakes' mounting the file system. 
-n
 	mounts without writing in /etc/mtab. This is necessary for example when /etc is on a read-only file system.
-s
 	tolerates sloppy mount options rather than failing. This will ignore mount options not supported by a filesystem type. Not all filesystems support this option. 
-r
 	mounts the file system read-only. A synonym is -o ro.
-w
 	mounts the file system read/write. (default) A synonym is -o rw.
-L label
 	mounts the partition that has the specified label.
-U uuid
 	mounts the partition that has the specified uuid. These two options require the file /proc/partitions to exist.
-t vfstype
 	indicates a file system type of vfstype. 
More than one type may be specified in a comma separated list. The list of file system types can be prefixed with no to specify the file system types on which no action should be taken.
-o
 	options are specified with a -o flag followed by a comma-separated string of options. Some of these options are only useful when they appear in the /etc/fstab file. The following options apply to any file system that is being mounted:
async
 	does all I/O to the file system asynchronously.
atime
 	updates inode access time for each access. (default)
auto
 	is mountable with -a.
defaults
 	uses default options: rw, suid, dev, exec, auto, nouser, and async.
dev
 	interprets character or block special devices on the file system.
exec
 	permits execution of binaries.
noatime
 	does not update inode access times on this file system.
noauto
 	is only explicitly mountable.
nodev
 	does not interpret character or block special devices on the file system.
noexec
 	does not allow execution of any binaries on the mounted file system.
nosuid
 	does not allow set-user-identifier or set-group-identifier bits to take effect.
nouser
 	forbids an ordinary (i.e., non-root) user to mount the file system. (default)
remount
 	attempts to remount an already-mounted file system. This is commonly used to change the mount flags for a file system, especially to make a read-only file system writable.
ro
 	mounts the file system read-only.
rw
 	mounts the file system read-write.
suid
 	allows set-user-identifier or set-group-identifier bits to take effect.
sync
 	does all I/O to the file system synchronously.
user
 	allows an ordinary user to mount the file system. This option implies the options noexec, nosuid, and nodev (unless overridden by subsequent options, as in the option line user,exec,dev,suid).
msgfmt
Name
msgfmt — retrieve text string from message database
Synopsis
msgfmt [ options ] filename.po ...
Description
msgfmt creates message object files from portable object files (filename.po), without changing the portable object files.
The .po file contains messages displayed to users by system utilities or by application programs. .po files can be edited, and the messages in them can be rewritten in any language supported by the system.
If input file is -, standard input is read.
The xgettext utility can be used to create .po files from script or programs.
msgfmt interprets data as characters according to the current setting of the LC_CTYPE locale category.
Options
-D directory
--directory=directory
 	Add directory to list for input files search.
-f
--use-fuzzy
 	Use fuzzy entries in output. If this option is not specified, fuzzy entries are not included into the output.
-o output-file
--output-file=output-file
 	Specify output file name as output-file. All domain directives and duplicate msgids in the .po file are ignored. If output-file is -, output is written to standard output.
--strict
 	Direct the utility to work strictly following the UniForum/Sun implementation. Currently this only affects the naming of the output file. If this option is not given the name of the output file is the same as the domain name. If the strict UniForum mode is enabled the suffix .mo is added to the file name if it is not already present.
-v
--verbose
 	Detect and diagnose input file anomalies which might represent translation errors. The msgid and msgstr strings are studied and compared. It is considered abnormal that one string starts or ends with a newline while the other does not.
Also, if the string represents a format string used in a printf-like function both strings should have the same number of % format specifiers, with matching types. If the flag c-format or possible-c-format appears in the special comment #, for this entry a check is performed. For example, the check will diagnose using %.*s against %s, or %d against %s, or %d against %x. It can even handle positional parameters.
Operands
The filename.po operands are treated as portable object files. The format of portable object files is defined in EXTENDED DESCRIPTION.
Standard Input
The standard input is not used unless a filename.po operand is specified as "-".
Environment Variables
LANGUAGE
 	Specifies one or more locale names. See gettext message handling functions for more information.
LANG
 	Specifies locale name.
LC_ALL
 	Specifies locale name for all categories. If defined, overrides LANG, LC_CTYPE and LC_MESSAGES.
LC_CTYPE
 	Specifies locale name for character handling.
LC_MESSAGES
 	Specifies messaging locale, and if present overrides LANG for messages.
Standard Output
The standard output is not used unless the option-argument of the -o option is specified as -.
Extended Description
The format of portable object files (.po files) is defined as follows. Each .po file contains one or more lines, with each line containing either a comment or a statement. Comments start the line with a hash mark (#) and end with the newline character. All comments and empty lines are ignored. The format of a statement is:
directive value
Each directive starts at the beginning of the line and is separated from value by white space (such as one or more space or tab characters). value consists of one or more quoted strings separated by white space. If two or more strings are specified as value, they are normalized into single string using the string normalization syntax the same as the ISO C language. Use any of the following types of directives:
domain domainname
msgid message_identifier
msgid_plural untranslated_string_plural
msgstr message_string
msgstr[n] message_string
The behavior of the domain directive is affected by the options used. See OPTIONS for the behavior when the -o option is specified. If the -o option is not specified, the behavior of the domain directive is as follows: (1) All msgids from the beginning of each .po file to the first domain directive are put into a default message object file, messages (or messages.mo if --strict option is specified). (2) When msgfmt encounters a domain domainname directive in the .po file, all following msgids until the next domain directive are put into the message object file domainname (or domainname.mo if --strict option is specified). (3) Duplicate msgids are defined in the scope of each domain. That is, a msgid is considered a duplicate only if the identical msgid exists in the same domain. (4) All duplicate msgids are ignored.
The msgid directive specifies the value of a message identifier associated with the directive that follows it. The msgid_plural directive specifies the plural form message specified to the plural message handling functions ngettext(), dngettext() or dcngettext(). The message_identifier string identifies a target string to be used at retrieval time. Each statement containing a msgid directive must be followed by a statement containing a msgstr directive or msgstr[n] directives.
The msgstr directive specifies the target string associated with the message_identifier string declared in the immediately preceding msgid directive.
The msgstr[n] (where n = 0, 1, 2, ...) directive specifies the target string to be used with plural form handling functions ngettext(), dngettext() and dcngettext().
Message strings can contain the escape sequences \n for newline, \t for tab, \v for vertical tab, \b for backspace, \r for carriage return, \f for formfeed, \\ for backslash, \" for double quote, \ddd for octal bit pattern, and \xHH for hexadecimal bit pattern.
Comments should be in one of the following formats:
# translator-comments
#. automatic-comments
#: reference...
#, flag
The comments that starts with #. and #: are automatically generated by xgettext utility. The #: comments indicate the location of the msgid string in the source files in filename:line format. The #. comments are generated when -c option of the xgettext utility is specified. These comments are informative only and silently ignored by the msgfmt utility.
The #, comments requires one or more flags separated by comma (,) character. The following flags can be specified:
fuzzy
 	This flag can be generated by the msgmerge utility or can be inserted by the translator. It shows that the msgstr string might not be a correct translation (anymore). Only the translator can judge if the translation requires further modification, or is acceptable as is. Once satisfied with the translation, the translator then removes this fuzzy flag. The msgmerge programs inserts this when it combined the msgid and msgstr entries after fuzzy search only.
If this flag is specified, the msgfmt utility will not generate the entry for the immediately following msgid in the output message catalog.
c-format
no-c-format
 	The flags are automatically added by the xgettext utility and they should not be added manually. The c-format flag indicates that the msgid string is used as format string by printf-like functions. In case the c-format flag is given for a string the msgfmt utility does some more tests to check to validity of the translation.
The msgid entry with empty string ("") is called the header entry and treated specially. If the message string for the header entry contains nplurals=value, the value indicates the number of plural forms. For example, if nplurals=4, there are 4 plural forms. If nplurals is defined, there should be plural=expression in the same line, separated by a semicolon (;) character. The expression is a C language expression to determine which version of msgstr[n] to be used based on the value of n, the last argument of ngettext(), dngettext() or dcngettext(). For example:
nplurals=2; plural=n == 1 ? 0 : 1
indicates that there are 2 plural forms in the language; msgstr[0] is used if n == 1, otherwise msgstr[1] is used. Another example:
nplurals=3; plural=n==1 ? 0 : n==2 ? 1 : 2
indicates that there are 3 plural forms in the language; msgstr[0] is used if n == 1, msgstr[1] is used if n == 2, otherwise msgstr[2] is used.
If the header entry contains charset=codeset string, the codeset is used to indicate the codeset to be used to encode the message strings. If the output string's codeset is different from the message string's codeset, codeset conversion from the message strings's codeset to the output string's codeset will be performed upon the call of gettext(), dgettext(), dcgettext(), ngettext(), dngettext(), and dcngettext(). The output string's codeset is determined by the current locale's codeset (the return value of nl_langinfo(CODESET)) by default, and can be changed by the call of bind_textdomain_codeset().
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
 	Successful completion.
>0
 	An error occurred.
Application Usage
Neither msgfmt nor any gettext() routine imposes a limit on the total length of a message. Installing message catalogs under the C locale is pointless, since they are ignored for the sake of efficiency.
Examples
Example 1: Examples of creating message objects from message files.
In this example module1.po and module2.po are portable message objects files.
example% cat module1.po

# default domain "messages"

msgid "msg 1"

msgstr "msg 1 translation"

#

domain "help_domain"

msgid "help 2"

msgstr "help 2 translation"

#

domain "error_domain"

msgid "error 3"

msgstr "error 3 translation"

example% cat module2.po

# default domain "messages"

msgid "mesg 4"

msgstr "mesg 4 translation"

#

domain "error_domain"

msgid "error 5"

msgstr "error 5 translation"

#

domain "window_domain"

msgid "window 6"

msgstr "window 6 translation"
The following command will produce the output files, messages, help_domain, and error_domain.
example% msgfmt module1.po
The following command will produce the output files, messages, help_domain, error_domain, and window_domain.
example% msgfmt module1.po module2.po
The following example will produce the output file hello.mo.
example% msgfmt -o hello.mo module1.po module2.po
mv
Name
mv — move (rename) files
Description
mv is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-b, --backup[=CONTROL]
 	makes backup before removal.
-S, --suffix=SUFFIX
 	overrides the usual backup suffix.
--strip-trailing-slashes
 	removes any trailing slashes from each SOURCE argument.
-S, --suffix=SUFFIX
 	overrides the usual backup suffix.
--target-directory=DIRECTORY
 	moves all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY.
-u, --update
 	moves only older or brand new non-directories.
-v, --verbose
 	explains what is being done.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
Notes
The backup suffix is ~, unless set with --suffix or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX. The version control method may be selected via the --backup option or through the VERSION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values:
none, off
 	makes no backups (even if --backup is given).
numbered, t
 	makes numbered backups.
existing, nil
 	is numbered if numbered backups exist, simple otherwise.
simple, never
 	makes simple backups.
newgrp
Name
newgrp — change group ID
Synopsis
newgrp [-] [group]
Description
newgrp changes the current group ID during a login session. If the optional - flag is given, the user's environment will be reinitialized as though the user had logged in, otherwise the current environment, including current working directory, remains unchanged.
nice
Name
nice — run a program with modified scheduling priority
Description
nice is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-ADJUST
 	increments priority by ADJUST first.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
nl
Name
nl — number lines of files
Description
nl is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
nohup
Name
nohup — runs a command immune to hangups, with output to a non-tty
Description
nohup is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
od
Name
od — dump files in octal and other formats 
Description
od is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-w, --width[=BYTES]
 	outputs BYTES bytes per output line.
--traditional
 	accepts arguments in pre-POSIX form.
Pre-POSIX Specifications
The LSB supports option intermixtures with the following pre-POSIX specifications:
-a
 	is equivalent to -t a, selects named characters.
-f
 	is equivalent to -t fF, selects floats.
-h
 	is equivalent to -t x2, selects hexadecimal shorts.
-i
 	is equivalent to -t d2, selects decimal shorts.
-l
 	is equivalent to -t d4, selects decimal longs.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
passwd
Name
passwd — change user password
Synopsis
passwd [-x max] [-n min] [-w warn] [-i inact] name
passwd {-l|-u} name
Description
passwd changes passwords for user and group accounts. A normal user may only change the password for their own account, the super user may change the password for any account. passwd also changes password expiry dates and intervals. Applications may not assume the format of prompts and anticipated input for user interaction, because they are unspecified.
Options
-x max
 	sets the maximum number of days a password remains valid.
-n min
 	sets the minimum number of days before a password may be changed.
-w warn
 	sets the number of days warning the user will receive before their password will expire.
-i inactive
 	disables an account after the password has been expired for the given number of days.
-l
 	disables an account by changing the password to a value which matches no possible encrypted value.
-u
 	re-enables an account by changing the password back to its previous value.
paste
Name
paste — merge lines of files
Description
paste is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
patch
Name
patch — apply a diff file to an original
Description
patch is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
--binary
 	reads and write all files in binary mode, except for standard output and /dev/tty. This option has no effect on POSIX-compliant systems.
-u, --unified
 	interprets the patch file as a unified context diff.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--backup-if-mismatch
 	backs up a file if the patch does not match the file exactly and if backups are not otherwise requested.
--no-backup-if-mismatch
 	does not back up a file if the patch does not match the file exactly and if backups are not otherwise requested.
-B pref, --prefix=pref
 	prefixes pref to a file name when generating its simple backup file name.
--dry-run
 	prints the results of applying the patches without actually changing any files.
-E, --remove-empty-files
 	removes output files that are empty after the patches have been applied. When patch removes a file, it also attempts to remove any empty ancestor directories.
-f, --force
 	skips patches whose headers do not say which file is to be patched; patches files even though they have the wrong version for the Prereq: line in the patch; assumes that patches are not reversed even if they look like they are.
-F num, --fuzz=num
 	sets the maximum fuzz factor. This option only applies to diffs that have context, and ignores up to that many lines in looking for places to install a hunk.
-g num, --get=num
 	controls patch behavior when a file is under RCS or SCCS control and does not exist or is read-only and matches the default version. If num is positive, patch gets (or checks out) the file from the revision control system; if zero, patch ignores RCS and SCCS and does not get the file; and if negative, patch asks the user where to get the file.
-s, --silent, --quiet
 	works silently, unless an error occurs.
-t, --batch
 	suppresses questions like -f, but makes some different assumptions: skips patches whose headers do not contain file names; skips patches for which the file has the wrong version for the Prereq: line in the patch; and assumes that patches are reversed if they look like they are.
-T, --set-time
 	sets the modification and access times of patched files from time stamps given in context diff headers, assuming that the context diff headers use local time.
-v, --version
 	prints out patch's revision header and patch level, and exits.
-V method, --version-control=method
 	uses method to determine backup file names. The method can also be given by the PATCH_VERSION_CONTROL environment variable, which is overridden by this option.
--verbose
 	outputs extra information about the work being done.
-Y pref, --basename-prefix=pref
 	prefixes pref to the basename of a file name when generating its simple backup file name.
-z suffix, --suffix=suffix
 	uses suffix as the simple backup suffix.
-Z, --set-utc
 	sets the modification and access times of patched files from time stamps given in context diff headers.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
pathchk
Name
pathchk — check whether file names are valid or portable
Description
pathchk is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
pidof
Name
pidof — find the process ID of a running program
Synopsis
pidof [-s] [-x] [-o omitpid..] program [program..]
Description
Return the process ID of a process which is running the program named on the command line.1
Options
-s
 	instructs the program to only return one pid.
-x
 	causes the program to also return process id's of shells running the named scripts.
-o
 	omits processes with specified process id.
Notes
1. 	Need further investigation on the behavior of various implementations concerning whether program is a full pathname, the basename only, the program as named by argv[0], or what.
pr
Name
pr — split a file into sections determined by context lines
Description
pr is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-P
 	has unspecified behavior.
-c, --show-control-chars
 	uses hat notation (^G) and octal backslash notation.
-J, --join-lines
 	merges full lines, turns off -W line truncation, no column alignment.
-N NUMBER, --first-line-number=NUMBER
 	starts counting with NUMBER at 1st line of first page printed.
-S[STRING], --sep-string=[=STRING]
 	separates columns by an optional STRING, doesn't use -S "STRING", -S only: No separator used without -S.
-T, --omit-pagination
 	omits page headers and trailers, eliminates any pagination by form feeds set in input files.
-v, --show-nonprinting
 	uses octal backslash notation.
-W PAGE_WIDTH, --page-width=PAGE_WIDTH
 	sets page width to PAGE_WIDTH (72) characters always, truncates lines, except -J option is set, no interference with -S or -s.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
printf
Name
printf — format and print data
Description
printf is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
pwd
Name
pwd — print name of current/working directory
Description
pwd is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
remove_initd
Name
remove_initd — clean up boot script system modifications introduced by install_initd
Synopsis
/usr/lib/lsb/remove_initd initd_file
Description
remove_initd processes the removal of the modifications made to a distribution's boot script system by the install_initd program. This cleanup is performed in the preuninstall script of a package; however, the package manager is still responsible for removing the /etc/init.d file. See also Section 24.4.
renice
Name
renice — alter priority of running processes
Description
renice is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-n increment
 	has unspecified behavior.
rm
Name
rm — remove files or directories
Description
rm is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-v, --verbose
 	explains what is being done.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
rmdir
Name
rmdir — remove empty directories
Description
rmdir is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--ignore-fail-on-non-empty
 	ignores each failure that is solely because a directory is non-empty.
--verbose
 	outputs a diagnostic for every directory processed.
--help
 	displays this help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
rsync
Name
rsync — faster, flexible replacement for rcp (LSB DEPRECATED)
Synopsis
rsync [OPTION]... SRC [SRC]... [USER@]HOST:DEST
rsync [OPTION]... [USER@]HOST:SRC DEST
rsync [OPTION]... SRC [SRC]... DEST
rsync [OPTION]... [USER@]HOST::SRC [DEST]
rsync [OPTION]... SRC [SRC]... [USER@]HOST::DEST
rsync [OPTION]... rsync://[USER@]HOST[:PORT]/SRC [DEST]
Description
The rsync command is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should not rely on its presence.1
rsync behaves in much the same way that rcp does, but has many more options and uses its remote-update protocol to greatly speedup file transfers when the destination file already exists.
The remote-update protocol allows rsync to transfer just the differences between two sets of files across the network link, using an efficient checksum-search algorithm described in the technical report that accompanies this package.
Standard Options
--version
 	prints the rsync version number and exits.
-v, --verbose
 	increases the amount of information given during the transfer. By default, rsync works silently. A single -v gives information about what files are being transferred and a brief summary at the end. Two -v flags give information on what files are being skipped and slightly more information at the end.
-q, --quiet
 	decreases the amount of information given during the transfer, notably suppressing information messages from the remote server. This flag is useful when invoking rsync from cron.
-I, --ignore-times
 	turns off the skipping of files that are already the same length and have the same time-stamp.
-c, --checksum
 	forces the sender to checksum all files using a 128-bit MD4 checksum before transfer. The checksum is then explicitly checked on the receiver and any files of the same name which already exist and have the same checksum and size on the receiver are skipped. This option can be quite slow.
-a, --archive
 	is a shortcut for specifying recursion and to preserve all attributes.
-r, --recursive
 	copies directories recursively. If not specified, rsync will not copy directories at all.
-R, --relative
 	uses relative paths. This means that the full path names specified on the command line are sent to the server rather than just the last parts of the filenames.
-b, --backup
 	renames preexisting destination files with a ~ extension as each file is transferred. You can control the backup suffix using the --suffix option.
--backup-dir=DIR
 	combines with --backup to store all backups in the specified directory. This is very useful for incremental backups.
--suffix=SUFFIX
 	overrides the default backup suffix used with the -b option. The default is a ~.
-u, --update
 	skips any files for which the destination file already exists and has a date later than the source file.
-l, --links
 	recreates symbolic links on the remote system to be the same as the local system. Without this option, all symbolic links are skipped.
-L, --copy-links
 	transfers the file referenced by a symbolic link, rather than recreating the link.
--copy-unsafe-links
 	treats symbolic links that point outside the source tree like ordinary files. Absolute symlinks are also treated like ordinary files, and so are any symlinks in the source path itself when --relative is used.
--safe-links
 	ignores any symbolic links that point outside the destination tree. All absolute symlinks are also ignored.
-H, --hard-links
 	recreates hard links on the remote system to be the same as the local system. Without this option hard links are treated like regular files.
-W, --whole-file
 	does not use the incremental rsync algorithm and sends the whole file as-is instead. This may be useful when using rsync with a local machine.
-p, --perms
 	updates the remote permissions to be the same as the local permissions.
-o, --owner
 	updates the remote owner of the file to be the same as the local owner. This is only available to the super-user. Note that if the source system is a daemon using chroot, --numeric-ids is implied because the source system cannot get access to the usernames.
-g, --group
 	updates the remote group of the file to be the same as the local group. If the receiving system is not running as the super-user, only groups that the receiver is a member of will be preserved (by group name, not group id number).
-D, --devices
 	transfers character and block device information to the remote system to recreate these devices. This option is only available to the super-user.
-t, --times
 	transfers modification times along with the files and updates them on the remote system.
-n, --dry-run
 	does not perform any file transfers, but simply reports the actions it would have taken.
-x, --one-file-system
 	does not cross filesystem boundaries when recursing.
--existing
 	does not create any new files - only updates files that already exist on the destination.
--max-delete=NUM
 	does not delete more than NUM files or directories.
--delete
 	deletes any files on the receiving side that are not on the sending side. Files that are excluded from transfer are excluded from being deleted unless --delete-excluded is specified.
has no effect if directory recursion is not selected.
--delete-excluded
 	deletes any files on the receiving side that are excluded, in addition to deleting the files on the receiving side that are not on the sending side. (See --exclude.)
--delete-after
 	processes file deletions after transferring files, as opposed to the default behavior of deleting before the transfer to ensure that there is sufficient space on the receiving filesystem.
-B, --block-size=BLOCKSIZE
 	controls the block size used in the rsync algorithm. See the technical report for details.
-e, --rsh=COMMAND
 	specifies the remote shell program to use for communication between the local and remote copies of rsync.
You can also choose the remote shell program using the RSYNC_RSH environment variable.
--rsync-path=PATH
 	specifies the path to the copy of rsync on the remote machine. Note that this is the full path to the binary, not just the directory that the binary is in.
--exclude=PATTERN
 	selectively excludes certain files from the list of files to be transferred. 
You may use as many --exclude options on the command line as you like to build up the list of files to exclude.
--exclude-from=FILE
 	is like the --exclude option, but instead adds all exclude patterns listed in the file FILE to the exclude list. Blank lines in FILE and lines starting with ´;´ or ´#´ are ignored.
--include=PATTERN
 	does not exclude the specified pattern of filenames. This is useful as it allows you to build up quite complex exclude/include rules.
--include-from=FILE
 	specifies a list of include patterns from a file.
-T, --temp-dir=DIR
 	instructs rsync to use DIR as a scratch directory when creating temporary copies of the files transferred on the receiving side. The default behavior is to create the temporary files in the receiving directory.
-z, --compress
 	compresses any data from the source file(s) that it sends to the destination machine.
--numeric-ids
 	transfers numeric group and user ids rather than using user and group names and mapping them at both ends.
By default rsync will use the user name and group name to determine what ownership to give files. The special uid 0 and the special group 0 are never mapped via user/group names even if --numeric-ids is not specified.
--timeout=TIMEOUT
 	sets a maximum IO timeout in seconds. If no data is transferred for the specified time, rsync will exit. The default is 0, which means no timeout.
--port=PORT
 	specifies an alternate TCP port number to use rather than the default port 873. This only has effect when using rsync to connect to a remote rsync daemon.
--blocking-io
 	specifies whether rsync will use blocking IO when launching a remote shell transport. You may find this is needed for some remote shells that can´t handle the default non-blocking IO.
--partial
 	keeps any partially-transferred file in the event of an incomplete transfer (causing a subsequent transfer of the file remainder to process more rapidly) as opposed to the default behavior of rsync where an incomplete file is deleted.
--progress
 	prints information showing the progress of the transfer.
-P
 	is equivalent to --partial --progress.
--password-file
 	allows you to provide a password in a file for accessing a remote rsync server. Note that this option is only useful when accessing a rsync server using the built in transport, not when using a remote shell as the transport. The file must not be world readable. It should contain just the password as a single line.
--bwlimit=KBPS
 	specifies a maximum transfer rate in kilobytes per second. A value of zero specifies no limit.
Notes
1. 	In particular, specifying a command without a protocol is insufficient to provide interoperability. rsync can be implemented on top of LSB interfaces.
sed
Name
sed — stream editor
Description
sed is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Differences
Certain aspects of internationalized regular expressions are optional; see Internationalization and Regular Expressions>.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-V, --version
 	prints out the version of sed that is being run and a copyright notice, then exits.
--quiet, --silent
 	is equivalent to -n.
--expression
 	is equivalent to -e.
--file=script-file
 	is equivalent to -f.
sendmail
Name
sendmail — an electronic mail transport agent
Synopsis
sendmail [flags] [address ...]
Description
To deliver electronic mail (email), applications shall support the interface provided by /usr/sbin/sendmail (described here). This interface shall be the default delivery method for applications.
This program sends an email message to one or more recipients, routing the message as necessary. This program is not intended as a user interface routine.
With no flags, sendmail reads its standard input up to an end-of-file or a line consisting only of a single dot and sends a copy of the message found there to all of the addresses listed. It determines the network(s) to use based on the syntax and contents of the addresses.
It is recommended that applications use as few flags as necessary, none if possible.
Some agents allow aliasing on the local system to be prevented by preceding the address with a backslash.
The format of messages must be as defined in RFC 2822.
Options
-bm
 	reads mail from standard input and delivers to the recipient addresses. This is the default mode of operation.
-bp
 	lists information about messages currently in the input mail queue.
-bs
 	uses the SMTP protocol as described in RFC 2821; reads SMTP commands on standard input and writes SMTP responses on standard output.
Note that RFC 2821 specifies \r\n (CR-LF) be used at the end of each line, but pipes almost always use \n (LF) instead. To deal with this, agents will accept both \r\n and \n at the end of each line. When accepting \r\n, the \r before the \n is silently discarded.
-F fullname
 	explicitly sets the full name of the sender for incoming mail unless the message already contains a From: message header.
If the user running sendmail is not sufficiently trusted, then the actual sender may be indicated in the message, depending on the behavior of the agent.
-f name
 	explicitly sets the envelope sender address for incoming mail. If there is no From: header, the address specified in the From: header will also be set.
If the user running sendmail is not sufficiently trusted, then the actual sender will be indicated in the message.
-i
 	ignores dots alone on lines by themselves in incoming messages. This option is ignored when -bs is used.
-odb
 	delivers any mail in background, if supported; otherwise ignored.
-odf
 	delivers any mail in foreground, if supported; otherwise ignored.
-oem or -em
 	mails errors back to the sender. (default)
-oep or -ep
 	writes errors to the standard error output.
-oeq or -eq
 	does not send notification of errors to the sender. This only works for mail delivered locally.
-oi
 	is equivalent to -i.
-om
 	indicates that the sender of a message should receive a copy of the message if the sender appears in an alias expansion. Ignored if aliases are not supported.
-t
 	reads the message to obtain recipients from the To:, Cc:, and Bcc: headers in the message instead of from the command arguments. If a Bcc: header is present, it is removed from the message unless there is no To: or Cc: header, in which case a Bcc: header with no data is created, in accordance with RFC 2822.
If there are any arguments, they specify addresses to which the message is not to be delivered. That is, the argument addresses are removed from the recipients list obtained from the headers. Note: some agents implement this behavior in reverse, adding addresses instead of removing them. Others may disallow addresses in argument list. Therefore, applications should not put addresses in the argument list if -t is used.
This option is sometimes ignored when not in -bm mode (the default).
Exit status
0
 	successful completion on all addresses. This does not indicate successful delivery.
>0
 	there was an error.
LSB-deprecated Options
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
The use of -i together with -bs is LSB-deprecated.
-oew or -ew
 	writes errors to the sender's terminal using the write(1) command, if he is logged in. Otherwise, mails errors back to the sender. If not supported, reports errors in the same manner as -oem.
-v
 	is more verbose. Additional -v options may make the software increasingly verbose.
Notes/Rationale
This page is believed to reflect functionality provided by smail, exim and other implementations, not just the sendmail implementation.
shutdown
Name
shutdown — bring the system down
Synopsis
/sbin/shutdown [-t sec] [-arkhcfF] time [warning-message]
Description
shutdown brings the system down in a secure way. All logged-in users are notified that the system is going down, and login(1) is blocked. It is possible to shut the system down immediately or after a specified delay. All processes are first notified that the system is going down by the signal SIGTERM. If neither the -h or the -r argument is used, then the default behavior is to take the system to runlevel one where administrative tasks can be run.
Standard Options
-a 
 	uses /etc/shutdown.allow.
-t sec
 	tells init(8) to wait sec seconds between sending processes the warning and the kill signal, before changing to another runlevel.
-k 
 	doesn't really shutdown; only sends the warning messages to everybody.
-r
 	reboots after shutdown.
-h
 	halts after shutdown. Powering off after halting is unspecified.
-f
 	skips fsck on reboot.
-F
 	forces fsck on reboot.
-c
 	cancels an already running shutdown. With this option, it is of course not possible to give the time argument, but you can enter a explanatory message on the command line that will be sent to all users.
time
 	specifies when to shut down.
The time argument can have different formats. First, it can be an absolute time in the format hh:mm, in which hh is the hour (1 or 2 digits) and mm is the minute of the hour (in two digits). Second, it can be in the format +m, in which m is the number of minutes to wait. The word now is an alias for +0.
If shutdown is called with a delay, it creates the advisory file /etc/nologin which causes programs such as login(1) to not allow new user logins. shutdown only removes this file if it is stopped before it can signal init (i.e. it is cancelled or something goes wrong). Otherwise it is the responsibility of the system shutdown or startup scripts to remove this file so that users can login.
warning-message
 	specifies message to send all users.
sleep
Name
sleep — delay for a specified amount of time
Synopsis
sleep [OPTION]... NUMBER[SUFFIX]
Description
The specification for sleep is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with the following differences.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
The operand to sleep in the Single UNIX Specification is the number of seconds to sleep for. As an extension, the number may be followed by s to keep seconds, m for minutes, h for hours or d for days.
--help
 	displays help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
sort
Name
sort — sort, merge or sequence check text files 
Description
sort is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-z
 	has unspecified behavior.1
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-g
 	compares according to general numerical value, implies -b.
-M
 	compares (unknown) < JAN < ... < DEC, imply -b.
-s
 	stabilizes sort by disabling last resort comparison.
-T DIRECTORY
 	uses DIRECTORY for temporary files, not $TMPDIR or /tmp.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
Notes
1. 	Rationale: the -z option found in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2 is supported in neither the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3 nor existing Linux implementations.
split
Name
split — split a file into pieces
Description
split is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-a suffix_length
 	has unspecified behavior. 1
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--bytes=SIZE
 	is equivalent to -b.
-C, --line-bytes
 	puts at most SIZE bytes of lines per output file.
--lines
 	is equivalent to -l.
--verbose
 	prints a diagnostic to standard error.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
Notes
1. 	Newer versions of split in GNU textutils have support for the -a flag. In a future version of the LSB, the -a flag will be required to conform to the Single UNIX Specification definition.
strip
Name
strip — remove unnecessary information from executable files 
Description
strip is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-F bdfname, --target=bfdname
 	treats the original objfile as a file with the object code format bfdname, and rewrites it in the same format.
-I bfdname, --input-target=bfdname
 	treats the original objfile as a file with the object code format bfdname.
-O bdfname, --output-target=bfdname
 	replaces objfile with a file in the output format bfdname.
-R sectionname, --remove-section=sectionname
 	removes the named section from the file. This option may be given more than once. Note that using this option inappropriately may make the object file unusable.
-s, --strip-all
 	removes all symbols.
-S, -g, --strip-debug
 	removes debugging symbols only.
--strip-unneeded
 	strips all symbols that are not needed for relocation processing.
-N symbolname, --strip-symbol=symbolname
 	removes symbol symbolname from the source file. This option may be given more than once, and may be combined with other strip options.
-o file
 	puts the stripped output in file, rather than replacing the existing file. When this argument is used, only one objfile argument may be specified.
-p, --preserve-dates
 	preserves the access and modification dates of the file.
-x, --discard-all
 	removes non-global symbols.
-X, --discard-locals
 	removes compiler-generated local symbols. (These usually start with `L' or `.'.)
-K symbolname, --keep-symbol=symbolname
 	copies only symbol symbolname from the source file. This option may be given more than once.
-N symbolname, --strip-symbol=symbolname
 	does not copy symbol symbolname from the source file. This option may be given more than once, and may be combined with strip options other than -K.
-v, --verbose
 	lists all object files modified. In the case of archives, lists all members of the archive.
--version
 	shows the version number for strip and exits.
su
Name
su — change user ID or become super-user
Synopsis
su [OPTS] [-] [username [ARGS]]
Description
su is used to become another user during a login session. Invoked without a username, su defaults to becoming the super user. The optional argument - may be used to provide an environment similar to what the user would expect had the user logged in directly.
The user will be prompted for a password, if appropriate. Invalid passwords will produce an error message. All attempts, both valid and invalid, are logged to detect abuses of the system. Applications may not assume the format of prompts and anticipated input for user interaction, because they are unspecified.
An optional command can be executed. This is done by the shell specified in /etc/passwd for the target user unless the -s or -m options are used. Any arguments supplied after the username will be passed to the invoked shell (shell must support the -c command line option in order for a command to be passed to it).
The current environment is passed to the new shell. The value of $PATH is reset to /bin:/usr/bin for normal users, or /sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin for the super user. This may be changed with the ENV_PATH and ENV_SUPATH definitions in /etc/login.defs. When using the -m or -p options, the user's environment is not changed.
A subsystem login is indicated by the presense of a "*" as the first character of the login shell. The given home directory will be used as the root of a new filesystem which the user is actually logged into.
Standard Options
-
 	makes this a login shell.
-c, --comand=command
 	passes command to the invoked shell. It is passed directly to the invoked shell (using the shell's -c option), so its syntax is whatever that shell will accept.
-m, -p, --preserve-environment
 	does not reset environment variables, and keeps the same shell if it is present in /etc/shells.
-s, --shell=shell
 	uses shell instead of the default in /etc/passwd. The shell specified must be present in /etc/shells.
sum
Name
sum — print checksum and block count of a file (deprecated)
Description
The sum command is deprecated and is expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should use cksum or md5sum instead.
sum is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-s, --sysv
 	uses System V sum algorithm, uses 512 bytes blocks.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
sync
Name
sync — flush filesystem buffers
Synopsis
sync [OPTION]
Description
Force changed blocks to disk, update the super block.
LSB Deprecated Options
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--help
 	displays help and exits.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
tail
Name
tail — output the last part of files
Description
tail is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--retry
 	tries to open a file even if it is inaccessible when tail starts or if it becomes inaccessible later; useful only with -f.
--bytes=N
 	outputs the last N bytes.
--follow
 	is equivalent to -f.
--lines=N
 	is equivalent to -n.
--max-unchanged-stats=N
 	performs open/fstat of a file specified by name (if there have been N consecutive iterations for which the size has remained the same) to determine if that file name is still associated with the same device/inode-number pair as before.
--max-consecutive-size-changes=N
 	if a file has been specified by name, controls how long tail follows the descriptor of a file that continues growing at a rapid pace even after it is deleted or renamed. After detecting N consecutive size changes for a file, open/fstat the file to determine if that file name is still associated with the same device/inode-number pair as before.
--pid=PID
 	terminates after process ID PID dies (only may be specified if -f is).
-q, --quiet, --silent
 	does not outputs headers giving file names.
-s, --sleep-interval=S
 	sleeps S seconds between iterations (only may be specified if -f is).
-v, --verbose
 	outputs headers giving file names.
+NUMBER, -NUMBER
 	supports b, k and m as suffixes (referring to multipliers 512, 1024 and 1048576, respectively), as opposed to the c or l suffixes as stated in the Single UNIX Specification.
tar
Name
tar — file archiver
Description
tar is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2, but with differences as listed below.
Differences
Certain aspects of internationalized filename globbing are optional; see Internationalization and Filename Globbing>.
-h
 	doesn't dump symlinks; dumps the files they point to.
-z
 	filters the archive through gzip.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-A, --catenate, --concatenate
 	appends tar files to an archive.
--create
 	is equivalent to -c.
-d, --diff, --compare
 	finds differences between archive and file system.
--delete
 	deletes from the archive. (Not for use on mag tapes!)
--apend
 	is equivalent to -r.
--list
 	is equivalent to -t.
--update
 	is equivalent to -u.
--extract, --get
 	extracts files from an archive.
--atime-preserve
 	does not change access times on dumped files.
--block-size N
 	is equivalent to -b.
-B, --read-full-blocks
 	reblocks as we read; for reading 4.2BSD pipes.
-C, --directory DIR
 	changes to directory DIR.
--checkpoint
 	prints directory names while reading the archive.
-f, --file [HOSTNAME:]F
 	uses archive file or device F. The default is "-", meaning stdin/stdout.
--force-local
 	specifies that archive file is local even if has a colon.
-F, --info-script F, --new-volume-script F
 	runs script at end of each tape; implies -M.
-G, --incremental
 	creates/lists/extracts old GNU-format incremental backup.
-g, --listed-incremental F
 	creates/lists/extracts new GNU-format incremental backup.
--dereference
 	Synonym for -h.
-i, --ignore-zeros
 	ignores blocks of zeros in archive that normally mean EOF.
--bzip2
 	filters archive through bzip2; used to decompress .bz2 files.
--ignore-failed-read
 	doesn't exit with non-zero status on unreadable files.
-k, --keep-old-files
 	keeps existing files; doesn't overwrite them from archive.
-K, --starting-file F
 	begins at file F in the archive.
-l, --one-file-system
 	stays in local file system when creating an archive.
-L, --tape-length N
 	changes tapes after writing N*1024 bytes.
--modification-time
 	is equivalent to -m.
-M, --multi-volume
 	creates/lists/extracts multi-volume archive.
-N, --after-date DATE, --newer DATE
 	stores only files newer than DATE.
-o, --old-archive, --portability
 	writes a V7 format archive, rather than ANSI format. Note that for -o the behavior is different than what is specified in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2.
-O, --to-stdout
 	extracts files to standard output.
-p, --same-permissions, --preserve-permissions
 	extracts all protection information.
-P, --absolute-paths
 	does not strip leading /s from file names.
--preserve
 	is equivalent to -p -s.
-R, --record-number
 	shows record number within archive with each message.
--remove-files
 	removes files after adding them to the archive.
-s, --same-order, --preserve-order
 	sorts list of names to extract to match archive.
--same-owner
 	creates extracted files with the same ownership.
-S, --sparse
 	handles sparse files efficiently.
-T, --files-from F
 	gets names to extract or create from file F.
--null
 	causes -T to read null-terminated names; disables -C.
--totals
 	prints total bytes written with --create.
--verbose
 	is equivalent to -v.
-V, --label NAME
 	creates archive with volume name NAME.
--version
 	prints tar program version number.
-w, --interactive, --confirmation
 	asks for confirmation for every action.
-W, --verify
 	attempts to verify the archive after writing it.
--exclude FILE
 	excludes file FILE.
-X, --exclude-from FILE
 	excludes files listed in FILE.
-Z, --compress, --uncompress
 	filters the archive through compress.
--gzip, --ungzip
 	Synonym for -z.
--use-compress-program PROG
 	filters the archive through PROG (which must accept -d)
--block-compress
 	blocks the output of compression program for tapes.
-[0-7][lmh]
 	specifies drive and density.
tee
Name
tee — read from standard input and write to standard output and files
Description
tee is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--append
 	is equivalent to -a.
--ignore-interrupts
 	is equivalent to -i.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
test
Name
test — check file types and compare values
Description
test is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
-G FILE
 	FILE exists and is owned by the effective group ID.
-k FILE
 	FILE exists and has its sticky bit set.
-L FILE
 	FILE exists and is a symbolic link.
-O FILE
 	FILE exists and is owned by the effective user ID.
-S
 	FILE exists and is a socket.
touch
Name
touch — change file access and modification times
Description
touch is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--no-create
 	is equivalent to -c.
-d, --date=STRING
 	parses STRING and uses it instead of current time.
--reference=FILE
 	is equivalent to -r.
--time=WORD
 	sets time given by WORD: access atime use (same as -a) modify mtime (same as -m).
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
tr
Name
tr — translate or delete characters
Description
tr is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--complement
 	is equivalent to -c.
--delete
 	is equivalent to -d.
--squeeze-repeats
 	is equivalent to -s.
-t, --truncate-set1
 	first truncates SET1 to length of SET2.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
tty
Name
tty — print the file name of the terminal connected to standard input
Description
tty is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--silent, --quiet
 	is equivalent to -s.
--delete
 	is equivalent to -d.
--squeeze-repeats
 	is equivalent to -s.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
umount
Name
umount — unmount file systems
Synopsis
umount [-hV]
umount -a [-nrv] [-t vfstype]
umount [-nrv] device | dir [...]
Description
umount detaches the file system(s) mentioned from the file hierarchy. A file system is specified by giving the directory where it has been mounted.
Standard Options
-V
 	print version and exits.
-v
 	invokes verbose mode.
-n
 	unmounts without writing in /etc/mtab.
-r
 	tries to remount read-only if unmounting fails.
-a
 	unmounts all of the file systems described in /etc/mtab except for the proc filesystem.
-t vfstype
 	indicates that the actions should only be taken on file systems of the specified type. More than one type may be specified in a comma separated list. The list of file system types can be prefixed with no to specify the file system types on which no action should be taken.
-f
 	forces unmount (in case of an unreachable NFS system).
uname
Name
uname — return system name 
Description
uname is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-a
 	prints all information (not just the options specified in the Single UNIX Specification).
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--all
 	is equivalent to -a.
--machine
 	is equivalent to -m.
--nodename
 	is equivalent to -n.
--release
 	is equivalent to -r.
-p, --processor
 	prints the host processor type.
--sysname
 	is equivalent to -s.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
unexpand
Name
unexpand — convert spaces to tabs
Description
unexpand is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--tabs=NUMBER, -NUMBER
 	is equivalent to -t NUMBER.
--tabs=LIST, -LIST
 	is equivalent to -t LIST.
uniq
Name
uniq — remove duplicate lines from a sorted file
Description
uniq is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--count
 	is equivalent to -c.
--repeated
 	is equivalent to -d.
-D, --all-repeated
 	prints all duplicate lines.
--skip-fields=N
 	is equivalent to -f fields.
-i, --ignore-case
 	ignores differences in case when comparing.
--skip-chars=N
 	is equivalent to -s.
--unique
 	is equivalent to -u.
-w, --check-chars=N
 	compares no more than N characters in lines.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
useradd
Name
useradd — create a new user or update default new user information
Synopsis
useradd [-c comment] [-d home_dir]
        [-g initial_group] [-G group[,...]]
        [-m [-k skeleton_dir]] [-p passwd] [-r]
        [-s shell] [-u uid [ -o]] login

useradd -D [-g default_group] [-b default_home]
           [-s default_shell]
Description
When invoked without the -D option, useradd creates a new user account using the values specified on the command line and the default values from the system. The new user account will be entered into the system files as needed, the home directory will be created, and initial files copied, depending on the command line options.
When invoked with the -D option, useradd will either display the current default values, or update the default values from the command line. If no options are specified, useradd displays the current default values.
Standard Options
-c comment
 	specifies the new user's password file comment field value.
-d home_dir
 	creates the new user using home_dir as the value for the user's login directory. The default is to append the login name to default_home and use that as the login directory name.
-g initial_group
 	specifies the group name or number of the user's initial login group. The group name must exist. A group number must refer to an already existing group. If -g is not specified, the implementation will follow the normal user default for that system. This may create a new group or choose a default group that normal users are placed in. Applications which require control of the groups into which a user is placed should specify -g.
-G group,[...]
 	specifies a list of supplementary groups which the user is also a member of. Each group is separated from the next by a comma, with no intervening whitespace. The groups are subject to the same restrictions as the group given with the -g option. The default is for the user to belong only to the initial group.
-m [-k skeleton_dir]
 	specifies the user's home directory will be created if it does not exist. The files contained in skeleton_dir will be copied to the home directory if the -k option is used, otherwise the files contained in /etc/skel will be used instead. Any directories contained in skeleton_dir or /etc/skel will be created in the user's home directory as well. The -k option is only valid in conjunction with the -m option. The default is to not create the directory and to not copy any files.
-p passwd
 	is the encrypted password, as returned by crypt(3). The default is to disable the account.
-r
 	creates a system account, that is, a user with a UID in the range reserved for system account users. If there is not a UID free in the reserved range the command will fail.
-s shell
 	specifies the name of the user's login shell. The default is to leave this field blank, which causes the system to select the default login shell.
-u uid [-o]
 	specifies the numerical value of the user's ID. This value must be unique, unless the -o option is used. The value must be non-negative. The default is the smallest ID value greater than 499 which is not yet used. 
Change Default Options
-b default_home
 	specifies the initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The user's name will be affixed to the end of default_home to create the new directory name if the -d option is not used when creating a new account.
-g default_group
 	specifies the group name or ID for a new user's initial group. The named group must exist, and a numerical group ID must have an existing entry.
-s default_shell
 	specifies the name of the new user's login shell. The named program will be used for all future new user accounts.
-c comment
 	specifies the new user's password file comment field value.
Application Usage
The -D option will typically be used by system administration packages. Most applications should not change defaults which will affect other applications and users.
userdel
Name
userdel — delete a user account and related files
Synopsis
userdel [-r] login
Description
Delete the user account named login. If there is also a group named login, this command may delete the group as well, or may leave it alone.
Options
-r
 	removes files in the user's home directory along with the home directory itself. Files located in other file system will have to be searched for and deleted manually.
usermod
Name
usermod — modify a user account
Synopsis
usermod [-c comment] [-d home_dir [ -m]]
        [-g initial_group] [-G group[,...]]
        [-l login_name] [-p passwd]
        [-s shell] [-u uid [ -o]] login
Options
-c comment
 	specifies the new value of the user's password file comment field.
-d home_dir
 	specifies the user's new login directory. If the -m option is given the contents of the current home directory will be moved to the new home directory, which is created if it does not already exist.
-g initial_group
 	specifies the group name or number of the user's new initial login group. The group name must exist. A group number must refer to an already existing group.
-G group,[...]
 	specifies a list of supplementary groups which the user is also a member of. Each group is separated from the next by a comma, with no intervening whitespace. The groups are subject to the same restrictions as the group given with the -g option. If the user is currently a member of a group which is not listed, the user will be removed from the group.
-l login_name
 	changes the name of the user from login to login_name. Nothing else is changed. In particular, the user's home directory name should probably be changed to reflect the new login name.
-p passwd
 	is the encrypted password, as returned by crypt(3).
-s shell
 	specifies the name of the user's new login shell. Setting this field to blank causes the system to select the default login shell.
-u uid [-o]
 	specifies the numerical value of the user's ID. This value must be unique, unless the -o option is used. The value must be non-negative. Any files which the user owns and which are located in the directory tree rooted at the user's home directory will have the file user ID changed automatically. Files outside of the user's home directory must be altered manually.
wc
Name
wc — print the number of bytes, words, and lines in files
Description
wc is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-m
 	has unspecified behavior.1
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--bytes, --chars
 	is equivalent to -c.
--lines
 	is equivalent to -l.
-L, --max-line-length
 	prints the length of the longest line.
--words
 	is equivalent to -w.
--version
 	outputs version information and exits.
Notes
1. 	GNU textutils 2.0 does not have -m, but more recent versions of textutils have it (added on 2000-08-06). The LSB will require this option in the future.
xargs
Name
xargs — build and execute command lines from standard input
Description
xargs is as specified in the Single UNIX Specification but with differences as listed below.
Differences
-E
 	has unspecified behavior.
-I
 	has unspecified behavior.
-L
 	has unspecified behavior.
LSB Deprecated Differences
The behaviors specified in this section are expected to disappear from a future version of the LSB; applications should only use the non-LSB-deprecated behaviors.
--null, -0
 	terminates input filenames by a null character instead of by whitespace, and the quotes and backslash are not special (every character is taken literally). Disables the end of file string, which is treated like any other argument. Useful when arguments might contain white space, quote marks, or backslashes. The GNU find -print0 option produces input suitable for this mode.
--eof[=eof-str]
 	is equivalent to -e.
--replace[=replace-str]
 	uses FORMAT as the format string that controls the output of time.
--max-lines[=max-lines]
 	is equivalent to -l.
--max-args=max-args
 	is equivalent to -n.
--interactive
 	is equivalent to -p.
--no-run-if-empty, -r
 	does not run this command if the standard input does not contain any nonblanks. Normally, the command is run once even if there is no input.
--max-chars
 	is equivalent to -s.
--verbose
 	is equivalent to -t.
--version
 	Prints the version number of xargs and exits.
--exit
 	is equivalent to -x.
--max-procs=max-procs, -P max-procs
 	runs up to max-procs processes at a time; the default is 1. If max-procs is 0, xargs will run as many processes as possible at a time. Use the -n option with -P; otherwise chances are that only one exec will be done.
Notes
1. 	Linux Standard Base
2. 	CAE Specification, January 1997, Commands and Utilities (XCU), Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-191-8, C604)
1. 	The following two options are expected to be added in a future version of the LSB:
-o office
 	sets the user's office room number.
-p office-phone
 	sets the user's office phone number.
Note that some implementations contain a "-o other" option which specifies an additional field called "other". Traditionally, this field is not subject to the constraints about legitimate characters in fields. Also, one traditionally must have appropriate privileges to change the other field. At this point there is no consensus about whether it is desirable to specify the other field; applications may wish to avoid using it.
The "-w work_phone" field found in some implementations should be replaced by the "-p office_phone" field. The "-r room_number" field found in some implementations is the equivalent of the "-o office" option mentioned above; which one of these two options to specify will depend on implementation experience and the decision regarding the other field.
The intention is for chfn to match the behavior of finger; some historical implementations have been broken in the sense that finger and chfn do not agree on what the fields are.
1. 	Need further investigation on the behavior of various implementations concerning whether program is a full pathname, the basename only, the program as named by argv[0], or what.
1. 	In particular, specifying a command without a protocol is insufficient to provide interoperability. rsync can be implemented on top of LSB interfaces.
1. 	Rationale: the -z option found in the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2 is supported in neither the Single UNIX Specification, Version 3 nor existing Linux implementations.
1. 	Newer versions of split in GNU textutils have support for the -a flag. In a future version of the LSB, the -a flag will be required to conform to the Single UNIX Specification definition.
1. 	GNU textutils 2.0 does not have -m, but more recent versions of textutils have it (added on 2000-08-06). The LSB will require this option in the future.

IX. Standard Shell

Chapter 18. Standard Shell
18.1. Introduction
The shell is POSIX-1003.2 with the following exceptions.
18.2. Standard Shell Exceptions
18.2.1. Pathname of $0
When the shell searches for a command name in the PATH and finds a shell script, POSIX specifies that it shall pass the command name as argv[0] and in the child shell script, $0 shall be set from argv[0] (POSIX Standard, section 3.9.1.1, line 779-784).
However, for an LSB shell, the system may implement either this behavior or $0 may be set to an absolute pathname of the shell script. 1
18.2.2. Sourcing non-executable files
•	When PATH is used to locate a file for the dot utility, and a matching file is on the PATH but is not readable, the behavior is undefined (unlike POSIX which apparently requires the shell to continue searching through the rest of the PATH, POSIX Standard, section 3.14.4, line 1493-1498).
18.2.3. Globalized Pattern Matching
For filename globbing, globalized implementations shall provide the functionality defined in [POSIX.2], with the following exceptions: 
•	 Range expression (such as [a-z]) can be based on code point order instead of collating element order. 
•	Equivalence class expression (such as [=a=]) and multi-character collating element expression (such as [.ch.]) are optional.
•	Handling of a multi-character collating element is optional.
18.3. Standard Shell Rationale
Among the many shells existing at the time of evaluation, the two most compliant were Bash and Pdksh.
At the time of evaluation, Bash was found mostly compliant with the POSIX-1003.2 standard, and its maintainer demonstrated interest in bringing the shell to full compliance. Bash already enjoys wide use among shell users, and is even included in many distributions as the default shell. Further, the abundance of documentation found both on the Internet and in the bookstore makes Bash an easy shell to use.
Of course, shell scripts must avoid using bash extensions if they want to run on any LSB system.
The two exceptions to POSIX (concerning . and non-readable files, and argv[0]) in this section are to accommodate bash. The need for exceptions should be reviewed if bash changes or POSIX changes to remove the conflict. Future versions of this standard may also consider exceptions for pdksh or other almost-compliant shells, if they seem to be warranted.
Notes
1. 	For example, bash behaves in the following way: 
$ cat ~/prefix/bin/mycommand
#!/bin/sh
echo $0
$ PATH=~/prefix/bin mycommand
/home/kingdon/prefix/bin/mycommand
$ 
With a POSIX shell, the output would be "mycommand".
When bash is executing an executable rather than a shell script, it seems to behave in the POSIX way.

X. Users & Groups

Chapter 19. Users & Groups
A "user name" is a string that is used to identify a user. A "login name" is a user name that is associated with a system login. A "user id" is a non negative integer, which can be contained in an object of type uid_t, that is used to identify a system user. 
When the identity of a user is associated with a process, a user ID value is referred to as a real user ID, or an effective user ID. [POSIX 1003.1-1996]
A "group name" is a string that is used to identify a set of users. A "group id" is a non negative integer, which can be contained in a object of type gid_t, that is used to identify a group of system users. Each system user is a member of at least one group. When the identity of a group is associated with a process, a group ID value is referred to as a real group ID, or an effective group ID. [POSIX 1003.1-1996]
19.1. User and Group Database
The format of the User and Group databases is not specified. Programs may only read these databases using the provided API. Changes to these databases should be made using the provided commands.
19.2. User & Group Names
Below is a table of required mnemonic user and group names. This specification makes no attempt to numerically assign uid or gid numbers. The exception is the uid and gid for "root" which are equal to 0.
Table 19-1. Required User & Group Names
User	Group	Comments	
root	root	Administrative user with no restrictions	
bin	bin	Legacy UID/GIDa	
daemon	daemon	Legacy UID/GIDb	
Notes:
a. 	The 'bin' UID/GID is included for compatibility with legacy applications. New applications should no longer use the 'bin' UID/GID.
b. 	The 'daemon' UID/GID was used as an unprivileged UID/GID for daemons to execute under in order to limit their access to the system. Generally daemons should now run under individual UID/GIDs in order to further partition daemons from one another.	

Below is a table of optional mnemonic user and group names. This specification makes no attempt to numerically assign uid or gid numbers. If the username exists on a system, then they should be in the suggested corresponding group. These user and group names are for use by distributions, not by applications.
Table 19-2. Optional User & Group Names
User	Group	Comments	
adm	adm	Administrative special privileges	
lp	lp	Printer special privileges	
sync	sync	Login to sync the system	
shutdown	shutdown	Login to shutdown the system	
halt	halt	Login to halt the system	
mail	mail	Mail special privileges	
news	news	News special privileges	
uucp	uucp	UUCP special privileges	
operator	root	Operator special privileges	
man	man	Man special privileges	
nobody	nobody	Used by NFS	

The differences in numeric values of the uids and gids between systems on a network can be reconciled via NIS, rdist(1), rsync(1), or ugidd(8). Only a minimum working set of "user names" and their corresponding "user groups" are required. Applications cannot assume non system user or group names will be defined.
Applications cannot assume any policy for the default umask or the default directory permissions a user may have. Applications should enforce user only file permissions on private files such as mailboxes. The location of the users home directory is also not defined by policy other than the recommendations of the FHS and must be obtained by the *pwnam(3) calls.
19.3. UID Ranges
The system UIDs from 0 to 99 should be statically allocated by the system. These static assignments should be defined by a common registry.
The system UIDs from 100 to 499 should be reserved for dynamically allocation by system administrators and post install scripts using useradd(1).
19.4. Rationale
The purpose of specifying optional users and groups is to reduce the potential for name conflicts between applications and distributions.

XI. Execution Environment

Chapter 20. File System Hierarchy
An LSB conforming implementation must adhere to the FHS 2.2.
An LSB conforming application is recommended to follow the FHS 2.2. If it does not follow the FHS 2.2 it should include documentation of the differences.
The FHS allows many components or subsystems to be optional. An application must check for the existence of an optional component before using it, and should behave in a reasonable manner if the optional component is not present.
The FHS requirement to locate the operating system kernel in either / or /boot does not apply if the operating system kernel does not exist as a file in the filesystem.
The FHS specifies certain behaviors for a variety of commands if they are present (for example, ping or python). However, LSB applications must not rely on any commands beyond those specified by the LSB. The mere existence of a command must not be used as an indication that the command behaves in any particular way.
The following directories or links need not be present: /etc/X11 /usr/bin/X11 /usr/lib/X11
20.1. /dev
The following must exist under /dev. Other devices may also exist in /dev. Device names may exist as symbolic links to other device nodes located in /dev or subdirectories of /dev. There is no requirement concerning major/minor number values.
/dev/null
 	All data written to this device is discarded. A read from this device will return an EOF condition.
/dev/zero
 	This device is a source of zeroed out data. All data written to this device is discarded. A read from this device will return as many bytes containing the value zero as was requested.
/dev/tty
 	This device is a synonym for the controlling terminal of a process. Once this device is opened, all reads and writes will behave as if the actual controlling terminal device had been opened.

Chapter 21. Additional Recommendations
21.1. Minimal granted Directory and File permissions
In this Chapter "System" means an "LSB conforming implementation" and "application" means an "LSB conforming (third party vendor) application".
The system must grant to the application read and execute permissions needed to use all system interfaces (ABIs) mentioned in the LSB document and included standards. 
21.2. Recommendations for applications on ownership and permissions
21.2.1. Directory Write Permissions
The application should not depend on having directory write permission outside /tmp, /var/tmp, invoking user's home directory and /var/opt/package, (where package is the name of the application package). 
The application should not depend on owning these directories.
For these directories the application should be able to work with directory write permissions restricted by the "sticky bit". (Which prevents the application from removing files owned by another user. This is classically done with /tmp, to prevent accidental deletion of "foreign" files.)
21.2.2. File Write Permissions
The application should not depend on file write permission on files not owned by the user it runs under with the exception of its personal inbox /var/mail/username
21.2.3. File Read and execute Permissions
The application should not depend on having read permission to every file and directory.
21.2.4. Suid and Sgid Permissions
The application should not depend on the suid/sgid permissions of a file not packaged with the application. Instead, the distribution is responsible for assuming that all system commands have the required permissions and work correctly.
Rationale: Let us make security officers happy. Let's give them the freedom to take sgid/suid perms away, as long as they do not break the system's functionality.
21.2.5. Privileged users
"Normal" applications should not depend on running as a privileged user.
Special applications that have a reason to run under a privileged user, should outline these reasons clearly in their documentation, if they are not obvious as in the case of a backup/restore program. Users of the application should be informed, that "this application demands security privileges, which could interfere with system security".
The application should not contain binary-only software that requires being run as root, as this makes security auditing harder or even impossible. 
21.2.6. Changing permissions
The application should not change permissions of files and directories that do not belong to its own package. To do so without a warning notice in the documentation is regarded as unfriendly act.
21.2.7. Removable Media (Cdrom, Floppy, etc.)
Applications that expect to be runnable from removable media should not depend on logging in as a privileged user, and should be prepared to deal with a restrictive environment. Examples of such restrictions could be default mount options that disable set-user/group-ID attributes, disabling block or character-special files on the medium, or remapping the user/group IDs of files away from 0. 1
21.2.8. Installable applications
If the installation of an application requires the execution of programs with superuser privileges, such programs should also be supplied in a human-readable form. 
Without this, the local system administrator would have to blindly trust a piece of software, particularly its security.
Notes
1. 	Rationale: System vendors and local system administrators want to run applications from removable media, but want the possibility to control what the application can do.

Chapter 22. Additional Behaviors
This section specifies behaviors in which there is optional behavior in one of the standards on which the LSB relies, and where the LSB requires a specific behavior. 1
The fcntl() function shall detect EDEADLK, as described as optional behavior in the Single UNIX Specification.
The fcntl() function shall treat the "cmd" value -1 as invalid.
The "whence" value -1 shall be an invalid value for the lseek(), fseek() and fcntl() functions.
The value "-5" shall be an invalid signal number.
The opendir() function shall detect EMFILE and ENFILE, as described as optional behavior in the Single UNIX Specification.
The readdir() and closedir() functions shall detect EBADF, as described as optional behavior in the Single UNIX Specification.
If the sigaddset() or sigdelset() functions are passed an invalid signal number, they shall return with EINVAL. Implementations are only required to enforce this requirement for signal numbers which are specified to be invalid by this specification (such as the -5 mentioned above).
The START and STOP termios characters shall be changeable, as described as optional behavior in the "General Terminal Interface" section of the Single UNIX Specification.
The mode value "-1" to the access() function shall be treated as invalid.
A value of -1 shall be an invalid "_PC_..." value for pathconf().
A value of -1 shall be an invalid "_SC..." value for sysconf().
The link() function shall require access to the existing file in order to succeed, as described as optional behavior in the Single UNIX Specification.
Calling unlink() on a directory shall fail. Calling link() specifying a directory as the first argument shall fail. See also unlink>.
The link() function shall not work across file systems, and shall return with EXDEV as described as optional behavior in the Single UNIX Specification.
The nl_item value "-1" shall be invalid for nl_langinfo.
The value -1 shall be an invalid "_CS_..." value for confstr().
The value "z" shall be an invalid mode argument to popen().
2
Notes
1. 	The intention is that none of these choices will create problems in practice (for example, for LSB implementations on top of non-Linux kernels). Future versions of the LSB may relax these requirements if needed.
2. 	On a Linux kernel, removing or renaming a directory will give EBUSY only when the directory is in use by a system process. However, the LSB does not specify this behavior on the grounds that it is of no use to applications and may be difficult to implement on some kernels.
Linux allows one to call rename() on a directory without having write access, but the LSB does not require this.

Chapter 23. Localization
Applications may either install a message catalog in the MO format as specified by the info page in version 0.10.40 of the gettext source package, or the application may execute the msgfmt command during it's installation to compile the message catalog. In either case, the resulting output must be located in the package's private area under /opt, and the application may use bindtextdomain() to specify this location.
Implementations shall support the POSIX and C locales as specified in the Single UNIX Specification.
23.1. Regular Expressions
Utilities that process regular expressions shall support Basic Regular Expressions and Extended Regular Expressions as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, with the following exceptions:
Range expression (such as [a-z]) can be based on code point order instead of collating element order.
Equivalence class expression (such as [=a=]) and multi-character collating element expression (such as [.ch.]) are optional.
Handling of a multi-character collating element is optional.
This affects at least the following utilities: grep (grep>) (including egrep), sed (sed>), and awk (awk>). 
23.2. Filename Globbing
Utilities that perform filename globbing (also known as Pattern Matching Notation) shall do it as specified in the Single UNIX Specification, with the following exceptions:
Range expression (such as [a-z]) can be based on code point order instead of collating element order.
Equivalence class expression (such as [=a=]) and multi-character collating element expression (such as [.ch.]) are optional.
Handling of a multi-character collating element is optional.
This affects at least the following utilities: cpio (cpio>), find (find>), ls (ls>) and tar (tar>).

XII. System Initialization

Chapter 24. System Initialization
24.1. Cron Jobs
Packages may not touch the configuration file /etc/crontab, nor may they modify the files in /var/spool/cron/crontabs.
If a package wants to install a job that has to be executed via cron, it shall place a file in one of the following directories:
/etc/cron.daily
/etc/cron.weekly
/etc/cron.monthly
As these directory names say, the files within them are executed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis, respectively. See below for the rules concerning the names of these files.
 If a certain job has to be executed more frequently than daily, the package shall install a file /etc/cron.d/cron-name tagged as configuration file. This file uses the same syntax as /etc/crontab and is processed by cron automatically.
It is recommended that files installed in any of these directories be scripts (shell scripts, Perl scripts, etc.) so that they may be modified by the local system administrator. In addition, they must be registered as configuration file.
The scripts in these directories have to check, if all necessary programs are installed before they try to execute them. Otherwise, problems will arise when a package was removed (but not purged), since the configuration files are kept on the system in this situation.
To avoid namespace conflicts in the /etc/cron.* directories, the filenames used by LSB-compliant packages in /etc/cron.daily, /etc/cron.weekly, /etc/cron.monthly, or /etc/cron.d must come from a managed namespace. These filenames may be assigned using one of the following methods:
•	 Assigned namespace. This namespace consists of names which only use the character set [a-z0-9]. In order to avoid conflicts these cron script names must be reserved through the Linux Assigned Names and Numbers Authority (LANANA). Information about the LANANA may be found at www.lanana.org (http://www.lanana.org). 
 Commonly used names shall be reserved in advance; developers for projects should be encouraged reserve names from LANA, so that each distribution can use the same name, and to avoid conflicts with other projects.
•	 Hierarchical namespace. This namespace consists of scripts names which look like this: [hier1]-[hier2]-...-[name], where name is again taken the character set [a-z0-9], and where there may be one or more [hier-n] components. [hier1] may either be an LSB provider name assigned by the LANANA, or it may be owners' DNS name in lower case, with at least one '.'. I.e., "debian.org", "staroffice.sun.com", etc. The LSB provider name assigned by LANANA must only consist of the ASCII characters [a-z0-9].
•	 Reserved namespace. This namespace consists of script names which begin with the character '_', and is reserved for distribution use only. This namespace should be used for core packages only, and in general use of this namespace is highly discouraged. 
24.2. Init Script Actions
Init files provided by LSB applications shall accept one argument, saying what to do:
start	start the service	
stop	stop the service	
restart	stop and restart the service if the service is already running, otherwise start the service	
reload	cause the configuration of the service to be reloaded without actually stopping and restarting the service	
force-reload	cause the configuration to be reloaded if the service supports this, otherwise restart the service	
status	print the current status of the service	

The start, stop, restart, force-reload, and status commands must be supported by all init files; the reload option is optional. Other init script actions may be defined by the init script.
Init files must ensure that they will behave sensibly if invoked with start when the service is already running, or with stop when it isn't, and that they don't kill unfortunately-named user processes. The best way to achieve this is to use the init-script functions provided by /lib/lsb/init-functions.
If a service reloads its configuration automatically (as in the case of cron, for example), the reload option of the init file must behave as if the configuration has been reloaded successfully.
These executable files must not fail obscurely when the configuration files remain but the package has been removed, as the default in [the packaging system] is to leave configuration files on the system after the package has been removed. Only when it is executed with the [purge] option will [the packaging system] remove configuration files. Therefore, you should include a test statement at the top of the file, like this: 
test -f program-executed-later-in-file || exit 5
or take the equivalent action if the init file is not a shell script.
If the status command is given, the init script will return the following exit status codes. 
0	program is running or service is OK	
1	program is dead and /var/run pid file exists	
2	program is dead and /var/lock lock file exists	
3	program is stopped	
4	program or service status is unknown	
5-99	reserved for future LSB use	
100-149	reserved for distribution use	
150-199	reserved for application use	
200-254	reserved	

In the case of init script commands other than "status" (i.e., "start", "stop", "restart", "reload", and "force-reload"), the init script must return an exit status of zero if the action described by the argument has been successful. Otherwise, the exit status shall be non-zero, as defined below. In addition to straightforward success, the following situations are also to be considered successful: 
•	restarting a service (instead of reloading it) with the "force-reload" argument
•	running "start" on a service already running
•	running "stop" on a service already stopped or not running
•	running "restart" on a service already stopped or not running
In case of an error, while processing any init script action except for "status", the init script must print an error message and return one of the following non-zero exit status codes. 
1	generic or unspecified error (current practice)	
2	invalid or excess argument(s)	
3	unimplemented feature (for example, "reload")	
4	user had insufficient privilege	
5	program is not installed	
6	program is not configured	
7	program is not running	
8-99	reserved for future LSB use	
100-149	reserved for distribution use	
150-199	reserved for application use	
200-254	reserved	

All error messages must be printed on standard error. All status messages must be printed on standard output. (This does not prevent scripts from calling the logging functions such as log_failure_msg).
Since init files may be run manually by a system administrator with non-standard environment variable values for PATH, USER, LOGNAME, etc. init files must not depend on the values of these environment variables. They should set them to some known/default values if they are needed. 
24.3. Comment conventions for init scripts
LSB applications which need to execute script(s) at bootup and/or shutdown may provide one or more init.d files. These files are installed by the install_initd program described below, which copies it into a standard directory and makes whatever other adjustments (creation of symlinks, creation of entries in a database, etc.) are necessary so that the script can be run at boot-time. 1
 In the init.d file, information about the shell script shall be delimited by the lines "### BEGIN INIT INFO" and "### END INIT INFO". These delimiter lines may containg trailing whitespace, which shall be ignored. Inside this block there shall be lines of the form "# {keyword}: [arg1] [arg2] ...". (All lines inside this block start with a hash ('#') character in the first column, so that shell treats them as comments.) There must be exactly one space character between "#" and the keyword.2 The following keywords, with their arguments are defined in this specification:
   # Provides: boot_facility_1 [ boot_facility_2 ...]
        # Required-Start: boot_facility_1 [ boot_facility_2 ...]
        # Required-Stop: boot_facility_1 [ boot_facility_2 ...]
        # Default-Start: run_level_1 [ run_level_2 ...]
        # Default-Stop: run_level_1 [ run_level_2 ...]
        # Short-Description: short_description
        # Description: multiline_description
Additional keywords may be defined in future LSB specifications. Distributions may define local extensions by using the prefix "X-[distribution name]" --- for example, "X-RedHat-foobardecl", or "X-Debian-xyzzydecl". 
An init.d shell script may declare using the "Required-Start: " header that it must not be run until certain boot facilities are provided. This information is used by the installation tool or the boot-time boot-script execution facility to assure that init scripts are run in the correct order. When an init script is run with a "start" argument, the boot facility or facilities specified in the "Provides" header shall be considered present, and hence init scripts which require those boot facilities would then be eligble to be run. When an init script is run with a "stop" argument, the boot facilities specified in the "Provides" header are considered no longer present. There are naming conventions for boot facilities and system facilities, as described in a following section.
Similarly, the "Required-Stop:" header defines which facilities must still be available during the shutdown of that service. Hence, the init script system should avoid stopping shell scripts which provide those facilities until this shell script is stopped.
The "Default-Start" and "Default-Stop" headers define which run levels should by default run the script with a start or stop argument, respectively, to start or stop the services controlled by the init script.
The "Short-Description" and "Description" header fields are used to provide text which describes the actions of the init script. The "short_description" shall be a relatively short, pithy description of the init script, where as the "multiline_description" can be a much longer piece of text that may span mulitple lines. In a multiline description, each continuation line must begin with a '#' followed by tab character or a '#' followed by at least two space characters. The multiline description is terminated by the first line that does not match this criteria.
The comment conventions described in this session are only required for use by LSB-compliant applications; system init scripts as provided by LSB-compliant run-time environments are not required to use the scheme outlined here. 3
24.4. Installation and removal of init.d files
An init.d file is installed by copying it into /etc/init.d (which may be a symlink to another location). This can be done by the package installer. During the package's postinstall script, the program "/usr/lib/lsb/install_initd" configures the distribution's boot script system to call the package's init.d file at the appropriate time.
The install_initd program takes a single argument, the pathanme to the /etc/init.d file. For example:
     /usr/lib/lsb/install_initd /etc/init.d/example.com-coffeed
 When a software package is removed, the package's preuninstall script shall call /usr/lib/lsb/remove_initd and pass the pathname to the /etc/init.d file. The package manager is still responsible for removing the /etc/init.d file; the remove_initd program is provided in case the distribution needs to clean up any other modifications in the distribution's boot script system that might have been made by the install_initd program. For example:
  /usr/lib/lsb/remove_initd /etc/init.d/example.com-coffeed
There should be a tool available to the user (e.g., RedHat's chkconfig) which can be used by the system administrator to easily manipulate at which init levels a particular init.d script is started or stopped. This specification currently does not specify such an interface, however.
24.5. Run Levels
 The following run levels are specified for use by the "Default-Start:" and "Default-Stop:" specifiers as defined by the section Comment conventions for init scripts>. Many LSB run-time environments commonly use these run level definitions, and in the absence of other considerations, providers of run-time environments are strongly encouraged to follow this convention to provide consistency for system administrators who need to work with multiple distributions. However, it is not required that LSB-compliant run-time environments use these run levels; the distribution-provided install_initd script may map the run levels specified below to whatever distribution-specified run levels are most appropriate. 
0	halt	
1	single user mode	
2	multiuser with no network services exported	
3	normal/full multiuser	
4	reserved for local use, default is normal/full multiuser	
5	multiuser with xdm or equivalent	
6	reboot	

24.6. Facility names
Boot facilities are used to indicate dependencies in init scripts, as defined in a previous section. Facility names that begin with a dollar sign ('$') are system facility names, defined by the LSB, and MUST be provided by distributions. 4 LSB applications must not provide facilities that begin with a dollar sign. This document defines the following facility names:
$local_fs	all local filesystems are mounted	
$network	low level networking (ethernet card; may imply PCMCIA running)	
$named	daemons which may provide hostname resolution (if present) are running	
$portmap	daemons providing SunRPC/ONCRPC portmapping service5 (if present) are running	
$remote_fs	all remote filesystems are mounted6.	
$syslog	system logger is operational	
$time	the system time has been set 7	

Other (non-system) facilities may be defined by other LSB applications. These facilities shall be named using the same conventions defined for naming init.d script names. Commonly, the facility provided by an LSB application init.d script will have the same name as the name assigned to the init.d script.
24.7. Script names
Since the init.d scripts must live in a single directory, they must come from a single namespace. Three means of assigning names from this namespace are available:
•	Assigned namespace. This namespace consists of names which only use the character set [a-z0-9]. This space is desirable for scripts which system administrators may often wish to run manually: e.g., "/etc/init.d/named restart" In order to avoid conflicts these init.d names must be reserved through the Linux Assigned Names and Numbers Authority (LANANA). Information about the LANANA may be found at www.lanana.org (http://www.lanana.org).
Commonly used names shall be reserved in advance; developers for projects should be encouraged to reserve names from LANANA, so that each distribution can use the same name, and to avoid conflicts with other projects.
•	Hierarchical namespace. This namespace consists of scripts names which look like this: [hier1]-[hier2]-...-[name], where name is again taken the character set [a-z0-9], and where there may be one or more [hier-n] components. [hier1] may either be an LSB provider name assigned by the LANANA, or it may be owners' DNS name in lower case, with at least one '.' (e.g., "debian.org", "staroffice.sun.com"). The LSB provider name assigned by LANANA must only consist of the ASCII characters [a-z0-9].
•	Reserved namespace. This namespace consists of script names which begin with the character '_', and is reserved for distribution use only. This namespace should be used for core packages only, and in general use of this namespace is highly discouraged. 
In general, if a package or some system function is likely to be used on multiple systems, the package developers or the distribution SHOULD get a registered name through LANANA, and distributions should strive to use the same name whenever possible. For applications which may not be "core" or may not be commonly installed, the hierarchical namespace may be more appropriate. An advantage to the hierarchical namespace is that there is no need to consult with the LANANA before obtaining an assigned name.
Short names are highly desirable, since many system administrators like to use them to manually start and stop services. Given this, they should be standardized on a per-package basis. This is the rationale behind having a LANANA organization to assign these names. The LANANA may be called upon to handle other namespace issues, such as package/prerequisites naming (which is essential to making prerequisites to work correctly).
24.8. Init script Functions
Each LSB-compliant init.d script must source the file /lib/lsb/init-functions. This file must cause the following shell script commands to be defined. This can be done either by adding a directory to the PATH variable which defines these commands, or by defining sh aliases. While the distribution-provided aliases may choose to use bash extensions (at the distribution's option), the LSB init.d files themselves should only depend in /bin/sh features as defined by POSIX.2.
start_daemon [-f] [-n nicelevel] pathname [args]	This runs the specified program as a daemon. start_daemon will check to see if there is a program named "daemon" already running. If so, it will not start another copy of the daemon unless the -f option is given. The -n option specifies a nice level. See nice(1).	
killproc basename [signal]	This stops the specified program. The program is found using the algorithm given by pidofproc. If a signal is specified, using the -signal_name or -signal_number syntaxes specified by the kill command, the program is sent that signal. Otherwise, a SIGTERM followed by a SIGKILL after some number of seconds is sent.	
pidofproc basename	This function returns one or more pid(s) for a particular daemon. If an entry is found in /var/run/basename.pid, then that value is returned. Compliant implementations of the LSB may attempt other mechanisms for determining the pid(s), although this is not required (and not recommended, since a user can trick startup scripts by creating processes that appear to be system programs in the process list thus creating a potential security exposure). Hence, LSB-complaint applications who wish to use the pidofproc function in their init scripts must store the pid in /var/run/basename.pid.	
log_success_msg "message"	This requests the distribution to print a success message. The message should be relatively short; no more than 60 characters is highly desirable.	
log_failure_msg "message"	This requests the distribution to print a failure message. The message should be relatively short; no more than 60 characters is highly desirable.	
log_warning_msg "message"	This requests the distribution to print a warning message. The message should be relatively short; no more than 60 characters is highly desirable.	

Notes
1. 	This specification does not require, but is designed to allow, the development of a system which runs boot scripts in parallel. Hence, enforced-serialization of scripts is avoided unless it is explicitly necessary.
2. 	More than one space, or a tab character, indicates the continuation line.
3. 	While these comment conventions do not prohibited in system init scripts, they do not provide sufficient functionality for most distributions' needs. Extensions which would addressed these needs (for example, "Should-Start:" and "Should-Stop:") would have substantially complicated the design of the install_initd script, which is why they were not included in this specification. Future versions of this specification may extend these comment conventions to add this functionality, if and when reference implementations which implement these extensions become available for use by distributions.
4. 	The dollar sign does not indicate variable expansion as in many Linux utilities. Starting a facility name with a dollar sign is merely a way of dividing the namespace between the system and applications.
5. 	as defined in RFC 1833
6. 	In some LSB run-time environments, filesystems such as /usr may be remote. Many applications that require $local_fs will probably require also require $remote_fs
7. 	i.e., using a network-based time program such as ntp or rdate, or via the hardware Real Time Clock

Appendix A. Alphabetical Listing of Interfaces
A.1. libX11
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
X11R6.4 Xlib - C library	

Table A-1. libX11 Function Interfaces
XActivateScreenSaver1	XIfEvent1	XcmsCIELabQueryMinL1	
XAddConnectionWatch1	XImageByteOrder1	XcmsCIELabToCIEXYZ1	
XAddExtension1	XInitExtension1	XcmsCIELabWhiteShiftColors1	
XAddHost1	XInitImage1	XcmsCIELuvClipL1	
XAddHosts1	XInitThreads1	XcmsCIELuvClipLuv1	
XAddPixel1	XInsertModifiermapEntry1	XcmsCIELuvClipuv1	
XAddToExtensionList1	XInstallColormap1	XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC1	
XAddToSaveSet1	XInternAtom1	XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxL1	
XAllPlanes1	XInternAtoms1	XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxLC1	
XAllocClassHint1	XInternalConnectionNumbers1	XcmsCIELuvQueryMinL1	
XAllocColor1	XIntersectRegion1	XcmsCIELuvToCIEuvY1	
XAllocColorCells1	XKeycodeToKeysym1	XcmsCIELuvWhiteShiftColors1	
XAllocColorPlanes1	XKeysymToKeycode1	XcmsCIEXYZToCIELab1	
XAllocIconSize1	XKeysymToString1	XcmsCIEXYZToCIEuvY1	
XAllocNamedColor1	XKillClient1	XcmsCIEXYZToCIExyY1	
XAllocSizeHints1	XLastKnownRequestProcessed1	XcmsCIEXYZToRGBi1	
XAllocStandardColormap1	XListDepths1	XcmsCIEuvYToCIELuv1	
XAllocWMHints1	XListExtensions1	XcmsCIEuvYToCIEXYZ1	
XAllowEvents1	XListFonts1	XcmsCIEuvYToTekHVC1	
XAutoRepeatOff1	XListFontsWithInfo1	XcmsCIExyYToCIEXYZ1	
XAutoRepeatOn1	XListHosts1	XcmsClientWhitePointOfCCC1	
XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet1	XListInstalledColormaps1	XcmsConvertColors1	
XBell1	XListPixmapFormats1	XcmsCreateCCC1	
XBitmapBitOrder1	XListProperties1	XcmsDefaultCCC1	
XBitmapPad1	XLoadFont1	XcmsDisplayOfCCC1	
XBitmapUnit1	XLoadQueryFont1	XcmsFormatOfPrefix1	
XBlackPixel1	XLocaleOfFontSet1	XcmsFreeCCC1	
XBlackPixelOfScreen1	XLocaleOfIM1	XcmsLookupColor1	
XCellsOfScreen1	XLocaleOfOM1	XcmsPrefixOfFormat1	
XChangeActivePointerGrab1	XLockDisplay1	XcmsQueryBlack1	
XChangeGC1	XLookupColor1	XcmsQueryBlue1	
XChangeKeyboardControl1	XLookupKeysym1	XcmsQueryColor1	
XChangeKeyboardMapping1	XLookupString1	XcmsQueryColors1	
XChangePointerControl1	XLowerWindow1	XcmsQueryGreen1	
XChangeProperty1	XMapRaised1	XcmsQueryRed1	
XChangeSaveSet1	XMapSubwindows1	XcmsQueryWhite1	
XChangeWindowAttributes1	XMapWindow1	XcmsRGBToRGBi1	
XCheckIfEvent1	XMaskEvent1	XcmsRGBiToCIEXYZ1	
XCheckMaskEvent1	XMatchVisualInfo1	XcmsRGBiToRGB1	
XCheckTypedEvent1	XMaxCmapsOfScreen1	XcmsScreenNumberOfCCC1	
XCheckTypedWindowEvent1	XMaxRequestSize1	XcmsScreenWhitePointOfCCC1	
XCheckWindowEvent1	XMinCmapsOfScreen1	XcmsSetCCCOfColormap1	
XCirculateSubwindows1	XMoveResizeWindow1	XcmsSetCompressionProc1	
XCirculateSubwindowsDown1	XMoveWindow1	XcmsSetWhiteAdjustProc1	
XCirculateSubwindowsUp1	XNewModifiermap1	XcmsSetWhitePoint1	
XClearArea1	XNextEvent1	XcmsStoreColor1	
XClearWindow1	XNextRequest1	XcmsStoreColors1	
XClipBox1	XNoOp1	XcmsTekHVCClipC1	
XCloseDisplay1	XOMOfOC1	XcmsTekHVCClipV1	
XCloseIM1	XOffsetRegion1	XcmsTekHVCClipVC1	
XCloseOM1	XOpenDisplay1	XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC1	
XConfigureWindow1	XOpenIM1	XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxV1	
XConnectionNumber1	XOpenOM1	XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVC1	
XContextDependentDrawing1	XParseColor1	XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVSamples1	
XContextualDrawing1	XParseGeometry1	XcmsTekHVCQueryMinV1	
XConvertCase1	XPeekEvent1	XcmsTekHVCToCIEuvY1	
XConvertSelection1	XPeekIfEvent1	XcmsTekHVCWhiteShiftColors1	
XCopyArea1	XPending1	XcmsVisualOfCCC1	
XCopyColormapAndFree1	XPlanesOfScreen1	XkbAllocClientMap1	
XCopyGC1	XPointInRegion1	XkbAllocCompatMap1	
XCopyPlane1	XPolygonRegion1	XkbAllocControls1	
XCreateBitmapFromData1	XProcessInternalConnection1	XkbAllocGeomColors1	
XCreateColormap1	XProtocolRevision1	XkbAllocGeomDoodads1	
XCreateFontCursor1	XProtocolVersion1	XkbAllocGeomKeyAliases1	
XCreateFontSet1	XPutBackEvent1	XkbAllocGeomKeys1	
XCreateGC1	XPutImage1	XkbAllocGeomOutlines1	
XCreateGlyphCursor1	XPutPixel1	XkbAllocGeomOverlayKeys1	
XCreateIC1	XQLength1	XkbAllocGeomOverlayRows1	
XCreateImage1	XQueryBestCursor1	XkbAllocGeomOverlays1	
XCreateOC1	XQueryBestSize1	XkbAllocGeomPoints1	
XCreatePixmap1	XQueryBestStipple1	XkbAllocGeomProps1	
XCreatePixmapCursor1	XQueryBestTile1	XkbAllocGeomRows1	
XCreatePixmapFromBitmapData1	XQueryColor1	XkbAllocGeomSectionDoodads1	
XCreateRegion1	XQueryColors1	XkbAllocGeomSections1	
XCreateSimpleWindow1	XQueryExtension1	XkbAllocGeomShapes1	
XCreateWindow1	XQueryFont1	XkbAllocGeometry1	
XDefaultColormap1	XQueryKeymap1	XkbAllocIndicatorMaps1	
XDefaultColormapOfScreen1	XQueryPointer1	XkbAllocKeyboard1	
XDefaultDepth1	XQueryTextExtents1	XkbAllocNames1	
XDefaultDepthOfScreen1	XQueryTextExtents161	XkbAllocServerMap1	
XDefaultGC1	XQueryTree1	XkbApplyCompatMapToKey1	
XDefaultGCOfScreen1	XRaiseWindow1	XkbBell1	
XDefaultRootWindow1	XReadBitmapFile1	XkbBellEvent1	
XDefaultScreen1	XReadBitmapFileData1	XkbChangeEnabledControls1	
XDefaultScreenOfDisplay1	XRebindKeysym1	XkbChangeMap1	
XDefaultString1	XRecolorCursor1	XkbChangeNames1	
XDefaultVisual1	XReconfigureWMWindow1	XkbChangeTypesOfKey1	
XDefaultVisualOfScreen1	XRectInRegion1	XkbComputeEffectiveMap1	
XDefineCursor1	XRefreshKeyboardMapping1	XkbComputeRowBounds1	
XDeleteContext1	XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback1	XkbComputeSectionBounds1	
XDeleteModifiermapEntry1	XRemoveConnectionWatch1	XkbComputeShapeBounds1	
XDeleteProperty1	XRemoveFromSaveSet1	XkbComputeShapeTop1	
XDestroyIC1	XRemoveHost1	XkbCopyKeyType1	
XDestroyImage1	XRemoveHosts1	XkbCopyKeyTypes1	
XDestroyOC1	XReparentWindow1	XkbFindOverlayForKey1	
XDestroyRegion1	XResetScreenSaver1	XkbForceBell1	
XDestroySubwindows1	XResizeWindow1	XkbFreeClientMap1	
XDestroyWindow1	XResourceManagerString1	XkbFreeCompatMap1	
XDirectionalDependentDrawing1	XRestackWindows1	XkbFreeComponentList1	
XDisableAccessControl1	XRootWindow1	XkbFreeControls1	
XDisplayCells1	XRootWindowOfScreen1	XkbFreeGeomColors1	
XDisplayHeight1	XRotateBuffers1	XkbFreeGeomDoodads1	
XDisplayHeightMM1	XRotateWindowProperties1	XkbFreeGeomKeyAliases1	
XDisplayKeycodes1	XSaveContext1	XkbFreeGeomKeys1	
XDisplayMotionBufferSize1	XScreenCount1	XkbFreeGeomOutlines1	
XDisplayName1	XScreenNumberOfScreen1	XkbFreeGeomOverlayKeys1	
XDisplayOfIM1	XScreenOfDisplay1	XkbFreeGeomOverlayRows1	
XDisplayOfOM1	XScreenResourceString1	XkbFreeGeomOverlays1	
XDisplayOfScreen1	XSelectInput1	XkbFreeGeomPoints1	
XDisplayPlanes1	XSendEvent1	XkbFreeGeomProperties1	
XDisplayString1	XServerVendor1	XkbFreeGeomRows1	
XDisplayWidth1	XSetAccessControl1	XkbFreeGeomSections1	
XDisplayWidthMM1	XSetAfterFunction1	XkbFreeGeomShapes1	
XDoesBackingStore1	XSetArcMode1	XkbFreeGeometry1	
XDoesSaveUnders1	XSetAuthorization1	XkbFreeIndicatorMaps1	
XDrawArc1	XSetBackground1	XkbFreeKeyboard1	
XDrawArcs1	XSetClassHint1	XkbFreeNames1	
XDrawImageString1	XSetClipMask1	XkbFreeServerMap1	
XDrawImageString161	XSetClipOrigin1	XkbGetAutoRepeatRate1	
XDrawLine1	XSetClipRectangles1	XkbGetCompatMap1	
XDrawLines1	XSetCloseDownMode1	XkbGetControls1	
XDrawPoint1	XSetCommand1	XkbGetGeometry1	
XDrawPoints1	XSetDashes1	XkbGetIndicatorMap1	
XDrawRectangle1	XSetErrorHandler1	XkbGetIndicatorState1	
XDrawRectangles1	XSetFillRule1	XkbGetKeyActions1	
XDrawSegments1	XSetFillStyle1	XkbGetKeyBehaviors1	
XDrawString1	XSetFont1	XkbGetKeyExplicitComponents1	
XDrawString161	XSetFontPath1	XkbGetKeyModifierMap1	
XDrawText1	XSetForeground1	XkbGetKeySyms1	
XDrawText161	XSetFunction1	XkbGetKeyTypes1	
XEHeadOfExtensionList1	XSetGraphicsExposures1	XkbGetKeyboard1	
XESetBeforeFlush1	XSetICFocus1	XkbGetKeyboardByName1	
XESetCloseDisplay1	XSetICValues1	XkbGetMap1	
XESetCopyGC1	XSetIMValues1	XkbGetMapChanges1	
XESetCreateFont1	XSetIOErrorHandler1	XkbGetNamedGeometry1	
XESetCreateGC1	XSetIconName1	XkbGetNamedIndicator1	
XESetError1	XSetIconSizes1	XkbGetNames1	
XESetErrorString1	XSetInputFocus1	XkbGetState1	
XESetEventToWire1	XSetLineAttributes1	XkbGetUpdatedMap1	
XESetFlushGC1	XSetLocaleModifiers1	XkbGetVirtualMods1	
XESetFreeFont1	XSetModifierMapping1	XkbGetXlibControls1	
XESetFreeGC1	XSetNormalHints1	XkbIgnoreExtension1	
XESetPrintErrorValues1	XSetOCValues1	XkbInitCanonicalKeyTypes1	
XESetWireToError1	XSetOMValues1	XkbKeyTypesForCoreSymbols1	
XESetWireToEvent1	XSetPlaneMask1	XkbKeycodeToKeysym1	
XEmptyRegion1	XSetPointerMapping1	XkbKeysymToModifiers1	
XEnableAccessControl1	XSetRGBColormaps1	XkbLatchGroup1	
XEqualRegion1	XSetRegion1	XkbLatchModifiers1	
XEventMaskOfScreen1	XSetScreenSaver1	XkbLibraryVersion1	
XEventsQueued1	XSetSelectionOwner1	XkbListComponents1	
XExtendedMaxRequestSize1	XSetSizeHints1	XkbLockGroup1	
XExtentsOfFontSet1	XSetStandardColormap1	XkbLockModifiers1	
XFetchBuffer1	XSetStandardProperties1	XkbLookupKeyBinding1	
XFetchBytes1	XSetState1	XkbLookupKeySym1	
XFetchName1	XSetStipple1	XkbNoteControlsChanges1	
XFillArc1	XSetSubwindowMode1	XkbNoteMapChanges1	
XFillArcs1	XSetTSOrigin1	XkbNoteNameChanges1	
XFillPolygon1	XSetTextProperty1	XkbOpenDisplay1	
XFillRectangle1	XSetTile1	XkbQueryExtension1	
XFillRectangles1	XSetTransientForHint1	XkbRefreshKeyboardMapping1	
XFilterEvent1	XSetWMClientMachine1	XkbResizeKeyActions1	
XFindContext1	XSetWMColormapWindows1	XkbResizeKeySyms1	
XFindOnExtensionList1	XSetWMHints1	XkbResizeKeyType1	
XFlush1	XSetWMIconName1	XkbSelectEventDetails1	
XFlushGC1	XSetWMName1	XkbSelectEvents1	
XFontsOfFontSet1	XSetWMNormalHints1	XkbSetAtomFuncs1	
XForceScreenSaver1	XSetWMProperties1	XkbSetAutoRepeatRate1	
XFree1	XSetWMProtocols1	XkbSetAutoResetControls1	
XFreeColormap1	XSetWMSizeHints1	XkbSetCompatMap1	
XFreeColors1	XSetWindowBackground1	XkbSetControls1	
XFreeCursor1	XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap1	XkbSetDebuggingFlags1	
XFreeExtensionList1	XSetWindowBorder1	XkbSetDetectableAutoRepeat1	
XFreeFont1	XSetWindowBorderPixmap1	XkbSetGeometry1	
XFreeFontInfo1	XSetWindowBorderWidth1	XkbSetIgnoreLockMods1	
XFreeFontNames1	XSetWindowColormap1	XkbSetIndicatorMap1	
XFreeFontPath1	XSetZoomHints1	XkbSetMap1	
XFreeFontSet1	XShrinkRegion1	XkbSetNamedIndicator1	
XFreeGC1	XStoreBuffer1	XkbSetNames1	
XFreeModifiermap1	XStoreBytes1	XkbSetServerInternalMods1	
XFreePixmap1	XStoreColor1	XkbSetXlibControls1	
XFreeStringList1	XStoreColors1	XkbToControl1	
XGContextFromGC1	XStoreName1	XkbTranslateKeyCode1	
XGeometry1	XStoreNamedColor1	XkbTranslateKeySym1	
XGetAtomName1	XStringListToTextProperty1	XkbUpdateMapFromCore1	
XGetAtomNames1	XStringToKeysym1	XkbUseExtension1	
XGetClassHint1	XSubImage1	XkbVirtualModsToReal1	
XGetCommand1	XSubtractRegion1	XmbDrawImageString1	
XGetDefault1	XSupportsLocale1	XmbDrawString1	
XGetErrorDatabaseText1	XSync1	XmbDrawText1	
XGetErrorText1	XSynchronize1	XmbLookupString1	
XGetFontPath1	XTextExtents1	XmbResetIC1	
XGetFontProperty1	XTextExtents161	XmbSetWMProperties1	
XGetGCValues1	XTextPropertyToStringList1	XmbTextEscapement1	
XGetGeometry1	XTextWidth1	XmbTextExtents1	
XGetICValues1	XTextWidth161	XmbTextListToTextProperty1	
XGetIMValues1	XTranslateCoordinates1	XmbTextPerCharExtents1	
XGetIconName1	XUndefineCursor1	XmbTextPropertyToTextList1	
XGetIconSizes1	XUngrabButton1	XrmCombineDatabase1	
XGetImage1	XUngrabKey1	XrmCombineFileDatabase1	
XGetInputFocus1	XUngrabKeyboard1	XrmDestroyDatabase1	
XGetKeyboardControl1	XUngrabPointer1	XrmEnumerateDatabase1	
XGetKeyboardMapping1	XUngrabServer1	XrmGetDatabase1	
XGetModifierMapping1	XUninstallColormap1	XrmGetFileDatabase1	
XGetMotionEvents1	XUnionRectWithRegion1	XrmGetResource1	
XGetNormalHints1	XUnionRegion1	XrmGetStringDatabase1	
XGetOCValues1	XUnloadFont1	XrmInitialize1	
XGetOMValues1	XUnlockDisplay1	XrmLocaleOfDatabase1	
XGetPixel1	XUnmapSubwindows1	XrmMergeDatabases1	
XGetPointerControl1	XUnmapWindow1	XrmParseCommand1	
XGetPointerMapping1	XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback1	XrmPermStringToQuark1	
XGetRGBColormaps1	XUnsetICFocus1	XrmPutFileDatabase1	
XGetScreenSaver1	XVaCreateNestedList1	XrmPutLineResource1	
XGetSelectionOwner1	XVendorRelease1	XrmPutResource1	
XGetSizeHints1	XVisualIDFromVisual1	XrmPutStringResource1	
XGetStandardColormap1	XWMGeometry1	XrmQGetResource1	
XGetSubImage1	XWarpPointer1	XrmQGetSearchList1	
XGetTextProperty1	XWhitePixel1	XrmQGetSearchResource1	
XGetTransientForHint1	XWhitePixelOfScreen1	XrmQPutResource1	
XGetVisualInfo1	XWidthMMOfScreen1	XrmQPutStringResource1	
XGetWMClientMachine1	XWidthOfScreen1	XrmQuarkToString1	
XGetWMColormapWindows1	XWindowEvent1	XrmSetDatabase1	
XGetWMHints1	XWithdrawWindow1	XrmStringToBindingQuarkList1	
XGetWMIconName1	XWriteBitmapFile1	XrmStringToQuark1	
XGetWMName1	XXorRegion1	XrmStringToQuarkList1	
XGetWMNormalHints1	XauDisposeAuth1	XrmUniqueQuark1	
XGetWMProtocols1	XauFileName1	Xutf8TextListToTextProperty	
XGetWMSizeHints1	XauGetBestAuthByAddr1	Xutf8TextPropertyToTextList	
XGetWindowAttributes1	XauReadAuth1	XwcDrawImageString1	
XGetWindowProperty1	XcmsAddColorSpace1	XwcDrawString1	
XGetZoomHints1	XcmsAddFunctionSet1	XwcDrawText1	
XGrabButton1	XcmsAllocColor1	XwcFreeStringList1	
XGrabKey1	XcmsAllocNamedColor1	XwcLookupString1	
XGrabKeyboard1	XcmsCCCOfColormap1	XwcResetIC1	
XGrabPointer1	XcmsCIELabClipL1	XwcTextEscapement1	
XGrabServer1	XcmsCIELabClipLab1	XwcTextExtents1	
XHeightMMOfScreen1	XcmsCIELabClipab1	XwcTextListToTextProperty1	
XHeightOfScreen1	XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC1	XwcTextPerCharExtents1	
XIMOfIC1	XcmsCIELabQueryMaxL1	XwcTextPropertyToTextList1	
XIconifyWindow1	XcmsCIELabQueryMaxLC1	

A.2. libXt
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
Linux Standard Base	
X11R6.4 X Toolkit Intrinsics	

Table A-2. libXt Function Interfaces
XtAddActions11	XtCvtStringToInitialState11	XtOwnSelectionIncremental11	
XtAddCallback11	XtCvtStringToInt11	XtParent11	
XtAddCallbacks11	XtCvtStringToPixel11	XtParseAcceleratorTable11	
XtAddConverter11	XtCvtStringToRestartStyle11	XtParseTranslationTable11	
XtAddEventHandler11	XtCvtStringToShort11	XtPeekEvent11	
XtAddExposureToRegion11	XtCvtStringToTranslationTable11	XtPending11	
XtAddGrab11	XtCvtStringToUnsignedChar11	XtPopdown11	
XtAddInput11	XtCvtStringToVisual11	XtPopup11	
XtAddRawEventHandler11	XtDatabase11	XtPopupSpringLoaded11	
XtAddSignal11	XtDestroyApplicationContext11	XtProcessEvent11	
XtAddTimeOut11	XtDestroyGC11	XtProcessLock11	
XtAddWorkProc11	XtDestroyWidget11	XtProcessUnlock11	
XtAllocateGC11	XtDirectConvert11	XtQueryGeometry11	
XtAppAddActionHook11	XtDisownSelection11	XtRealizeWidget11	
XtAppAddActions11	XtDispatchEvent11	XtRealloc11	
XtAppAddBlockHook11	XtDispatchEventToWidget11	XtRegisterCaseConverter11	
XtAppAddConverter11	XtDisplay11	XtRegisterDrawable11	
XtAppAddInput11	XtDisplayInitialize11	XtRegisterExtensionSelector11	
XtAppAddSignal11	XtDisplayOfObject11	XtRegisterGrabAction11	
XtAppAddTimeOut11	XtDisplayStringConversionWarning11	XtReleaseGC11	
XtAppAddWorkProc11	XtDisplayToApplicationContext11	XtReleasePropertyAtom11	
XtAppCreateShell11	XtError11	XtRemoveActionHook11	
XtAppError11	XtErrorMsg11	XtRemoveAllCallbacks11	
XtAppErrorMsg11	XtFindFile11	XtRemoveBlockHook11	
XtAppGetErrorDatabase11	XtFree11	XtRemoveCallback11	
XtAppGetErrorDatabaseText11	XtGetActionKeysym11	XtRemoveCallbacks11	
XtAppGetExitFlag11	XtGetActionList11	XtRemoveEventHandler11	
XtAppGetSelectionTimeout11	XtGetApplicationNameAndClass11	XtRemoveEventTypeHandler11	
XtAppInitialize11	XtGetApplicationResources11	XtRemoveGrab11	
XtAppLock11	XtGetClassExtension11	XtRemoveInput11	
XtAppMainLoop11	XtGetConstraintResourceList11	XtRemoveRawEventHandler11	
XtAppNextEvent11	XtGetDisplays11	XtRemoveSignal11	
XtAppPeekEvent11	XtGetErrorDatabase11	XtRemoveTimeOut11	
XtAppPending11	XtGetErrorDatabaseText11	XtRemoveWorkProc11	
XtAppProcessEvent11	XtGetGC11	XtReservePropertyAtom11	
XtAppReleaseCacheRefs11	XtGetKeyboardFocusWidget11	XtResizeWidget11	
XtAppSetErrorHandler11	XtGetKeysymTable11	XtResizeWindow11	
XtAppSetErrorMsgHandler11	XtGetMultiClickTime11	XtResolvePathname11	
XtAppSetExitFlag11	XtGetResourceList11	XtScreen11	
XtAppSetFallbackResources11	XtGetSelectionParameters11	XtScreenDatabase11	
XtAppSetSelectionTimeout11	XtGetSelectionRequest11	XtScreenOfObject11	
XtAppSetTypeConverter11	XtGetSelectionTimeout11	XtSendSelectionRequest11	
XtAppSetWarningHandler11	XtGetSelectionValue11	XtSessionGetToken11	
XtAppSetWarningMsgHandler11	XtGetSelectionValueIncremental11	XtSessionReturnToken11	
XtAppUnlock11	XtGetSelectionValues11	XtSetErrorHandler11	
XtAppWarning11	XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental11	XtSetErrorMsgHandler11	
XtAppWarningMsg11	XtGetSubresources11	XtSetEventDispatcher11	
XtAugmentTranslations11	XtGetSubvalues11	XtSetKeyTranslator11	
XtBuildEventMask11	XtGetValues11	XtSetKeyboardFocus11	
XtCallAcceptFocus11	XtGrabButton11	XtSetLanguageProc11	
XtCallActionProc11	XtGrabKey11	XtSetMappedWhenManaged11	
XtCallCallbackList11	XtGrabKeyboard11	XtSetMultiClickTime11	
XtCallCallbacks11	XtGrabPointer11	XtSetSelectionParameters11	
XtCallConverter11	XtHasCallbacks11	XtSetSelectionTimeout11	
XtCallbackExclusive11	XtHooksOfDisplay11	XtSetSensitive11	
XtCallbackNone11	XtInitialize11	XtSetSubvalues11	
XtCallbackNonexclusive11	XtInitializeWidgetClass11	XtSetTypeConverter11	
XtCallbackPopdown11	XtInsertEventHandler11	XtSetValues11	
XtCallbackReleaseCacheRef11	XtInsertEventTypeHandler11	XtSetWMColormapWindows11	
XtCallbackReleaseCacheRefList11	XtInsertRawEventHandler11	XtSetWarningHandler11	
XtCalloc11	XtInstallAccelerators11	XtSetWarningMsgHandler11	
XtCancelSelectionRequest11	XtInstallAllAccelerators11	XtStringConversionWarning11	
XtChangeManagedSet11	XtIsApplicationShell11	XtSuperclass11	
XtClass11	XtIsComposite11	XtToolkitInitialize11	
XtCloseDisplay11	XtIsConstraint11	XtToolkitThreadInitialize11	
XtConfigureWidget11	XtIsManaged11	XtTranslateCoords11	
XtConvert11	XtIsObject11	XtTranslateKey11	
XtConvertAndStore11	XtIsOverrideShell11	XtTranslateKeycode11	
XtConvertCase11	XtIsRealized11	XtUngrabButton11	
XtCreateApplicationContext11	XtIsRectObj11	XtUngrabKey11	
XtCreateApplicationShell11	XtIsSensitive11	XtUngrabKeyboard11	
XtCreateManagedWidget11	XtIsSessionShell11	XtUngrabPointer11	
XtCreatePopupShell11	XtIsShell11	XtUninstallTranslations11	
XtCreateSelectionRequest11	XtIsSubclass11	XtUnmanageChild11	
XtCreateWidget11	XtIsTopLevelShell11	XtUnmanageChildren11	
XtCreateWindow11	XtIsTransientShell11	XtUnmapWidget11	
XtCvtColorToPixel11	XtIsVendorShell11	XtUnrealizeWidget11	
XtCvtIntToBool11	XtIsWMShell11	XtUnregisterDrawable11	
XtCvtIntToBoolean11	XtIsWidget11	XtVaAppCreateShell11	
XtCvtIntToColor11	XtKeysymToKeycodeList11	XtVaAppInitialize11	
XtCvtIntToFloat11	XtLastEventProcessed11	XtVaCreateArgsList11	
XtCvtIntToFont11	XtLastTimestampProcessed11	XtVaCreateManagedWidget11	
XtCvtIntToPixel11	XtMainLoop11	XtVaCreatePopupShell11	
XtCvtIntToPixmap11	XtMakeGeometryRequest11	XtVaCreateWidget11	
XtCvtIntToShort11	XtMakeResizeRequest11	XtVaGetApplicationResources11	
XtCvtIntToUnsignedChar11	XtMalloc11	XtVaGetSubresources11	
XtCvtStringToAcceleratorTable11	XtManageChild11	XtVaGetSubvalues11	
XtCvtStringToAtom11	XtManageChildren11	XtVaGetValues11	
XtCvtStringToBool11	XtMapWidget11	XtVaOpenApplication11	
XtCvtStringToBoolean11	XtMenuPopupAction11	XtVaSetSubvalues11	
XtCvtStringToCommandArgArray11	XtMergeArgLists11	XtVaSetValues11	
XtCvtStringToCursor11	XtMoveWidget11	XtWarning11	
XtCvtStringToDimension11	XtName11	XtWarningMsg11	
XtCvtStringToDirectoryString11	XtNameToWidget11	XtWidgetToApplicationContext11	
XtCvtStringToDisplay11	XtNewString11	XtWindow11	
XtCvtStringToFile11	XtNextEvent11	XtWindowOfObject11	
XtCvtStringToFloat11	XtNoticeSignal11	XtWindowToWidget11	
XtCvtStringToFont11	XtOpenApplication11	_XtCheckSubclassFlag11	
XtCvtStringToFontSet11	XtOpenDisplay11	_XtCopyFromArg10	
XtCvtStringToFontStruct11	XtOverrideTranslations11	_XtInherit10	
XtCvtStringToGravity11	XtOwnSelection11	_XtIsSubclassOf10	

Table A-3. libXt Data Interfaces
XtCXtToolkitError11	objectClass11	topLevelShellClassRec11	
XtShellStrings11	objectClassRec11	topLevelShellWidgetClass11	
XtStrings11	overrideShellClassRec11	transientShellClassRec11	
_XtInheritTranslations10	overrideShellWidgetClass11	transientShellWidgetClass11	
applicationShellWidgetClass11	rectObjClass11	widgetClass11	
compositeClassRec11	rectObjClassRec11	widgetClassRec11	
compositeWidgetClass11	sessionShellClassRec11	wmShellClassRec11	
constraintClassRec11	sessionShellWidgetClass11	wmShellWidgetClass11	
constraintWidgetClass11	shellClassRec11	
	
coreWidgetClass11	shellWidgetClass11	

A.3. libm
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
ISO/IEC 9899: 1999, Programming Languages --C	
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)	

Table A-4. libm Function Interfaces
acos(GLIBC_2.0)23	csinhl(GLIBC_2.0)22	log(GLIBC_2.0)23	
acosf(GLIBC_2.0)22	csinl(GLIBC_2.0)22	log10(GLIBC_2.0)23	
acosh(GLIBC_2.0)23	csqrt(GLIBC_2.0)22	log10f22	
acoshf(GLIBC_2.0)22	csqrtf(GLIBC_2.0)22	log10l22	
acoshl(GLIBC_2.0)22	csqrtl(GLIBC_2.0)22	log1p(GLIBC_2.0)23	
acosl(GLIBC_2.0)22	ctan(GLIBC_2.0)22	logb(GLIBC_2.0)23	
asin(GLIBC_2.0)23	ctanf(GLIBC_2.0)22	logf22	
asinf(GLIBC_2.0)22	ctanh(GLIBC_2.0)22	logl22	
asinh(GLIBC_2.0)23	ctanhf(GLIBC_2.0)22	lrint(GLIBC_2.0)22	
asinhf(GLIBC_2.0)22	ctanhl(GLIBC_2.0)22	lrintf(GLIBC_2.0)22	
asinhl(GLIBC_2.0)22	ctanl(GLIBC_2.0)22	lrintl(GLIBC_2.0)22	
asinl(GLIBC_2.0)22	dremf(GLIBC_2.0)22	lround(GLIBC_2.0)22	
atan(GLIBC_2.0)23	dreml(GLIBC_2.0)22	lroundf(GLIBC_2.0)22	
atan2(GLIBC_2.0)23	erf(GLIBC_2.0)23	lroundl(GLIBC_2.0)22	
atan2f(GLIBC_2.0)22	erfc(GLIBC_2.0)23	matherr(GLIBC_2.0)22	
atan2l(GLIBC_2.0)22	erfcf(GLIBC_2.0)22	modf(GLIBC_2.0)23	
atanf(GLIBC_2.0)22	erfcl(GLIBC_2.0)22	modff(GLIBC_2.0)22	
atanh(GLIBC_2.0)23	erff(GLIBC_2.0)22	modfl(GLIBC_2.0)22	
atanhf(GLIBC_2.0)22	erfl(GLIBC_2.0)22	nan(GLIBC_2.0)22	
atanhl(GLIBC_2.0)22	exp(GLIBC_2.0)23	nanf(GLIBC_2.0)22	
atanl(GLIBC_2.0)22	expf22	nanl(GLIBC_2.0)22	
cabs(GLIBC_2.1)23	expl22	nearbyint(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cabsf(GLIBC_2.1)22	expm1(GLIBC_2.1)23	nearbyintf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cabsl(GLIBC_2.1)22	fabs(GLIBC_2.1)23	nearbyintl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cacos(GLIBC_2.1)22	fabsf(GLIBC_2.1)22	nextafter(GLIBC_2.1)23	
cacosf(GLIBC_2.1)22	fabsl(GLIBC_2.1)22	nextafterf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cacosh(GLIBC_2.1)22	fdim(GLIBC_2.1)22	nextafterl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cacoshf(GLIBC_2.1)22	fdimf(GLIBC_2.1)22	nexttoward(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cacoshl(GLIBC_2.1)22	fdiml(GLIBC_2.1)22	nexttowardf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cacosl(GLIBC_2.1)22	feclearexcept(GLIBC_2.1)22	nexttowardl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
carg(GLIBC_2.1)22	fegetenv(GLIBC_2.1)22	pow(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cargf(GLIBC_2.1)22	fegetexceptflag(GLIBC_2.1)22	pow10(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cargl(GLIBC_2.1)22	fegetround(GLIBC_2.1)22	pow10f(GLIBC_2.1)22	
casin(GLIBC_2.1)22	feholdexcept(GLIBC_2.1)22	pow10l(GLIBC_2.1)22	
casinf(GLIBC_2.1)22	feraiseexcept(GLIBC_2.1)22	powf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
casinh(GLIBC_2.1)22	fesetenv(GLIBC_2.1)22	powl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
casinhf(GLIBC_2.1)22	fesetexceptflag(GLIBC_2.1)22	remainder(GLIBC_2.1)23	
casinhl(GLIBC_2.1)22	fesetround(GLIBC_2.1)22	remainderf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
casinl(GLIBC_2.1)22	fetestexcept(GLIBC_2.1)22	remainderl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
catan(GLIBC_2.1)22	feupdateenv(GLIBC_2.1)22	remquo(GLIBC_2.1)22	
catanf(GLIBC_2.1)22	finite(GLIBC_2.1)23	remquof(GLIBC_2.1)22	
catanh(GLIBC_2.1)22	finitef(GLIBC_2.1)22	remquol(GLIBC_2.1)22	
catanhf(GLIBC_2.1)22	finitel(GLIBC_2.1)22	rint(GLIBC_2.1)23	
catanhl(GLIBC_2.1)22	floor(GLIBC_2.1)23	rintf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
catanl(GLIBC_2.1)22	floorf(GLIBC_2.1)22	rintl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cbrt(GLIBC_2.0)23	floorl(GLIBC_2.0)22	round(GLIBC_2.0)22	
cbrtf(GLIBC_2.0)22	fma(GLIBC_2.0)22	roundf(GLIBC_2.0)22	
cbrtl(GLIBC_2.0)22	fmaf(GLIBC_2.0)22	roundl(GLIBC_2.0)22	
ccos(GLIBC_2.1)22	fmal(GLIBC_2.1)22	scalb(GLIBC_2.1)23	
ccosf(GLIBC_2.1)22	fmax(GLIBC_2.1)22	scalbf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
ccosh(GLIBC_2.1)22	fmaxf(GLIBC_2.1)22	scalbl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
ccoshf(GLIBC_2.1)22	fmaxl(GLIBC_2.1)22	scalbln(GLIBC_2.1)22	
ccoshl(GLIBC_2.1)22	fmin(GLIBC_2.1)22	scalblnf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
ccosl(GLIBC_2.1)22	fminf(GLIBC_2.1)22	scalblnl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
ceil(GLIBC_2.0)23	fminl(GLIBC_2.0)22	scalbn(GLIBC_2.0)22	
ceilf(GLIBC_2.0)22	fmod(GLIBC_2.0)23	scalbnf(GLIBC_2.0)22	
ceill(GLIBC_2.0)22	fmodf(GLIBC_2.0)22	scalbnl(GLIBC_2.0)22	
cexp(GLIBC_2.1)22	fmodl(GLIBC_2.1)22	significand(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cexpf(GLIBC_2.1)22	frexp(GLIBC_2.1)23	significandf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cexpl(GLIBC_2.1)22	frexpf(GLIBC_2.1)22	significandl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cimag(GLIBC_2.1)22	frexpl(GLIBC_2.1)22	sin(GLIBC_2.1)23	
cimagf(GLIBC_2.1)22	gamma(GLIBC_2.1)23	sincos(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cimagl(GLIBC_2.1)22	gammaf(GLIBC_2.1)22	sincosf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
clog(GLIBC_2.1)22	gammal(GLIBC_2.1)22	sincosl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
clog10(GLIBC_2.1)22	hypot(GLIBC_2.1)23	sinf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
clog10f(GLIBC_2.1)22	hypotf(GLIBC_2.1)22	sinh(GLIBC_2.1)23	
clog10l(GLIBC_2.1)22	hypotl(GLIBC_2.1)22	sinhf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
clogf(GLIBC_2.1)22	ilogb(GLIBC_2.1)23	sinhl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
clogl(GLIBC_2.1)22	ilogbf(GLIBC_2.1)22	sinl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
conj(GLIBC_2.1)22	ilogbl(GLIBC_2.1)22	sqrt(GLIBC_2.1)23	
conjf(GLIBC_2.1)22	j0(GLIBC_2.1)23	sqrtf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
conjl(GLIBC_2.1)22	j0f(GLIBC_2.1)22	sqrtl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
copysign(GLIBC_2.0)22	j0l(GLIBC_2.0)22	tan(GLIBC_2.0)23	
copysignf(GLIBC_2.0)22	j1(GLIBC_2.0)23	tanf(GLIBC_2.0)22	
copysignl(GLIBC_2.0)22	j1f(GLIBC_2.0)22	tanh(GLIBC_2.0)23	
cos(GLIBC_2.0)23	j1l(GLIBC_2.0)22	tanhf(GLIBC_2.0)22	
cosf(GLIBC_2.0)22	jn(GLIBC_2.0)23	tanhl(GLIBC_2.0)22	
cosh(GLIBC_2.0)23	jnf(GLIBC_2.0)22	tanl(GLIBC_2.0)22	
coshf(GLIBC_2.0)22	jnl(GLIBC_2.0)22	tgamma(GLIBC_2.0)22	
coshl(GLIBC_2.0)22	ldexp(GLIBC_2.0)23	tgammaf(GLIBC_2.0)22	
cosl(GLIBC_2.0)22	ldexpf(GLIBC_2.0)22	tgammal(GLIBC_2.0)22	
cpow(GLIBC_2.1)22	ldexpl(GLIBC_2.1)22	trunc(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cpowf(GLIBC_2.1)22	lgamma(GLIBC_2.1)23	truncf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cpowl(GLIBC_2.1)22	lgamma_r(GLIBC_2.1)22	truncl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cproj(GLIBC_2.1)22	lgammaf(GLIBC_2.1)22	y0(GLIBC_2.1)23	
cprojf(GLIBC_2.1)22	lgammaf_r(GLIBC_2.1)22	y0f(GLIBC_2.1)22	
cprojl(GLIBC_2.1)22	lgammal(GLIBC_2.1)22	y0l(GLIBC_2.1)22	
creal(GLIBC_2.1)22	lgammal_r(GLIBC_2.1)22	y1(GLIBC_2.1)23	
crealf(GLIBC_2.1)22	llrint(GLIBC_2.1)22	y1f(GLIBC_2.1)22	
creall(GLIBC_2.1)22	llrintf(GLIBC_2.1)22	y1l(GLIBC_2.1)22	
csin(GLIBC_2.1)22	llrintl(GLIBC_2.1)22	yn(GLIBC_2.1)23	
csinf(GLIBC_2.1)22	llround(GLIBC_2.1)22	ynf(GLIBC_2.1)22	
csinh(GLIBC_2.1)22	llroundf(GLIBC_2.1)22	ynl(GLIBC_2.1)22	
csinhf(GLIBC_2.1)22	llroundl(GLIBC_2.1)22	

Table A-5. libm Data Interfaces
signgam23	

A.4. libGL
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
OpenGL® Application Binary Interface for Linux	

Table A-6. libGL Function Interfaces
glAccum12	glGetString12	glRasterPos4iv12	
glActiveTextureARB12	glGetTexEnvfv12	glRasterPos4s12	
glAlphaFunc12	glGetTexEnviv12	glRasterPos4sv12	
glAreTexturesResident12	glGetTexGendv12	glReadBuffer12	
glArrayElement12	glGetTexGenfv12	glReadPixels12	
glBegin12	glGetTexGeniv12	glRectd12	
glBindTexture12	glGetTexImage12	glRectdv12	
glBitmap12	glGetTexLevelParameterfv12	glRectf12	
glBlendColor12	glGetTexLevelParameteriv12	glRectfv12	
glBlendEquation12	glGetTexParameterfv12	glRecti12	
glBlendFunc12	glGetTexParameteriv12	glRectiv12	
glCallList12	glHint12	glRects12	
glCallLists12	glHistogram12	glRectsv12	
glClear12	glIndexMask12	glRenderMode12	
glClearAccum12	glIndexPointer12	glResetHistogram12	
glClearColor12	glIndexd12	glResetMinmax12	
glClearDepth12	glIndexdv12	glRotated12	
glClearIndex12	glIndexf12	glRotatef12	
glClearStencil12	glIndexfv12	glScaled12	
glClientActiveTextureARB12	glIndexi12	glScalef12	
glClipPlane12	glIndexiv12	glScissor12	
glColor3b12	glIndexs12	glSelectBuffer12	
glColor3bv12	glIndexsv12	glSeparableFilter2D12	
glColor3d12	glIndexub12	glShadeModel12	
glColor3dv12	glIndexubv12	glStencilFunc12	
glColor3f12	glInitNames12	glStencilMask12	
glColor3fv12	glInterleavedArrays12	glStencilOp12	
glColor3i12	glIsEnabled12	glTexCoord1d12	
glColor3iv12	glIsList12	glTexCoord1dv12	
glColor3s12	glIsTexture12	glTexCoord1f12	
glColor3sv12	glLightModelf12	glTexCoord1fv12	
glColor3ub12	glLightModelfv12	glTexCoord1i12	
glColor3ubv12	glLightModeli12	glTexCoord1iv12	
glColor3ui12	glLightModeliv12	glTexCoord1s12	
glColor3uiv12	glLightf12	glTexCoord1sv12	
glColor3us12	glLightfv12	glTexCoord2d12	
glColor3usv12	glLighti12	glTexCoord2dv12	
glColor4b12	glLightiv12	glTexCoord2f12	
glColor4bv12	glLineStipple12	glTexCoord2fv12	
glColor4d12	glLineWidth12	glTexCoord2i12	
glColor4dv12	glListBase12	glTexCoord2iv12	
glColor4f12	glLoadIdentity12	glTexCoord2s12	
glColor4fv12	glLoadMatrixd12	glTexCoord2sv12	
glColor4i12	glLoadMatrixf12	glTexCoord3d12	
glColor4iv12	glLoadName12	glTexCoord3dv12	
glColor4s12	glLogicOp12	glTexCoord3f12	
glColor4sv12	glMap1d12	glTexCoord3fv12	
glColor4ub12	glMap1f12	glTexCoord3i12	
glColor4ubv12	glMap2d12	glTexCoord3iv12	
glColor4ui12	glMap2f12	glTexCoord3s12	
glColor4uiv12	glMapGrid1d12	glTexCoord3sv12	
glColor4us12	glMapGrid1f12	glTexCoord4d12	
glColor4usv12	glMapGrid2d12	glTexCoord4dv12	
glColorMask12	glMapGrid2f12	glTexCoord4f12	
glColorMaterial12	glMaterialf12	glTexCoord4fv12	
glColorPointer12	glMaterialfv12	glTexCoord4i12	
glColorSubTable12	glMateriali12	glTexCoord4iv12	
glColorTable12	glMaterialiv12	glTexCoord4s12	
glColorTableParameterfv12	glMatrixMode12	glTexCoord4sv12	
glColorTableParameteriv12	glMinmax12	glTexCoordPointer12	
glConvolutionFilter1D12	glMultMatrixd12	glTexEnvf12	
glConvolutionFilter2D12	glMultMatrixf12	glTexEnvfv12	
glConvolutionParameterf12	glMultiTexCoord1dARB12	glTexEnvi12	
glConvolutionParameterfv12	glMultiTexCoord1dvARB12	glTexEnviv12	
glConvolutionParameteri12	glMultiTexCoord1fARB12	glTexGend12	
glConvolutionParameteriv12	glMultiTexCoord1fvARB12	glTexGendv12	
glCopyColorSubTable12	glMultiTexCoord1iARB12	glTexGenf12	
glCopyColorTable12	glMultiTexCoord1ivARB12	glTexGenfv12	
glCopyConvolutionFilter1D12	glMultiTexCoord1sARB12	glTexGeni12	
glCopyConvolutionFilter2D12	glMultiTexCoord1svARB12	glTexGeniv12	
glCopyPixels12	glMultiTexCoord2dARB12	glTexImage1D12	
glCopyTexImage1D12	glMultiTexCoord2dvARB12	glTexImage2D12	
glCopyTexImage2D12	glMultiTexCoord2fARB12	glTexImage3D12	
glCopyTexSubImage1D12	glMultiTexCoord2fvARB12	glTexParameterf12	
glCopyTexSubImage2D12	glMultiTexCoord2iARB12	glTexParameterfv12	
glCopyTexSubImage3D12	glMultiTexCoord2ivARB12	glTexParameteri12	
glCullFace12	glMultiTexCoord2sARB12	glTexParameteriv12	
glDeleteLists12	glMultiTexCoord2svARB12	glTexSubImage1D12	
glDeleteTextures12	glMultiTexCoord3dARB12	glTexSubImage2D12	
glDepthFunc12	glMultiTexCoord3dvARB12	glTexSubImage3D12	
glDepthMask12	glMultiTexCoord3fARB12	glTranslated12	
glDepthRange12	glMultiTexCoord3fvARB12	glTranslatef12	
glDisable12	glMultiTexCoord3iARB12	glVertex2d12	
glDisableClientState12	glMultiTexCoord3ivARB12	glVertex2dv12	
glDrawArrays12	glMultiTexCoord3sARB12	glVertex2f12	
glDrawBuffer12	glMultiTexCoord3svARB12	glVertex2fv12	
glDrawElements12	glMultiTexCoord4dARB12	glVertex2i12	
glDrawPixels12	glMultiTexCoord4dvARB12	glVertex2iv12	
glDrawRangeElements12	glMultiTexCoord4fARB12	glVertex2s12	
glEdgeFlag12	glMultiTexCoord4fvARB12	glVertex2sv12	
glEdgeFlagPointer12	glMultiTexCoord4iARB12	glVertex3d12	
glEdgeFlagv12	glMultiTexCoord4ivARB12	glVertex3dv12	
glEnable12	glMultiTexCoord4sARB12	glVertex3f12	
glEnableClientState12	glMultiTexCoord4svARB12	glVertex3fv12	
glEnd12	glNewList12	glVertex3i12	
glEndList12	glNormal3b12	glVertex3iv12	
glEvalCoord1d12	glNormal3bv12	glVertex3s12	
glEvalCoord1dv12	glNormal3d12	glVertex3sv12	
glEvalCoord1f12	glNormal3dv12	glVertex4d12	
glEvalCoord1fv12	glNormal3f12	glVertex4dv12	
glEvalCoord2d12	glNormal3fv12	glVertex4f12	
glEvalCoord2dv12	glNormal3i12	glVertex4fv12	
glEvalCoord2f12	glNormal3iv12	glVertex4i12	
glEvalCoord2fv12	glNormal3s12	glVertex4iv12	
glEvalMesh112	glNormal3sv12	glVertex4s12	
glEvalMesh212	glNormalPointer12	glVertex4sv12	
glEvalPoint112	glOrtho12	glVertexPointer12	
glEvalPoint212	glPassThrough12	glViewport12	
glFeedbackBuffer12	glPixelMapfv12	glXChooseFBConfig12	
glFinish12	glPixelMapuiv12	glXChooseVisual12	
glFlush12	glPixelMapusv12	glXCopyContext12	
glFogf12	glPixelStoref12	glXCreateContext12	
glFogfv12	glPixelStorei12	glXCreateGLXPixmap12	
glFogi12	glPixelTransferf12	glXCreateNewContext12	
glFogiv12	glPixelTransferi12	glXCreatePbuffer12	
glFrontFace12	glPixelZoom12	glXCreatePixmap12	
glFrustum12	glPointSize12	glXCreateWindow12	
glGenLists12	glPolygonMode12	glXDestroyContext12	
glGenTextures12	glPolygonOffset12	glXDestroyGLXPixmap12	
glGetBooleanv12	glPolygonStipple12	glXDestroyPbuffer12	
glGetClipPlane12	glPopAttrib12	glXDestroyPixmap12	
glGetColorTable12	glPopClientAttrib12	glXDestroyWindow12	
glGetColorTableParameterfv12	glPopMatrix12	glXFreeContextEXT12	
glGetColorTableParameteriv12	glPopName12	glXGetClientString12	
glGetConvolutionFilter12	glPrioritizeTextures12	glXGetConfig12	
glGetConvolutionParameterfv12	glPushAttrib12	glXGetContextIDEXT12	
glGetConvolutionParameteriv12	glPushClientAttrib12	glXGetCurrentContext12	
glGetDoublev12	glPushMatrix12	glXGetCurrentDisplay12	
glGetError12	glPushName12	glXGetCurrentDrawable12	
glGetFloatv12	glRasterPos2d12	glXGetCurrentReadDrawable12	
glGetHistogram12	glRasterPos2dv12	glXGetFBConfigAttrib12	
glGetHistogramParameterfv12	glRasterPos2f12	glXGetProcAddressARB12	
glGetHistogramParameteriv12	glRasterPos2fv12	glXGetSelectedEvent12	
glGetIntegerv12	glRasterPos2i12	glXGetVisualFromFBConfig12	
glGetLightfv12	glRasterPos2iv12	glXImportContextEXT12	
glGetLightiv12	glRasterPos2s12	glXIsDirect12	
glGetMapdv12	glRasterPos2sv12	glXMakeContextCurrent12	
glGetMapfv12	glRasterPos3d12	glXMakeCurrent12	
glGetMapiv12	glRasterPos3dv12	glXQueryContext12	
glGetMaterialfv12	glRasterPos3f12	glXQueryContextInfoEXT12	
glGetMaterialiv12	glRasterPos3fv12	glXQueryDrawable12	
glGetMinmax12	glRasterPos3i12	glXQueryExtension12	
glGetMinmaxParameterfv12	glRasterPos3iv12	glXQueryExtensionsString12	
glGetMinmaxParameteriv12	glRasterPos3s12	glXQueryServerString12	
glGetPixelMapfv12	glRasterPos3sv12	glXQueryVersion12	
glGetPixelMapuiv12	glRasterPos4d12	glXSelectEvent12	
glGetPixelMapusv12	glRasterPos4dv12	glXSwapBuffers12	
glGetPointerv12	glRasterPos4f12	glXUseXFont12	
glGetPolygonStipple12	glRasterPos4fv12	glXWaitGL12	
glGetSeparableFilter12	glRasterPos4i12	glXWaitX12	

A.5. libXext
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
Double Buffer Extension Library	
X Display Power Management Signaling (DPMS) Extension, Library Specification	
Security Extension Specification, Version 7.1	
X Nonrectangular Window Shape Extension Library Version 1.0	
MIT-SHM--The MIT Shared Memory Extension	
X Synchronization Extension Library	

Table A-7. libXext Function Interfaces
DPMSCapable3	XShmCreateImage6	XSyncQueryExtension7	
DPMSDisable3	XShmCreatePixmap6	XSyncSetCounter7	
DPMSEnable3	XShmDetach6	XSyncSetPriority7	
DPMSForceLevel3	XShmGetEventBase6	XSyncValueAdd7	
DPMSGetTimeouts3	XShmGetImage6	XSyncValueEqual7	
DPMSGetVersion3	XShmPixmapFormat6	XSyncValueGreaterOrEqual7	
DPMSInfo3	XShmPutImage6	XSyncValueGreaterThan7	
DPMSQueryExtension3	XShmQueryExtension6	XSyncValueHigh327	
DPMSSetTimeouts3	XShmQueryVersion6	XSyncValueIsNegative7	
XSecurityAllocXauth4	XSyncAwait7	XSyncValueIsPositive7	
XSecurityFreeXauth4	XSyncChangeAlarm7	XSyncValueIsZero7	
XSecurityGenerateAuthorization4	XSyncChangeCounter7	XSyncValueLessOrEqual7	
XSecurityQueryExtension4	XSyncCreateAlarm7	XSyncValueLessThan7	
XSecurityRevokeAuthorization4	XSyncCreateCounter7	XSyncValueLow327	
XShapeCombineMask5	XSyncDestroyAlarm7	XSyncValueSubtract7	
XShapeCombineRectangles5	XSyncDestroyCounter7	XdbeAllocateBackBufferName2	
XShapeCombineRegion5	XSyncFreeSystemCounterList7	XdbeBeginIdiom2	
XShapeCombineShape5	XSyncGetPriority7	XdbeDeallocateBackBufferName2	
XShapeGetRectangles5	XSyncInitialize7	XdbeEndIdiom2	
XShapeInputSelected5	XSyncIntToValue7	XdbeFreeVisualInfo2	
XShapeOffsetShape5	XSyncIntsToValue7	XdbeGetBackBufferAttributes2	
XShapeQueryExtension5	XSyncListSystemCounters7	XdbeGetVisualInfo2	
XShapeQueryExtents5	XSyncMaxValue7	XdbeQueryExtension2	
XShapeQueryVersion5	XSyncMinValue7	XdbeSwapBuffers2	
XShapeSelectInput5	XSyncQueryAlarm7	
	
XShmAttach6	XSyncQueryCounter7	

A.6. libICE
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
X11R6.4 X Inter-Client Exchange (ICE) Protocol	

Table A-8. libICE Function Interfaces
IceAcceptConnection9	IceGetConnectionContext9	IceProtocolVersion9	
IceAddConnectionWatch9	IceGetInBufSize9	IceReadAuthFileEntry9	
IceAllocScratch9	IceGetListenConnectionNumber9	IceRegisterForProtocolReply9	
IceAppLockConn9	IceGetListenConnectionString9	IceRegisterForProtocolSetup9	
IceAppUnlockConn9	IceGetOutBufSize9	IceRelease9	
IceAuthFileName9	IceInitThreads9	IceRemoveConnectionWatch9	
IceCheckShutdownNegotiation9	IceLastReceivedSequenceNumber9	IceSetErrorHandler9	
IceCloseConnection9	IceLastSentSequenceNumber9	IceSetHostBasedAuthProc9	
IceComposeNetworkIdList9	IceListenForConnections9	IceSetIOErrorHandler9	
IceConnectionNumber9	IceListenForWellKnownConnections9	IceSetPaAuthData9	
IceConnectionStatus9	IceLockAuthFile9	IceSetShutdownNegotiation9	
IceConnectionString9	IceOpenConnection9	IceSwapping9	
IceFlush9	IcePing9	IceUnlockAuthFile9	
IceFreeAuthFileEntry9	IceProcessMessages9	IceVendor9	
IceFreeListenObjs9	IceProtocolRevision9	IceWriteAuthFileEntry9	
IceGenerateMagicCookie9	IceProtocolSetup9	
	
IceGetAuthFileEntry9	IceProtocolShutdown9	

A.7. libSM
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
X11R6.4 X Session Management Library	

Table A-9. libSM Function Interfaces
SmFreeProperty8	SmcRelease8	SmsInitialize8	
SmFreeReasons8	SmcRequestSaveYourself8	SmsInteract8	
SmcClientID8	SmcRequestSaveYourselfPhase28	SmsProtocolRevision8	
SmcCloseConnection8	SmcSaveYourselfDone8	SmsProtocolVersion8	
SmcDeleteProperties8	SmcSetErrorHandler8	SmsRegisterClientReply8	
SmcGetIceConnection8	SmcSetProperties8	SmsReturnProperties8	
SmcGetProperties8	SmcVendor8	SmsSaveComplete8	
SmcInteractDone8	SmsCleanUp8	SmsSaveYourself8	
SmcInteractRequest8	SmsClientHostName8	SmsSaveYourselfPhase28	
SmcModifyCallbacks8	SmsClientID8	SmsSetErrorHandler8	
SmcOpenConnection8	SmsDie8	SmsShutdownCancelled8	
SmcProtocolRevision8	SmsGenerateClientID8	
	
SmcProtocolVersion8	SmsGetIceConnection8	

A.8. libdl
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
Linux Standard Base	
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)	

Table A-10. libdl Function Interfaces
dladdr(GLIBC_2.0)27	dlerror(GLIBC_2.0)28	dlsym(GLIBC_2.0)28	
dlclose(GLIBC_2.0)28	dlopen(GLIBC_2.0)28	

A.9. libcrypt
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)	

Table A-11. libcrypt Function Interfaces
crypt(GLIBC_2.0)29	encrypt(GLIBC_2.0)29	setkey(GLIBC_2.0)29	

A.10. libz
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
zlib 1.1.3 Manual	

Table A-12. libz Function Interfaces
adler322	gzdopen2	gztell2	
compress2	gzeof2	gzwrite2	
compress22	gzerror2	inflate2	
crc322	gzflush2	inflateEnd2	
deflate2	gzgetc2	inflateInit2_2	
deflateCopy2	gzgets2	inflateInit_2	
deflateEnd2	gzopen2	inflateReset2	
deflateInit2_2	gzprintf2	inflateSetDictionary2	
deflateInit_2	gzputc2	inflateSync2	
deflateParams2	gzputs2	inflateSyncPoint2	
deflateReset2	gzread2	uncompress2	
deflateSetDictionary2	gzrewind2	zError2	
get_crc_table2	gzseek2	
	
gzclose2	gzsetparams2	

A.11. libncurses
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
CAE Specification, May 1996, X/Open Curses, Issue 4, Version 2 (ISBN: 1-85912-171-3, C610), plus Corrigendum U018	

Table A-13. libncurses Function Interfaces
addch3	mvdelch3	slk_restore3	
addchnstr3	mvderwin3	slk_set3	
addchstr3	mvgetch3	slk_touch3	
addnstr3	mvgetnstr3	standend3	
addstr3	mvgetstr3	standout3	
attr_get3	mvhline3	start_color3	
attr_off3	mvinch3	subpad3	
attr_on3	mvinchnstr3	subwin3	
attr_set3	mvinchstr3	syncok3	
attroff3	mvinnstr3	termattrs3	
attron3	mvinsch3	termname3	
attrset3	mvinsnstr3	tgetent3	
baudrate3	mvinsstr3	tgetflag3	
beep3	mvinstr3	tgetnum3	
bkgd3	mvprintw3	tgetstr3	
bkgdset3	mvscanw3	tgoto3	
border3	mvvline3	tigetflag3	
box3	mvwaddch3	tigetnum3	
can_change_color3	mvwaddchnstr3	tigetstr3	
cbreak3	mvwaddchstr3	timeout3	
chgat3	mvwaddnstr3	touchline3	
clear3	mvwaddstr3	touchwin3	
clearok3	mvwchgat3	tparm3	
clrtobot3	mvwdelch3	tputs3	
clrtoeol3	mvwgetch3	typeahead3	
color_content3	mvwgetnstr3	ungetch3	
color_set3	mvwgetstr3	untouchwin3	
copywin3	mvwhline3	use_env3	
curs_set3	mvwin3	vidattr3	
def_prog_mode3	mvwinch3	vidputs3	
def_shell_mode3	mvwinchnstr3	vline3	
delay_output3	mvwinchstr3	vw_printw3	
delch3	mvwinnstr3	vw_scanw3	
deleteln3	mvwinsch3	vwprintw3	
delscreen3	mvwinsnstr3	vwscanw3	
delwin3	mvwinsstr3	waddch3	
derwin3	mvwinstr3	waddchnstr3	
doupdate3	mvwprintw3	waddchstr3	
dupwin3	mvwscanw3	waddnstr3	
echo3	mvwvline3	waddstr3	
echochar3	napms3	wattr_get3	
endwin3	newpad3	wattr_off3	
erase3	newterm3	wattr_on3	
erasechar3	newwin3	wattr_set3	
filter3	nl3	wattroff3	
flash3	nocbreak3	wattron3	
flushinp3	nodelay3	wattrset3	
getbkgd3	noecho3	wbkgd3	
getch3	nonl3	wbkgdset3	
getnstr3	noqiflush3	wborder3	
getstr3	noraw3	wchgat3	
getwin3	notimeout3	wclear3	
halfdelay3	overlay3	wclrtobot3	
has_colors3	overwrite3	wclrtoeol3	
has_ic3	pair_content3	wcolor_set3	
has_il3	pechochar3	wcursyncup3	
hline3	pnoutrefresh3	wdelch3	
idcok3	prefresh3	wdeleteln3	
idlok3	printw3	wechochar3	
immedok3	putp3	werase3	
inch3	putwin3	wgetch3	
inchnstr3	qiflush3	wgetnstr3	
inchstr3	raw3	wgetstr3	
init_color3	redrawwin3	whline3	
init_pair3	refresh3	winch3	
initscr3	reset_prog_mode3	winchnstr3	
innstr3	reset_shell_mode3	winchstr3	
insch3	resetty3	winnstr3	
insdelln3	ripoffline3	winsch3	
insertln3	savetty3	winsdelln3	
insnstr3	scanw3	winsertln3	
insstr3	scr_dump3	winsnstr3	
instr3	scr_init3	winsstr3	
intrflush3	scr_restore3	winstr3	
is_linetouched3	scr_set3	wmove3	
is_wintouched3	scrl3	wnoutrefresh3	
isendwin3	scroll3	wprintw3	
keyname3	scrollok3	wredrawln3	
keypad3	set_term3	wrefresh3	
killchar3	setscrreg3	wscanw3	
leaveok3	setupterm3	wscrl3	
longname3	slk_attr_set3	wsetscrreg3	
meta3	slk_attroff3	wstandend3	
move3	slk_attron3	wstandout3	
mvaddch3	slk_attrset3	wsyncdown3	
mvaddchnstr3	slk_clear3	wsyncup3	
mvaddchstr3	slk_color3	wtimeout3	
mvaddnstr3	slk_init3	wtouchln3	
mvaddstr3	slk_label3	wvline3	
mvchgat3	slk_noutrefresh3	
	
mvcur3	slk_refresh3	

Table A-14. libncurses Data Interfaces
COLS3	curscr3	
	
LINES3	stdscr3	

A.12. libutil
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
Linux Standard Base	

Table A-15. libutil Function Interfaces
forkpty(GLIBC_2.0)4	login_tty(GLIBC_2.0)4	logwtmp(GLIBC_2.0)4	
login(GLIBC_2.0)4	logout(GLIBC_2.0)4	openpty(GLIBC_2.0)4	

A.13. libc
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
ISO/IEC 9899: 1999, Programming Languages --C	
Large File Support	
Linux Standard Base	
IEEE Std POSIX.1-1996 [ISO/IEC 9945-1:1996]	
CAE Specification, February 1997, Networking Services (XNS), Issue 5(ISBN: 1-85912-165-9, C523)	
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)	
The Single UNIX® Specification(SUS) Version 3	
System V Interface Definition, Issue 3 (ISBN 0201566524)	
System V Interface Definition,Fourth Edition	

Table A-16. libc Function Interfaces
_Exit(GLIBC_2.1.1)1	getrusage(GLIBC_2.1.1)6	shmctl(GLIBC_2.1.1)6	
_IO_feof(GLIBC_2.0)3	gets(GLIBC_2.0)3	shmdt(GLIBC_2.0)6	
_IO_getc(GLIBC_2.0)3	getservbyname(GLIBC_2.0)3	shmget(GLIBC_2.0)6	
_IO_putc(GLIBC_2.0)3	getservbyport(GLIBC_2.0)5	shutdown(GLIBC_2.0)5	
_IO_puts(GLIBC_2.0)3	getservent(GLIBC_2.0)3	sigaction(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__assert_fail(GLIBC_2.0)3	getsid(GLIBC_2.0)6	sigaddset(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__ctype_get_mb_cur_max(GLIBC_2.0)3	getsockname(GLIBC_2.0)5	sigaltstack(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__cxa_atexit(GLIBC_2.1.3)3	getsockopt(GLIBC_2.1.3)5	sigandset(GLIBC_2.1.3)3	
__errno_location(GLIBC_2.0)3	getsubopt(GLIBC_2.0)6	sigblock(GLIBC_2.0)3	
__fpending(GLIBC_2.2)3	gettext(GLIBC_2.2)3	sigdelset(GLIBC_2.2)6	
__fxstat(GLIBC_2.0)3	gettimeofday(GLIBC_2.0)6	sigemptyset(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__fxstat64(GLIBC_2.2)3	getuid(GLIBC_2.2)6	sigfillset(GLIBC_2.2)6	
__getpagesize(GLIBC_2.0)3	getutent(GLIBC_2.0)3	siggetmask(GLIBC_2.0)3	
__getpgid(GLIBC_2.0)3	getutent_r(GLIBC_2.0)3	sighold(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__h_errno_location3	getutxent()6	sigignore()6	
__isinf3	getutxid()6	siginterrupt()6	
__isinff3	getutxline()6	sigisemptyset()3	
__isinfl3	getw()6	sigismember()6	
__isnan3	getwc()1	siglongjmp()6	
__isnanf3	getwchar()6	signal()6	
__isnanl3	getwd()6	sigorset()3	
__libc_current_sigrtmax(GLIBC_2.1)3	glob(GLIBC_2.1)6	sigpause(GLIBC_2.1)6	
__libc_current_sigrtmin(GLIBC_2.1)3	glob64(GLIBC_2.1)3	sigpending(GLIBC_2.1)6	
__libc_start_main(GLIBC_2.0)3	globfree(GLIBC_2.0)6	sigprocmask(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__lxstat(GLIBC_2.0)3	globfree64(GLIBC_2.0)3	sigqueue(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__lxstat64(GLIBC_2.2)3	gmtime(GLIBC_2.2)6	sigrelse(GLIBC_2.2)6	
__mempcpy(GLIBC_2.0)3	gmtime_r(GLIBC_2.0)6	sigreturn(GLIBC_2.0)3	
__rawmemchr(GLIBC_2.1)3	grantpt(GLIBC_2.1)6	sigset(GLIBC_2.1)6	
__sigsetjmp(GLIBC_2.0)3	hcreate(GLIBC_2.0)6	sigstack(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__stpcpy(GLIBC_2.0)3	hdestroy(GLIBC_2.0)6	sigsuspend(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__strdup(GLIBC_2.0)3	hsearch(GLIBC_2.0)6	sigtimedwait(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__strtod_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	htonl(GLIBC_2.0)5	sigwait(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__strtof_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	htons(GLIBC_2.0)5	sigwaitinfo(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__strtok_r(GLIBC_2.0)3	iconv(GLIBC_2.0)6	sleep(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__strtol_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	iconv_close(GLIBC_2.0)6	snprintf(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__strtold_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	iconv_open(GLIBC_2.0)6	socket(GLIBC_2.0)5	
__strtoll_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	imaxabs(GLIBC_2.0)1	socketpair(GLIBC_2.0)5	
__strtoul_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	imaxdiv(GLIBC_2.0)1	sprintf(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__strtoull_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	index(GLIBC_2.0)6	srand(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__sysconf(GLIBC_2.2)3	inet_addr(GLIBC_2.2)5	srand48(GLIBC_2.2)6	
__sysv_signal(GLIBC_2.0)3	inet_aton(GLIBC_2.0)5	srandom(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__wcstod_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	inet_ntoa(GLIBC_2.0)5	sscanf(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__wcstof_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	inet_ntop7	statvfs(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__wcstol_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	inet_pton7	statvfs642	
__wcstold_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	initgroups(GLIBC_2.0)3	step(GLIBC_2.0)6	
__wcstoul_internal(GLIBC_2.0)3	initstate(GLIBC_2.0)6	stime(GLIBC_2.0)3	
__xmknod(GLIBC_2.0)3	insque(GLIBC_2.0)6	stpcpy(GLIBC_2.0)3	
__xstat(GLIBC_2.0)3	ioctl(GLIBC_2.0)3	stpncpy(GLIBC_2.0)3	
__xstat64(GLIBC_2.2)3	isalnum(GLIBC_2.2)6	strcasecmp(GLIBC_2.2)6	
_exit(GLIBC_2.0)6	isalpha(GLIBC_2.0)6	strcasestr(GLIBC_2.0)3	
_longjmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	isascii(GLIBC_2.0)6	strcat(GLIBC_2.0)6	
_obstack_begin(GLIBC_2.0)3	isatty(GLIBC_2.0)6	strchr(GLIBC_2.0)6	
_obstack_newchunk(GLIBC_2.0)3	isblank(GLIBC_2.0)7	strcmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	
_setjmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	iscntrl(GLIBC_2.0)6	strcoll(GLIBC_2.0)6	
_tolower(GLIBC_2.0)6	isdigit(GLIBC_2.0)6	strcpy(GLIBC_2.0)6	
_toupper(GLIBC_2.0)6	isgraph(GLIBC_2.0)6	strcspn(GLIBC_2.0)6	
a64l(GLIBC_2.0)6	isinf(GLIBC_2.0)1	strdup(GLIBC_2.0)6	
abort(GLIBC_2.0)6	isinff	strerror(GLIBC_2.0)6	
abs(GLIBC_2.0)6	isinfl(GLIBC_2.0)1	strerror_r(GLIBC_2.0)3	
accept(GLIBC_2.0)5	islower(GLIBC_2.0)6	strfmon(GLIBC_2.0)6	
access(GLIBC_2.0)6	isnan(GLIBC_2.0)1	strfry(GLIBC_2.0)3	
acct(GLIBC_2.0)3	isnanf(GLIBC_2.0)1	strftime(GLIBC_2.0)6	
adjtime(GLIBC_2.0)3	isnanl(GLIBC_2.0)1	strlen(GLIBC_2.0)6	
adjtimex(GLIBC_2.0)3	isprint(GLIBC_2.0)6	strncasecmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	
advance(GLIBC_2.0)6	ispunct(GLIBC_2.0)6	strncat(GLIBC_2.0)6	
alarm(GLIBC_2.0)6	isspace(GLIBC_2.0)6	strncmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	
asctime(GLIBC_2.0)6	isupper(GLIBC_2.0)6	strncpy(GLIBC_2.0)6	
asctime_r(GLIBC_2.0)6	iswalnum(GLIBC_2.0)6	strndup(GLIBC_2.0)3	
asprintf(GLIBC_2.0)3	iswalpha(GLIBC_2.0)6	strnlen(GLIBC_2.0)3	
atexit(GLIBC_2.0)6	iswblank(GLIBC_2.0)7	strpbrk(GLIBC_2.0)6	
atof(GLIBC_2.0)6	iswcntrl(GLIBC_2.0)6	strptime(GLIBC_2.0)3	
atoi(GLIBC_2.0)6	iswctype(GLIBC_2.0)3	strrchr(GLIBC_2.0)6	
atol(GLIBC_2.0)6	iswdigit(GLIBC_2.0)6	strsep(GLIBC_2.0)3	
atoll1	iswgraph()6	strsignal()3	
authnone_create(GLIBC_2.0)9	iswlower(GLIBC_2.0)6	strspn(GLIBC_2.0)6	
basename(GLIBC_2.0)6	iswprint(GLIBC_2.0)6	strstr(GLIBC_2.0)6	
bcmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	iswpunct(GLIBC_2.0)6	strtod(GLIBC_2.0)6	
bcopy(GLIBC_2.0)6	iswspace(GLIBC_2.0)6	strtof(GLIBC_2.0)1	
bind(GLIBC_2.0)5	iswupper(GLIBC_2.0)6	strtoimax(GLIBC_2.0)1	
bind_textdomain_codeset3	iswxdigit()6	strtok()6	
bindresvport(GLIBC_2.0)3	isxdigit(GLIBC_2.0)6	strtok_r(GLIBC_2.0)3	
bindtextdomain(GLIBC_2.0)3	jrand48(GLIBC_2.0)6	strtol(GLIBC_2.0)6	
brk(GLIBC_2.0)6	key_decryptsession(GLIBC_2.0)8	strtold(GLIBC_2.0)1	
bsd_signal(GLIBC_2.0)6	kill(GLIBC_2.0)3	strtoll(GLIBC_2.0)1	
bsearch(GLIBC_2.0)6	killpg(GLIBC_2.0)6	strtoq(GLIBC_2.0)3	
btowc(GLIBC_2.0)6	l64a(GLIBC_2.0)6	strtoul(GLIBC_2.0)6	
bzero(GLIBC_2.0)6	labs(GLIBC_2.0)6	strtoull(GLIBC_2.0)1	
calloc(GLIBC_2.0)6	lchown(GLIBC_2.0)6	strtoumax(GLIBC_2.0)1	
catclose(GLIBC_2.0)6	lcong48(GLIBC_2.0)6	strtouq(GLIBC_2.0)3	
catgets(GLIBC_2.0)6	ldiv(GLIBC_2.0)6	strverscmp(GLIBC_2.0)3	
catopen(GLIBC_2.0)6	lfind(GLIBC_2.0)6	strxfrm(GLIBC_2.0)6	
cfgetispeed(GLIBC_2.0)6	link(GLIBC_2.0)6	svc_getreqset(GLIBC_2.0)8	
cfgetospeed(GLIBC_2.0)6	listen(GLIBC_2.0)5	svcerr_auth(GLIBC_2.0)8	
cfmakeraw(GLIBC_2.0)3	llabs(GLIBC_2.0)1	svcerr_decode(GLIBC_2.0)8	
cfsetispeed(GLIBC_2.0)6	lldiv(GLIBC_2.0)1	svcerr_noproc(GLIBC_2.0)8	
cfsetospeed(GLIBC_2.0)6	localeconv(GLIBC_2.0)6	svcerr_noprog(GLIBC_2.0)8	
cfsetspeed(GLIBC_2.0)3	localtime(GLIBC_2.0)6	svcerr_progvers(GLIBC_2.0)8	
chdir(GLIBC_2.0)6	localtime_r(GLIBC_2.0)6	svcerr_systemerr(GLIBC_2.0)8	
chmod(GLIBC_2.0)6	lockf(GLIBC_2.0)6	svcerr_weakauth(GLIBC_2.0)8	
chown(GLIBC_2.1)6	lockf64(GLIBC_2.1)2	swab(GLIBC_2.1)6	
chroot(GLIBC_2.0)6	longjmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	swapcontext(GLIBC_2.0)6	
clearerr(GLIBC_2.0)6	lrand48(GLIBC_2.0)6	swprintf(GLIBC_2.0)6	
clnt_create(GLIBC_2.0)9	lsearch(GLIBC_2.0)6	swscanf(GLIBC_2.0)1	
clnt_pcreateerror(GLIBC_2.0)9	lseek(GLIBC_2.0)6	symlink(GLIBC_2.0)6	
clnt_perrno(GLIBC_2.0)9	lseek64(GLIBC_2.0)2	sync(GLIBC_2.0)6	
clnt_perror(GLIBC_2.0)9	makecontext(GLIBC_2.0)6	sysconf(GLIBC_2.0)6	
clnt_spcreateerror(GLIBC_2.0)9	malloc(GLIBC_2.0)6	syslog(GLIBC_2.0)6	
clnt_sperrno(GLIBC_2.0)9	mblen(GLIBC_2.0)6	system(GLIBC_2.0)3	
clnt_sperror(GLIBC_2.0)9	mbrlen(GLIBC_2.0)6	tcdrain(GLIBC_2.0)6	
clock(GLIBC_2.0)6	mbrtowc(GLIBC_2.0)6	tcflow(GLIBC_2.0)6	
close(GLIBC_2.0)6	mbsinit(GLIBC_2.0)6	tcflush(GLIBC_2.0)6	
closedir(GLIBC_2.0)6	mbsnrtowcs(GLIBC_2.0)3	tcgetattr(GLIBC_2.0)6	
closelog(GLIBC_2.0)6	mbsrtowcs(GLIBC_2.0)6	tcgetpgrp(GLIBC_2.0)6	
confstr(GLIBC_2.0)6	mbstowcs(GLIBC_2.0)6	tcgetsid(GLIBC_2.0)6	
connect(GLIBC_2.0)5	mbtowc(GLIBC_2.0)6	tcsendbreak(GLIBC_2.0)6	
creat(GLIBC_2.0)6	memccpy(GLIBC_2.0)6	tcsetattr(GLIBC_2.0)6	
creat64(GLIBC_2.1)2	memchr(GLIBC_2.1)6	tcsetpgrp(GLIBC_2.1)6	
ctermid(GLIBC_2.0)6	memcmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	tdelete6	
ctime(GLIBC_2.0)6	memcpy(GLIBC_2.0)6	telldir(GLIBC_2.0)6	
ctime_r(GLIBC_2.0)6	memmem(GLIBC_2.0)3	tempnam(GLIBC_2.0)6	
cuserid(GLIBC_2.0)6	memmove(GLIBC_2.0)6	textdomain(GLIBC_2.0)3	
daemon(GLIBC_2.0)3	memrchr(GLIBC_2.0)3	tfind(GLIBC_2.0)6	
dcgettext(GLIBC_2.0)3	memset(GLIBC_2.0)6	time(GLIBC_2.0)6	
dcngettext3	mkdir()6	times()6	
dgettext3	mkfifo()6	tmpfile()6	
difftime(GLIBC_2.0)6	mkstemp(GLIBC_2.0)6	tmpfile64(GLIBC_2.0)2	
dirname(GLIBC_2.0)6	mkstemp64(GLIBC_2.0)2	tmpnam(GLIBC_2.0)6	
div(GLIBC_2.0)6	mktemp(GLIBC_2.0)6	toascii(GLIBC_2.0)6	
dngettext3	mktime()6	tolower()6	
drand48(GLIBC_2.0)6	mlock(GLIBC_2.0)6	toupper(GLIBC_2.0)6	
dup(GLIBC_2.0)6	mlockall(GLIBC_2.0)6	towctrans(GLIBC_2.0)6	
dup2(GLIBC_2.0)6	mmap(GLIBC_2.0)6	towlower(GLIBC_2.0)1	
ecvt(GLIBC_2.0)6	mmap64(GLIBC_2.0)2	towupper(GLIBC_2.0)6	
endgrent(GLIBC_2.0)6	mprotect(GLIBC_2.0)6	truncate(GLIBC_2.0)6	
endnetent(GLIBC_2.0)5	mrand48(GLIBC_2.0)6	truncate64(GLIBC_2.0)2	
endprotoent(GLIBC_2.0)5	msgctl(GLIBC_2.0)6	tsearch(GLIBC_2.0)6	
endpwent(GLIBC_2.0)6	msgget(GLIBC_2.0)6	ttyname(GLIBC_2.0)6	
endservent(GLIBC_2.0)5	msgrcv(GLIBC_2.0)6	ttyname_r(GLIBC_2.0)6	
endutent(GLIBC_2.0)6	msgsnd(GLIBC_2.0)6	twalk(GLIBC_2.0)6	
endutxent(GLIBC_2.1)6	msync(GLIBC_2.1)6	tzset(GLIBC_2.1)6	
erand48(GLIBC_2.0)6	munlock(GLIBC_2.0)6	ualarm(GLIBC_2.0)6	
err(GLIBC_2.0)3	munlockall(GLIBC_2.0)6	ulimit(GLIBC_2.0)6	
error(GLIBC_2.0)3	munmap(GLIBC_2.0)6	umask(GLIBC_2.0)6	
errx(GLIBC_2.0)3	nanosleep(GLIBC_2.0)6	uname(GLIBC_2.0)6	
execl(GLIBC_2.0)6	nftw(GLIBC_2.0)6	ungetc(GLIBC_2.0)6	
execle(GLIBC_2.0)6	nftw64(GLIBC_2.0)2	ungetwc(GLIBC_2.0)1	
execlp(GLIBC_2.0)6	ngettext3	unlink(GLIBC_2.0)3	
execv(GLIBC_2.0)6	nice(GLIBC_2.0)3	unlockpt(GLIBC_2.0)6	
execve(GLIBC_2.0)6	nl_langinfo(GLIBC_2.0)6	unsetenv3	
execvp(GLIBC_2.0)6	nrand48(GLIBC_2.0)6	usleep(GLIBC_2.0)6	
exit(GLIBC_2.0)6	ntohl(GLIBC_2.0)5	utime(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fchdir(GLIBC_2.0)6	ntohs(GLIBC_2.0)5	utimes(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fchmod(GLIBC_2.0)6	obstack_free(GLIBC_2.0)3	vasprintf(GLIBC_2.0)3	
fchown(GLIBC_2.0)6	open(GLIBC_2.0)6	vdprintf(GLIBC_2.0)3	
fclose(GLIBC_2.1)6	open64(GLIBC_2.1)2	verrx(GLIBC_2.1)3	
fcntl(GLIBC_2.0)3	opendir(GLIBC_2.0)6	vfork(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fcvt(GLIBC_2.0)6	openlog(GLIBC_2.0)6	vfprintf(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fdatasync(GLIBC_2.0)6	pathconf(GLIBC_2.0)6	vfscanf1	
fdopen(GLIBC_2.1)6	pause(GLIBC_2.1)6	vfwprintf(GLIBC_2.1)1	
feof(GLIBC_2.0)6	pclose(GLIBC_2.0)6	vfwscanf(GLIBC_2.0)1	
ferror(GLIBC_2.0)6	perror(GLIBC_2.0)6	vprintf(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fflush(GLIBC_2.0)6	pipe(GLIBC_2.0)6	vscanf1	
fflush_unlocked(GLIBC_2.0)6	poll(GLIBC_2.0)6	vsnprintf(GLIBC_2.0)6	
ffs(GLIBC_2.0)6	popen(GLIBC_2.0)6	vsprintf(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fgetc(GLIBC_2.0)6	posix_memalign(GLIBC_2.0)4	vsscanf1	
fgetpos(GLIBC_2.0)6	pread(GLIBC_2.0)6	vswprintf(GLIBC_2.0)1	
fgetpos64(GLIBC_2.1)2	pread64(GLIBC_2.1)2	vswscanf(GLIBC_2.1)1	
fgets(GLIBC_2.0)6	printf(GLIBC_2.0)6	vsyslog3	
fgetwc(GLIBC_2.2)6	psignal(GLIBC_2.2)3	vwprintf(GLIBC_2.2)1	
fgetwc_unlocked(GLIBC_2.2)6	ptsname(GLIBC_2.2)6	vwscanf(GLIBC_2.2)1	
fgetws(GLIBC_2.2)1	putc(GLIBC_2.2)6	wait(GLIBC_2.2)6	
fileno(GLIBC_2.0)6	putc_unlocked(GLIBC_2.0)6	wait3(GLIBC_2.0)3	
flock(GLIBC_2.0)3	putchar(GLIBC_2.0)6	wait4(GLIBC_2.0)3	
flockfile(GLIBC_2.0)6	putchar_unlocked(GLIBC_2.0)6	waitpid(GLIBC_2.0)3	
fmtmsg(GLIBC_2.1)6	putenv(GLIBC_2.1)6	warn(GLIBC_2.1)3	
fnmatch(GLIBC_2.2.3)6	puts(GLIBC_2.2.3)6	warnx(GLIBC_2.2.3)3	
fopen(GLIBC_2.1)6	pututxline(GLIBC_2.1)6	wcpcpy(GLIBC_2.1)3	
fopen64(GLIBC_2.1)2	putw(GLIBC_2.1)6	wcpncpy(GLIBC_2.1)3	
fork(GLIBC_2.0)6	putwc(GLIBC_2.0)1	wcrtomb(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fpathconf(GLIBC_2.0)6	putwchar(GLIBC_2.0)1	wcscasecmp(GLIBC_2.0)3	
fprintf(GLIBC_2.0)6	pwrite(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcscat(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fputc(GLIBC_2.0)6	pwrite64(GLIBC_2.0)2	wcschr(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fputs(GLIBC_2.0)6	qsort(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcscmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fputwc(GLIBC_2.2)1	raise(GLIBC_2.2)6	wcscoll(GLIBC_2.2)6	
fputws(GLIBC_2.2)1	rand(GLIBC_2.2)6	wcscpy(GLIBC_2.2)6	
fread(GLIBC_2.0)6	rand_r(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcscspn(GLIBC_2.0)6	
free(GLIBC_2.0)6	random(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcsdup(GLIBC_2.0)3	
freeaddrinfo7	random_r()3	wcsftime()1	
freopen(GLIBC_2.0)6	re_comp(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcslen(GLIBC_2.0)6	
freopen64(GLIBC_2.1)2	re_exec(GLIBC_2.1)6	wcsncasecmp(GLIBC_2.1)3	
fscanf(GLIBC_2.0)6	read(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcsncat(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fseek(GLIBC_2.0)6	readdir(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcsncmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fseeko(GLIBC_2.1)6	readdir64(GLIBC_2.1)2	wcsncpy(GLIBC_2.1)6	
fseeko64(GLIBC_2.1)2	readdir_r6	wcsnlen(GLIBC_2.1)3	
fsetpos(GLIBC_2.0)6	readlink(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcsnrtombs(GLIBC_2.0)3	
fsetpos64(GLIBC_2.1)2	readv(GLIBC_2.1)6	wcspbrk(GLIBC_2.1)1	
fstatvfs(GLIBC_2.1)6	realloc(GLIBC_2.1)6	wcsrchr(GLIBC_2.1)6	
fstatvfs64(GLIBC_2.1)2	realpath(GLIBC_2.1)6	wcsrtombs(GLIBC_2.1)6	
fsync(GLIBC_2.0)6	recv(GLIBC_2.0)5	wcsspn(GLIBC_2.0)6	
ftell(GLIBC_2.0)6	recvfrom(GLIBC_2.0)5	wcsstr(GLIBC_2.0)6	
ftello(GLIBC_2.1)6	recvmsg(GLIBC_2.1)5	wcstod(GLIBC_2.1)6	
ftello64(GLIBC_2.1)2	regcomp(GLIBC_2.1)6	wcstof(GLIBC_2.1)1	
ftime(GLIBC_2.0)6	regerror(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcstoimax(GLIBC_2.0)1	
ftok(GLIBC_2.0)6	regexec(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcstok(GLIBC_2.0)6	
ftruncate(GLIBC_2.0)6	regfree(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcstol(GLIBC_2.0)6	
ftruncate64(GLIBC_2.1)2	remove(GLIBC_2.1)6	wcstold(GLIBC_2.1)1	
ftrylockfile(GLIBC_2.0)6	remque(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcstoll(GLIBC_2.0)1	
ftw(GLIBC_2.0)6	rename(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcstombs(GLIBC_2.0)6	
ftw64(GLIBC_2.1)2	rewind(GLIBC_2.1)6	wcstoq(GLIBC_2.1)3	
funlockfile(GLIBC_2.0)6	rewinddir(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcstoul(GLIBC_2.0)6	
fwide(GLIBC_2.2)1	rindex(GLIBC_2.2)6	wcstoull(GLIBC_2.2)1	
fwprintf(GLIBC_2.2)6	rmdir(GLIBC_2.2)6	wcstoumax(GLIBC_2.2)1	
fwrite(GLIBC_2.0)6	sbrk(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcstouq(GLIBC_2.0)3	
fwscanf(GLIBC_2.2)1	scanf(GLIBC_2.2)6	wcswcs(GLIBC_2.2)6	
gai_strerror7	sched_get_priority_max()6	wcswidth()6	
gcvt(GLIBC_2.0)6	sched_get_priority_min(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcsxfrm(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getaddrinfo7	sched_getparam()6	wctob()6	
getc(GLIBC_2.0)6	sched_getscheduler(GLIBC_2.0)6	wctomb(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getc_unlocked(GLIBC_2.0)6	sched_rr_get_interval(GLIBC_2.0)6	wctrans(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getchar(GLIBC_2.0)6	sched_setparam(GLIBC_2.0)6	wctype(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getchar_unlocked(GLIBC_2.0)6	sched_setscheduler(GLIBC_2.0)6	wcwidth(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getcontext(GLIBC_2.1)6	sched_yield(GLIBC_2.1)6	wmemchr(GLIBC_2.1)6	
getcwd(GLIBC_2.0)6	seed48(GLIBC_2.0)6	wmemcmp(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getdate(GLIBC_2.1)6	seekdir(GLIBC_2.1)6	wmemcpy(GLIBC_2.1)6	
getdomainname(GLIBC_2.0)3	select(GLIBC_2.0)5	wmemmove(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getegid(GLIBC_2.0)6	semctl(GLIBC_2.0)6	wmemset(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getenv(GLIBC_2.0)6	semget(GLIBC_2.0)6	wordexp(GLIBC_2.0)6	
geteuid(GLIBC_2.0)6	semop(GLIBC_2.0)6	wordfree(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getgid(GLIBC_2.0)6	send(GLIBC_2.0)5	wprintf(GLIBC_2.0)1	
getgrent(GLIBC_2.0)6	sendmsg(GLIBC_2.0)5	write(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getgrgid(GLIBC_2.0)6	sendto(GLIBC_2.0)5	writev(GLIBC_2.0)6	
getgrgid_r(GLIBC_2.0)6	setbuf(GLIBC_2.0)6	wscanf(GLIBC_2.0)1	
getgrnam(GLIBC_2.0)6	setbuffer(GLIBC_2.0)3	xdr_accepted_reply(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getgrnam_r(GLIBC_2.0)6	setcontext(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_array(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getgroups(GLIBC_2.0)6	setdomainname3	xdr_bool(GLIBC_2.0)8	
gethostbyaddr(GLIBC_2.0)5	setegid(GLIBC_2.0)3	xdr_bytes(GLIBC_2.0)8	
gethostbyname(GLIBC_2.0)3	setenv3	xdr_callhdr(GLIBC_2.0)8	
gethostbyname_r(GLIBC_2.1.2)3	seteuid(GLIBC_2.1.2)3	xdr_callmsg(GLIBC_2.1.2)8	
gethostid(GLIBC_2.0)6	setgid(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_char(GLIBC_2.0)8	
gethostname(GLIBC_2.0)5	setgrent(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_double(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getitimer(GLIBC_2.0)6	setgroups(GLIBC_2.0)3	xdr_enum(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getloadavg(GLIBC_2.2)3	sethostid(GLIBC_2.2)3	xdr_float(GLIBC_2.2)8	
getlogin(GLIBC_2.0)6	sethostname(GLIBC_2.0)3	xdr_free(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getnameinfo7	setitimer()6	xdr_int()8	
getnetbyaddr(GLIBC_2.0)5	setlocale(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_long(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getopt(GLIBC_2.0)3	setlogmask(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_opaque(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getopt_long(GLIBC_2.0)3	setnetent(GLIBC_2.0)5	xdr_opaque_auth(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getopt_long_only(GLIBC_2.0)3	setpgid(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_pointer(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpagesize(GLIBC_2.0)6	setpgrp(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_reference(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpeername(GLIBC_2.0)5	setpriority(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_rejected_reply(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpgid(GLIBC_2.0)6	setprotoent(GLIBC_2.0)5	xdr_replymsg(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpgrp(GLIBC_2.0)6	setpwent(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_short(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpid(GLIBC_2.0)6	setregid(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_string(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getppid(GLIBC_2.0)6	setreuid(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_u_char(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpriority(GLIBC_2.0)6	setrlimit(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_u_int(GLIBC_2.0)3	
getprotobyname(GLIBC_2.0)6	setrlimit642	xdr_u_long(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getprotobynumber(GLIBC_2.0)5	setservent(GLIBC_2.0)5	xdr_u_short(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getprotoent(GLIBC_2.0)6	setsid(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_union(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpwent(GLIBC_2.0)6	setsockopt(GLIBC_2.0)5	xdr_vector(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpwnam(GLIBC_2.0)6	setstate(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_void(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpwnam_r(GLIBC_2.0)3	setuid(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdr_wrapstring(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpwuid(GLIBC_2.0)6	setutent(GLIBC_2.0)3	xdrmem_create(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getpwuid_r(GLIBC_2.0)6	setutxent(GLIBC_2.0)6	xdrrec_create(GLIBC_2.0)8	
getrlimit(GLIBC_2.2)6	setvbuf(GLIBC_2.2)6	xdrrec_eof(GLIBC_2.2)8	
getrlimit64(GLIBC_2.1)2	shmat(GLIBC_2.1)6	

Table A-17. libc Data Interfaces
__ctype_tolower3	__environ3	_sys_errlist3	
__daylight3	__timezone3	

A.14. libpthread
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
Linux Standard Base	
CAE Specification, January 1997, System Interfaces and Headers (XSH),Issue 5 (ISBN: 1-85912-181-0, C606)	

Table A-18. libpthread Function Interfaces
pthread_attr_destroy(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_create(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_getdetachstate(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_detach(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlock_trywrlock(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_getguardsize(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_equal(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_rwlock_unlock(GLIBC_2.1)25	
pthread_attr_getinheritsched(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_exit(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlock_wrlock(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_getschedparam(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_getschedparam(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlockattr_destroy(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_getschedpolicy(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_getspecific(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlockattr_getpshared(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_getscope(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_join(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlockattr_init(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_getstackaddr(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_key_create(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared(GLIBC_2.1)25	
pthread_attr_getstacksize(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_key_delete(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_self(GLIBC_2.1)25	
pthread_attr_init(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_kill(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_setcancelstate(GLIBC_2.1)25	
pthread_attr_setdetachstate(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_mutex_destroy(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_setcanceltype(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_setguardsize(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_mutex_init(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_setconcurrency25	
pthread_attr_setinheritsched(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_mutex_lock(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_setschedparam(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_setschedparam(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_mutex_trylock(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_setspecific(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_setschedpolicy(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_mutex_unlock(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_sigmask(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_setscope(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_mutexattr_destroy(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_testcancel(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_attr_setstackaddr(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_mutexattr_getpshared(GLIBC_2.1)25	sem_close(GLIBC_2.1)25	
pthread_attr_setstacksize(GLIBC_2.1)25	pthread_mutexattr_gettype(GLIBC_2.1)25	sem_destroy(GLIBC_2.1)25	
pthread_cancel(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_mutexattr_init(GLIBC_2.0)25	sem_getvalue(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_cond_broadcast(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_mutexattr_setpshared(GLIBC_2.0)25	sem_init(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_cond_destroy(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_mutexattr_settype(GLIBC_2.0)25	sem_open(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_cond_init(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_once(GLIBC_2.0)25	sem_post(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_cond_signal(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlock_destroy(GLIBC_2.0)25	sem_timedwait(GLIBC_2.0)24	
pthread_cond_timedwait(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlock_init(GLIBC_2.0)25	sem_trywait(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_cond_wait(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlock_rdlock(GLIBC_2.0)25	sem_unlink(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_condattr_destroy(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlock_timedrdlock25	sem_wait(GLIBC_2.0)25	
pthread_condattr_init(GLIBC_2.0)25	pthread_rwlock_timedwrlock25	

A.15. libpam
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
Linux Standard Base	
OSF-RFC 86.0	

Table A-19. libpam Function Interfaces
pam_acct_mgmt31	pam_fail_delay31	pam_setcred31	
pam_authenticate31	pam_get_item31	pam_start31	
pam_chauthtok31	pam_getenvlist31	pam_strerror31	
pam_close_session31	pam_open_session31	
	
pam_end31	pam_set_item31	

A.16. libgcc_s
The behaviour of the interfaces in this library is specified by the following Standards.
Linux Standard Base	

Table A-20. libgcc_s Function Interfaces
_Unwind_DeleteException26	_Unwind_GetIP26	_Unwind_Resume26	
_Unwind_Find_FDE26	_Unwind_GetLanguageSpecificData26	_Unwind_SetGR26	
_Unwind_ForcedUnwind26	_Unwind_GetRegionStart26	_Unwind_SetIP26	
_Unwind_GetDataRelBase26	_Unwind_GetTextRelBase26	
	
_Unwind_GetGR26	_Unwind_RaiseException26	

Appendix B. GNU Free Documentation License
Version 1.1, March 2000
Copyright (C) 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
B.1. PREAMBLE
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
B.2. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you".
A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
B.3. VERBATIM COPYING
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
B.4. COPYING IN QUANTITY
If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
B.5. MODIFICATIONS
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
	A.	Use in the Title Page  (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the  Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if  there were any, be listed in the History section of the  Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if  the original publisher of that version gives permission.
	B.	List on the Title Page,  as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for  authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version,  together with at least five of the principal authors of the  Document (all of its principal authors, if it has less than  five).
	C.	State on the Title page  the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the  publisher.
	D.	Preserve all the  copyright notices of the Document.
	E.	Add an appropriate  copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other  copyright notices.
	F.	Include, immediately  after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public  permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this  License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
	G.	Preserve in that license  notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover  Texts given in the Document's license notice.
	H.	Include an unaltered  copy of this License.
	I.	Preserve the section  entitled "History", and its title, and add to it an item stating  at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the  Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no  section entitled "History" in the Document, create one stating  the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given  on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified  Version as stated in the previous sentence.
	J.	Preserve the network  location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a  Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network  locations given in the Document for previous versions it was  based on. These may be placed in the "History" section. You  may omit a network location for a work that was published at  least four years before the Document itself, or if the original  publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
	K.	In any section entitled  "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", preserve the section's  title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of  each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications  given therein.
	L.	Preserve all the  Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and  in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not  considered part of the section titles.
	M.	Delete any section  entitled "Endorsements". Such a section may not be included in  the Modified Version.
	N.	Do not retitle any  existing section as "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with  any Invariant Section.
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
B.6. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled "History" in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
B.7. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
B.8. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate.
B.9. TRANSLATION
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
B.10. TERMINATION
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
B.11. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
B.12. How to use this License for your documents
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections" instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.